Insolvency Act 1986 The First Group of Parts Company Insolvency; Companies Winding Up Part A1 Moratorium Chapter 1 Introductory Overview A1 1 This Part contains provision that enables an eligible company, in certain circumstances, to obtain a moratorium, giving it various protections from creditors set out in this Part. 2 In this Chapter section A2 introduces Schedule ZA1 (which defines what is meant by an “eligible” company). 3 Chapter 2 sets out how an eligible company may obtain a moratorium. 4 Chapter 3 sets out for how long a moratorium has effect. 5 Chapter 4 sets out the effects of a moratorium on the company and its creditors. 6 Chapter 5 contains provision about the monitor. 7 Chapter 6 contains provision about challenges. 8 Chapter 7 contains provision about certain offences. 9 Chapter 8 contains miscellaneous and general provision, including— a special provision for certain kinds of company; b definitions for the purposes of this Part; c provision about regulations under this Part. Eligible companies A2 Schedule ZA1 contains provision for determining whether a company is an eligible company for the purposes of this Part. Chapter 2 Obtaining a moratorium Obtaining a moratorium by filing or lodging documents at court A3 1 This section applies to an eligible company that— a is not subject to an outstanding winding-up petition, and b is not an overseas company. 2 The directors of the company may obtain a moratorium for the company by filing the relevant documents with the court (for the relevant documents, see section A6). 3 For the purposes of this Chapter a company is “subject to an outstanding winding-up petition” if— a a petition for the winding up of the company has been presented, and b the petition has not been withdrawn or determined. Obtaining a moratorium for company subject to winding-up petition A4 1 This section applies to an eligible company that is subject to an outstanding winding-up petition. 2 The directors of the company may apply to the court for a moratorium for the company. 3 The application must be accompanied by the relevant documents (for the relevant documents, see section A6). 4 On hearing the application the court may— a make an order that the company should be subject to a moratorium, or b make any other order which the court thinks appropriate. 5 The court may make an order under subsection (4)(a) only if it is satisfied that a moratorium for the company would achieve a better result for the company’s creditors as a whole than would be likely if the company were wound up (without first being subject to a moratorium). Obtaining a moratorium for other overseas companies A5 1 This section applies to an eligible company that— a is not subject to an outstanding winding-up petition, and b is an overseas company. 2 The directors of the company may apply to the court for a moratorium for the company. 3 The application must be accompanied by the relevant documents (for the relevant documents, see section A6). 4 On hearing the application the court may— a make an order that the company should be subject to a moratorium, or b make any other order which the court thinks appropriate. The relevant documents A6 1 For the purposes of this Chapter, “the relevant documents” are— a a notice that the directors wish to obtain a moratorium, b a statement from a qualified person (“the proposed monitor”) that the person— i is a qualified person, and ii consents to act as the monitor in relation to the proposed moratorium, c a statement from the proposed monitor that the company is an eligible company, d a statement from the directors that, in their view, the company is, or is likely to become, unable to pay its debts, and e a statement from the proposed monitor that, in the proposed monitor’s view, it is likely that a moratorium for the company would result in the rescue of the company as a going concern. 2 Where it is proposed that more than one person should act as the monitor in relation to the proposed moratorium— a each of them must make a statement under subsection (1)(b), (c) and (e), and b the statement under subsection (1)(b) must specify— i which functions (if any) are to be exercised by the persons acting jointly, and ii which functions (if any) are to be exercised by any or all of the persons. 3 The rules may make provision about the date on which a statement comprised in the relevant documents must be made. 4 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of adding to the list of documents in subsection (1). 5 Regulations under subsection (4) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. Beginning of moratorium and appointment of monitor A7 1 A moratorium for a company comes into force at the time at which— a in the case of a company to which section A3 applies, the relevant documents are filed with the court under subsection (2) of that section; b in the case of a company to which section A4 applies, an order is made under section A4(4)(a); c in the case of a company to which section A5 applies, an order is made under section A5(4)(a). 2 On the coming into force of a moratorium, the person or persons who made the statement mentioned in section A6(1)(b) become the monitor in relation to the moratorium. Obligations to notify where moratorium comes into force A8 1 As soon as reasonably practicable after a moratorium for a company comes into force, the directors must notify the monitor of that fact. 2 As soon as reasonably practicable after receiving a notice under subsection (1), the monitor must notify the following that a moratorium for the company has come into force— a the registrar of companies, b every creditor of the company of whose claim the monitor is aware, c in a case where the company is or has been an employer in respect of an occupational pension scheme that is not a money purchase scheme, the Pensions Regulator, and d in a case where the company is an employer in respect of such a pension scheme that is an eligible scheme within the meaning given by section 126 of the Pensions Act 2004, the Board of the Pension Protection Fund. 3 A notice under subsection (2) must specify— a when the moratorium came into force, and b when, subject to any alteration under or by virtue of any of the provisions mentioned in section A9(3) or (4), the moratorium will come to an end. 4 If the directors fail to comply with subsection (1), any director who did not have a reasonable excuse for the failure commits an offence. 5 If the monitor without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (2), the monitor commits an offence. Chapter 3 Length of moratorium Initial period End of the moratorium A9 1 A moratorium ends at the end of the initial period unless it is extended, or comes to an end sooner, under or by virtue of a provision mentioned in subsection (3) or (4). 2 In this Chapter “the initial period”, in relation to a moratorium, means the period of 20 business days beginning with the business day after the day on which the moratorium comes into force. 3 For provision under or by virtue of which a moratorium is or may be extended, see— section A10 (extension by directors without creditor consent); section A11 (extension by directors with creditor consent); section A13 (extension by court on application of directors); section A14 (extension while proposal for CVA pending); section A15 (extension by court in course of other proceedings). 4 For provision under or by virtue of which the moratorium is or may be terminated, see— section A16 (termination on entry into insolvency procedure etc); section A38 (termination by monitor); section A42 or A44 (termination by court). 5 A moratorium may not be extended under a provision mentioned in subsection (3) once it has come to an end. 6 Where the application of two or more of the provisions mentioned in subsections (3) and (4) would produce a different length of moratorium, the provision that applies last is to prevail (irrespective of whether that results in a shorter or longer moratorium). Extension of moratorium Extension by directors without creditor consent A10 1 During the initial period, but after the first 15 business days of that period, the directors may extend the moratorium by filing with the court— a a notice that the directors wish to extend the moratorium, b a statement from the directors that all of the following that have fallen due have been paid or otherwise discharged— i moratorium debts, and ii pre-moratorium debts for which the company does not have a payment holiday during the moratorium (see section A18), c a statement from the directors that, in their view, the company is, or is likely to become, unable to pay its pre-moratorium debts, and d a statement from the monitor that, in the monitor’s view, it is likely that the moratorium will result in the rescue of the company as a going concern. 2 The rules may make provision about the date on which a statement mentioned in subsection (1) must be made. 3 On the filing with the court of the documents mentioned in subsection (1), the moratorium is extended so that it ends at the end of the period— a beginning immediately after the initial period ends, and b ending with the 20th business day after the initial period ends. Extension by directors with creditor consent A11 1 At any time after the first 15 business days of the initial period the directors may, if they have obtained creditor consent, extend the moratorium by filing with the court— a a notice that the directors wish to extend the moratorium, b a statement from the directors that all of the following that have fallen due have been paid or otherwise discharged— i moratorium debts, and ii pre-moratorium debts for which the company does not have a payment holiday during the moratorium (see section A18), c a statement from the directors that, in their view, the company is, or is likely to become, unable to pay its pre-moratorium debts, d a statement from the monitor that, in the monitor’s view, it is likely that the moratorium will result in the rescue of the company as a going concern, and e a statement from the directors that creditor consent has been obtained, and of the revised end date for which that consent was obtained. 2 The rules may make provision about the date on which a statement mentioned in subsection (1) must be made. 3 On the filing with the court of the documents mentioned in subsection (1), the moratorium is extended so that it ends with the revised end date mentioned in the statement under subsection (1)(e). 4 A moratorium may be extended under this section more than once. Creditor consent for the purposes of section A11 A12 1 References in section A11 to creditor consent are to the consent of pre-moratorium creditors to a revised end date for the moratorium. 2 The decision as to consent is to be made using a qualifying decision procedure. 3 The revised end date must be a date before the end of the period of one year beginning with the first day of the initial period. 4 In this section “pre-moratorium creditor” means a creditor in respect of a pre-moratorium debt— a for which the company has a payment holiday during the moratorium (see section A18), and b which has not been paid or otherwise discharged. 5 In determining for the purposes of subsection (4) what counts as a pre-moratorium debt for which the company has a payment holiday during the moratorium, sections A18(3) and A53(1)(b) apply as if the references to the moratorium were to the moratorium as proposed to be extended. 6 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of changing the definition of “pre-moratorium creditor”. 7 Regulations under subsection (6) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. Extension by court on application of directors A13 1 At any time after the first 15 business days of the initial period, the directors may apply to the court for an order that the moratorium be extended. 2 The application must be accompanied by— a a statement from the directors that all of the following that have fallen due have been paid or otherwise discharged— i moratorium debts, and ii pre-moratorium debts for which the company does not have a payment holiday during the moratorium (see section A18), b a statement from the directors that, in their view, the company is, or is likely to become, unable to pay its pre-moratorium debts, c a statement from the directors as to whether pre-moratorium creditors (as defined by section A12(4) and (5)) have been consulted about the application and if not why not, and d a statement from the monitor that, in the monitor’s view, it is likely that the moratorium will result in the rescue of the company as a going concern. 3 The rules may make provision about the date on which a statement mentioned in subsection (2) must be made. 4 On hearing the application the court may— a make an order that the moratorium be extended to such date as is specified in the order, or b make any other order which the court thinks appropriate. 5 In deciding whether to make an order under subsection (4)(a) the court must, in particular, consider the following— a the interests of pre-moratorium creditors, as defined by section A12(4) and (5), and b the likelihood that the extension of the moratorium will result in the rescue of the company as a going concern. 6 Subsection (7) applies where— a an application under this section is made, and b apart from that subsection, the moratorium would end at a time before the application has been disposed of. 7 The moratorium— a does not end at the time mentioned in subsection (6)(b), and b instead, ends— i in a case in which the court makes an order under subsection (4)(a), in accordance with the order; ii otherwise, when the application is withdrawn or disposed of. 8 A moratorium may be extended under this section more than once. Extension while proposal for CVA pending A14 1 Subsection (2) applies where— a at any time, the directors make a proposal under Part 1 (company voluntary arrangements), and b apart from that subsection, the moratorium would end at a time before the proposal is disposed of. 2 The moratorium— a does not end at the time mentioned in subsection (1)(b), and b instead, ends when the proposal is disposed of. 3 For the purposes of this section a proposal under Part 1 is “disposed of” when any of the following takes place— a the company and its creditors both decide under section 4 not to approve the voluntary arrangement contained in the proposal; b the decisions taken by the company and its creditors under section 4 differ, and— i the period for making an application under section 4A(3) expires and either no application has been made within that period or any application made within that period has been withdrawn, or ii an application is made under section 4A(3) and that application is disposed of, or it is withdrawn after the expiry of the period for making an application under section 4A(3); c the voluntary arrangement contained in the proposal takes effect under section 5; d the proposal is withdrawn. Extension by court in the course of other proceedings A15 1 Subsection (2) applies where— a an application is made under section 896 or 901C(1) of the Companies Act 2006 (arrangements and reconstructions: court order for holding of meeting) in respect of a company, and b during proceedings before a court in connection with the application, a moratorium for the company is in force. 2 The court may make an order that the moratorium be extended to such date as is specified in the order. Early termination on certain grounds Company enters into insolvency procedure etc A16 1 A moratorium comes to an end at any time at which the company— a enters into a compromise or arrangement (see subsection (2)), or b enters into a relevant insolvency procedure (see subsection (3)). 2 For the purposes of this section a company enters into a compromise or arrangement if an order under section 899 or 901F of the Companies Act 2006 (court sanction for compromise or arrangement) comes into effect in relation to the company. 3 For the purposes of this section a company enters into a relevant insolvency procedure if— a a voluntary arrangement takes effect under section 5 in relation to the company, b the company enters administration (within the meaning of Schedule B1 (see paragraph 1(2)(b) of that Schedule)), c paragraph 44 of Schedule B1 (administration: interim moratorium) begins to apply in relation to the company, or d the company goes into liquidation (see section 247). Obligations to notify change in end of moratorium Obligations to notify change in end of moratorium A17 1 The table imposes obligations on the directors of a company to notify the monitor where a moratorium for the company is extended or comes to an end. Where a moratorium is extended or comes to an end under or by virtue of the following provision the directors must 1 Section A10 Notify the monitor of the extension. 2 Section A11 Notify the monitor of the extension and of the revised end date. 3 Section A13(4) Notify the monitor of the extension and provide the monitor with the court order under section A13(4). 4 Section A13(7)(a) Notify the monitor of the extension. 5 Section A13(7)(b)(ii) Notify the monitor that the moratorium has come to an end and of the date that it ended. 6 Section A14(2)(a) Notify the monitor of the extension. 7 Section A14(2)(b) Notify the monitor that the moratorium has come to an end and of the date that it ended. 8 Section A15 Notify the monitor of the extension and provide the monitor with any court order under section A15. 9 Section A16 Notify the monitor that the moratorium has come to an end. 10 Section A42 Notify the monitor that the moratorium has come to an end and provide the monitor with the court order under section A42. 11 Section A44 Notify the monitor that the moratorium has come to an end and provide the monitor with the court order under section A44. 2 After receiving a notice under subsection (1), other than a notice under entry 4 or 6 of the table, the monitor must notify the relevant persons of when the moratorium ended or, subject to any alteration under or by virtue of any of the provisions mentioned in section A9(3) or (4), the moratorium will come to an end. 3 After receiving a notice under entry 4 or 6 of the table, the monitor must notify the relevant persons. 4 If a moratorium comes to an end under section A38 (termination by monitor), the monitor must notify the company and the relevant persons of when the moratorium ended. 5 The rules may— a make further provision about the timing of a notice required to be given under this section; b require a notice to be accompanied by other documents. 6 If the directors fail to comply with subsection (1), any director who did not have a reasonable excuse for the failure commits an offence. 7 If the monitor without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any of subsections (2) to (4), the monitor commits an offence. 8 In this section “the relevant persons” means— a the registrar of companies, b every creditor of the company of whose claim the monitor is aware, c in a case where the company is or has been an employer in respect of an occupational pension scheme that is not a money purchase scheme, the Pensions Regulator, and d in a case where the company is an employer in respect of such a pension scheme that is an eligible scheme within the meaning given by section 126 of the Pensions Act 2004, the Board of the Pension Protection Fund. Chapter 4 Effects of moratorium Introductory Overview and construction of references to payment holidays A18 1 This Chapter makes provision about the main effects of a moratorium for a company. 2 The provision made by this Chapter includes restrictions on the enforcement or payment of the debts that are defined by subsection (3) as pre-moratorium debts for which a company has a payment holiday during a moratorium. 3 In this Part a reference to pre-moratorium debts for which a company has a payment holiday during a moratorium is to its pre-moratorium debts that have fallen due before the moratorium, or that fall due during the moratorium, except in so far as they consist of amounts payable in respect of— a the monitor’s remuneration or expenses, b goods or services supplied during the moratorium, c rent in respect of a period during the moratorium, d wages or salary arising under a contract of employment, e redundancy payments, or f debts or other liabilities arising under a contract or other instrument involving financial services. 4 The rules may make provision as to what is, or is not, to count as the supply of goods or services for the purposes of subsection (3)(b). 5 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of changing the list in subsection (3). 6 Regulations under subsection (5) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. 7 In this section— “contract or other instrument involving financial services” has the meaning given by Schedule ZA2; “monitor’s remuneration or expenses” does not include remuneration in respect of anything done by a proposed monitor before the moratorium begins; “redundancy payment” means— a redundancy payment under Part 11 of the Employment Rights Act 1996 or Part 12 of the Employment Rights (Northern Ireland) Order 1996, or a payment made to a person who agrees to the termination of their employment in circumstances where they would have been entitled to a redundancy payment under that Part if dismissed; “wages or salary” includes— a sum payable in respect of a period of holiday (for which purpose the sum is to be treated as relating to the period by reference to which the entitlement to holiday accrued), a sum payable in respect of a period of absence through illness or other good cause, a sum payable in lieu of holiday, and a contribution to an occupational pension scheme. Publicity about moratorium Publicity about moratorium A19 1 During a moratorium, the company must, in any premises— a where business of the company is carried on, and b to which customers of the company or suppliers of goods or services to the company have access, display, in a prominent position so that it may easily be read by such customers or suppliers, a notice containing the required information. 2 During a moratorium, any websites of the company must state the required information. 3 During a moratorium, every business document issued by or on behalf of the company must state the required information. 4 For the purposes of subsections (1), (2) and (3), “the required information” is— a that a moratorium is in force in relation to the company, and b the name of the monitor. 5 If subsection (1), (2) or (3) is contravened— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the contravention commits an offence. 6 In this section “business document” means— a an invoice, b an order for goods or services, c a business letter, and d an order form, whether in hard copy, electronic or any other form. Effect on creditors etc Restrictions on insolvency proceedings etc A20 1 During a moratorium— a no petition may be presented for the winding up of the company, except by the directors, b no resolution may be passed for the voluntary winding up of the company under section 84(1)(a), c a resolution for the voluntary winding up of the company under section 84(1)(b) may be passed only if the resolution is recommended by the directors, d no order may be made for the winding up of the company, except on a petition by the directors, e no administration application may be made in respect of the company, except by the directors, f no notice of intention to appoint an administrator of the company under paragraph 14 or 22(1) of Schedule B1 may be filed with the court, g no administrator of the company may be appointed under paragraph 14 or 22(1) of Schedule B1, and h no administrative receiver of the company may be appointed. 2 Subsection (1)(a) does not apply to an excepted petition; and subsection (1)(d) does not apply to an order on an excepted petition. 3 For these purposes, “excepted petition” means a petition under— a section 124A, 124B or 124C, or b section 367 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 on the ground mentioned in subsection (3)(b) of that section. Restrictions on enforcement and legal proceedings A21 1 During a moratorium— a a landlord or other person to whom rent is payable may not exercise a right of forfeiture by peaceable re-entry in relation to premises let to the company, except with the permission of the court, b in Scotland, a landlord or other person to whom rent is payable may not exercise a right of irritancy in relation to premises let to the company, except with the permission of the court, c no steps may be taken to enforce any security over the company’s property except— i steps to enforce a collateral security charge (within the meaning of the Financial Markets and Insolvency (Settlement Finality) Regulations 1999 ( S.I. 1999/2979 )), ii steps to enforce security created or otherwise arising under a financial collateral arrangement (within the meaning of regulation 3 of the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003 ( S.I. 2003/3226 )), or iii steps taken with the permission of the court, d no steps may be taken to repossess goods in the company’s possession under any hire-purchase agreement, except with the permission of the court, and e no legal process (including legal proceedings, execution, distress or diligence) may be instituted, carried out or continued against the company or its property except— i employment tribunal proceedings or any legal process arising out of such proceedings, ii proceedings, not within sub-paragraph (i), involving a claim between an employer and a worker, or iii a legal process instituted, carried out or continued with the permission of the court. 2 An application may not be made for permission under subsection (1) for the purposes of enforcing a pre-moratorium debt for which the company has a payment holiday during the moratorium. 3 An application may not be made for permission under subsection (1)(c), (d) or (e) with a view to obtaining— a the crystallisation of a floating charge, or b the imposition, by virtue of provision in an instrument creating a floating charge, of any restriction on the disposal of any property of the company. 4 Permission of the court under subsection (1) may be given subject to conditions. 5 Subsection (1)(c)(iii) is subject to section A23(1). 6 In this section— “agency worker” has the meaning given by section 13(2) of the Employment Relations Act 1999; “employer”— in relation to an agency worker, has the meaning given by section 13(2) of the Employment Relations Act 1999; otherwise, has the meaning given by section 230(4) of the Employment Rights Act 1996; “worker” means an individual who is— a worker within the meaning of section 230(3) of the Employment Rights Act 1996, or an agency worker. Floating charges A22 1 This section applies where there is an uncrystallised floating charge on the property of a company for which a moratorium is in force. 2 During the moratorium, the holder of the floating charge may not give any notice which would have the effect of— a causing the floating charge to crystallise, or b causing the imposition, by virtue of provision in the instrument creating the charge, of any restriction on the disposal of property of the company. 3 No other event occurring during the moratorium is to have the effect mentioned in subsection (2)(a) or (b). 4 Subsection (5) applies where— a the holder of a floating charge (“the chargee”) is prevented by subsection (2) from giving a notice mentioned there during the moratorium, and b under the terms of the floating charge, the time for giving such a notice ends during the moratorium or before the chargee is given notice of the end of the moratorium under section A17. 5 The chargee may give notice later than is required under the terms of the floating charge, but only if the chargee does so as soon as is practicable after— a the end of the moratorium, or b if later, the day on which the chargee is notified of the end of the moratorium. 6 Where— a subsection (3) prevents an event which occurs during the moratorium from having the effect mentioned there, and b the holder of the floating charge gives notice of the event to the company as soon as is practicable after— i the end of the moratorium, or ii if later, the day on which the chargee is notified of the end of the moratorium, the event is to be treated as if it had occurred when the notice was given. 7 This section does not apply in relation to a floating charge that is— a a collateral security (as defined by section A27); b a market charge (as defined by section A27); c a security financial collateral arrangement (within the meaning of regulation 3 of the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003 ( S.I. 2003/3226 )); d a system-charge (as defined by section A27). Enforcement of security granted during moratorium A23 1 Security granted by a company during a moratorium in relation to the company may be enforced only if the monitor consented to the grant of security under section A26. 2 See also section A21(1)(c), which restricts enforcement during a moratorium. Notification of insolvency proceedings Duty of directors to notify monitor of insolvency proceedings etc A24 1 The directors of a company must notify the monitor before taking any of the following steps during a moratorium— a presenting a petition for the winding up of the company; b making an administration application in respect of the company; c appointing an administrator under paragraph 22(2) of Schedule B1. 2 The directors of a company must notify the monitor if, during a moratorium for the company, they recommend that the company passes a resolution for voluntary winding up under section 84(1)(b). 3 The rules may make provision about the timing of a notice required to be given under subsection (1) or (2). 4 If the directors fail to comply with subsection (1) or (2), any director who did not have a reasonable excuse for the failure commits an offence. Restrictions on transactions Restrictions on obtaining credit A25 1 During a moratorium, the company may not obtain credit to the extent of £500 or more from a person unless the person has been informed that a moratorium is in force in relation to the company. 2 The reference to the company obtaining credit includes— a the company entering into a conditional sale agreement in accordance with which goods are to be sold to the company, b the company entering into any other form of hire-purchase agreement under which goods are to be bailed (in Scotland, hired) to the company, and c the company being paid in advance (whether in money or otherwise) for the supply of goods or services. 3 If a company contravenes subsection (1)— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the obtaining of the credit commits an offence. Restrictions on grant of security etc A26 1 During a moratorium, the company may grant security over its property only if the monitor consents. 2 The monitor may give consent under subsection (1) only if the monitor thinks that the grant of security will support the rescue of the company as a going concern. 3 In deciding whether to give consent under subsection (1), the monitor is entitled to rely on information provided by the company unless the monitor has reason to doubt its accuracy. 4 If the company grants security over its property during the moratorium otherwise than as authorised by subsection (1)— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the grant of the security commits an offence. 5 For the consequences of a company granting security over its property in contravention of subsection (1), see also section A23. 6 The monitor may not give consent under this section if the granting of security is an offence under section A27. Prohibition on entering into market contracts etc A27 1 If a company enters into a transaction to which this section applies during a moratorium for the company— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the company to enter into the transaction commits an offence. 2 A company enters into a transaction to which this section applies if it— a enters into a market contract, b enters into a financial collateral arrangement, c gives a transfer order, d grants a market charge or a system-charge, or e provides any collateral security. 3 Where during the moratorium a company enters into a transaction to which this section applies, nothing done by or in pursuance of the transaction is to be treated as done in contravention of any of sections A19, A21, A25, A26 and A28 to A32. 4 In this section— “collateral security” has the same meaning as in the Financial Markets and Insolvency (Settlement Finality) Regulations 1999 ( S.I. 1999/2979 ); “financial collateral arrangement” has the same meaning as in the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003 ( S.I. 2003/3226 ); “market charge” has the same meaning as in Part 7 of the Companies Act 1989; “market contract” has the same meaning as in Part 7 of the Companies Act 1989; “system-charge” has the meaning given by the Financial Markets and Insolvency Regulations 1996 ( S.I. 1996/1469 ); “transfer order” has the same meaning as in the Financial Markets and Insolvency (Settlement Finality) Regulations 1999. Restrictions on payments and disposal of property Restrictions on payment of certain pre-moratorium debts A28 1 During a moratorium, the company may make one or more relevant payments to a person that (in total) exceed the specified maximum amount only if— a the monitor consents, b the payment is in pursuance of a court order, or c the payment is required by section A31(3) or A32(3). 2 In subsection (1)— “relevant payments” means payments in respect of pre-moratorium debts for which the company has a payment holiday during the moratorium (see section A18); “specified maximum amount” means an amount equal to the greater of— £5000, and 1% of the value of the debts and other liabilities owed by the company to its unsecured creditors when the moratorium began, to the extent that the amount of such debts and liabilities can be ascertained at that time. 3 The monitor may give consent under subsection (1)(a) only if the monitor thinks that it will support the rescue of the company as a going concern. 4 In deciding whether to give consent under subsection (1)(a), the monitor is entitled to rely on information provided by the company unless the monitor has reason to doubt its accuracy. 5 If the company makes a payment to which subsection (1) applies otherwise than as authorised by that subsection— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the payment commits an offence. Restrictions on disposal of property A29 1 During a moratorium, the company may dispose of its property only if authorised by subsection (2) or (5). 2 In the case of property that is not subject to a security interest, the company may dispose of the property if— a the disposal is made in the ordinary way of the company’s business, b the monitor consents, or c the disposal is in pursuance of a court order. 3 The monitor may give consent under subsection (2)(b) only if the monitor thinks that it will support the rescue of the company as a going concern. 4 In deciding whether to give consent under subsection (2)(b), the monitor is entitled to rely on information provided by the company unless the monitor has reason to doubt its accuracy. 5 In the case of property that is subject to a security interest, the company may dispose of the property if the disposal is in accordance with— a section A31(1), or b the terms of the security. 6 If the company disposes of its property during the moratorium otherwise than as authorised by this section— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the disposal commits an offence. Restrictions on disposal of hire-purchase property A30 1 During a moratorium, the company may dispose of any goods in the possession of the company under a hire-purchase agreement only if the disposal is in accordance with — a section A32(1), or b the terms of the agreement. 2 If the company disposes of goods in the possession of the company under a hire-purchase agreement otherwise than as authorised by subsection (1)— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the disposal commits an offence. Disposals of property free from charges etc Disposal of charged property free from charge A31 1 During a moratorium, the company may, with the permission of the court, dispose of property which is subject to a security interest as if it were not subject to the security interest. 2 The court may give permission under subsection (1) only if the court thinks that it will support the rescue of the company as a going concern. 3 Where the court gives permission under subsection (1) other than in relation to a floating charge, the company must apply the following towards discharging the sums secured— a the net proceeds of disposal of the property, and b any money required to be added to the net proceeds so as to produce the amount determined by the court as the net amount which would be realised on a sale of the property in the open market by a willing vendor. 4 Where the permission relates to two or more security interests, the condition in subsection (3) requires the application of money in the order of the priorities of the security interests. 5 Where property subject to a floating charge is disposed of under subsection (1), the holder of the floating charge has the same priority in respect of acquired property as they had in respect of the property disposed of. 6 In subsection (5) “acquired property” means property of the company which directly or indirectly represents the property disposed of. 7 Where the court makes an order giving permission under subsection (1), the directors must, within the period of 14 days beginning with the date of the order, send a copy of it to the registrar of companies. 8 If the directors fail to comply with subsection (7), any director who did not have a reasonable excuse for the failure commits an offence. 9 Where property in Scotland is disposed of under subsection (1), the company must grant to the disponee an appropriate document of transfer or conveyance of the property, and— a that document, or b recording, intimation or registration of that document (where recording, intimation or registration of the document is a legal requirement for completion of title to the property), has the effect of disencumbering the property of or, as the case may be, freeing the property from, the security interest. 10 If a company fails to comply with subsection (3) or (9)— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the failure commits an offence. 11 Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to any property which is subject to a financial collateral arrangement, a market charge, a system-charge or a collateral security (as defined by section A27). Disposal of hire-purchase property A32 1 During a moratorium, the company may, with the permission of the court, dispose of goods which are in the possession of the company under a hire-purchase agreement as if all of the rights of the owner under the agreement were vested in the company. 2 The court may give permission under subsection (1) only if the court thinks that it will support the rescue of the company as a going concern. 3 Where the court gives permission under subsection (1), the company must apply the following towards discharging the sums payable under the hire-purchase agreement— a the net proceeds of disposal of the goods, and b any additional money required to be added to the net proceeds so as to produce the amount determined by the court as the net amount which would be realised on a sale of the goods in the open market by a willing vendor. 4 If a company fails to comply with subsection (3)— a the company commits an offence, and b any officer of the company who without reasonable excuse authorised or permitted the failure commits an offence. 5 Where the court makes an order giving permission under subsection (1), the directors must, within the period of 14 days beginning with the date of the order, send a copy of it to the registrar of companies. 6 If the directors fail to comply with subsection (5), any director who did not have a reasonable excuse for the failure commits an offence. 7 In Scotland, where goods in the possession of the company under a hire-purchase agreement are disposed of under subsection (1), the disposal has the effect of extinguishing, as against the disponee, all rights of the owner of the goods under the agreement. Effect of contravention of certain provisions of Chapter Contravention of certain requirements imposed under this Chapter A33 The fact that a company contravenes section A19 or any of sections A25 to A32 does not— a make any transaction void or unenforceable, or b affect the validity of any other thing. CHAPTER 5 The monitor Status of monitor A34 The monitor in relation to a moratorium is an officer of the court. Monitoring A35 1 During a moratorium, the monitor must monitor the company’s affairs for the purpose of forming a view as to whether it remains likely that the moratorium will result in the rescue of the company as a going concern. 2 In forming the view mentioned in subsection (1), the monitor is entitled to rely on information provided by the company, unless the monitor has reason to doubt its accuracy. Provision of information to monitor A36 1 The monitor may require the directors of the company to provide any information required by the monitor for the purpose of carrying out the monitor’s functions. 2 The directors must comply with a requirement to provide information as soon as practicable. 3 For the potential consequences of failing to comply with a requirement to provide information, see section A38. Application by monitor for directions A37 The monitor in relation to a moratorium may apply to the court for directions about the carrying out of the monitor’s functions. Termination of moratorium by monitor A38 1 The monitor must bring a moratorium to an end by filing a notice with the court if— a the monitor thinks that the moratorium is no longer likely to result in the rescue of the company as a going concern, b the monitor thinks that the objective of rescuing the company as a going concern has been achieved, c the monitor thinks that, by reason of a failure by the directors to comply with a requirement under section A36, the monitor is unable properly to carry out the monitor’s functions, or d the monitor thinks that the company is unable to pay any of the following that have fallen due— i moratorium debts; ii pre-moratorium debts for which the company does not have a payment holiday during the moratorium (see section A18). 2 The rules may provide for debts that are to be disregarded for the purposes of subsection (1)(d). 3 On the filing with the court of a notice under subsection (1), the moratorium comes to an end. 4 The rules may make provision about the timing of a notice required to be given under subsection (1). 5 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of changing the circumstances in which the monitor must bring a moratorium to an end under subsection (1). 6 Regulations under subsection (5) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. 7 See also section A17 (obligations to notify change in end of moratorium). Replacement of monitor or appointment of additional monitor A39 1 The court may make an order authorising the appointment of a qualified person to act as the monitor in relation to a moratorium instead of, or in addition to, a person who already acts as the monitor. 2 The court may make an order providing that a person ceases to act as the monitor in relation to a moratorium. 3 An order under subsection (1) or (2) may be made only on an application by the directors or the monitor. 4 The court may make an order authorising the appointment of a monitor under subsection (1) only if the person has provided the court with a statement that the person— a is a qualified person, and b consents to act as the monitor in relation to the moratorium. 5 Where it is proposed that more than one person should act as the monitor in relation to the moratorium, the statement under subsection (4) must specify— a which functions (if any) are to be exercised by the persons acting jointly, and b which functions (if any) are to be exercised by any or all of the persons. 6 The rules may make provision about the date on which the statement under subsection (4) must be made. 7 Where the court makes an order under subsection (1) or (2) the person begins to act as the monitor, or ceases to act as the monitor, in relation to the moratorium at the time specified in, or determined in accordance with, the order (“the relevant time”). 8 As soon as reasonably practicable after the relevant time, the monitor must notify the following of the effect of the order— a the registrar of companies, b every creditor of the company of whose claim the monitor is aware, c in a case where the company is or has been an employer in respect of an occupational pension scheme that is not a money purchase scheme, the Pensions Regulator, and d in a case where the company is an employer in respect of such a pension scheme that is an eligible scheme within the meaning given by section 126 of the Pensions Act 2004, the Board of the Pension Protection Fund. 9 If the monitor without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (8), the monitor commits an offence. Application of Part where two or more persons act as monitor A40 1 Where two or more persons act jointly as the monitor— a a reference in this Act to the monitor is a reference to those persons acting jointly; b where an offence of omission is committed by the monitor, each of the persons appointed to act jointly— i commits the offence, and ii may be proceeded against and punished individually. 2 Where persons act jointly in respect of only some of the functions of the monitor, subsection (1) applies only in relation to those functions. 3 Where two or more persons act concurrently as the monitor a reference in this Act to the monitor is a reference to any of the persons appointed (or any combination of them). Presumption of validity A41 An act of the monitor is valid in spite of a defect in the monitor’s appointment or qualification. Chapter 6 Challenges Challenge to monitor’s actions A42 1 Any of the persons specified below may apply to the court on the ground that an act, omission or decision of the monitor during a moratorium has unfairly harmed the interests of the applicant. 2 The persons who may apply are— a a creditor, director or member of the company, or b any other person affected by the moratorium. 3 An application under subsection (1) may be made during the moratorium or after it has ended. 4 On an application under subsection (1) the court may— a confirm, reverse or modify any act or decision of the monitor, b give the monitor directions, or c make such other order as it thinks fit (but may not, under this paragraph, order the monitor to pay any compensation). 5 Where an application under subsection (1) relates to a failure by the monitor to bring the moratorium to an end under section A38(1), an order under subsection (4) may, in particular, bring the moratorium to an end and make such consequential provision as the court thinks fit. 6 Where an application under subsection (1) relates to the monitor bringing a moratorium to an end under section A38(1), an order under subsection (4) may, in particular, provide that the moratorium is not to be taken into account for the purposes of paragraph 2(1)(b) of Schedule ZA1 (company not eligible for moratorium if moratorium in force within previous 12 months). 7 In making an order under subsection (4) the court must have regard to the need to safeguard the interests of persons who have dealt with the company in good faith and for value. 8 See also section A17 (obligations to notify change in end of moratorium). Challenges to monitor remuneration in insolvency proceedings A43 1 The rules may confer on an administrator or liquidator of a company the right to apply to the court on the ground that remuneration charged by the monitor in relation to a prior moratorium for the company was excessive. 2 Rules under subsection (1) may (among other things) make provision as to— a time limits; b disposals available to the court; c the treatment of costs (or, in Scotland, the expenses) of the application in the administration or winding up. Challenge to directors’ actions A44 1 A creditor or member of a company may apply to the court for an order under this section on the ground that— a during a moratorium, the company’s affairs, business and property are being or have been managed by the directors in a manner which has unfairly harmed the interests of its creditors or members generally or of some part of its creditors or members (including at least the applicant), or b any actual or proposed act or omission of the directors during a moratorium causes or would cause such harm. 2 An application under subsection (1) may be made during the moratorium or after it has ended. 3 On an application under subsection (1) the court may make such order as it thinks fit. 4 An order under subsection (3) may in particular— a regulate the management by the directors of the company’s affairs, business and property during the remainder of the moratorium, b require the directors to refrain from doing or continuing an act complained of by the applicant or to do an act which the applicant has complained they have omitted to do, c require a decision of the company’s creditors to be sought (using a qualifying decision procedure) on such matters as the court may direct, or d bring the moratorium to an end and make such consequential provision as the court thinks fit. 5 In making an order under subsection (3) the court must have regard to the need to safeguard the interests of persons who have dealt with the company in good faith and for value. 6 See also section A17 (obligations to notify change in end of moratorium). Challenge brought by Board of the Pension Protection Fund A45 1 This section applies where— a a moratorium— i is in force in relation to a company that is an employer in respect of an eligible scheme, or ii is or has been in force in relation to a company that has been an employer in respect of an eligible scheme at any time during the moratorium, and b the trustees or managers of the scheme are a creditor of the company. 2 The Board of the Pension Protection Fund may make any application under section A42(1) or A44(1) that could be made by the trustees or managers as a creditor. 3 For the purposes of such an application, any reference in section A42(1) or A44(1) to the interests of the applicant is to be read as a reference to the interests of the trustees or managers as a creditor. 4 In this section “eligible scheme” has the meaning given by section 126 of the Pensions Act 2004. CHAPTER 7 Offences: general Offence of fraud etc during or in anticipation of moratorium A46 1 An officer of a company commits an offence if, during a moratorium for the company or at any time within the period of 12 months ending with the day on which a moratorium for the company comes into force, the officer— a does any of the things mentioned in subsection (2), or b was privy to the doing by others of any of the things mentioned in subsection (2)(c), (d) and (e). 2 Those things are— a concealing any part of the company’s property to the value of £500 or more, or concealing any debt due to or from the company, b fraudulently removing any part of the company’s property to the value of £500 or more, c concealing, destroying, mutilating or falsifying any document affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs, d making any false entry in any document affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs, e fraudulently parting with, altering or making any omission in any document affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs, or f pawning, pledging or disposing of any property of the company which has been obtained on credit and has not been paid for (unless the pawning, pledging or disposal was in the ordinary way of the company’s business). 3 It is a defence— a for a person charged with an offence under subsection (1) in respect of any of the things mentioned in subsection (2)(a) or (f) to prove that the person had no intent to defraud, and b for a person charged with an offence under subsection (1) in respect of any of the things mentioned in subsection (2)(c) or (d) to prove that the person had no intent to conceal the state of affairs of the company or to defeat the law. 4 Where a person pawns, pledges or disposes of any property of a company in circumstances which amount to an offence under subsection (1), every person who takes in pawn or pledge, or otherwise receives, the property commits an offence if the person knows it to be pawned, pledged or disposed of in circumstances which— a amount to an offence under subsection (1), or b would, if a moratorium were obtained for the company within the period of 12 months beginning with the day on which the pawning, pledging or disposal took place, amount to an offence under subsection (1). 5 In this section, “officer” includes a shadow director. Offence of false representation etc to obtain a moratorium A47 1 An officer of a company commits an offence if, for the purpose of obtaining a moratorium for the company or an extension of a moratorium for the company, the officer— a makes any false representation, or b fraudulently does, or omits to do, anything. 2 Subsection (1) applies even if no moratorium or extension is obtained. 3 In this section, “officer” includes a shadow director. Prosecution of delinquent officers of company A48 1 This section applies where a moratorium has been obtained for a company. 2 If it appears to the monitor that any past or present officer of the company has committed an offence in connection with the moratorium, the monitor must forthwith— a report the matter to the appropriate authority, and b provide the appropriate authority with such information and give the authority such access to and facilities for inspecting and taking copies of documents (being information or documents in the possession or under the control of the monitor and relating to the matter in question) as the authority requires. 3 In subsection (2), “the appropriate authority”— a in the case of a company registered in England and Wales, means the Secretary of State, b in the case of a company registered in Scotland, means the Lord Advocate, and c in the case of an unregistered company means— i if it has a principal place of business in England and Wales but not Scotland, the Secretary of State, ii if it has a principal place of business in Scotland but not England and Wales, the Lord Advocate, iii if it has a principal place of business in both England and Wales and Scotland, the Secretary of State and the Lord Advocate, and iv if it does not have a principal place of business in England and Wales or Scotland, the Secretary of State. 4 Where a matter is reported to the Secretary of State under subsection (2), the Secretary of State may, for the purpose of investigating the matter and such other matters relating to the affairs of the company as appear to the Secretary of State to require investigation, exercise any of the powers which are exercisable by inspectors appointed under section 431 or 432 of the Companies Act 1985. 5 For the purpose of such an investigation any obligation imposed on a person by any provision of the Companies Acts to produce documents or give information to, or otherwise to assist, inspectors so appointed is to be regarded as an obligation similarly to assist the Secretary of State in the Secretary of State’s investigation. 6 Where a question is put to a person in exercise of the powers conferred by subsection (4), the person’s answer may be used in evidence against them. 7 However, in criminal proceedings in which the person is charged with an offence other than a false statement offence— a no evidence relating to the answer may be adduced, and b no question relating to it may be asked, by or on behalf of the prosecution, unless evidence relating to it is adduced, or a question relating to it is asked, in the proceedings by or on behalf of the person. 8 In subsection (7) “false statement offence” means— a an offence under section 2 or 5 of the Perjury Act 1911 (false statements made on oath otherwise than in judicial proceedings or made otherwise than on oath), or b an offence under section 44(1) or (2) of the Criminal Law (Consolidation) (Scotland) Act 1995 (false statements made on oath or otherwise than on oath). 9 Where a prosecuting authority institutes criminal proceedings following any report under subsection (2), the monitor, and every officer and agent of the company past and present (other than the defendant or defender), must give the authority all assistance in connection with the prosecution which they are reasonably able to give. 10 For this purpose— “agent” includes any banker or solicitor of the company and any person employed by the company as auditor, whether that person is or is not an officer of the company; “prosecuting authority” means the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Lord Advocate or the Secretary of State. 11 The court may, on the application of the prosecuting authority, direct a person who has failed to comply with subsection (9) to comply with it. Chapter 8 Miscellaneous and general Special rules for certain kinds of company etc Regulated companies: modifications to this Part A49 1 For the purposes of sections A3 and A4 as they apply in relation to a regulated company, section A6(1) has effect as if the documents listed there included a reference to the written consent of the appropriate regulator to the appointment of the proposed monitor. 2 The remaining provisions of this section apply in relation to a moratorium for a regulated company. 3 Any notice under section A8(2), A17(2) to (4) or A39(8) must also be sent by the monitor to the appropriate regulator. 4 The directors must give the appropriate regulator notice of any qualifying decision procedure by which a decision of the company’s creditors is sought for the purposes of section A12(2) or A44(4)(c). 5 If the directors fail to comply with subsection (4), any director who did not have a reasonable excuse for the failure commits an offence. 6 The appropriate regulator, or a person appointed by the appropriate regulator, may in the way provided for by the rules, participate (but not vote) in any qualifying decision procedure by which a decision of the company’s creditors is sought for the purposes of this Part. 7 The appropriate regulator is entitled to be heard on any application to the court for permission under section A31(1) or A32(1) (disposal of charged property, etc). 8 The court may make an order under section A39(1) only if the appropriate regulator has given its written consent to the appointment of the proposed monitor. 9 The persons who may apply to the court under section A39(3), A42(1) or A44(1) include the appropriate regulator. 10 If a person other than a regulator applies to the court under section A39(3), A42(1) or A44(1) the appropriate regulator is entitled to be heard on the application. 11 If either regulator makes an application to the court under section A39(3), A42(1) or A44(1) in relation to a PRA-regulated company, the other regulator is entitled to be heard on the application. 12 This section does not affect any right that the appropriate regulator has (apart from this section) as a creditor of a regulated company. 13 In this section— “the appropriate regulator” means— where the regulated company is a PRA-regulated company, each of the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority, and where the regulated company is not a PRA-regulated company, the Financial Conduct Authority; “PRA-authorised person” has the meaning given by section 2B(5) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000; “PRA-regulated company” means a regulated company which— is, or has been, a PRA-authorised person, is, or has been, an appointed representative within the meaning given by section 39 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, whose principal (or one of whose principals) is, or was, a PRA-authorised person, or is carrying on, or has carried on, a PRA-regulated activity (within the meaning of section 22A of that Act) in contravention of the general prohibition; “regulated activity” has the meaning given by section 22 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, taken with Schedule 2 to that Act and any order under that section; “regulated company” means a company which— is, or has been, an authorised person within the meaning given by section 31 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, is, or has been, an appointed representative within the meaning given by section 39 of that Act, or is carrying on, or has carried on, a regulated activity in contravention of the general prohibition within the meaning given by section 19 of that Act; “regulator” means the Financial Conduct Authority or the Prudential Regulation Authority. 14 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of changing the definition of “regulated company” in subsection (13). 15 Regulations under subsection (14) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. Power to modify this Part etc in relation to certain companies A50 1 The Secretary of State may by regulations make provision under the law of England and Wales or Scotland— a to modify this Part as it applies in relation to a company for which there is a special administration regime, or b in connection with the interaction between this Part and any other insolvency procedure in relation to such a company. 2 The Welsh Ministers may by regulations make provision under the law of England and Wales— a to modify this Part as it applies in relation to a company that is a social landlord registered under Part 1 of the Housing Act 1996, or b make provision in connection with the interaction between this Part and any other insolvency procedure in relation to such a company. 3 The Scottish Ministers may by regulations make provision under the law of Scotland— a to modify this Part as it applies in relation to a company that is a social landlord registered under Part 2 of the Housing (Scotland) Act 2010 (asp 17) , or b make provision in connection with the interaction between this Part and any other insolvency procedure in relation to such a company. 4 The Secretary of State may, by regulations, make any provision under the law of England and Wales, Scotland or Northern Ireland that appears to the Secretary of State to be appropriate in view of provision made under subsection (1), (2) or (3). 5 The power in subsection (1), (2), (3) or (4) may, in particular, be used to amend, repeal, revoke or otherwise modify any provision made by an enactment. 6 Regulations under subsection (1) or (4) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. 7 A statutory instrument containing regulations under subsection (2) may not be made unless a draft of the statutory instrument containing them has been laid before and approved by a resolution of Senedd Cymru. 8 Regulations made by the Scottish Ministers under subsection (3) are subject to the affirmative procedure (see section 29 of the Interpretation and Legislative Reform (Scotland) Act 2010 (asp 10) ). 9 In this section— “insolvency procedure” includes— in relation to subsection (1)(b), the provision made by sections 143A to 159 of the Housing and Regeneration Act 2008; in relation to subsection (2)(b), the provision made by sections 39 to 50 of the Housing Act 1996; in relation to subsection (3)(b), the provision made by Part 7 of the Housing (Scotland) Act 2010; “ordinary administration” means the insolvency procedure provided for by Schedule B1; “special administration regime” means provision made by an enactment for an insolvency procedure that— is similar or corresponds to ordinary administration, and provides for the administrator to have one or more special objectives instead of or in addition to the objectives of ordinary administration. Power to make provision in connection with pension schemes A51 1 The Secretary of State may by regulations provide that, in a case where— a a moratorium— i is in force in relation to a company that is an employer in respect of an eligible scheme, or ii is or has been in force in relation to a company that has been an employer in respect of an eligible scheme at any time during the moratorium, and b the trustees or managers of the scheme are a creditor of the company, the Board of the Pension Protection Fund may exercise any of the following rights. 2 The rights are those which are exercisable by the trustees or managers as a creditor of the company under or by virtue of— a section A12, or b a court order under section A44(4)(c). 3 Regulations under subsection (1) may provide that the Board may exercise any such rights— a to the exclusion of the trustees or managers of the scheme, or b in addition to the exercise of those rights by the trustees or managers of the scheme. 4 Regulations under subsection (1)— a may specify conditions that must be met before the Board may exercise any such rights; b may provide for any such rights to be exercisable by the Board for a specified period; c may make provision in connection with any such rights ceasing to be so exercisable at the end of such a period. 5 Regulations under subsection (1) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. 6 In this section “eligible scheme” has the meaning given by section 126 of the Pensions Act 2004. Floating charges Void provisions in floating charge documents A52 1 A provision in an instrument creating a floating charge is void if it provides for the obtaining of a moratorium, or anything done with a view to obtaining a moratorium, to be— a an event causing the floating charge to crystallise, b an event causing restrictions which would not otherwise apply to be imposed on the disposal of property by the company, or c a ground for the appointment of a receiver. 2 The reference in subsection (1) to anything done with a view to obtaining a moratorium includes any preliminary decision or investigation. 3 In subsection (1) “receiver” includes a manager and a person who is appointed both receiver and manager. 4 Subsection (1) does not apply to a provision in an instrument creating a floating charge that is— a a collateral security (as defined by section A27); b a market charge (as defined by section A27); c a security financial collateral arrangement (within the meaning of regulation 3 of the Financial Collateral Arrangements (No. 2) Regulations 2003 ( S.I. 2003/3226 )); d a system-charge (as defined by section A27). Interpretation of this Part Meaning of “pre-moratorium debt” and “moratorium debt” A53 1 In this Part “pre-moratorium debt”, in relation to a company for which a moratorium is or has been in force, means— a any debt or other liability to which the company becomes subject before the moratorium comes into force, or b any debt or other liability to which the company has become or may become subject during the moratorium by reason of any obligation incurred before the moratorium comes into force, but this is subject to subsection (3). 2 In this Part “moratorium debt”, in relation to a company for which a moratorium is or has been in force, means— a any debt or other liability to which the company becomes subject during the moratorium, other than by reason of an obligation incurred before the moratorium came into force, or b any debt or other liability to which the company has become or may become subject after the end of the moratorium by reason of an obligation incurred during the moratorium, but this is subject to subsection (3). 3 For the purposes of this Part— a a liability in tort or delict is a “pre-moratorium debt” if either— i the cause of action has accrued before the moratorium comes into force, or ii all the elements necessary to establish the cause of action exist before the moratorium comes into force except for actionable damage; b a liability in tort or delict is a “moratorium debt” if it does not fall within paragraph (a) and either— i the cause of action has accrued during the moratorium, or ii all the elements necessary to establish the cause of action exist before the moratorium comes to an end except for actionable damage. 4 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of changing the definition of “pre-moratorium debt” or “moratorium debt” in this Part. 5 Regulations under subsection (4) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. Interpretation of this Part: general A54 1 In this Part— “company” means— a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 in England and Wales or Scotland, or an unregistered company that may be wound up under Part 5 of this Act; “the court” means such court as is prescribed; “eligible”, in relation to a company, has the meaning given by Schedule ZA1; “employer”, in relation to a pension scheme— in sections A8(2)(c), A17(8)(c) and A39(8)(c), means an employer within the meaning of section 318(1) of the Pensions Act 2004; elsewhere in this Part, has the same meaning that it has for the purposes of Part 2 of the Pensions Act 2004 (see section 318(1) and (4) of that Act); “enactment” includes an Act of the Scottish Parliament and an instrument made under such an Act; “hire-purchase agreement” includes a conditional sale agreement, a chattel leasing agreement and a retention of title agreement; “liability” means (subject to subsection (2)) a liability to pay money or money’s worth, including any liability under an enactment, a liability for breach of trust, any liability in contract, tort, delict or bailment, and any liability arising out of an obligation to make restitution; “money purchase scheme” has the meaning given by section 181(1) of the Pension Schemes Act 1993; “the monitor”, in relation to a moratorium, means the person who has the functions of the monitor in relation to the moratorium (see also section A40 for cases where two or more persons act as the monitor); “moratorium” means a moratorium under this Part; “moratorium debt” has the meaning given by section A53; “occupational pension scheme” has the meaning given by section 1 of the Pension Schemes Act 1993; “pension scheme” has the meaning given by section 1 of the Pension Schemes Act 1993; “pre-moratorium debt” has the meaning given by section A53; “qualified person” means a person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner; “unable to pay its debts”— in relation to a registered company, has the same meaning as in Part 4 (see section 123); in relation to an unregistered company, has the same meaning as in Part 5 (see sections 222 to 224). 2 For the purposes of references in any provision of this Part to a debt or liability it is immaterial whether the debt or liability is present or future, whether it is certain or contingent, or whether its amount is fixed or liquidated, or is capable of being ascertained by fixed rules or as a matter of opinion. 3 In this Part references to filing a document with the court are, in relation to a court in Scotland, references to lodging it in court. 4 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend this section for the purposes of changing the definition of “qualified person” in subsection (1). 5 Regulations under subsection (4) are subject to the affirmative resolution procedure. Regulations Regulations A55 1 Regulations under this Part may make— a different provision for different purposes; b consequential, supplementary, incidental or transitional provision or savings. 2 Regulations under this Part are to be made by statutory instrument, unless they are made by the Scottish Ministers. 3 Where regulations of the Secretary of State under this Part are subject to “the affirmative resolution procedure”, they may not be made unless a draft of the statutory instrument containing them has been laid before Parliament and approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament. Part I Company Voluntary Arrangements The Proposal Those who may propose an arrangement. 1 1 The directors of a company (other than one which is in administration or being wound up) may make a proposal under this Part to the company and to its creditors for a composition in satisfaction of its debts or a scheme of arrangement of its affairs (from here on referred to, in either case, as a “voluntary arrangement”). 2 A proposal under this Part is one which provides for some person (“the nominee”) to act in relation to the voluntary arrangement either as trustee or otherwise for the purpose of supervising its implementation; and the nominee must be a person who is qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner ... in relation to the voluntary arrangement . 3 Such a proposal may also be made— a where the company is in administration, by the administrator, b where the company is being wound up, by the liquidator. 4 In this Part “ company ” means— a a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 in England and Wales or Scotland; b a company incorporated in an EEA State ...; or c a company not incorporated in an EEA State but having its centre of main interests in a member State (other than Denmark) or in the United Kingdom . 5 In subsection (4), in relation to a company, “ centre of main interests ” has the same meaning as in the Article 3 of the EU Regulation . 6 If a company incorporated outside the United Kingdom has a principal place of business in Northern Ireland, no proposal under this Part shall be made in relation to it unless it also has a principal place of business in England and Wales or Scotland (or both in England and Wales or Scotland). Moratorium. 1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure where nominee is not the liquidator or administrator. 2 1 This section applies where the nominee under section 1 is not the liquidator or administrator of the company .... 2 The nominee shall, within 28 days (or such longer period as the court may allow) after he is given notice of the proposal for a voluntary arrangement, submit a report to the court stating— a whether, in his opinion, the proposed voluntary arrangement has a reasonable prospect of being approved and implemented, b whether, in his opinion, the proposal should be considered by a meeting of the company and by the company's creditors, and c if in his opinion it should, the date on which, and time and place at which, he proposes a meeting of the company should be held. 3 For the purposes of enabling the nominee to prepare his report, the person intending to make the proposal shall submit to the nominee— a a document setting out the terms of the proposed voluntary arrangement, and b a statement of the company’s affairs containing— i such particulars of its creditors and of its debts and other liabilities and of its assets as may be prescribed, and ii such other information as may be prescribed. 4 The court may— a on an application made by the person intending to make the proposal, in a case where the nominee has failed to submit the report required by this section or has died, or b on an application made by that person or the nominee, in a case where it is impracticable or inappropriate for the nominee to continue to act as such, direct that the nominee be replaced as such by another person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner ... in relation to the voluntary arrangement. Consideration of proposal . 3 1 Where the nominee under section 1 is not the liquidator or administrator, and it has been report to the court under section 2(2) that the proposal should be considered by a meeting of the company and by the company's creditors , the person making the report shall (unless the court otherwise directs)— a summon a meeting of the company to consider the proposal for the time, date and place proposed in the report, and b seek a decision from the company's creditors as to whether they approve the proposal. 2 Where the nominee is the liquidator or administrator, he shall— a summon a meeting of the company to consider the proposal for such time, date and place as he thinks fit, and b seek a decision from the company's creditors as to whether they approve the proposal. 3 A decision of the company's creditors as to whether they approve the proposal is to be made by a qualifying decision procedure. 4 Notice of the qualifying decision procedure must be given to every creditor of the company of whose claim and address the person seeking the decision is aware. Consideration and implementation of proposal Decisions of the company and its creditors . 4 1 This section applies where, under section 3— a a meeting of the company is summoned to consider the proposed voluntary arrangement, and b the company's creditors are asked to decide whether to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement. 1A The company and its creditors may approve the proposed voluntary arrangement with or without modifications. 2 The modifications may include one conferring the functions proposed to be conferred on the nominee on another person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner ... in relation to the voluntary arrangement . But they shall not include any modification by virtue of which the proposal ceases to be a proposal such as is mentioned in section 1. 3 Neither the company nor its creditors may approve any proposal or modification which affects the right of a secured creditor of the company to enforce his security, except with the concurrence of the creditor concerned. 4 Subject as follows, neither the company nor its creditors may approve any proposal or modification under which— a any preferential debt of the company is to be paid otherwise than in priority to such of its debts as are not preferential debts, ... aa any ordinary preferential debt of the company is to be paid otherwise than in priority to any secondary preferential debts that it may have, b a preferential creditor of the company is to be paid an amount in respect of an ordinary preferential debt that bears to that debt a smaller proportion than is borne to another ordinary preferential debt by the amount that is to be paid in respect of that other debt , ... c a preferential creditor of the company is to be paid an amount in respect of a secondary preferential debt that bears to that debt a smaller proportion than is borne to another secondary preferential debt by the amount that is to be paid in respect of that other debt. or d in the case of a company which is a relevant financial institution (see section 387A), any non-preferential debt is to be paid otherwise than in accordance with the rules in section 176AZA(2) or (3). However, ... such a proposal or modification may be approved with the concurrence of the ... creditor concerned. 4A Subject to subsection (4B), where the nominee’s report under section 2(2) is submitted to the court before the end of the period of 12 weeks beginning with the day after the end of any moratorium for the company under Part A1, neither the company nor its creditors may approve any proposal or modification under which the following are to be paid otherwise than in full— a moratorium debts (within the meaning given by section 174A); b priority pre-moratorium debts (within the meaning given by section 174A). 4B Subsection (4A) does not prevent the approval of such a proposal or modification with the concurrence of the creditor concerned. 5 Subject as above, the meeting of the company and the qualifying decision procedure shall be conducted in accordance with the rules. 6 After the conclusion of the company meeting in accordance with the rules, the chairman of the meeting shall report the result of the meeting to the court, and, immediately after reporting to the court, shall give notice of the result of the meeting to such persons as may be prescribed. 6A After the company's creditors have decided whether to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement the person who sought the decision must— a report the creditors' decision to the court, and b immediately after reporting to the court, give notice of the creditors' decision to such persons as may be prescribed. 7 References in this section to preferential debts , ordinary preferential debts, secondary preferential debts and preferential creditors are to be read in accordance with section 386 in Part XII of this Act. Approval of arrangement. 4A 1 This section applies to a decision, under section 4, with respect to the approval of a proposed voluntary arrangement. 2 The decision has effect if, in accordance with the rules— a it has been taken by the meeting of the company summoned under section 3 and by the company's creditors pursuant to that section , or b (subject to any order made under subsection (6) ) it has been taken by the company's creditors pursuant to that section. 3 If the decision taken by the company's creditors differs from that taken by the company meeting, a member of the company may apply to the court. 4 An application under subsection (3) shall not be made after the end of the period of 28 days beginning with— a the day on which the decision was taken by the company's creditors , or b where the decision of the company meeting was taken on a later day, that day. 5 Where a member of a regulated company, as defined by section A49(13) , applies to the court under subsection (3), the appropriate regulator is entitled to be heard on the application. 5A The appropriate regulator” means— a where the regulated company is a PRA-regulated company as defined by section A49(13) , the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority, and b in any other case, the Financial Conduct Authority. 6 On an application under subsection (3), the court may— a order the decision of the company meeting to have effect instead of the decision of the company's creditors , or b make such other order as it thinks fit. Effect of approval. 5 1 This section applies where a decision approving a voluntary arrangement has effect under section 4A. 2 The ... voluntary arrangement— a takes effect as if made by the company at the time the creditors decided to approve the voluntary arrangement , and b binds every person who in accordance with the rules— i was entitled to vote in the qualifying decision procedure by which the creditors' decision to approve the voluntary arrangement was made , or ii would have been so entitled if he had had notice of it, as if he were a party to the voluntary arrangement. 2A If— a when the arrangement ceases to have effect any amount payable under the arrangement to a person bound by virtue of subsection (2)(b)(ii) has not been paid, and b the arrangement did not come to an end prematurely, the company shall at that time become liable to pay to that person the amount payable under the arrangement. 3 Subject as follows, if the company is being wound up or is in administration , the court may do one or both of the following, namely— a by order stay or sist all proceedings in the winding up or provide for the appointment of the administrator to cease to have effect ; b give such directions with respect to the conduct of the winding up or the administration as it thinks appropriate for facilitating the implementation of the ... voluntary arrangement. 3A Where immediately before the voluntary arrangement took effect a moratorium for the company was in force under Part A1 and a petition for the winding up of the company, other than an excepted petition within the meaning of section A20 , was presented before the beginning of the moratorium, the court must dismiss the petition. 4 The court shall not make an order under subsection (3)(a) or dismiss a petition under subsection (3A) — a at any time before the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the first day on which each of the reports required by section 4(6) and (6A) has been made to the court, or b at any time when an application under the next section or an appeal in respect of such an application is pending, or at any time in the period within which such an appeal may be brought. 5 Where the company is in energy administration, the court shall not make an order or give a direction under subsection (3) unless— a the court has given the Secretary of State or the Gas and Electricity Markets Authority a reasonable opportunity of making representations to it about the proposed order or direction; and b the order or direction is consistent with the objective of the energy administration. 6 In subsection (5) “in energy administration” and “objective of the energy administration” are to be construed in accordance with Schedule B1 to this Act, as applied by Part 1 of Schedule 20 to the Energy Act 2004. Challenge of decisions. 6 1 Subject to this section, an application to the court may be made, by any of the persons specified below, on one or both of the following grounds, namely— a that a voluntary arrangement which has effect under section 4A unfairly prejudices the interests of a creditor, member or contributory of the company; b that there has been some material irregularity at or in relation to the meeting of the company, or in relation to the relevant qualifying decision procedure . 1A In this section— a the “ relevant qualifying decision procedure ” means the qualifying decision procedure in which the company's creditors decide whether to approve a voluntary arrangement; b references to a decision made in the relevant qualifying decision procedure include any other decision made in that qualifying decision procedure. 2 The persons who may apply under subsection (1) are— a a person entitled, in accordance with the rules, to vote at the meeting of the company or in the relevant qualifying decision procedure ; aa a person who would have been entitled, in accordance with the rules, to vote in the relevant qualifying decision procedure if he had had notice of it; b the nominee or any person who has replaced him under section 2(4) or 4(2); and c if the company is being wound up or is in administration , the liquidator or administrator. 2A Subject to this section, where a voluntary arrangement in relation to a company in energy administration is approved at the meetings summoned under section 3, an application to the court may be made— a by the Secretary of State, or b with the consent of the Secretary of State, by the Gas and Electricity Markets Authority, on the ground that the voluntary arrangement is not consistent with the achievement of the objective of the energy administration. 3 An application under this section shall not be made a after the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the first day on which each of the reports required by section 4(6) and (6A) has been made to the court or b in the case of a person who was not given notice of the relevant qualifying decision procedure , after the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which he became aware that the relevant qualifying decision procedure had taken place, but (subject to that) an application made by a person within subsection (2)(aa) on the ground that the voluntary arrangement prejudices his interests may be made after the arrangement has ceased to have effect, unless it came to an end prematurely. 4 Where on such an application the court is satisfied as to either of the grounds mentioned in subsection (1) or, in the case of an application under subsection (2A), as to the ground mentioned in that subsection , it may do any of the following, namely— a revoke or suspend any decision approving the voluntary arrangement which has effect under section 4A or, in a case falling within subsection (1)(b), any decision taken by the meeting of the company, or in the relevant qualifying decision procedure, which has effect under that section ; b give a direction to any person for the summoning of a further company meeting to consider any revised proposal the person who made the original proposal may make or, in the case falling within subsection (1)(b), and relating to the company meeting, a further company meeting to reconsider the original proposal; c direct any person— i to seek a decision from the company's creditors (using a qualifying decision procedure) as to whether they approve any revised proposal the person who made the original proposal may make, or ii in a case falling within subsection (1)(b) and relating to the relevant qualifying decision procedure, to seek a decision from the company's creditors (using a qualifying decision procedure) as to whether they approve the original proposal. 5 Where at any time after giving a direction under subsection (4)(b) or (c) in relation to a revised proposal the court is satisfied that the person who made the original proposal does not intend to submit a revised proposal, the court shall revoke the direction and revoke or suspend any decision approving the voluntary arrangement which has effect under section 4A . 6 In a case where the court, on an application under this section with respect to any meeting or relevant qualifying decision procedure — a gives a direction under subsection (4)(b) or (c) , or b revokes or suspends an approval under subsection (4)(a) or (5), the court may give such supplemental directions as it thinks fit and, in particular, directions with respect to things done under the voluntary arrangement since it took effect . 7 Except in pursuance of the preceding provisions of this section, a a decision taken at a company meeting summoned under section 3 is not invalidated by any irregularity at or in relation to the meeting , and b a decision of the company's creditors made in the relevant qualifying decision procedure is not invalidated by any irregularity in relation to the relevant qualifying decision procedure. 8 In this section “in energy administration” and “objective of the energy administration” are to be construed in accordance with Schedule B1 to this Act, as applied by Part 1 of Schedule 20 to the Energy Act 2004. False representations, etc. 6A 1 If, for the purpose of obtaining the approval of the members or creditors of a company to a proposal for a voluntary arrangement, a person who is an officer of the company— a makes any false representation, or b fraudulently does, or omits to do, anything, he commits an offence. 2 Subsection (1) applies even if the proposal is not approved. 3 For purposes of this section “ officer ” includes a shadow director. 4 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Implementation of proposal. 7 1 This section applies where a voluntary arrangement has effect under section 4A . 2 The person who is for the time being carrying out in relation to the voluntary arrangement the functions conferred— a on the nominee by virtue of the approval of the voluntary arrangement by the company or its creditors (or both) pursuant to section 3 , b by virtue of section 2(4) or 4(2) on a person other than the nominee, shall be known as the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement. 3 If any of the company’s creditors or any other person is dissatisfied by any act, omission or decision of the supervisor, he may apply to the court; and on the application the court may— a confirm, reverse or modify any act or decision of the supervisor, b give him directions, or c make such other order as it thinks fit. 4 The supervisor— a may apply to the court for directions in relation to any particular matter arising under the voluntary arrangement, and b is included among the persons who may apply to the court for the winding up of the company or for an administration order to be made in relation to it. 5 The court may, whenever— a it is expedient to appoint a person to carry out the functions of the supervisor, and b it is inexpedient, difficult or impracticable for an appointment to be made without the assistance of the court, make an order appointing a person who is qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner ... in relation to the voluntary arrangement , either in substitution for the existing supervisor or to fill a vacancy. 6 The power conferred by subsection (5) is exercisable so as to increase the number of persons exercising the functions of supervisor or, where there is more than one person exercising those functions, so as to replace one or more of those persons. Prosecution of delinquent officers of company. 7A 1 This section applies where the approval of a voluntary arrangement in relation to a company has taken effect under section 4A. 2 If it appears to the supervisor that any past or present officer of the company has committed an offence in connection with the voluntary arrangement, the supervisor must forthwith a report the matter to the appropriate authority, and b provide the appropriate authority with such information and give the authority such access to and facilities for inspecting and taking copies of documents (being information or documents in the possession or under the control of the ... supervisor and relating to the matter in question) as the authority requires. In this subsection, “ the appropriate authority ” means— in the case of a company registered in England and Wales, the Secretary of State, and in the case of a company registered in Scotland, the Lord Advocate. 3 Where a report is made to the Secretary of State under subsection (2), he may, for the purpose of investigating the matter reported to him and such other matters relating to the affairs of the company as appear to him to require investigation, exercise any of the powers which are exercisable by inspectors appointed under section 431 or 432 of the the Companies Act 1985 to investigate a company’s affairs. 4 For the purpose of such an investigation any obligation imposed on a person by any provision of the the Companies Acts to produce documents or give information to, or otherwise to assist, inspectors so appointed is to be regarded as an obligation similarly to assist the Secretary of State in his investigation. 5 An answer given by a person to a question put to him in exercise of the powers conferred by subsection (3) may be used in evidence against him. 6 However, in criminal proceedings in which that person is charged with an offence to which this subsection applies— a no evidence relating to the answer may be adduced, and b no question relating to it may be asked, by or on behalf of the prosecution, unless evidence relating to it is adduced, or a question relating to it is asked, in the proceedings by or on behalf of that person. 7 Subsection (6) applies to any offence other than— a an offence under section 2 or 5 of the Perjury Act 1911 (false statements made on oath otherwise than in judicial proceedings or made otherwise than on oath), or b an offence under section 44(1) or (2) of the Criminal Law (Consolidation) (Scotland) Act 1995 (false statements made on oath or otherwise than on oath). 8 Where a prosecuting authority institutes criminal proceedings following any report under subsection (2), the ... supervisor, and every officer and agent of the company past and present (other than the defendant or defender), shall give the authority all assistance in connection with the prosecution which he is reasonably able to give. For this purpose— “ agent ” includes any banker or solicitor of the company and any person employed by the company as auditor, whether that person is or is not an officer of the company, “ prosecuting authority ” means the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Lord Advocate or the Secretary of State. 9 The court may, on the application of the prosecuting authority, direct any person referred to in subsection (8) to comply with that subsection if he has failed to do so. Arrangements coming to an end prematurely. 7B For the purposes of this Part, a voluntary arrangement the approval of which has taken effect under section 4A ... comes to an end prematurely if, when it ceases to have effect, it has not been fully implemented in respect of all persons bound by the arrangement by virtue of section 5(2)(b)(i) .... Part II Administration Administration 8 Schedule B1 to this Act (which makes provision about the administration of companies) shall have effect. Part II Administration Orders Making etc. of administration order Application for order. 9 1 An application to the court for an administration order shall be by petition presented either by the company or the directors, or by a creditor or creditors (including any contingent or prospective creditor or creditors), or by the clerk of a magistrates’ court in the exercise of the power conferred by section 87A of the Magistrates’ Courts Act 1980 (enforcement of fines imposed on companies) or by all or any of those parties, together or separately. 2 Where a petition is presented to the court— a notice of the petition shall be given forthwith to any person who has appointed, or is or may be entitled to appoint, an administrative receiver of the company, and to such other persons as may be prescribed, and b the petition shall not be withdrawn except with the leave of the court. 3 Where the court is satisfied that there is an administrative receiver of the company, the court shall dismiss the petition unless it is also satisfied either— a that the person by whom or on whose behalf the receiver was appointed has consented to the making of the order, or b that, if an administration order were made, any security by virtue of which the receiver was appointed would— i be void against the administrator to any extent by virtue of the provisions of Part XII of the Companies Act 1985 (registration of company charges), i be liable to be released or discharged under sections 238 to 240 in Part VI (transactions at an undervalue and preferences), ii be avoided under section 245 in that Part (avoidance of floating charges), or iii be challengeable under section 242 (gratuitous alienations) or 243 (unfair preferences) in that Part, or under any rule of law in Scotland. 4 Subject to subsection (3), on hearing a petition the court may dismiss it, or adjourn the hearing conditionally or unconditionally, or make an interim order or any other order that it thinks fit. 5 Without prejudice to the generality of subsection (4), an interim order under that subsection may restrict the exercise of any powers of the directors or of the company (whether by reference to the consent of the court or of a person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company, or otherwise). Effect of application. 10 1 During the period beginning with the presentation of a petition for an administration order and ending with the making of such an order or the dismissal of the petition— a no resolution may be passed or order made for the winding up of the company; aa no landlord or other person to whom rent is payable may exercise any right of forfeiture by peaceable re-entry in relation to premises let to the company in respect of a failure by the company to comply with any term or condition of its tenancy of such premises, except with the leave of the court and subject to such terms as the court may impose b no steps may be taken to enforce any security over the company’s property, or to repossess goods in the company’s possession under any hire-purchase agreement, except with the leave of the court and subject to such terms as the court may impose; and c no other proceedings and no execution or other legal process may be commenced or continued, and no distress may be levied, against the company or its property except with the leave of the court and subject to such terms as aforesaid. 2 Nothing in subsection (1) requires the leave of the court— a for the presentation of a petition for the winding up of the company, b for the appointment of an administrative receiver of the company, or c for the carrying out by such a receiver (whenever appointed) of any of his functions. 3 Where— a a petition for an administration order is presented at a time when there is an administrative receiver of the company, and b the person by or on whose behalf the receiver was appointed has not consented to the making of the order, the period mentioned in subsection (1) is deemed not begin unless and until that person so consents. 4 References in this section and the next to hire-purchase agreements include conditional sale agreements, chattel leasing agreements and retention of title agreements. 5 In the application of this section and the next to Scotland, references to execution being commenced or continued include references to diligence being carried out or continued, and references to distress being levied shall be omitted. Effect of order. 11 1 On the making of an administration order— a any petition for the winding up of the company shall be dismissed, and b any administrative receiver of the company shall vacate office. 2 Where an administration order has been made, any receiver of part of the company’s property shall vacate office on being required to do so by the administrator. 3 During the period for which an administration order is in force— a no resolution may be passed or order made for the winding up of the company; b no administrative receiver of the company may be appointed; ba no landlord or other person to whom rent is payable may exercise any right of forfeiture by peaceable re-entry in relation to premises let to the company in respect of a failure by the company to comply with any term or condition of its tenancy of such premises, except with the consent of the administrator or the leave of the court and subject (where the court gives leave) to such terms as the court may impose c no other steps may be taken to enforce any security over the company’s property, or to repossess goods in the company’s possession under any hire-purchase agreement, except with the consent of the administrator or the leave of the court and subject (where the court gives leave) to such terms as the court may impose; and d no other proceedings and no execution or other legal process may be commenced or continued, and no distress may be levied, against the company or its property except with the consent of the administrator or the leave of the court and subject (where the court gives leave) to such terms as aforesaid. 4 Where at any time an administrative receiver of the company has vacated office under subsection (1)(b), or a receiver of part of the company’s property has vacated office under subsection (2)— a his remuneration and any expenses properly incurred by him, and b any indemnity to which he is entitled out of the assets of the company. shall be charged on and (subject to subsection (3) above) paid out of any property of the company which was in his custody or under his control at that time in priority to any security held by the person by or on whose behalf he was appointed. 5 Neither an administrative receiver who vacates office under subsection (1)(b) nor a receiver who vacates office under subsection (2) is required on or after so vacating office to take any steps for the purpose of complying with any duty imposed on him by section 40 or 59 of this Act (duty to pay preferential creditors). Notification of order. 12 1 Every invoice, order for goods or business letter which, at a time when an administration order is in force in relation to a company, is issued by or on behalf of the company or the administrator, being a document on or in which the company’s name appears, shall also contain the administrator’s name and a statement that the affairs, business and property of the company are being managed by the administrator. 2 If default is made in complying with this section, the company and any of the following persons who without reasonable excuse authorises or permits the default, namely, the administrator and any officer of the company, is liable to a fine. Administrators Appointment of administrator. 13 1 The administrator of a company shall be appointed either by the administration order or by an order under the next subsection. 2 If a vacancy occurs by death, resignation or otherwise in the office of the administrator, the court may by order fill the vacancy. 3 An application for an order under subsection (2) may be made— a by any continuing administrator of the company; or b where there is no such administrator, by a creditors’ committee established under section 26 below; or c where there is no such administrator and no such committee, by the company or the directors or by any creditor or creditors of the company. General powers. 14 1 The administrator of a company— a may do all such things as may be necessary for the management of the affairs, business and property of the company, and b without prejudice to the generality of paragraph (a), has the powers specified in Schedule 1 to this Act; and in the application of that Schedule to the administrator of a company the words “he” and “him” refer to the administrator. 2 The administrator also has power— a to remove any director of the company and to appoint any person to be a director of it, whether to fill a vacancy or otherwise, and b to call any meeting of the members or creditors of the company. 3 The administrator may apply to the court for directions in relation to any particular matter arising in connection with the carrying out of his functions. 4 Any power conferred on the company or its officers, whether by this Act or the Companies Act or by the memorandum or articles of association, which could be exercised in such a way as to interfere with the exercise by the administrator of his powers is not exercisable except with the consent of the administrator, which may be given either generally or in relation to particular cases. 5 In exercising his powers the administrator is deemed to act as the company’s agent. 6 A person dealing with the administrator in good faith and for value is not concerned to inquire whether the administrator is acting within his powers. Power to deal with charged property, etc. 15 1 The administrator of a company may dispose of or otherwise exercise his powers in relation to any property of the company which is subject to a security to which this subsection applies as if the property were not subject to the security. 2 Where, on an application by the administrator, the court is satisifed that the disposal (with or without other assets) of— a any property of the company subject to a security to which this subsection applies, or b any goods in the possession of the company under a hire-purchase agreement, would be likely to promote the purpose or one or more of the purposes specified in the administration order, the court may by order authorise the administrator to dispose of the property as if it were not subject to the security or to dispose of the goods as if all rights of the owner under the hire-purchase agreement were vested in the company. 3 Subsection (1) applies to any security which, as created, was a floating charge; and subsection (2) applies to any other security. 4 Where property is disposed of under subsection (1), the holder of the security has the same priority in respect of any property of the company directly or indirectly representing the property disposed of as he would have had in respect of the property subject to the security. 5 It shall be a condition of an order under subsection (2) that— a the net proceeds of the disposal, and b where those proceeds are less than such amount as may be determined by the court to be the net amount which would be realised on a sale of the property or goods in the open market by a willing vendor, such sums as may be required to make good the deficiency, shall be applied towards discharging the sums secured by the security or payable under the hire-purchase agreement. 6 Where a condition imposed in pursuance of subsection (5) relates to two or more securities, that condition requires the net proceeds of the disposal and, where paragraph (b) of that subsection applies, the sums mentioned in that paragraph to be applied towards discharging the sums secured by those securities in the order of their priorities. 7 An office copy of an order under subsection (2) shall, within 14 days after the making of the order, be sent by the administrator to the registrar of companies. 8 If the administrator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (7), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 9 References in this section to hire-purchase agreements include conditional sale agreements, chattel leasing agreements and retention of title agreements. Operation of s. 15 in Scotland. 16 1 Where property is disposed of under section 15 in its application to Scotland, the administrator shall grant to the disponee an appropriate document of transfer or conveyance of the property, and— a that document, or b where any recording, intimation or registration of the document is a legal requirement for completion of title to the property, that recording, intimation or registration, has the effect of disencumbering the property of or, as the case may be, freeing the property from the security. 2 Where goods in the possession of the company under a hire-purchase agreement, conditional sale agreement, chattel leasing agreement or retention of title agreement are disposed of under section 15 in its application to Scotland, the disposal has the effect of extinguishing, as against the disponee, all rights of the owner of the goods under the agreement. General duties. 17 1 The administrator of a company shall, on his appointment, take into his custody or under his control all the property to which the company is or appears to be entitled. 2 The administrator shall manage the affairs, business and property of the company— a at any time before proposals have been approved (with or without modifications) under section 24 below, in accordance with any directions given by the court, and b at any time after proposals have been so approved, in accordance with those proposals as from time to time revised, whether by him or a predecessor of his. 3 The administrator shall summon a meeting of the company’s creditors if— a he is requested, in accordance with the rules, to do so by one-tenth, in value, of the company’s creditors, or b he is directed to do so by the court. Discharge or variation of administration order. 18 1 The administrator of a company may at any time apply to the court for the administration order to be discharged, or to be varied so as to specify an additional purpose. 2 The administrator shall make an application under this section if— a it appears to him that the purpose or each of the purposes specified in the order either has been achieved or is incapable of achievement, or b he is required to do so by a meeting of the company’s creditors summoned for the purpose in accordance with the rules. 3 On the hearing of an application under this section, the court may by order discharge or vary the administration order and make such consequential provision as it thinks fit, or adjourn the hearing conditionally or unconditionally, or make an interim order or any other order it thinks fit. 4 Where the administration order is discharged or varied the administrator shall, within 14 days after the making of the order effecting the discharge or variation, send an office copy of that order to the registrar of companies. 5 If the administrator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (4), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Vacation of office. 19 1 The administrator of a company may at any time be removed from office by order of the court and may, in the prescribed circumstances, resign his office by giving notice of his resignation to the court. 2 The administrator shall vacate office if— a he ceases to be qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company, or b the administration order is discharged. 3 Where at any time a person ceases to be administrator, the following subsections apply. 4 His remuneration and any expenses properly incurred by him shall be charged on and paid out of any property of the company which is in his custody or under his control at that time in priority to any security to which section 15(1) then applies. 5 Any sums payable in respect of debts or liabilities incurred, while he was administrator, under contracts entered into . . . by him or a predecessor of his in the carrying out of his or the predecessor’s functions shall be charged on and paid out of any such property as is mentioned in subsection (4) in priority to any charge arising under that subsection. 6 Any sums payable in respect of liabilities incurred, while he was administrator, under contracts of employment adopted by him or a predecessor of his in the carrying out of his or the predecessor’s functions shall, to the extent that the liabilities are qualifying liabilities, be charged on and paid out of any such property as is mentioned in subsection (4) and enjoy the same priority as any sums to which subsection (5) applies. For this purpose, the administrator is not to be taken to have adopted a contract of employment by reason of anything done or omitted to be done within 14 days after his appointment. 7 For the purposes of subsection (6), a liability under a contract of employment is a qualifying liability if— a it is a liability to pay a sum by way of wages or salary or contribution to an occupational pension scheme, and b it is in respect of services rendered wholly or partly after the adoption of the contract. 8 There shall be disregarded for the purposes of subsection (6) so much of any qualifying liability as represents payment in respect of services rendered before the adoption of the contract. 9 For the purposes of subsections (7) and (8)— a wages or salary payable in respect of a period of holiday or absence from work through sickness or other good cause are deemed to be wages or (as the case may be) salary in respect of services rendered in that period, and b a sum payable in lieu of holiday is deemed to be wages or (as the case may be) salary in respect of services rendered in the period by reference to which the holiday entitlement arose. 10 In subsection (9)(a), the reference to wages or salary payable in respect of a period of holiday includes any sums which, if they had been paid, would have been treated for the purposes of the enactments relating to social security as earnings in respect of that period. Release of administrator. 20 1 A person who has ceased to be the administrator of a company has his release with effect from the following time, that is to say— a in the case of a person who has died, the time at which notice is given to the court in accordance with the rules that he has ceased to hold office; b in any other case, such time as the court may determine. 2 Where a person has his release under this section, he is, with effect from the time specified above, discharged from all liability both in respect of acts or omissions of his in the administration and otherwise in relation to his conduct as administrator. 3 However, nothing in this section prevents the exercise, in relation to a person who has had his release as above, of the court’s powers under section 212 in Chapter X of Part IV (summary remedy against delinquent directors, liquidators, etc.). Ascertainment and investigation of company’s affairs Information to be given by administrator. 21 1 Where an administration order has been made, the administrator shall— a forthwith send to the company and publish in the prescribed manner a notice of the order, and b within 28 days after the making of the order, unless the court otherwise directs, send such a notice to all creditors of the company (so far as he is aware of their addresses). 2 Where an administration order has been made, the administrator shall also, within 14 days after the making of the order, send an office copy of the order to the registrar of companies and to such other persons as may be prescribed. 3 If the administrator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Statement of affairs to be submitted to administrator. 22 1 Where an administration order has been made, the administrator shall forthwith require some or all of the persons mentioned below to make out and submit to him a statement in the prescribed form as to the affairs of the company. 2 The statement shall be verified by affidavit by the persons required to submit it and shall show— a particulars of the company’s assets, debts and liabilities; b the names and addresses of its creditors; c the securities held by them respectively; d the dates when the securities were respectively given; and e such further or other information as may be prescribed. 3 The persons referred to in subsection (1) are— a those who are or have been officers of the company; b those who have taken part in the company’s formation at any time within one year before the date of the administration order; c those who are in the company’s employment or have been in its employment within that year, and are in the administrator’s opinion capable of giving the information required; d those who are or have been within that year officers of or in the employment of a company which is, or within that year was, an officer of the company. In this subsection “ employment ” includes employment under a contract for services. 4 Where any persons are required under this section to submit a statement of affairs to the administrator, they shall do so (subject to the next subsection) before the end of the period of 21 days beginning with the day after that on which the prescribed notice of the requirement is given to them by the administrator. 5 The administrator, if he thinks fit, may— a at any time release a person from an obligation imposed on him under subsection (1) or (2), or b either when giving notice under subsection (4) or subsequently, extend the period so mentioned; and where the administrator has refused to exercise a power conferred by this subsection, the court, if it thinks fit, may exercise it. 6 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed under this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Administrator’s proposals Statement of proposals. 23 1 Where an administration order has been made, the administrator shall, within 3 months (or such longer period as the court may allow) after the making of the order— a send to the registrar of companies and (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all creditors a statement of his proposals for achieving the purpose or purposes specified in the order, and b lay a copy of the statement before a meeting of the company’s creditors summoned for the purpose on not less than 14 days’ notice. 2 The administrator shall also, within 3 months (or such longer period as the court may allow) after the making of the order, either— a send a copy of the statement (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all members of the company, or b publish in the prescribed manner a notice stating an address to which members of the company should write for copies of the statement to be sent to them free of charge. 3 If the administrator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Consideration of proposals by creditors’ meeting. 24 1 A meeting of creditors summoned under section 23 shall decide whether to approve the administrator’s proposals. 2 The meeting may approve the proposals with modifications, but shall not do so unless the administrator consents to each modification. 3 Subject as above, the meeting shall be conducted in accordance with the rules. 4 After the conclusion of the meeting in accordance with the rules, the administrator shall report the result of the meeting to the court and shall give notice of that result to the registrar of companies and to such persons as may be prescribed. 5 If a report is given to the court under subsection (4) that the meeting has declined to approve the administrator’s proposals (with or without modifications), the court may by order discharge the administration order and make such consequential provision as it thinks fit, or adjourn the hearing conditionally or unconditionally, or make an interim order or any other order that it thinks fit. 6 Where the administration order is discharged, the administrator shall, within 14 days after the making of the order effecting the discharge, send an office copy of that order to the registrar of companies. 7 If the administrator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (6), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Approval of substantial revisions. 25 1 This section applies where— a proposals have been approved (with or without modifications) under section 24, and b the administrator proposes to make revisions of those proposals which appear to him substantial. 2 The administrator shall— a send to all creditors of the company (so far as he is aware of their addresses) a statement in the prescribed form of his proposed revisions, and b lay a copy of the statement before a meeting of the company’s creditors summoned for the purpose on not less than 14 days’ notice; and he shall not make the proposed revisions unless they are approved by the meeting. 3 The administrator shall also either— a send a copy of the statement (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all members of the company, or b publish in the prescribed manner a notice stating an address to which members of the company should write for copies of the statement to be sent to them free of charge. 4 The meeting of creditors may approve the proposed revisions with modifications, but shall not do so unless the administrator consents to each modification. 5 Subject as above, the meeting shall be conducted in accordance with the rules. 6 After the conclusion of the meeting in accordance with the rules, the administrator shall give notice of the result of the meeting to the registrar of companies and to such persons as may be prescribed. Miscellaneous Creditors’ committee. 26 1 Where a meeting of creditors summoned under section 23 has approved the administrator’s proposals (with or without modifications), the meeting may, if it thinks fit, establish a committee (“the creditors’ committee”) to exercise the functions conferred on it by or under this Act. 2 If such a committee is established, the committee may, on giving not less than 7 days’ notice, require the administrator to attend before it at any reasonable time and furnish it with such information relating to the carrying out of his functions as it may reasonably require. Protection of interests of creditors and members. 27 1 At any time when an administration order is in force, a creditor or member of the company may apply to the court by petition for an order under this section on the ground— a that the company’s affairs, business and property are being or have been managed by the administrator in a manner which is unfairly prejudicial to the interests of its creditors or members generally, or of some part of its creditors or members (including at least himself), or b that any actual or proposed act or omission of the administrator is or would be so prejudicial. 2 On an application for an order under this section the court may, subject as follows, make such order as it thinks fit for giving relief in respect of the matters complained of, or adjourn the hearing conditionally or unconditionally, or make an interim order or any other order that it thinks fit. 3 An order under this section shall not prejudice or prevent— a the implementation of a voluntary arrangement approved under . . . Part I, or any compromise or arrangement sanctioned under section 425 of the Companies Act; or b where the application for the order was made more than 28 days after the approval of any proposals or revised proposals under section 24 or 25, the implementation of those proposals or revised proposals 4 Subject as above, an order under this section may in particular— a regulate the future management by the administrator of the company’s affairs, business and property; b require the administrator to refrain from doing or continuing an act complained of by the petitioner, or to do an act which the petitioner has complained he has omitted to do. c require the summoning of a meeting of creditors or members for the purpose of considering such matters as the court may direct; d discharge the administration order and make such consequential provision as the court thinks fit. 5 Nothing in section 15 or 16 is to be taken as prejudicing applications to the court under this section. 6 Where the administration order is discharged, the administrator shall, within 14 days after the making of the order effecting the discharge, send an office copy of that order to the registrar of companies; and if without reasonable excuse he fails to comply with this subsection, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Part III Receivership Chapter I Receivers and Managers (England and Wales) Preliminary and general provisions Extent of this Chapter. 28 1 In this Chapter “ company ” means a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 in England and Wales or Scotland. 2 This Chapter does not apply to receivers appointed under Chapter 2 of this Part (Scotland). Definitions. 29 1 It is hereby declared that, except where the context otherwise requires— a any reference in . . . this Act to a receiver or manager of the property of a company, or to a receiver of it, includes a receiver or manager, or (as the case may be) a receiver of part only of that property and a receiver only of the income arising from the property or from part of it; and b any reference in . . . this Act to the appointment of a receiver or manager under powers contained in an instrument includes an appointment made under powers which, by virtue of any enactment, are implied in and have effect as if contained in an instrument. 2 In this Chapter “ administrative receiver ” means— a a receiver or manager of the whole (or substantially the whole) of a company’s property appointed by or on behalf of the holders of any debentures of the company secured by a charge which, as created, was a floating charge, or by such a charge and one or more other securities; or b a person who would be such a receiver or manager but for the appointment of some other person as the receiver of part of the company’s property. Disqualification of body corporate from acting as receiver. 30 A body corporate is not qualified for appointment as receiver of the property of a company, and any body corporate which acts as such a receiver is liable to a fine. Disqualification of bankrupt or person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made 31 1 A person commits an offence if he acts as receiver or manager of the property of a company on behalf of debenture holders while— a he is an undischarged bankrupt, aa a moratorium period under a debt relief order applies in relation to him, or b a bankruptcy restrictions order or a debt relief restrictions order is in force in respect of him. 2 A person guilty of an offence under subsection (1) shall be liable to imprisonment, a fine or both. 3 This section does not apply to a receiver or manager acting under an appointment made by the court. Power for court to appoint official receiver. 32 Where application is made to the court to appoint a receiver on behalf of the debenture holders or other creditors of a company which is being wound up by the court, the official receiver may be appointed. Receivers and managers appointed out of court Time from which appointment is effective. 33 1 The appointment of a person as a receiver or manager of a company’s property under powers contained in an instrument— a is of no effect unless it is accepted by that person before the end of the business day next following that on which the instrument of appointment is received by him or on his behalf, and b subject to this, is deemed to be made at the time at which the instrument of appointment is so received. 2 This section applies to the appointment of two or more persons as joint receivers or managers of a company’s property under powers contained in an instrument, subject to such modifications as may be prescribed by the rules. Liability for invalid appointment. 34 Where the appointment of a person as the receiver or manager of a company’s property under powers contained in an instrument is discovered to be invalid (whether by virtue of the invalidity of the instrument or otherwise), the court may order the person by whom or on whose behalf the appointment was made to indemnify the person appointed against any liability which arises solely by reason of the invalidity of the appointment. Application to court for directions. 35 1 A receiver or manager of the property of a company appointed under powers contained in an instrument, or the persons by whom or on whose behalf a receiver or manager has been so appointed, may apply to the court for directions in relation to any particular matter arising in connection with the performance of the functions of the receiver or manager. 2 On such an application, the court may give such directions, or may make such order declaring the rights of persons before the court or otherwise, as it thinks just. Court’s power to fix remuneration. 36 1 The court may, on an application made by the liquidator of a company, by order fix the amount to be paid by way of remuneration to a person who, under powers contained in an instrument, has been appointed receiver or manager of the company’s property. 2 The court’s power under subsection (1), where no previous order has been made with respect thereto under the subsection— a extends to fixing the remuneration for any period before the making of the order or the application for it, b is exercisable notwithstanding that the receiver or manager has died or ceased to act before the making of the order or the application, and c where the receiver or manager has been paid or has retained for his remuneration for any period before the making of the order any amount in excess of that so fixed for that period, extends to requiring him or his personal representatives to account for the excess or such part of it as may be specified in the order. But the power conferred by pararaph (c) shall not be exercised as respects any period before the making of the application for the order under this section, unless in the court’s opinion there are special circumstances making it proper for the power to be exercised. 3 The court may from time to time on an application made either by the liquidator or by the receiver or manager, vary or amend an order made under subsection (1). Liability for contracts, etc. 37 1 A receiver or manager appointed under powers contained in an instrument (other than an administrative receiver) is, to the same extent as if he had been appointed by order of the court— a personally liable on any contract entered into by him in the performance of his functions (except in so far as the contract otherwise provides) and on any contract of employment adopted by him in the performance of those functions, and b entitled in respect of that liability to indemnity out of the assets. 2 For the purposes of subsection (1)(a), the receiver or manager is not to be taken to have adopted a contract of employment by reason of anything done or omitted to be done with 14 days after his appointment. 3 Subsection (1) does not limit any right to indemnity which the receiver or manager would have apart from it, nor limit his liability on contracts entered into without authority, nor confer any right to indemnity in respect of that liability. 4 Where at any time the receiver or manager so appointed vacates office— a his remuneration and any expenses properly incurred by him, and b any indemnity to which he is entitled out of the assets of the company, shall be charged on and paid out of any property of the company which is in his custody or under his control at that time in priority to any charge or other security held by the person by or on whose behalf he was appointed. Receivership accounts to be delivered to registrar. 38 1 Except in the case of an adminstrative receiver, every receiver or manager of a company’s property who has been appointed under powers contained in an instrument shall deliver to the registrar of companies for registration the requisite accounts of his receipts and payments. 2 The accounts shall be delivered within one month (or such longer period as the registrar may allow) after the expiration of 12 months from the date of his appointment and of every subsequent period of 6 months, and also within one month after he ceases to act as receiver or manager. 3 The requisite accounts shall be an abstract in the prescribed form showing— a receipts and payments during the relevant period of 12 or 6 months, or b where the receiver or manager ceases to act, receipts and payments during the period from the end of the period of 12 or 6 months to which the last preceding abstract related (or, if no preceding abstract has been delivered under this section, from the date of his appointment) up to the date of his so ceasing, and the aggregate amount of receipts and payments during all preceding periods since his appointment. 4 In this section “ prescribed ” means prescribed by regulations made by statutory instrument by the Secretary of State. 5 A receiver or manager who makes default in complying with this section is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Provisions applicable to every receivership Notification that receiver or manager appointed. 39 1 Where a receiver or manager of the property of a company has been appointed— a every invoice, order for goods or services, business letter or order form (whether in hard copy, electronic or any other form) issued by or on behalf of the company or the receiver or manager or the liquidator of the company; and b all the company's websites, must contain a statement that a receiver or manager has been appointed. 2 If default is made in complying with this section, the company and any of the following persons, who knowingly and wilfully authorises or permits the default, namely, any officer of the company, any liquidator of the company and any receiver or manager, is liable to a fine. Payment of debts out of assets subject to floating charge. 40 1 The following applies in the case of a company, where a receiver is appointed on behalf of the holders of any debentures of the company secured by a charge which, as created, was a floating charge. 2 If the company is not at the time in course of being wound up, its preferential debts (within the meaning given to that expression by section 386 in Part XII) shall be paid out of the assets coming to the hands of the receiver in priority to any claims for principal or interest in respect of the debentures. 3 Payments made under this section shall be recouped, as far as may be, out of the assets of the company available for payment of general creditors. Enforcement of duty to make returns. 41 1 If a receiver or manager of a company’s property— a having made default in filing, delivering or making any return, account or other document, or in giving any notice, which a receiver or manager is by law required to file, deliver, make or give, fails to make good the default within 14 days after the service on him of a notice requiring him to do so, or b having been appointed under powers contained in an instrument, has, after being required at any time by the liquidator of the company to do so, failed to render proper accounts of his receipts and payments and to vouch them and pay over to the liquidator the amount properly payable to him, the court may, on an application made for the purpose, make an order directing the receiver or manager (as the case may be) to make good the default within such time as may be specified in the order. 2 In the case of the default mentioned in subsection (1)(a), application to the court may be made by any member or creditor of the company or by the registrar of companies; and in the case of the default mentioned in subsection (1)(b), the application shall be made by the liquidator. In either case the court’s order may provide that all costs of and incidental to the application shall be borne by the receiver or manager, as the case may be. 3 Nothing in this section prejudices the operation of any enactment imposing penalties on receivers in respect of any such default as is mentioned in subsection (1). Administrative receivers: general General powers. 42 1 The powers conferred on the administrative receiver of a company by the debentures by virtue of which he was appointed are deemed to include (except in so far as they are inconsistent with any of the provisions of those debentures) the powers specified in Schedule 1 to this Act. 2 In the application of Schedule 1 to the administrative receiver of a company— a the words “he” and “him” refer to the administrative receiver, and b references to the property of the company are to the property of which he is or, but for the appointment of some other person as the receiver of part of the company’s property, would be the receiver or manager. 3 A person dealing with the administrative receiver in good faith and for value is not concerned to inquire whether the receiver is acting within his powers. Power to dispose of charged property, etc. 43 1 Where, on an application by the administrative receiver, the court is satisfied that the disposal (with or without other assets) of any relevant property which is subject to a security would be likely to promote a more advantageous realisation of the company’s assets than would otherwise be effected, the court may by order authorise the administrative receiver to dispose of the property as if it were not subject to the security. 2 Subsection (1) does not apply in the case of any security held by the person by or on whose behalf the administrative receiver was appointed, or of any security to which a security so held has priority. 3 It shall be a condition of an order under this section that— a the net proceeds of the disposal, and b where those proceeds are less than such amount as may be determined by the court to be the net amount which would be realised on a sale of the property in the open market by a willing vendor, such sums as may be required to make good the deficiency, shall be applied towards discharging the sums secured by the security. 4 Where a condition imposed in pursuance of subsection (3) relates to two or more securities, that condition shall require the net proceeds of the disposal and, where paragraph (b) of that subsection applies, the sums mentioned in that paragraph to be applied towards discharging the sums secured by those securities in the order of their priorities. 5 A copy of an order under this section shall, within 14 days of the making of the order, be sent by the administrative receiver to the registrar of companies. 6 If the administrative receiver without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (5), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 7 In this section “ relevant property ”, in relation to the administrative receiver, means the property of which he is or, but for the appointment of some other person as the receiver of part of the company’s property, would be the receiver or manager. Agency and liability for contracts. 44 1 The administrative receiver of a company— a is deemed to be the company’s agent, unless and until the company goes into liquidation; b is personally liable on any contract entered into by him in the carrying out of his functions (except in so far as the contract otherwise provides) and , to the extent of any qualifying liability, on any contract of employment adopted by him in the carrying out of those functions; and c is entitled in respect of that liability to an indemnity out of the assets of the company. 2 For the purposes of subsection (1)(b) the administrative receiver is not to be taken to have adopted a contract of employment by reason of anything done or omitted to be done within 14 days after his appointment. 2A For the purposes of subsection (1)(b), a liability under a contract of employment is a qualifying liability if— a it is a liability to pay a sum by way of wages or salary or contribution to an occupational pension scheme, b it is incurred while the administrative receiver is in office, and c it is in respect of services rendered wholly or partly after the adoption of the contract. 2B Where a sum payable in respect of a liability which is a qualifying liability for the purposes of subsection (1)(b) is payable in respect of services rendered partly before and partly after the adoption of the contract, liability under subsection (1)(b) shall only extend to so much of the sum as is payable in respect of services rendered after the adoption of the contract. 2C For the purposes of subsections (2A) and (2B)— a wages or salary payable in respect of a period of holiday or absence from work through sickness or other good cause are deemed to be wages or (as the case may be) salary in respect of services rendered in that period, and b a sum payable in lieu of holiday is deemed to be wages or (as the case may be) salary in respect of services rendered in the period by reference to which the holiday entitlement arose. 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 This section does not limit any right to indemnity which the administrative receiver would have apart from it, nor limit his liability on contracts entered into or adopted without authority, nor confer any right to indemnity in respect of that liability. Vacation of office. 45 1 An administrative receiver of a company may at any time be removed from office by order of the court (but not otherwise) and may resign his office by giving notice of his resignation in the prescribed manner to such persons as may be prescribed. 2 An administrative receiver shall vacate office if he ceases to be qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company. 3 Where at any time an administrative receiver vacates office— a his remuneration and any expenses properly incurred by him, and b any indemnity to which he is entitled out of the assets of the company, shall be charged on and paid out of any property of the company which is in his custody or under his control at that time in priority to any security held by the person by or on whose behalf he was appointed. 4 Where an administrative receiver vacates office otherwise than by death, he shall, within 14 days after his vacation of office, send a notice to that effect to the registrar of companies. 5 If an administrative receiver without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (4), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine . Administrative receivers: ascertainment and investigation of company’s affairs Information to be given by administrative receiver. 46 1 Where an administrative receiver is appointed, he shall— a forthwith send to the company and publish in the prescribed manner a notice of his appointment, and b within 28 days after his appointment, unless the court otherwise directs, send such a notice to all the creditors of the company (so far as he is aware of their addresses). 2 This section and the next do not apply in relation to the appointment of an administrative receiver to act— a with an existing administrative receiver, or b in place of an administrative receiver dying or ceasing to act, except that, where they apply to an administrative receiver who dies or ceases to act before they have been fully complied with, the references in this section and the next to the administrative receiver include (subject to the next subsection) his successor and any continuing administrative receiver. 3 If the company is being wound up, this section and the next apply notwithstanding that the administrative receiver and the liquidator are the same person, but with any necessary modifications arising from that fact. 4 If the administrative receiver without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Statement of affairs to be submitted. 47 1 Where an administrative receiver is appointed, he shall forthwith require some or all of the persons mentioned below to make out and submit to him a statement in the prescribed form as to the affairs of the company. 2 A statement submitted under this section shall be verified by a statement of truth by the persons required to submit it and shall show— a particulars of the company’s assets, debts and liabilities; b the names and addresses of its creditors; c the securities held by them respectively; d the dates when the securities were respectively given; and e such further or other information as may be prescribed. 3 The persons referred to in subsection (1) are— a those who are or have been officers of the company; b those who have taken part in the company’s formation at any time within one year before the date of the appointment of the administrative receiver; c those who are in the company’s employment, or have been in its employment within that year, and are in the administrative receiver’s opinion capable of giving the information required; d those who are or have been within that year officers of or in the employment of a company which is, or within that year was, an officer of the company. In this subsection “ employment ” includes employment under a contract for services. 4 Where any persons are required under this section to submit a statement of affairs to the administrative receiver, they shall do so (subject to the next subsection) before the end of the period of 21 days beginning with the day after that on which the prescribed notice of the requirement is given to them by the administrative receiver. 5 The administrative receiver, if he thinks fit, may— a at any time release a person from an obligation imposed on him under subsection (1) or (2), or b either when giving notice under subsection (4) or subsequently, extend the period so mentioned; and where the administrative receiver has refused to exercise a power conferred by this subsection, the court, if it thinks fit, may exercise it. 6 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed under this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Report by administrative receiver. 48 1 Where an administrative receiver is appointed, he shall, within 3 months (or such longer period as the court may allow) after his appointment, send to the registrar of companies, to any trustees for secured creditors of the company and (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all such creditors , other than opted-out creditors, a report as to the following matters, namely— a the events leading up to his appointment, so far as he is aware of them; b the disposal or proposed disposal by him of any property of the company and the carrying on or proposed carrying on by him of any business of the company; c the amounts of principal and interest payable to the debenture holders by whom or on whose behalf he was appointed and the amounts payable to preferential creditors; and d the amount (if any) likely to be available for the payment of other creditors. 2 The administrative receiver shall also, within 3 months (or such longer period as the court may allow) after his appointment, either— a send a copy of the report (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all unsecured creditors of the company , other than opted-out creditors, or b publish in the prescribed manner a notice stating an address to which unsecured creditors of the company should write for copies of the report to be sent to them free of charge, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Where the company has gone or goes into liquidation, the administrative receiver— a shall, within 7 days after his compliance with subsection (1) or, if later, the nomination or appointment of the liquidator, send a copy of the report to the liquidator, and b where he does so within the time limited for compliance with subsection (2), is not required to comply with that subsection. 5 A report under this section shall include a summary of the statement of affairs made out and submitted to the administrative receiver under section 47 and of his comments (if any) upon it. 6 Nothing in this section is to be taken as requiring any such report to include any information the disclosure of which would seriously prejudice the carrying out by the administrative receiver of his functions. 7 Section 46(2) applies for the purposes of this section also. 8 If the administrative receiver without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Committee of creditors. 49 1 Where an administrative receiver has sent or published a report as mentioned in section 48(2) the company's unsecured creditors may, in accordance with the rules , establish a committee (“the creditors’ committee”) to exercise the functions conferred on it by or under this Act. 2 If such a committee is established, the committee may, on giving not less than 7 days’ notice, require the administrative receiver to attend before it at any reasonable time and furnish it with such information relating to the carrying out by him of his functions as it may reasonably require. Chapter II Receivers (Scotland) Extent of this Chapter. 50 This Chapter extends to Scotland only. Power to appoint receiver. 51 1 It is competent under the law of Scotland for the holder of a floating charge over all or any part of the property (including uncalled capital), which may from time to time be comprised in the property and undertaking of an incorporated company (whether a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 or not) a which the Court of Session has jurisdiction to wind up; or b where paragraph (a) does not apply, in respect of which a court of a member state ... has under the EU Regulation jurisdiction to open insolvency proceedings, to appoint a receiver of such part of the property of the company as is subject to the charge. 2 It is competent under the law of Scotland for the court, on the application of the holder of such a floating charge, to appoint a receiver of such part of the property of the company as is subject to the charge. 2ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A Subsections (1) and (2) are subject to section 72A. 3 The following are disqualified from being appointed as receiver— a a body corporate; b an undischarged bankrupt; and ba a person subject to a bankruptcy restrictions order; c a firm according to the law of Scotland. 4 A body corporate or a firm according to the law of Scotland which acts as a receiver is liable to a fine. 5 An undischarged bankrupt or a person subject to a bankruptcy restrictions order who so acts is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. 6 In this section, “ receiver ” includes joint receivers ; and “ bankruptcy restrictions order ” means— a bankruptcy restrictions order made under section 155 of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 ; ... a bankruptcy restrictions order made under paragraph 1 of Schedule 4A to this Act; or a bankruptcy restrictions undertaking entered into under paragraph 7 of that Schedule. “the EU Regulation” is Regulation (EU) 2015/848 of the European Parliament and of the Council on insolvency proceedings as that Regulation has effect in the law of the European Union ; “ court ” is to be construed in accordance with Article 2(6) of the EU Regulation; “ insolvency proceedings ” is to be construed in accordance with Article 2(4) of the EU Regulation. Circumstances justifying appointment. 52 1 A receiver may be appointed under section 51(1) by the holder of the floating charge on the occurrence of any event which, by the provisions of the instrument creating the charge, entitles the holder of the charge to make that appointment and, in so far as not otherwise provided for by the instrument, on the occurrence of any of the following events, namely— a the expiry of a period of 21 days after the making of a demand for payment of the whole or any part of the principal sum secured by the charge, without payment having been made; b the expiry of a period of 2 months during the whole of which interest due and payable under the charge has been in arrears; c the making of an order or the passing of a resolution to wind up the company; d the appointment of a receiver by virtue of any other floating charge created by the company. 2 A receiver may be appointed by the court under section 51(2) on the occurrence of any event which, by the provisions of the instrument creating the floating charge, entitles the holder of the charge to make that appointment and, in so far as not otherwise provided for by the instrument, on the occurrence of any of the following events, namely— a where the court, on the application of the holder of the charge, pronounces itself satisfied that the position of the holder of the charge is likely to be prejudiced if no such appointment is made; b any of the events referred to in paragraphs (a) to (c) of subsection (1). Mode of appointment by holder of charge. 53 1 The appointment of a receiver by the holder of the floating charge under section 51(1) shall be by means of an instrument subscribed in accordance with the Requirements of Writing (Scotland) Act 1995 (“the instrument of appointment”), a copy (certified in the prescribed manner to be a correct copy) whereof shall be delivered by or on behalf of the person making the appointment to the registrar of companies for registration within 7 days of its execution and shall be accompanied by a notice in the prescribed form. 2 If any person without reasonable excuse makes default in complying with the requirements of subsection (1), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 If the receiver is to be appointed by the holders of a series of secured debentures, the instrument of appointment may be executed on behalf of the holders of the floating charge by any person authorised by resolution of the debenture-holders to execute the instrument. 5 On receipt of the certified copy of the instrument of appointment in accordance with subsection (1), the registrar shall, on payment of the prescribed fee, enter the particulars of the appointment in the register . 6 The appointment of a person as a receiver by an instrument of appointment in accordance with subsection (1)— a is of no effect unless it is accepted by that person before the end of the business day next following that on which the instrument of appointment is received by him or on his behalf, and b subject to paragraph (a), is deemed to be made on the day on and at the time at which the instrument of appointment is so received, as evidenced by a written docquet by that person or on his behalf; and this subsection applies to the appointment of joint receivers subject to such modifications as may be prescribed. 7 On the appointment of a receiver under this section, the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed attaches to the property then subject to the charge; and such attachment has effect as if the charge was a fixed security over the property to which it has attached. Appointment by court. 54 1 Application for the appointment of a receiver by the court under section 51(2) shall be by petition to the court, which shall be served on the company. 2 On such an application, the court shall, if it thinks fit, issue an interlocutor making the appointment of the receiver. 3 A copy (certified by the clerk of the court to be a correct copy) of the court’s interlocutor making the appointment shall be delivered by or on behalf of the petitioner to the registrar of companies for registration, accompanied by a notice in the prescribed form, within 7 days of the date of the interlocutor or much longer period as the court may allow. If any person without reasonable excuse makes default in complying with the requirements of this subsection, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine . 4 On receipt of the certified copy interlocutor in accordance with subsection (3), the registrar shall, on payment of the prescribed fee, enter the particulars of the appointment in the register . 5 The receiver is to be regarded as having been appointed on the date of his being appointed by the court. 6 On the appointment of a receiver under this section, the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed attaches to the property then subject to the charge; and such attachment has effect as if the charge were a fixed security over the property to which it has attached. 7 In making rules of court for the purposes of this section, the Court of Session shall have regard to the need for special provision for cases which appear to the court to require to be dealt with as a matter of urgency. Powers of receiver. 55 1 Subject to the next subsection, a receiver has in relation to such part of the property of the company as is attached by the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed, the powers, if any, given to him by the instrument creating that charge. 2 In addition, the receiver has under this Chapter the powers as respects that property (in so far as these are not inconsistent with any provision contained in that instrument) which are specified in Schedule 2 to this Act. 3 Subsections (1) and (2) apply— a subject to the rights of any person who has effectually executed diligence on all or any part of the property of the company prior to the appointment of the receiver, and b subject to the rights of any person who holds over all or any part of the property of the company a fixed security or floating charge having priority, over, or ranking pari passu with, the floating charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed. 4 A person dealing with a receiver in good faith and for value is not concerned to enquire whether the receiver is acting within his powers. Precedence among receivers. 56 1 Where there are two or more floating charges subsisting over all or any part of the property of the company, a receiver may be appointed under this Chapter by virtue of each such charge; but a receiver appointed by, or on the application of, the holder of a floating charge having priority of ranking over any other floating charge by virtue of which a receiver has been appointed has the powers given to a receiver by section 55 and Schedule 2 to the exclusion of any other receiver. 2 Where two or more floating charges rank with one another equally, and two or more receivers have been appointed by virtue of such charges, the receivers so appointed are deemed to have been appointed as joint receivers. 3 Receivers appointed, or deemed to have been appointed, as joint receivers shall act jointly unless the instrument of appointment or respective instruments of appointment otherwise provide. 4 Subject to subsection (5) below, the powers of a receiver appointed by, or on the application of, the holder of a floating charge are suspended by, and as from the date of, the appointment of a receiver by, or on the application of, the holder of a floating charge having priority of ranking over that charge to such extent as may be necessary to enable the receiver second mentioned to exercise his powers under section 55 and Schedule 2; and any powers so suspended take effect again when the floating charge having priority of ranking ceases to attach to the property then subject to the charge, whether such cessation is by virtue of section 62(6) or otherwise. 5 The suspension of the powers of a receiver under subsection (4) does not have the effect of requiring him to release any part of the property (including any letters or documents) of the company from his control until he receives from the receiver superseding him a valid indemnity (subject to the limit of the value of such part of the property of the company as is subject to the charge by virtue of which he was appointed) in respect of any expenses, charges and liabilities he may have incurred in the performance of his functions as receiver. 6 The suspension of the powers of a receiver under subsection (4) does not cause the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed to cease to attach to the property to which it attached by virtue of section 53(7) or 54(6). 7 Nothing in this section prevents the same receiver being appointed by virtue of two or more floating charges. Agency and liability of receiver for contracts. 57 1 A receiver is deemed to be the agent of the company in relation to such property of the company as is attached by the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed. 1A Without prejudice to subsection (1), a receiver is deemed to be the agent of the company in relation to any contract of employment adopted by him in the carrying out of his functions. 2 A receiver (including a receiver whose powers are subsequently suspended under section 56) is personally liable on any contract entered into by him in the performance of his functions, except in so far as the contract otherwise provides, and , to the extent of any qualifying liability, on any contract of employment adopted by him in the carrying out of those functions. 2A For the purposes of subsection (2), a liability under a contract of employment is a qualifying liability if— a it is a liability to pay a sum by way of wages or salary or contribution to an occupational pension scheme, b it is incurred while the receiver is in office, and c it is in respect of services rendered wholly or partly after the adoption of the contract. 2B Where a sum payable in respect of a liability which is a qualifying liability for the purposes of subsection (2) is payable in respect of services rendered partly before and partly after the adoption of the contract, liability under that subsection shall only extend to so much of the sum as is payable in respect of services rendered after the adoption of the contract. 2C For the purposes of subsections (2A) and (2B)— a wages or salary payable in respect of a period of holiday or absence from work through sickness or other good cause are deemed to be wages or (as the case may be) salary in respect of services rendered in that period, and b a sum payable in lieu of holiday is deemed to be wages or (as the case may be) salary in respect of services rendered in the period by reference to which the holiday entitlement arose. 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A receiver who is personally liable by virtue of subsection (2) is entitled to be indemnified out of the property in respect of which he was appointed. 4 Any contract entered into by or on behalf of the company prior to the appointment of a receiver continues in force (subject to its terms) notwithstanding that appointment, but the receiver does not by virtue only of his appointment incur any personal liability on any such contract. 5 For the purposes of subsection (2), a receiver is not to be taken to have adopted a contract of employment by reason of anything done or omitted to be done within 14 days after his appointment. 6 This section does not limit any right to indemnity which the receiver would have apart from it, nor limit his liability on contracts entered into or adopted without authority, nor confer any right to indemnity in respect of that liability. 7 Any contract entered into by a receiver in the performance of his functions continues in force (subject to its terms) although the powers of the receiver are subsequently suspended under section 56. Remuneration of receiver. 58 1 The remuneration to be paid to a receiver is to be determined by agreement between the receiver and the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed. 2 Where the remuneration to be paid to the receiver has not been determined under subsection (1), or where it has been so determined but is disputed by any of the persons mentioned in paragraphs (a) to (d) below, it may be fixed instead by the Auditor of the Court of Session on application made to him by— a the receiver; b the holder of any floating charge or fixed security over all or any part of the property of the company; c the company; or d the liquidator of the company. 3 Where the receiver has been paid or has retained for his remuneration for any period before the remuneration has been fixed by the Auditor of the Court of Session under subsection (2) any amount in excess of the remuneration so fixed for that period, the receiver or his personal representatives shall account for the excess. Priority of debts. 59 1 Where a receiver is appointed and the company is not at the time of the appointment in course of being wound up, the debts which fall under subsection (2) of this section shall be paid out of any assets coming to the hands of the receiver in priority to any claim for principal or interest by the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed. 2 Debts falling under this subsection are preferential debts (within the meaning given by section 386 in Part XII) which, by the end of a period of 6 months after advertisement by the receiver for claims in the Edinburgh Gazette and in a newspaper circulating in the district where the company carries on business either— i have been intimated to him, or ii have become known to him. 3 Any payments made under this section shall be recouped as far as may be out of the assets of the company available for payment of ordinary creditors. Distribution of moneys. 60 1 Subject to the next section, and to the rights of any of the following categories of persons (which rights shall, except to the extent otherwise provided in any instrument, have the following order of priority), namely— a the holder of any fixed security which is over property subject to the floating charge and which ranks prior to, or pari passu with, the floating charge; b all persons who have effectually executed diligence on any part of the property of the company which is subject to the charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed; c creditors in respect of all liabilities, charges and expenses incurred by or on behalf of the receiver; d the receiver in respect of his liabilities, expenses and remuneration, and any indemnity to which he is entitled out of the property of the company; and e the preferential creditors entitled to payment under section 59, the receiver shall pay moneys received by him to the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed in or towards satisfaction of the debt secured by the floating charge. 2 Any balance of moneys remaining after the provisions of subsection (1) and section 61 below have been satisfied shall be paid in accordance with their respective rights and interests to the following persons, as the case may require— a any other receiver; b the holder of a fixed security which is over property subject to the floating charge; c the company or its liquidator, as the case may be. 3 Where any question arises as to the person entitled to a payment under this section, or where a receipt or a discharge of a security cannot be obtained in respect of any such payment, the receiver shall consign the amount of such payment in any joint stock bank of issue in Scotland in name of the Accountant of Court for behoof of the person or persons entitled thereto. Disposal of interest in property. 61 1 Where the receiver sells or disposes, or is desirous of selling or disposing, or any property or interest in property of the company which is subject to the floating charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed and which is— a subject to any security or interest of, or burden or encumbrance in favour of, a creditor the ranking of which is prior to, or pari passu with, or postponed to the floating charge, or b property or an interest in property affected or attached by effectual diligence executed by any person, and the receiver is unable to obtain the consent of such creditor or, as the case may be, such person to such a sale or disposal, the receiver may apply to the court for authority to sell or dispose of the property or interest in property free of such security, interest, burden, encumbrance or diligence. 1A For the purposes of subsection (1) above, an inhibition which takes effect after the creation of the floating charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed is not an effectual diligence. 2 Subject to the next subsection, on such an application the court may, if it thinks fit, authorise the sale or disposal of the property or interest in question free of such security, interest, burden, encumbrance or diligence, and such authorisation may be on such terms or conditions as the court thinks fit. 3 In the case of an application where a fixed security over the property or interest in question which ranks prior to the floating charge has not been met or provided for in full, the court shall not authorise the sale or disposal of the property or interest in question unless it is satisfied that the sale or disposal would be like to provide a more advantageous realisation of the company’s assets than would otherwise be effected. 4 It shall be a condition of an authorisation to which subsection (3) applies that— a the net proceeds of the disposal, and b where those proceeds are less than such amount as may be determined by the court to be the net amount which would be realised on a sale of the property or interest in the open market by a willing seller, such sums as may be required to make good the deficiency, shall be applied towards discharging the sums secured by the fixed security. 5 Where a condition imposed in pursuance of subsection (4) relates to two or more such fixed securities, that condition shall require the net proceeds of the disposal and, where paragraph (b) of that subsection applies, the sums mentioned in that paragraph to be applied towards discharging the sums secured by those fixed securities in the order of their priorities. 6 A copy of an authorisation under subsection (2) . . . shall, within 14 days of the granting of the authorisation, be sent by the receiver to the registrar of companies. 7 If the receiver without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsection (6), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 8 Where any sale or disposal is effected in accordance with the authorisation of the court under subsection (2), the receiver shall grant to the purchaser or disponee an appropriate document of transfer or conveyance of the property or interest in question, and that document has the effect, or, where recording, intimation or registration of that document is a legal requirement for completion of title to the property or interest, then that recording, intimation or registration (as the case may be) has the effect, of— a disencumbering the property or interest of the security, interest, burden or encumbrance affecting it, and b freeing the property or interest from the diligence executed upon it. 9 Nothing in this section prejudices the right of any creditor of the company to rank for his debt in the winding up of the company. Cessation of appointment of receiver. 62 1 A receiver may be removed from office by the court under subsection (3) below and may resign his office by giving notice of his resignation in the prescribed manner to such persons as may be prescribed. 2 A receiver shall vacate office if he ceases to be qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company. 3 Subject to the next subsection, a receiver may, on application to the court by the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed, be removed by the court on cause shown. 4 Where at any time a receiver vacates office— a his remuneration and any expenses properly incurred by him, and b any indemnity to which he is entitled out of the property of the company, shall be paid out of the property of the company which is subject to the floating charge and shall have priority as provided for in section 60(1). 5 When a receiver ceases to act as such otherwise than by death he shall, and, when a receiver is removed by the court, the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed shall, within 14 days of the cessation or removal (as the case may be) given the registrar of companies notice to that effect, and the registrar shall enter the notice in the register . If the receiver or the holder of the floating charge (as the case may require) makes default in complying with the requirements of this subsection, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 6 If by the expiry of a period of one month following upon the removal of the receiver or his ceasing to act as such no other receiver has been appointed, the floating charge by virtue of which the receiver was appointed— a thereupon ceases to attach to the property then subject to the charge, and b again subsists as a floating charge; and for the purposes of calculating the period of one month under this subsection no account shall be taken of any period during which the company is in administration, under Part II of this Act . . . . Powers of court. 63 1 The court on the application of— a the holder of a floating charge by virtue of which a receiver was appointed, or b a receiver appointed under section 51, may give directions to the receiver in respect of any matter arising in connection with the performance by him of his functions. 2 Where the appointment of a person as a receiver by the holder of a floating charge is discovered to be invalid (whether by virtue of the invalidity of the instrument or otherwise), the court may order the holder of the floating charge to indemnify the person appointed against any liability which arises solely by reason of the invalidity of the appointment. Notification that receiver appointed. 64 1 Where a receiver has been appointed— a every invoice, order for goods or services, business letter or order form (whether in hard copy, electronic or any other form) issued by or on behalf of the company or the receiver or the liquidator of the company; and b all the company's websites, must contain a statement that a receiver has been appointed. 2 If default is made in complying with the requirements of this section, the company and any of the following persons who knowingly and wilfully authorises or permits the default, namely any officer of the company, any liquidator of the company and any receiver, is liable to a fine. Information to be given by receiver. 65 1 Where a receiver is appointed, he shall— a forthwith send to the company and publish notice of his appointment, and b within 28 days after his appointment, unless the court otherwise directs, send such notice to all the creditors of the company (so far as he is aware of their addresses). 2 This section and the next do not apply in relation to the appointment of a receiver to act— a with an existing receiver, or b in place of a receiver who has died or ceased to act, except that, where they apply to a receiver who dies or ceases to act before they have been fully complied with, the references in this section and the next to the receiver include (subject to subsection (3) of this section) his successor and any continuing receiver. 3 If the company is being wound up, this section and the next apply notwithstanding that the receiver and the liquidator are the same person, but with any necessary modifications arising from that fact. 4 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Company’s statement of affairs. 66 1 Where a receiver of a company is appointed, the receiver shall forthwith require some or all of the persons mentioned in subsection (3) below to make out and submit to him a statement in the prescribed form as to the affairs of the company. 2 A statement submitted under this section shall contain a statutory declaration by the persons required to submit it and shall show— a particulars of the company’s assets, debts and liabilities; b the names and addresses of its creditors; c the securities held by them respectively; d the dates when the securities were respectively given; and e such further or other information as may be prescribed. 3 The persons referred to in subsection (1) are— a those who are or have been officers of the company; b those who have taken part in the company’s formation at any time within one year before the date of the appointment of the receiver; c those who are in the company’s employment or have been in its employment within that year, and are in the receiver’s opinion capable of giving the information required; d those who are or have been within that year officers of or in the employment of a company which is, or within that year was, an officer of the company. In this subsection “ employment ” includes employment under a contract for services. 4 Where any persons are required under this section to submit a statement of affairs to the receiver they shall do so (subject to the next subsection) before the end of the period of 21 days beginning with the day after that on which the prescribed notice of the requirement is given to them by the receiver. 5 The receiver, if he thinks fit, may— a at any time release a person from an obligation imposed on him under subsection (1) or (2), or b either when giving the notice mentioned in subsection (4) or subsequently extend the period so mentioned, and where the receiver has refused to exercise a power conferred by this subsection, the court, if it thinks fit, may exercise it. 6 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed under this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention to a daily default fine. Report by receiver. 67 1 Where a receiver is appointed under section 51, he shall within 3 months (or such longer period as the court may allow) after his appointment, send to the registrar of companies, to the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed and to any trustees for secured creditors of the company and (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all such creditors , other than opted-out creditors, a report as to the following matters, namely— a the events leading up to his appointment, so far as he is aware of them; b the disposal or proposed disposal by him of any property of the company and the carrying on or proposed carrying on by him of any business of the company; c the amounts of principal and interest payable to the holder of the floating charge by virtue of which he was appointed and the amounts payable to preferential creditors; and d the amount (if any) likely to be available for the payment of other creditors. 2 The receiver shall also, within 3 months (or such longer period as the court may allow) after his appointment, either— a send a copy of the report (so far as he is aware of their addresses) to all unsecured creditors of the company , other than opted-out creditors , or b publish in the prescribed manner a notice stating an address to which unsecured creditors of the company should write for copies of the report to be sent to them free of charge, ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Where the company has gone or goes into liquidation, the receiver— a shall, within 7 days after his compliance with subsection (1) or, if later, the nomination or appointment of the liquidator, send a copy of the report to the liquidator, and b where he does so within the time limited for compliance with subsection (2), is not required to comply with that subsection. 5 A report under this section shall include a summary of the statement of affairs made out and submitted under section 66 and of his comments (if any) on it. 6 Nothing in this section shall be taken as requiring any such report to include any information the disclosure of which would seriously prejudice the carrying out by the receiver of his functions. 7 Section 65(2) applies for the purposes of this section also. 8 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 9 In this section “ secured creditor ”, in relation to a company, means a creditor of the company who holds in respect of his debt a security over property of the company, and “ unsecured creditor ” shall be construed accordingly. Committee of creditors 68 1 Where a receiver has sent or published a report as mentioned in section 67(2) the company's unsecured creditors may, in accordance with the rules , establish a committee (“ the creditors’ committee ”) to exercise the functions conferred on it by or under this Act. 2 If such a committee is established, the committee may on giving not less than 7 days’ notice require the receiver to attend before it at any reasonable time and furnish it with such information relating to the carrying out by him of his functions as it may reasonably require. Enforcement of receiver’s duty to make returns, etc. 69 1 If any receiver— a having made default in filing, delivering or making any return, account or other document, or in giving any notice, which a receiver is by law required to file, deliver, make or give, fails to make good the default within 14 days after the service on him of a notice requiring him to do so; or b has, after being required at any time by the liquidator of the company so to do, failed to render proper accounts of his receipts and payments and to vouch the same and to pay over to the liquidator the amount properly payable to him, the court may, on an application made for the purpose, make an order directing the receiver to make good the default within such time as may be specified in the order. 2 In the case of any such default as is mentioned in subsection (1)(a), an application for the purposes of this section may be made by any member or creditor of the company or by the registrar of companies; and, in the case of any such default as is mentioned in subsection (1)(b), the application shall be made by the liquidator; and, in either case, the order may provide that all expenses of and incidental to the application shall be borne by the receiver. 3 Nothing in this section prejudices the operation of any enactments imposing penalties on receivers in respect of any such default as is mentioned in subsection (1). Interpretation for Chapter II. 70 1 In this Chapter, unless the contrary intention appears, the following expressions have the following meanings respectively assigned to them— “ company ” means an incorporated company (whether or not a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 ) which the Court of Session has jurisdiction to wind up; “ fixed security ”, in relation to any property of a company, means any security, other than a floating charge or a charge having the nature of a floating charge, which on the winding up of the company in Scotland would be treated as an effective security over that property, and (without prejudice to that generality) includes a security over that property, being— a heritable security within the meaning of the Conveyancing and Feudal Reform (Scotland) Act 1970 ; or a statutory pledge within the meaning given by section 113 (1) of the Moveable Transactions (Scotland) Act 2023; “ instrument of appointment ” has the meaning given by section 53(1); “ prescribed ” means prescribed by regulations made under this Chapter by the Secretary of State; “prescribed fee” means the fee prescribed by regulations made under this Chapter by the Secretary of State; “ receiver ” means a receiver of such part of the property of the company as is subject to the floating charge by virtue of which he has been appointed under section 51; “ register ” means the register kept by the registrar of companies for the purposes of Chapter 2 of Part 25 of the Companies Act 2006 ; “ secured debenture ” means a bond, debenture, debenture stock or other security which, either itself or by reference to any other instrument, creates a floating charge over all or any part of the property of the company, but does not include a security which creates no charge other than a fixed security; and “ series of secured debentures ” means two or more secured debentures created as a series by the company in such a manner that the holders thereof are entitled pari passu to the benefit of the floating charge. 2 Where a floating charge, secured debenture or series of secured debentures has been created by the company, then, except where the context otherwise requires, any reference in this Chapter to the holder of the floating charge shall— a where the floating charge, secured debenture or series of secured debentures provides for a receiver to be appointed by any person or body, be construed as a reference to that person or body; b where, in the case of a series of secured debentures, no such provision has been made therein but— i there are trustees acting for the debenture-holders under and in accordance with a trust deed, be construed as a reference to those trustees, and ii where no such trustees are acting, be construed as a reference to— aa a majority in nominal value of those present or represented by proxy and voting at a meeting of debenture-holders at which the holders of at least one-third in nominal value of the outstanding debentures of the series are present or so represented, or bb where no such meeting is held, the holders of at least one-half in nominal value of the outstanding debentures of the series. 3 Any reference in this Chapter to a floating charge, secured debenture, series of secured debentures or instrument creating a charge includes, except where the context otherwise requires, a reference to that floating charge, debenture, series of debentures or instrument as varied by any instrument. 4 References in this Chapter to the instrument by which a floating charge was created are, in the case of a floating charge created by words in a bond or other written acknowledgement, references to the bond or, as the case may be, the other written acknowledgement. Prescription of forms, etc.; regulations. 71 1 The notice referred to in section 62(5), and the notice referred to in section 65(1)(a) shall be in such form as may be prescribed. 2 Any power conferred by this Chapter on the Secretary of State to make regulations is exercisable by statutory instrument; and a statutory instrument made in the exercise of the power so conferred to prescribe a fee is subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Chapter III Receivers’ Powers in Great Britain as a Whole Cross-border operation of receivership provisions. 72 1 A receiver appointed under the law of either part of Great Britain in respect of the whole or any part of any property or undertaking of a company and in consequence of the company having created a charge which, as created, was a floating charge may exercise his powers in the other part of Great Britain so far as their exercise is not inconsistent with the law applicable there. 2 In subsection (1) “ receiver ” includes a manager and a person who is appointed both receiver and manager. CHAPTER IV PROHIBITION OF APPOINTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE RECEIVER Floating charge holder not to appoint administrative receiver 72A 1 The holder of a qualifying floating charge in respect of a company’s property may not appoint an administrative receiver of the company. 2 In Scotland, the holder of a qualifying floating charge in respect of a company’s property may not appoint or apply to the court for the appointment of a receiver who on appointment would be an administrative receiver of property of the company. 3 In subsections (1) and (2)— “ holder of a qualifying floating charge in respect of a company’s property ” has the same meaning as in paragraph 14 of Schedule B1 to this Act, and “ administrative receiver ” has the meaning given by section 251. 4 This section applies— a to a floating charge created on or after a date appointed by the Secretary of State by order made by statutory instrument, and b in spite of any provision of an agreement or instrument which purports to empower a person to appoint an administrative receiver (by whatever name). 5 An order under subsection (4)(a) may— a make provision which applies generally or only for a specified purpose; b make different provision for different purposes; c make transitional provision. 6 This section is subject to the exceptions specified in sections 72B to 72GA . First exception: capital market 72B 1 Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver in pursuance of an agreement which is or forms part of a capital market arrangement if— a a party incurs or, when the agreement was entered into was expected to incur, a debt of at least £50 million under the arrangement, and b the arrangement involves the issue of a capital market investment. 2 In subsection (1)— “ capital market arrangement ” means an arrangement of a kind described in paragraph 1 of Schedule 2A, and “ capital market investment ” means an investment of a kind described in paragraph 2 or 3 of that Schedule. Second exception: public-private partnership 72C 1 Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of a project company of a project which— a is a public-private partnership project, and b includes step-in rights. 2 In this section “ public-private partnership project ” means a project— a the resources for which are provided partly by one or more public bodies and partly by one or more private persons, or b which is designed wholly or mainly for the purpose of assisting a public body to discharge a function. 3 In this section— “ step-in rights ” has the meaning given by paragraph 6 of Schedule 2A, and “ project company ” has the meaning given by paragraph 7 of that Schedule. Third exception: utilities 72D 1 Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of a project company of a project which— a is a utility project, and b includes step-in rights. 2 In this section— a “ utility project ” means a project designed wholly or mainly for the purpose of a regulated business, b “ regulated business ” means a business of a kind listed in paragraph 10 of Schedule 2A, c “ step-in rights ” has the meaning given by paragraph 6 of that Schedule, and d “ project company ” has the meaning given by paragraph 7 of that Schedule. Exception in respect of urban regeneration projects 72DA 1 Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of a project company of a project which— a is designed wholly or mainly to develop land which at the commencement of the project is wholly or partly in a designated disadvantaged area outside Northern Ireland, and b includes step-in rights. 2 In subsection (1) “ develop ” means to carry out— a building operations, b any operation for the removal of substances or waste from land and the levelling of the surface of the land, or c engineering operations in connection with the activities mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b). 3 In this section— “ building ” includes any structure or erection, and any part of a building as so defined, but does not include plant and machinery comprised in a building, “ building operations ” includes— demolition of buildings, filling in of trenches, rebuilding, structural alterations of, or additions to, buildings and other operations normally undertaken by a person carrying on business as a builder, “ designated disadvantaged area ” means an area designated as a disadvantaged area under section 92 of the Finance Act 2001, “ engineering operations ” includes the formation and laying out of means of access to highways, “ project company ” has the meaning given by paragraph 7 of Schedule 2A, “ step-in rights ” has the meaning given by paragraph 6 of that Schedule, “ substance ” means any natural or artificial substance whether in solid or liquid form or in the form of a gas or vapour, and “ waste ” includes any waste materials, spoil, refuse or other matter deposited on land. Fourth exception: project finance 72E 1 Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of a project company of a project which— a is a financed project, and b includes step-in rights. 2 In this section— a a project is “ financed ” if under an agreement relating to the project a project company incurs, or when the agreement is entered into is expected to incur, a debt of at least £50 million for the purposes of carrying out the project, b “ project company ” has the meaning given by paragraph 7 of Schedule 2A, and c “ step-in rights ” has the meaning given by paragraph 6 of that Schedule. Fifth exception: financial market 72F Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of a company by virtue of— a a market charge within the meaning of section 173 of the Companies Act 1989 (c. 40), b a system-charge within the meaning of the Financial Markets and Insolvency Regulations 1996 ( S.I. 1996/1469), c a collateral security charge within the meaning of the Financial Markets and Insolvency (Settlement Finality) Regulations 1999 ( S.I. 1999/2979). Sixth exception: social landlords 72G Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of a company which is — a a private registered provider of social housing, or b registered as a social landlord under Part I of the Housing Act 1996 (c. 52) or under Part 2 of the Housing (Scotland) Act 2010 (asp 17) . Exception in relation to protected railway companies etc. 72GA Section 72A does not prevent the appointment of an administrative receiver of— a a company holding an appointment under Chapter I of Part II of the Water Industry Act 1991, b a protected railway company within the meaning of section 59 of the Railways Act 1993(including that section as it has effect by virtue of section 19 of the Channel Tunnel Rail Link Act 1996, or c a licence company within the meaning of section 26 of the Transport Act 2000. Sections 72A to 72G: supplementary 72H 1 Schedule 2A (which supplements sections 72B to 72G) shall have effect. 2 The Secretary of State may by order— a insert into this Act provision creating an additional exception to section 72A(1) or (2); b provide for a provision of this Act which creates an exception to section 72A(1) or (2) to cease to have effect; c amend section 72A in consequence of provision made under paragraph (a) or (b); d amend any of sections 72B to 72G; e amend Schedule 2A. 3 An order under subsection (2) must be made by statutory instrument. 4 An order under subsection (2) may make— a provision which applies generally or only for a specified purpose; b different provision for different purposes; c consequential or supplementary provision; d transitional provision. 5 An order under subsection (2)— a in the case of an order under subsection (2)(e), shall be subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament, b in the case of an order under subsection (2)(d) varying the sum specified in section 72B(1)(a) or 72E(2)(a) (whether or not the order also makes consequential or transitional provision), shall be subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament, and c in the case of any other order under subsection (2)(a) to (d), may not be made unless a draft has been laid before and approved by resolution of each House of Parliament. Part IV Winding Up of Companies Registered under the Companies Acts Chapter I Preliminary Introductory Scheme of this Part 73 1 This Part applies to the winding up of a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 in England and Wales or Scotland. 2 The winding up may be either— a voluntary (see Chapters 2 to 5), or b by the court (see Chapter 6). 3 This Chapter and Chapters 7 to 10 relate to winding up generally, except where otherwise stated. Contributories Liability as contributories of present and past members. 74 1 When a company is wound up, every present and past member is liable to contribute to its assets to any amount sufficient for payment of its debts and liabilities, and the expenses of the winding up, and for the adjustment of the rights of the contributories among themselves. 2 This is subject as follows— a a past member is not liable to contribute if he has ceased to be a member for one year or more before the commencement of the winding up; b a past member is not liable to contribute in respect of any debt or liability of the company contracted after he ceased to be a member; c a past member is not liable to contribute, unless it appears to the court that the existing members are unable to satisfy the contributions required to be made by them . . . ; d in the case of a company limited by shares, no contribution is required from any member exceeding the amount (if any) unpaid on the shares in respect of which he is liable as a present or past member; e nothing in the Companies Acts or this Act invalidates any provision contained in a policy of insurance or other contract whereby the liability of individual members on the policy or contract is restricted, or whereby the funds of the company are alone made liable in respect of the policy or contract; f a sum due to any member of the company (in his character of a member) by way of dividends, profits or otherwise is not deemed to be a debt of the company, payable to that member in a case of competition between himself and any other creditor not a member of the company, but any such sum may be taken into account for the purpose of the final adjustment of the rights of the contributories among themselves. 3 In the case of a company limited by guarantee, no contribution is required from any member exceeding the amount undertaken to be contributed by him to the company’s assets in the event of its being wound up; but if it is a company with a share capital, every member of it is liable (in addition to the amount so undertaken to be contributed to the assets), to contribute to the extent of any sums unpaid on shares held by him. Directors, etc. with unlimited liability. 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liability of past directors and shareholders. 76 1 This section applies where a company is being wound up and— a it has under Chapter 5 of Part 18 of the Companies Act 2006 (acquisition by limited company of its own shares: redemption or purchase by private company out of capital) made a payment out of capital in respect of the redemption or purchase of any of its own shares (the payment being referred to below as “ the relevant payment ”), and b the aggregate amount of the company’s assets and the amounts paid by way of contribution to its assets (apart from this section) is not sufficient for payment of its debts and liabilities, and the expenses of the winding up. 2 If the winding up commenced within one year of the date on which the relevant payment was made, then— a the person from whom the shares were redeemed or purchased, and b the directors who signed the statement made in accordance with section 714(1) to (3) of the Companies Act 2006 for purposes of the redemption or purchase (except a director who shows that he had reasonable grounds for forming the opinion set out in the statement , are, so as to enable that insufficiency to be met, liable to contribute to the following extent to the company’s assets. 3 A person from whom any of the shares were redeemed or purchased is liable to contribute an amount not exceeding so much of the relevant payment as was made by the company in respect of his shares; and the directors are jointly and severally liable with that person to contribute that amount. 4 A person who has contributed any amount to the assets in pursuance of this section may apply to the court for an order directing any other person jointly and severally liable in respect of that amount to pay him such amount as the court thinks just and equitable. 5 Section 74 does not apply in relation to liability accruing by virtue of this section. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited company formerly unlimited. 77 1 This section applies in the case of a company being wound up which was at some former time registered as unlimited but has re-registered as a limited company. 2 Notwithstanding section 74(2)(a) above, a past member of the company who was a member of it at the time of re-registration, if the winding up commences within the period of 3 years beginning with the day on which the company was re-registered, is liable to contribute to the assets of the company in respect of debts and liabilities contracted before that time. 3 If no persons who were members of the company at that time are existing members of it, a person who at that time was a present or past member is liable to contribute as above notwithstanding that the existing members have satisfied the contributions required to be made by them . . . This applies subject to section 74(2)(a) above and to subsection (2) of this section, but notwithstanding section 74(2)(c). 4 Notwithstanding section 74(2)(d) and (3), there is no limit on the amount which a person who, at that time, was a past or present member of the company is liable to contribute as above. Unlimited company formerly limited. 78 1 This section applies in the case of a company being wound up which was at some former time registered as limited but has been re-registered as unlimited . . . . 2 A person who, at the time when the application for the company to be re-registered was lodged, was a past member of the company and did not after that again become a member of it is not liable to contribute to the assets of the company more than he would have been liable to contribute had the company not been re-registered. Meaning of “contributory”. 79 1 In this Act . . . the expression “ contributory ” means every person liable to contribute to the assets of a company in the event of its being wound up, and for the purposes of all proceedings for determining, and all proceedings prior to the final determination of, the persons who are to be deemed contributories, includes any person alleged to be a contributory. 2 The reference in subsection (1) to persons liable to contribute to the assets does not include a person so liable by virtue of a declaration by the court under section 213 (imputed responsibility for company’s fraudulent trading) or section 214 (wrongful trading) in Chapter X of this Part. 3 A reference in a company’s articles to a contributory does not (unless the context requires) include a person who is a contributory only by virtue of section 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nature of contributory’s liability. 80 The liability of a contributory creates a debt (in England and Wales in the nature of an ordinary contract debt ) accruing due from him at the time when his liability commenced, but payable at the times when calls are made for enforcing the liability. Contributories in case of death of a member. 81 1 If a contributory dies either before or after he has been placed on the list of contributories, his personal representatives, and the heirs and legatees of heritage of his heritable estate in Scotland, are liable in a due course of administration to contribute to the assets of the company in discharge of his liability and are contributories accordingly. 2 Where the personal representatives are placed on the list of contributories, the heirs or legatees of heritage need not be added, but they may be added as and when the court thinks fit. 3 If in England and Wales the personal representatives make default in paying any money ordered to be paid by them, proceedings may be taken for administering the estate of the deceased contributory and for compelling payment out of it of the money due. Effect of contributory’s bankruptcy. 82 1 The following applies if a contributory becomes bankrupt, either before or after he has been placed on the list of contributories. 2 His trustee in bankruptcy represents him for all purposes of the winding up, and is a contributory accordingly. 3 The trustee may be called on to admit to proof against the bankrupt’s estate, or otherwise allow to be paid out of the bankrupt’s assets in due course of law, any money due from the bankrupt in respect of his liability to contribute to the company’s assets. 4 There may be proved against the bankrupt’s estate the estimated value of his liability to future calls as well as calls already made. Companies registered but not formed under the Companies Act 2006 83 1 The following applies in the event of a company being wound up which is registered but not formed under the Companies Act 2006. . 2 Every person is a contributory, in respect of the company’s debts and liabilities contracted before registration, who is liable— a to pay, or contribute to the payment of, any debt or liability so contracted, or b to pay, or contribute to the payment of, any sum for the adjustment of the rights of the members among themselves in respect of any such debt or liability, or c to pay, or contribute to the amount of, the expenses of winding up the company, so far as relates to the debts or liabilities above mentioned. 3 Every contributory is liable to contribute to the assets of the company, in the course of the winding up, all sums due from him in respect of any such liability. 4 In the event of the death, bankruptcy or insolvency of any contributory, provisions of this Act, with respect to the personal representatives, to the heirs and legatees of heritage of the heritable estate in Scotland of deceased contributories and to the trustees of bankrupt or insolvent contributories respectively, apply. Chapter II Voluntary Winding Up (Introductory and General) Resolutions for, and commencement of, voluntary winding up Circumstances in which company may be wound up voluntarily. 84 1 A company may be wound up voluntarily— a when the period (if any) fixed for the duration of the company by the articles expires, or the event (if any) occurs, on the occurrence of which the articles provide that the company is to be dissolved, and the company in general meeting has passed a resolution requiring it be wound up voluntarily; b if the company resolves by special resolution that it be wound up voluntarily; c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 In this Act the expression “ a resolution for voluntary winding up ” means a resolution passed under either of the paragraphs of subsection (1). 2A Before a company passes a resolution for voluntary winding up it must give written notice of the resolution to the holder of any qualifying floating charge to which section 72A applies. 2B Where notice is given under subsection (2A) a resolution for voluntary winding up may be passed only— a after the end of the period of five business days beginning with the day on which the notice was given, or b if the person to whom the notice was given has consented in writing to the passing of the resolution. 3 Chapter 3 of Part 3 of the Companies Act 2006 (resolutions affecting a company's constitution) applies to a resolution under paragraph (a) of subsection (1) as well as a special resolution under paragraph (b). 4 This section has effect subject to section 43 of the Commonhold and Leasehold Reform Act 2002. Notice of resolution to wind up. 85 1 When a company has passed a resolution for voluntary winding up, it shall, within 14 days after the passing of the resolution, give notice of the resolution by advertisement in the Gazette. 2 If default is made in complying with this section, the company and every officer of it who is in default is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. For purposes of this subsection the liquidator is deemed an officer of the company. Commencement of winding up. 86 A voluntary winding up is deemed to commence at the time of the passing of the resolution for voluntary winding up. Consequences of resolution to wind up 87 1 In case of a voluntary winding up, the company shall from the commencement of the winding up cease to carry on its business, except so far as may be required for its beneficial winding up. 2 However, the corporate state and corporate powers of the company, notwithstanding anything to the contrary in its articles, continue until the company is dissolved. Avoidance of share transfers, etc. after winding-up resolution. 88 Any transfer of shares, not being a transfer made to or with the sanction of the liquidator, and any alteration in the status of the company’s members, made after the commencement of a voluntary winding up, is void. Declaration of solvency Statutory declaration of solvency. 89 1 Where it is proposed to wind up a company voluntarily, the directors (or, in the case of a company having more than two directors, the majority of them) may at a directors’ meeting make a statutory declaration to the effect that they have made a full inquiry into the company’s affairs and that, having done so, they have formed the opinion that the company will be able to pay its debts in full, together with interest at the official rate (as defined in section 251), within such period, not exceeding 12 months from the commencement of the winding up, as may be specified in the declaration. 2 Such a declaration by the directors has no effect for purposes of this Act unless— a it is made within the 5 weeks immediately preceding the date of the passing of the resolution for winding up, or on that date but before the passing of the resolution, and b it embodies a statement of the company’s assets and liabilities as at the latest practicable date before the making of the declaration. 3 A copy of the declaration shall be delivered to the registrar of companies before the expiration of 15 days immediately following the date on which the resolution for winding up is passed. 4 A director making a declaration under this section without having reasonable grounds for the opinion that the company will be able to pay its debts in full, together with interest at the official rate, within the period specified is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. 5 If the company is wound up in pursuance of a resolution passed within 5 weeks after the making of the declaration, and its debts (together with interest at the official rate) are not paid or provided for in full within the period specified, it is to be presumed (unless the contrary is shown) that the director did not have reasonable grounds for his opinion. 6 If a copy of a declaration required by subsection (3) to be delivered to the registrar is not so delivered within the time prescribed by that subsection, the company and every officer in default is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Distinction between “members’” and “creditors’” voluntary winding up. 90 A winding up in the case of which a directors’ statutory declaration under section 89 has been made is a “ members’ voluntary winding up ”; and a winding up in the case of which such a declaration has not been made is a “ creditors’ voluntary winding up ”. Chapter III Members’ Voluntary Winding Up Appointment of liquidator. 91 1 In a members’ voluntary winding up, the company in general meeting shall appoint one or more liquidators for the purpose of winding up the company’s affairs and distributing its assets. 2 On the appointment of a liquidator all the powers of the directors cease, except so far as the company in general meeting or the liquidator sanctions their continuance. Power to fill vacancy in office of liquidator. 92 1 If a vacancy occurs by death resignation or otherwise in the office of liquidator appointed by the company, the company in general meeting may, subject to any arrangement with its creditors, fill the vacancy. 2 For that purpose a general meeting may be convened by any contributory or, if there were more liquidators than one, by the continuing liquidators. 3 The meeting shall be held in manner provided by this Act or by the articles, or in such manner as may, on application by any contributory or by the continuing liquidators, be determined by the court. Progress report to company ... 92A 1 Subject to section 96 , ... the liquidator must— a for each prescribed period produce a progress report relating to the prescribed matters; and b within such period commencing with the end of the period referred to in paragraph (a) as may be prescribed send a copy of the progress report to— i the members of the company; and ii such other persons as may be prescribed. 2 A liquidator who fails to comply with this section is liable to a fine. General company meeting at each year’s end (Scotland) 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final account prior to dissolution 94 1 As soon as the company's affairs are fully wound up the liquidator must make up an account of the winding up, showing how it has been conducted and the company's property has been disposed of. 2 The liquidator must send a copy of the account to the members of the company before the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day on which the account is made up. 3 The liquidator must send a copy of the account to the registrar of companies before the end of that period (but not before sending it to the members of the company). 4 If the liquidator does not comply with subsection (2) the liquidator is liable to a fine. 5 If the liquidator does not comply with subsection (3) the liquidator is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, a daily default fine. Effect of company’s insolvency. 95 1 This section applies where the liquidator is of the opinion that the company will be unable to pay its debts in full (together with interest at the official rate) within the period stated in the directors’ declaration under section 89. 1A The liquidator must before the end of the period of 7 days beginning with the day after the day on which the liquidator formed that opinion— a make out a statement in the prescribed form as to the affairs of the company, and b send it to the company's creditors. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 The statement as to the affairs of the company . . . shall show— a particulars of the company’s assets, debts and liabilities; b the names and addresses of the company’s creditors; c the securities held by them respectively; d the dates when the securities were respectively given; and e such further or other information as may be prescribed. 4A The statement as to the affairs of the company shall be ...— a in the case of a winding up of a company registered in England and Wales be verified by the liquidator , by a statement of truth; and b in the case of a winding up of a company registered in Scotland, contain a statutory declaration by the liquidator . 4B The company's creditors may in accordance with the rules nominate a person to be liquidator. 4C The liquidator must in accordance with the rules seek such a nomination from the company's creditors. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 If the liquidator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with subsections (1) to (4A) , he is liable to a fine. Conversion to creditors’ voluntary winding up. 96 1 The winding up becomes a creditors' voluntary winding up as from the day on which— a the company's creditors under section 95 nominate a person to be liquidator, or b the procedure by which the company's creditors were to have made such a nomination concludes without a nomination having been made. 2 As from that day this Act has effect as if the directors' declaration under section 89 had not been made. 3 The liquidator in the creditors' voluntary winding up is to be the person nominated by the company's creditors under section 95 or, where no person has been so nominated, the existing liquidator. 4 In the case of the creditors nominating a person other than the existing liquidator any director, member or creditor of the company may, within 7 days after the date on which the nomination was made by the creditors, apply to the court for an order either— a directing that the existing liquidator is to be liquidator instead of or jointly with the person nominated by the creditors, or b appointing some other person to be liquidator instead of the person nominated by the creditors. 4A The court shall grant an application under subsection (4) made by the holder of a qualifying floating charge in respect of the company's property (within the meaning of paragraph 14 of Schedule B1) unless the court thinks it right to refuse the application because of the particular circumstances of the case. 5 The “existing liquidator” is the person who is liquidator immediately before the winding up becomes a creditors' voluntary winding up. Chapter IV Creditors’ Voluntary Winding Up Application of this Chapter. 97 1 Subject as follows, this Chapter applies in relation to a creditors’ voluntary winding up. 2 Sections 99 and 100 do not apply where, under section 96 in Chapter III , a members’ voluntary winding up has become a creditors’ voluntary winding up. Meeting of creditors. 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directors to lay statement of affairs before creditors. 99 1 The directors of the company must, before the end of the period of 7 days beginning with the day after the day on which the company passes a resolution for voluntary winding up— a make out a statement in the prescribed form as to the affairs of the company, and b send the statement to the company's creditors. 2 The statement as to the affairs of the company . . . shall show— a particulars of the company’s assets, debts and liabilities; b the names and addresses of the company’s creditors; c the securities held by them respectively; d the dates when the securities were respectively given; and e such further or other information as may be prescribed. 2A The statement as to the affairs of the company shall be verified by some or all of the directors — a in the case of a winding up of a company registered in England and Wales, be verified by some or all of the directors by a statement of truth; and b in the case of a winding up of a company registered in Scotland, by affidavit contain a statutory declaration by some or all of the directors . 3 If the directors without reasonable excuse fail to comply with subsection (1), (2) or (2A), they are guilty of an offence and liable to a fine. Appointment of liquidator. 100 1 The company may nominate a person to be liquidator at the company meeting at which the resolution for voluntary winding up is passed. 1A The company's creditors may in accordance with the rules nominate a person to be liquidator. 1B The directors of the company must in accordance with the rules seek such a nomination from the company's creditors. 2 The liquidator shall be the person nominated by the creditors or, where no person has been so nominated, the person (if any) nominated by the company. 3 In the case of different persons being nominated, any director, member or creditor of the company may, within 7 days after the date on which the nomination was made by the creditors, apply to the court for an order either— a directing that the person nominated as liquidator by the company shall be liquidator instead of or jointly with the person nominated by the creditors, or b appointing some other person to be liquidator instead of the person nominated by the creditors. Appointment of liquidation committee. 101 1 The creditors may in accordance with the rules appoint a committee (“ the liquidation committee ”) of not more than 5 persons to exercise the functions conferred on it by or under this Act. 2 If such a committee is appointed, the company may, either at the meeting at which the resolution for voluntary winding up is passed or at any time subsequently in general meeting, appoint such number of persons as they think fit to act as members of the committee, not exceeding 5. 3 However, the creditors may, if they think fit, decide that all or any of the persons so appointed by the company ought not to be members of the liquidation committee; and if the creditors so decide — a those persons are not then, unless the court otherwise directs, qualified to act as members of the committee; and b on any application to the court under this provision the court may, if it thinks fit, appoint other persons to act as such members in place of those persons . 4 In Scotland, the liquidation committee has, in addition to the powers and duties conferred and imposed on it by this Act, such of the powers and duties of commissioners on a bankrupt estate as may be conferred and imposed on liquidation committees by the rules. Creditors’ meeting where winding up converted under s. 96. 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cesser of directors’ powers. 103 On the appointment of a liquidator, all the powers of the directors cease, except so far as the liquidation committee (or, if there is no such committee, the creditors) sanction their continuance. Vacancy in office of liquidator. 104 If a vacancy occurs, by death, resignation or otherwise, in the office of a liquidator (other than a liquidator appointed by, or by the direction of, the court), the creditors may fill the vacancy. Progress report to company and creditors ... ... 104A 1 The liquidator must— a for each prescribed period produce a progress report relating to the prescribed matters; and b within such period commencing with the end of the period referred to in paragraph (a) as may be prescribed send a copy of the progress report to— i the members and creditors , other than opted-out creditors of the company; and ii such other persons as may be prescribed. 2 A liquidator who fails to comply with this section is liable to a fine. Meetings of company and creditors at each year’s end (Scotland) . 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final account prior to dissolution. 106 1 As soon as the company's affairs are fully wound up the liquidator must make up an account of the winding up, showing how it has been conducted and the company's property has been disposed of. 2 The liquidator must, before the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day on which the account is made up— a send a copy of the account to the company's members, b send a copy of the account to the company's creditors (other than opted-out creditors), and c give the company's creditors (other than opted-out creditors) a notice explaining the effect of section 173(2)(e) and how they may object to the liquidator's release. 3 The liquidator must during the relevant period send to the registrar of companies— a a copy of the account, and b a statement of whether any of the company's creditors objected to the liquidator's release. 4 The relevant period is the period of 7 days beginning with the day after the last day of the period prescribed by the rules as the period within which the creditors may object to the liquidator's release. 4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 If the liquidator does not comply with subsection (2) the liquidator is liable to a fine. 6 If the liquidator does not comply with subsection (3) the liquidator is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, a daily default fine. Chapter V Provisions Applying to both kinds of Voluntary Winding Up Distribution of company’s property. 107 Subject to the provisions of this Act as to preferential payments, the company’s property in a voluntary winding up shall on the winding up be applied in satisfaction of the company’s liabilities pari passu and, subject to that application, shall (unless the articles otherwise provide) be distributed among the members according to their rights and interests in the company. Appointment or removal of liquidator by the court. 108 1 If from any cause whatever there is not liquidator acting, the court may appoint a liquidator. 2 The court may, on cause shown, remove a liquidator and appoint another. Notice by liquidator of his appointment. 109 1 The liquidator shall, within 14 days after his appointment, publish in the Gazette and deliver to the registrar of companies for registration a notice of his appointment in the form prescribed by statutory instrument made by the Secretary of State. 2 If the liquidator fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Acceptance of shares, etc., as consideration for sale of company property. 110 1 This section applies, in the case of a company proposed to be, or being, wound up voluntarily, where the whole or part of the company’s business or property is proposed to be transferred or sold a to another company (“the transferee company"), whether or not the latter is a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 , or b to a limited liability partnership (the “transferee limited liability partnership"). 2 With the requisite sanction, the liquidator of the company being, or proposed to be, wound up (“the transferor company") may receive, in compensation or part compensation for the transfer or sale— a in the case of the transferee company, shares, policies or other like interests in the transferee company for distribution among the members of the transferor company, or b in the case of the transferee limited liability partnership, membership in the transferee limited liability partnership for distribution among the members of the transferor company. 3 The sanction requisite under subsection (2) is— a in the case of a members’ voluntary winding up, that of a special resolution of the company, conferring either a general authority on the liquidator or an authority in respect of any particular arrangement, and b in the case of a creditors’ voluntary winding up, that of either the court or the liquidation committee. 4 Alternatively to subsection (2), the liquidator may (with that sanction) enter into any other arrangement whereby the members of the transferor company may— a in the case of the transferee company, in lieu of receiving cash, shares, policies or other like interests (or in addition thereto) participate in the profits of, or receive any other benefit from, the transferee company, or b in the case of the transferee limited liability partnership, in lieu of receiving cash or membership (or in addition thereto), participate in some other way in the profits of, or receive any other benefit from, the transferee limited liability partnership. 5 A sale or arrangement in pursuance of this section is binding on members of the transferor company. 6 A special resolution is not invalid for purposes of this section by reason that it is passed before or concurrently with a resolution for voluntary winding up or for appointing liquidators; but, if an order is made within a year for winding up the company by the court, the special resolution is not valid unless sanctioned by the court. Dissent from arrangement under s. 110. 111 1 This section applies in the case of a voluntary winding up where, for the purposes of section 110(2) or (4), there has been passed a special resolution of the transferor company providing the sanction requisite for the liquidator under that section. 2 If a member of the transferor company who did not vote in favour of the special resolution expresses his dissent from it in writing, addressed to the liquidator and left at the company’s registered office within 7 days after the passing of the resolution, he may require the liquidator either to abstain from carrying the resolution into effect or to purchase his interest at a price to be determined by agreement or by arbitration under this section. 3 If the liquidator elects to purchase the member’s interest, the purchase money must be paid before the company is dissolved and be raised by the liquidator in such manner as may be determined by special resolution. 4 For purposes of an arbitration under this section, the provisions of the Companies Clauses Consolidation Act 1845 or, in the case of a winding up in Scotland, the Companies Clauses Consolidation (Scotland) Act 1845 with respect to the settlement of disputes by arbitration are incorporated with this Act, and— a in the construction of those provisions this Act is deemed the special Act and “ the company ” means the transferor company, and b any appointment by the incorporated provisions directed to be made under the hand of the secretary or any two of the directors may be made in writing by the liquidator (or, if there is more than one liquidator, then any two or more of them). Reference of questions to court. 112 1 The liquidator or any contributory or creditor may apply to the court to determine any question arising in the winding up of a company, or to exercise, as respects the enforcing of calls or any other matter, all or any of the powers which the court might exercise if the company were being wound up by the court. 2 The court, if satisfied that the determination of the question or the required exercise of power will be just and beneficial, may accede wholly or partially to the application on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit, or may make such other order on the application as it thinks just. 3 A copy of an order made by virtue of this section staying the proceedings in the winding up shall forthwith be forwarded by the company, or otherwise as may be prescribed, to the registrar of companies, who shall enter it in his records relating to the company. Court’s power to control proceedings (Scotland). 113 If the court, on the application of the liquidator in the winding up of a company registered in Scotland, so directs, no action or proceeding shall be proceeded with or commenced against the company except by leave of the court and subject to such terms as the court may impose. No liquidator appointed or nominated by company. 114 1 This section applies where, in the case of a voluntary winding up, no liquidator has been appointed or nominated by the company. 2 The powers of the directors shall not be exercised, except with the sanction of the court or (in the case of a creditors’ voluntary winding up) so far as may be necessary to secure compliance with sections ... 99 (statement of affairs) and 100(1B) (nomination of liquidator by creditors) , during the period before the appointment or nomination of a liquidator of the company. 3 Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to the powers of the directors— a to dispose of perishable goods and other goods the value of which is likely to diminish if they are not immediately disposed of, and b to do all such other things as may be necessary for the protection of the company’s assets. 4 If the directors of the company without reasonable excuse fail to comply with this section, they are liable to a fine. Expenses of voluntary winding up. 115 After the payment of any liabilities to which section 174A applies, all expenses properly incurred in the winding up, including the remuneration of the liquidator, are payable out of the company’s assets in priority to all other claims. Saving for certain rights. 116 The voluntary winding up of a company does not bar the right of any creditor or contributory to have it wound up by the court; but in the case of an application by a contributory the court must be satisfied that the rights of the contributories will be prejudiced by a voluntary winding up. Chapter VI Winding Up by the Court Jurisdiction (England and Wales) High Court and county court jurisdiction. 117 1 The High Court has jurisdiction to wind up any company registered in England and Wales. 2 Where in the case of a company registered in England and Wales the amount of its share capital paid up or credited as paid up does not exceed £120,000, then (subject to this section) the county court ... has concurrent jurisdiction with the High Court to wind up the company. 2A Despite subsection (2), proceedings for the exercise of the jurisdiction to wind up a company registered in England and Wales may be commenced only in the High Court if the place which has longest been the company’s registered office during the 6 months immediately preceding the presentation of the petition for winding up is in the district that is the London insolvency district for the purposes of the second Group of Parts of this Act. 3 The money sum for the time being specified in subsection (2) is subject to increase or reduction by order under section 416 in Part XV. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Every court in England and Wales having winding-up jurisdiction has for the purposes of that jurisdiction all the powers of the High Court; and every prescribed officer of the court shall perform any duties which an officer of the High Court may discharge by order of a judge of that court or otherwise in relation to winding up. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Proceedings taken in wrong court. 118 1 Nothing in section 117 invalidates a proceeding by reason of its being taken in the wrong court. 2 The winding up of a company by the court in England and Wales, or any proceedings in the winding up, may be retained in the court in which the proceedings were commenced, although it may not be the court in which they ought to have been commenced. Proceedings in county court; case stated for High Court. 119 1 If any question arises in any winding-up proceedings in a county court which all the parties to the proceedings, or which one of them and the judge of the court, desire to have determined in the first instance in the High Court, the judge shall state the facts in the form of a special case for the opinion of the High Court. 2 Thereupon the special case and the proceedings (or such of them as may be required) shall be transmitted to the High Court for the purposes of the determination. Jurisdiction (Scotland) Court of Session and sheriff court jurisdiction. 120 1 The Court of Session has jurisdiction to wind up any company registered in Scotland. 2 When the Court of Session is in vacation, the jurisdiction conferred on that court by this section may (subject to the provisions of this Part) be exercised by the judge acting as vacation judge in pursuance of section 4 of the Admnistration of Justice (Scotland) Act 1933 . 3 Where the amount of a company’s share capital paid up or credited as paid up does not exceed £120,000, the sheriff court of the sheriffdom in which the company’s registered office is situated has concurrent jurisdiction with the Court of Session to wind up the company; but— a the Court of Session may, if it thinks expedient having regard to the amount of the company’s assets to do so— i remit to a sheriff court any petition presented to the Court of Session for winding up such a company, or ii require such a petition presented to a sheriff court to be remitted to the Court of Session; and b the Court of Session may require any such petition as above mentioned presented to one sheriff court to be remitted to another sheriff court; and c in a winding up in the sheriff court the sheriff may submit a stated case for the opinion of the Court of Session on any question of law arising in that winding up. 4 For purposes of this section, the expression “ registered office ” means the place which has longest been the company’s registered office during the 6 months immediately preceding the presentation of the petition for winding up. 5 The money sum for the time being specified in subsection (3) is subject to increase or reduction by order under section 416 in Part XV. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power to remit winding up to Lord Ordinary. 121 1 The Court of Session may, by Act of Sederunt, make provision for the taking of proceedings in a winding up before one of the Lords Ordinary; and, where provision is so made, the Lord Ordinary has, for the purposes of the winding up all the powers and jurisdiction of the court. 2 However, the Lord Ordinary may report to the Inner House any matter which may arise in the course of a winding up. Grounds and effect of winding-up petition Circumstances in which company may be wound up by the court. 122 1 A company may be wound up by the court if— a the company has by special resolution resolved that the company be wound up by the court, b being a public company which was registered as such on its original incorporation, the company has not been issued with a trading certificate under section 761 of the Companies Act 2006 (requirement as to minimum share capital) and more than a year has expired since it was so registered, c it is an old public company, within the meaning of the Schedule 3 to the Companies Act 2006 (Consequential Amendments, Transitional Provisions and Savings) Order 2009 , d the company does not commence its business within a year from its incorporation or suspends its business for a whole year; e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f the company is unable to pay its debts, fa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g the court is of the opinion that it is just and equitable that the company should be wound up. 2 In Scotland, a company which the Court of Session has jurisdiction to wind up may be wound up by the Court if there is subsisting a floating charge over property comprised in the company’s property and undertaking, and the court is satisfied that the security of the creditor entitled to the benefit of the floating charge is in jeopardy. For this purpose a creditor’s security is deemed to be in jeopardy if the Court is satisfied that events have occurred or are about to occur which render it unreasonable in the creditor’s interests that the company should retain power to dispose of the property which is subject to the floating charge. Definition of inability to pay debts. 123 1 A company is deemed unable to pay its debts— a if a creditor (by assignment or otherwise) to whom the company is indebted in a sum exceeding £750 then due has served on the company, by leaving it at the company’s registered office, a written demand (in the prescribed form) requiring the company to pay the sum so due and the company has for 3 weeks thereafter neglected to pay the sum or to secure or compound for it to the reasonable satisfaction of the creditor, or b if, in England and Wales, execution or other process issued on a judgment, decree or order of any court in favour of a creditor of the company is returned unsatisfied in whole or in part, or c if, in Scotland, the induciae of a charge for payment on an extract decree, or an extract registered bond, or an extract registered protest, have expired without payment being made, or d if, in Northern Ireland, a certificate of unenforceability has been granted in respect of a judgment against the company, or e if it is proved to the satisfaction of the court that the company is unable to pay its debts as they fall due. 2 A company is also deemed unable to pay its debts if it is proved to the satisfaction of the court that the value of the company’s assets is less than the amount of its liabilities, taking into account its contingent and prospective liabilities. 3 The money sum for the time being specified in subsection (1)(a) is subject to increase or reduction by order under section 416 in Part XV. Application for winding up. 124 1 Subject to the provisions of this section, an application to the court for the winding up of a company shall be by petition presented either by the company, or the directors, or by any creditor or creditors (including any contingent or prospective creditor or creditors), contributory or contributories, ... or by the designated officer for a magistrates' court in the exercise of the power conferred by section 87A of the Magistrates’ Courts Act 1980 (enforcement of fines imposed on companies) , or by all or any of those parties, together or separately. 2 Except as mentioned below, a contributory is not entitled to present a winding-up petition unless either— a the number of members is reduced below 2, or b the shares in respect of which he is a contributory, or some of them, either were originally allotted to him, or have been held by him, and registered in his name, for at least 6 months during the 18 months before the commencement of the winding up, or have devolved on him through the death of a former holder. 3 A person who is liable under section 76 to contribute to a company’s assets in the event of its being wound up may petition on either of the grounds set out in section 122(1)(f) and (g), and subsection (2) above does not then apply; but unless the person is a contributory otherwise than under section 76, he may not in his character as contributory petition on any other ground. . . . 3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 A winding-up petition may be presented by the Secretary of State— a if the ground of the petition is that in section 122(1)(b) or (c), or b in a case falling within section 124A or 124B below. 4AA A winding up petition may be presented by the Financial Conduct Authority in a case falling within section 124C(1) or (2). 4A A winding-up petition may be presented by the Regulator of Community Interest Companies in a case falling within section 50 of the Companies (Audit, Investigations and Community Enterprise) Act 2004. 5 Where a company is being wound up voluntarily in England and Wales, a winding-up petition may be presented by the official receiver attached to the court as well as by any other person authorised in that behalf under the other provisions of this section; but the court shall not make a winding-up order on the petition unless it is satisfied that the voluntary winding up cannot be continued with due regard to the interests of the creditors or contributories. Petition for winding up on grounds of public interest. 124A 1 Where it appears to the Secretary of State from— a any report made or information obtained under Part XIV (except section 448A) of the Companies Act 1985 (company investigations, &c.), b any report made by inspectors under— i section 167, 168, 169 or 284 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, or ii where the company is an open-ended investment company (within the meaning of that Act), regulations made as a result of section 262(2)(k) of that Act; bb any information or documents obtained under section 165, 171, 172, 173 or 175 of that Act, c any information obtained under section 2 of the Criminal Justice Act 1987 or section 28 of the Criminal Law (Consolidation) (Scotland) Act 1995 (fraud investigations), or d any information obtained under section 83 of the Companies Act 1989 (powers exercisable for purpose of assisting overseas regulatory authorities), that it is expedient in the public interest that a company should be wound up, he may present a petition for it to be wound up if the court thinks it just and equitable for it to be so. 2 This section does not apply if the company is already being wound up by the court. Petition for winding up of SE 124B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petition for winding up of SCE 124C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powers of court on hearing of petition. 125 1 On hearing a winding-up petition the court may dismiss it, or adjourn the hearing conditionally or unconditionally, or make an interim order, or any other order that it thinks fit; but the court shall not refuse to make a winding-up order on the ground only that the company’s assets have been mortgaged to an amount equal to or in excess of those assets, or that the company has no assets. 2 If the petition is presented by members of the company as contributories on the ground that it is just and equitable that the company should be wound up, the court, if it is of opinion— a that the petitioners are entitled to relief either by winding up the company or by some other means, and b that in the absence of any other remedy it would be just and equitable that the company should be wound up, shall make a winding-up order; but this does not apply if the court is also of the opinion both that some other remedy is available to the petitioners and that they are acting unreasonably in seeking to have the company wound up instead of pursuing that other remedy. Power to stay or restrain proceedings against company. 126 1 At any time after the presentation of a winding-up petition, and before a winding-up order has been made, the company, or any creditor or contributory, may— a where any action or proceeding against the company is pending in the High Court or Court of Appeal in England and Wales or Northern Ireland, apply to the court in which the action or proceeding is pending for a stay of proceedings therein, and b where any other action or proceeding is pending against the company, apply to the court having jurisdiction to wind up the company to restrain further proceedings in the action or proceeding; and the court to which the application is so made may (as the case may be) stay, sist or restrain the proceedings accordingly on such terms as it thinks fit. 2 In the case of a company registered but not formed under the Companies Act 2006 , where the application to stay, sist or restrain is by a creditor, this section extends to actions and proceedings against any contributory of the company. 3 Subsection (1) applies in relation to any action being taken in respect of the company under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction from accounts) as it applies in relation to any action or proceeding mentioned in paragraph (b) of that subsection. Avoidance of property dispositions, etc. 127 1 In a winding up by the court, any disposition of the company’s property, and any transfer of shares, or alteration in the status of the company’s members, made after the commencement of the winding up is, unless the court otherwise orders, void. 2 This section has no effect in respect of anything done by an administrator of a company while a winding-up petition is suspended under paragraph 40 of Schedule B1. 3 This section has no effect in respect of anything done during a moratorium under Part A1, or during a period mentioned in section 5(4)(a) following the end of a moratorium, where the winding-up order was made on a petition presented before the moratorium begins, unless the petition was presented under section 367 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 on the ground mentioned in section 367(3)(b) of that Act. Avoidance of attachments, etc. 128 1 Where a company registered in England and Wales is being wound up by the court, any attachment, sequestration, distress or execution put in force against the estate or effects of the company after the commencement of the winding up is void. 2 This section, so far as relates to any estate or effects of the company situated in England and Wales, applies in the case of a company registered in Scotland as it applies in the case of a company registered in England and Wales. 3 In subsection (1) “ attachment ” includes a hold notice or a deduction notice under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction from accounts) and, if subsection (1) has effect in relation to a deduction notice, it also has effect in relation to the hold notice to which the deduction notice relates (whenever the hold notice was given). Commencement of winding up Commencement of winding up by the court. 129 1 If, before the presentation of a petition for the winding up of a company by the court, a resolution has been passed by the company for voluntary winding up, the winding up of the company is deemed to have commenced at the time of the passing of the resolution; and unless the court, on proof of fraud or mistake, directs otherwise, all proceedings taken in the voluntary winding up are deemed to have been validly taken. 1A Where the court makes a winding-up order by virtue of paragraph 13(1)(e) of Schedule B1, the winding up is deemed to commence on the making of the order. 2 In any other case, the winding up of a company by the court is deemed to commence at the time of the presentation of the petition for winding up. Consequences of winding-up order. 130 1 On the making of a winding-up order, a copy of the order must forthwith be forwarded by the company (or otherwise as may be prescribed) to the registrar of companies, who shall enter it in his records relating to the company. 2 When a winding-up order has been made or a provisional liquidator has been appointed, no action or proceeding shall be proceeded with or commenced against the company or its property, except by leave of the court and subject to such terms as the court may impose. 3 When an order has been made for winding up a company registered but not formed under the Companies Act 2006 , no action or proceeding shall be commenced or proceeded with against the company or its property or any contributory of the company, in respect of any debt of the company, except by leave of the court, and subject to such terms as the court may impose. 3A In subsections (2) and (3), the reference to an action or proceeding includes action in respect of the company under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction from accounts). 4 An order for winding up a company operates in favour of all the creditors and of all contributories of the company as if made on the joint petition of a creditor and of a contributory. Investigation procedures Company’s statement of affairs. 131 1 Where the court has made a winding-up order or appointed a provisional liquidator, the official receiver may require some or all of the persons mentioned in subsection (3) below to make out and submit to him a statement in the prescribed form as to the affairs of the company. 2 The statement . . . shall show— a particulars of the company’s assets, debts and liabilities; b the names and addresses of the company’s creditors; c the securities held by them respectively; d the dates when the securities were respectively given; and e such further or other information as may be prescribed or as the official receiver may require 2A The statement shall be verified by the persons required to submit it — a in the case of an appointment of a provisional liquidator or a winding up by the court in England and Wales be verified by the persons required to submit it , by a statement of truth; and b in the case of an appointment of a provisional liquidator or a winding up by the court in Scotland, by affidavit contain a statutory declaration by the persons required to submit it . 3 The persons referred to in subsection (1) are— a those who are or have been officers of the company; b those who have taken part in the formation of the company at any time within one year before the relevant date; c those who are in the company’s employment, or have been in its employment within that year, and are in the official receiver’s opinion capable of giving the information required; d those who are or have been within that year officers of, or in the employment of, a company which is, or within that year was, an officer of the company. 4 Where any persons are required under this section to submit a statement of affairs to the official receiver, they shall do so (subject to the next subsection) before the end of the period of 21 days beginning with the day after that on which the prescribed notice of the requirement is given to them by the official receiver. 5 The official receiver, if he thinks fit, may— a at any time release a person from an obligation imposed on him under subsection (1) or (2) above; or b either when giving the notice mentioned in subsection (4) or subsequently, extend the period so mentioned; and where the official receiver has refused to exercise a power conferred by this subsection, the court, if it thinks fit, may exercise it. 6 In this section— “ employment ” includes employment under a contract for services; and “ the relevant date ” means— a in a case where a provisional liquidator is appointed, the date of his appointment; and b in a case where no such appointment is made, the date of the winding-up order. 7 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed under this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 8 In the application of this section to Scotland references to the official receiver are to the liquidator or, in a case where a provisional liquidator is appointed, the provisional liquidator. Investigation by official receiver. 132 1 Where a winding-up order is made by the court in England and Wales, it is the duty of the official receiver to investigate— a if the company has failed, the causes of the failure; and b generally, the promotion, formation, business, dealings and affairs of the company, and to make such report (if any) to the court as he thinks fit. 2 The report is, in any proceedings, prima facie evidence of the facts stated in it. Public examination of officers 133 1 Where a company is being wound up by the court, the official receiver or, in Scotland, the liquidator may at any time before the dissolution of the company apply to the court for the public examination of any person who— a is or has been an officer of the company; or b has acted as liquidator or administrator of the company or as receiver or manager or, in Scotland, receiver of its property; or c not being a person falling within paragraph (a) or (b), is or has been concerned, or has taken part, in the promotion, formation or management of the company. 2 Unless the court otherwise orders, the official receiver or, in Scotland, the liquidator shall make an application under subsection (1) if he is requested in accordance with the rules to do so by— a one-half, in value, of the company’s creditors; or b three-quarters, in value, of the company’s contributories. 3 On an application under subsection (1), the court shall direct that a public examination of the person to whom the application relates shall be held on a day appointed by the court; and that person shall attend on that day and be publicly examined as to the promotion, formation or management of the company or as to the conduct of its business and affairs, or his conduct or dealings in relation to the company. 4 The following may take part in the public examination of a person under this section and may question that person concerning the matters mentioned in subsection (3), namely— a the official receiver; b the liquidator of the company; c any person who has been appointed as special manager of the company’s property or business; d any creditor of the company who has tendered a proof or, in Scotland, submitted a claim in the winding up; e any contributory of the company. Enforcement of s. 133. 134 1 If a person without reasonable excuse fails at any time to attend his public examination under section 133, he is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly. 2 In a case where a person without reasonable excuse fails at any time to attend his examination under section 133 or there are reasonable grounds for believing that a person has absconded, or is about to abscond, with a view to avoiding or delaying his examination under that section, the court may cause a warrant to be issued to a constable or prescribed officer of the court— a for the arrest of that person; and b for the seizure of any books, papers, records, money or goods in that person’s possession. 3 In such a case the court may authorise the person arrested under the warrant to be kept in custody, and anything seized under such a warrant to be held, in accordance with the rules, until such time as the court may order. Appointment of liquidator Appointment and powers of provisional liquidator. 135 1 Subject to the provisions of this section, the court may, at any time after the presentation of a winding-up petition, appoint a liquidator provisionally. 2 In England and Wales, the appointment of a provisional liquidator may be made at any time before the making of a winding-up order; and either the official receiver or any other fit person may be appointed. 3 In Scotland, such an appointment may be made at any time before the first appointment of liquidators. 4 The provisional liquidator shall carry out such functions as the court may confer on him. 5 When a liquidator is provisionally appointed by the court, his powers may be limited by the order appointing him. Functions of official receiver in relation to office of liquidator. 136 1 The following provisions of this section have effect, subject to section 140 below, on a winding-up order being made by the court in England and Wales. 2 The official receiver, by virtue of his office, becomes the liquidator of the company and continues in office until another person becomes liquidator under the provisions of this Part. 3 The official receiver is, by virtue of his office, the liquidator during any vacancy. 4 At any time when he is the liquidator of the company, the official receiver may in accordance with the rules seek nominations from the company’s creditors and contributories for the purpose of choosing a person to be liquidator of the company in place of the official receiver. 5 It is the duty of the official receiver— a as soon as practicable in the period of 12 weeks beginning with the day on which the winding-up order was made, to decide whether to exercise his power under sub-section (4) ... , and b if in pursuance of paragraph (a) he decides not to exercise that power, to give notice of his decision, before the end of that period, to the court and to the company’s creditors and contributories, and c (whether or not he has decided to exercise that power) to exercise his power ... under subsection (4) if he is at any time requested, in accordance with rules, to do so by one-quarter, in value, of the company’s creditors; and accordingly, where the duty imposed by paragraph (c) arises before the official receiver has performed a duty imposed by paragraph (a) or (b), he is not required to perform the latter duty. 6 A notice given under subsection (5)(b) to the company’s creditors shall contain an explanation of the creditors’ power under subsection (5)(c) to require the official receiver to seek nominations from the company’s creditors and contributories. Appointment by Secretary of State. 137 1 In a winding up by the court in England and Wales the official receiver may, at any time when he is the liquidator of the company, apply to the Secretary of State for the appointment of a person as liquidator in his place. 2 If nominations are sought from the company's creditors and contributories in pursuance of a decision under section 136(5)(a), but no person is chosen to be liquidator as a result ..., it is the duty of the official receiver to decide whether to refer the need for an appointment to the Secretary of State. 3 On an application under subsection (1), or a reference made in pursuance of a decision under subsection (2), the Secretary of State shall either make an appointment or decline to make one. 4 Where a liquidator has been appointed by the Secretary of State under subsection (3), the liquidator shall give notice of his appointment to the company’s creditors or, if the court so allows, shall advertise his appointment in accordance with the directions of the court. 5 In that notice or advertisement the liquidator must explain the procedure for establishing a liquidation committee under section 141. Appointment of liquidator in Scotland. 138 1 Where a winding-up order is made by the court in Scotland, a liquidator shall be appointed by the court at the time when the order is made. 2 The liquidator so appointed (here referred to as “ the interim liquidator ”) continues in office until another person becomes liquidator in his place under this section or the next. 3 The interim liquidator shall (subject to the next subsection) as soon as practicable in the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which the winding-up order was made or such longer period as the court may allow, in accordance with the rules seek nominations from the company’s creditors and contributories for the purpose of choosing a person (who may be the person who is the interim liquidator) to be liquidator of the company in place of the interim liquidator. 4 If it appears to the interim liquidator, in any case where a company is being wound up on grounds including its inability to pay its debts, that it would be inappropriate to seek a nomination from the company's contributories under subsection (3), he may seek a nomination only from the company’s creditors for the purpose mentioned in that subsection. 5 If a nomination is sought from the company's creditors, or nominations are sought from the company's creditors and contributories, in pursuance of this section but no person is appointed or nominated as a result , the interim liquidator shall make a report to the court which shall appoint either the interim liquidator or some other person to be liquidator of the company. 6 A person who becomes liquidator of the company in place of the interim liquidator shall, unless he is appointed by the court, forthwith notify the court of that fact. Choice of liquidator by creditors and contributories. 139 1 This section applies where a company is being wound up by the court and nominations are sought from the company's creditors and contributories for the purpose of choosing a person to be liquidator of the company. 2 The creditors and the contributories may in accordance with the rules nominate a person to be liquidator. 3 The liquidator shall be the person nominated by the creditors or, where no person has been so nominated, the person (if any) nominated by the contributories. 4 In the case of different persons being nominated, any contributory or creditor may, within 7 days after the date on which the nomination was made by the creditors, apply to the court for an order either— a appointing the person nominated as liquidator by the contributories to be a liquidator instead of, or jointly with, the person nominated by the creditors; or b appointing some other person to be liquidator instead of the person nominated by the creditors. Appointment by the court following administration or voluntary arrangement. 140 1 Where a winding-up order is made immediately upon the appointment of an administrator ceasing to have effect, the court may appoint as liquidator of the company the person whose appointment as administrator has ceased to have effect. 2 Where a winding-up order is made at a time when there is a supervisor of a voluntary arrangement approved in relation to the company under Part I, the court may appoint as liquidator of the company the person who is the supervisor at the time when the winding-up order is made. 3 Where the court makes an appointment under this section, the official receiver does not become the liquidator as otherwise provided by section 136(2), and section 136(5)(a) and (b) does not apply. Liquidation committees Liquidation committee (England and Wales). 141 1 This section applies where a winding up order has been made by the court in England and Wales. 2 If both the company's creditors and the company's contributories decide that a liquidation committee should be established, a liquidation committee is to be established in accordance with the rules. 3 If only the company's creditors, or only the company's contributories, decide that a liquidation committee should be established, a liquidation committee is to be established in accordance with the rules unless the court orders otherwise. 3A A “liquidation committee” is a committee having such functions as are conferred on it by or under this Act. 3B The liquidator must seek a decision from the company's creditors and contributories as to whether a liquidation committee should be established if requested, in accordance with the rules, to do so by one-tenth in value of the company's creditors. 3C Subsection (3B) does not apply where the liquidator is the official receiver. 4 The liquidation committee is not to be able or required to carry out its functions at any time when the official receiver is liquidator; but at any such time its functions are vested in the Secretary of State except to the extent that the rules otherwise provide. 5 Where there is for the time being no liquidation committee, and the liquidator is a person other than the official receiver, the functions of such a committee are vested in the Secretary of State except to the extent that the rules otherwise provide. Liquidation committee (Scotland). 142 1 This section applies where a winding up order has been made by the court in Scotland. 2 If both the company's creditors and the company's contributories decide that a liquidation committee should be established, a liquidation committee is to be established in accordance with the rules. 3 If only the company's creditors, or only the company's contributories, decide that a liquidation committee should be established, a liquidation committee is to be established in accordance with the rules unless the court orders otherwise. 3A A “liquidation committee” is a committee having such functions as are conferred on it by or under this Act. 4 A liquidator appointed by the court other than under section 139(4)(a) must seek a decision from the company's creditors and contributories as to whether a liquidation committee should be established if requested, in accordance with the rules, to do so by one-tenth in value of the company's creditors. 5 Where in the case of any winding up there is for the time being no liquidation committee, the functions of such a committee are vested in the court except to the extent that the rules otherwise provide. 6 A “liquidation committee” is a committee having the powers and duties conferred and imposed on it by this Act, and such of the powers and duties of commissioners in a sequestration as may be conferred and imposed on such committees by the rules. The liquidator’s functions General functions in winding up by the court. 143 1 The functions of the liquidator of a company which is being wound up by the court are to secure that the assets of the company are got in, realised and distributed to the company’s creditors and, if there is a surplus, to the persons entitled to it. 2 It is the duty of the liquidator of a company which is being wound up by the court in England and Wales, if he is not the official receiver— a to furnish the official receiver with such information, b to produce to the official receiver, and permit inspection by the official receiver of, such books, papers and other records, and c to give the official receiver such other assistance, as the official receiver may reasonably require for the purposes of carrying out his functions in relation to the winding up. Custody of company’s property. 144 1 When a winding-up order has been made, or where a provisional liquidator has been appointed, the liquidator or the provisional liquidator (as the case may be) shall take into his custody or under his control all the property and things in action to which the company is or appears to be entitled. 2 In a winding up by the court in Scotland, if and so long as there is no liquidator, all the property of the company is deemed to be in the custody of the court. Vesting of company property in liquidator. 145 1 When a company is being wound up by the court, the court may on the application of the liquidator by order direct that all or any part of the property of whatsoever description belonging to the company or held by trustees on its behalf shall vest in the liquidator by his official name; and thereupon the property to which the order relates vests accordingly. 2 The liquidator may, after giving such indemnity (if any) as the court may direct, bring or defend in his official name any action or other legal proceeding which relates to that property or which it is necessary to bring or defend for the purpose of effectually winding up the company and recovering its property. Final account 146 1 This section applies where a company is being wound up by the court and the liquidator is not the official receiver. 2 If it appears to the liquidator that the winding up of the company is for practical purposes complete the liquidator must make up an account of the winding up, showing how it has been conducted and the company's property has been disposed of. 3 The liquidator must— a send a copy of the account to the company's creditors (other than opted-out creditors), and b give the company's creditors (other than opted-out creditors) a notice explaining the effect of section 174(4)(d) and how they may object to the liquidator's release. 4 The liquidator must during the relevant period send to the court and the registrar of companies— a a copy of the account, and b a statement of whether any of the company's creditors objected to the liquidator's release. 5 The relevant period is the period of 7 days beginning with the day after the last day of the period prescribed by the rules as the period within which the creditors may object to the liquidator's release. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Official receiver’s duty to send statement to registrar about other proceedings 146A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General powers of court Power to stay or sist winding up. 147 1 The court may at any time after an order for winding up, on the application either of the liquidator or the official receiver or any creditor or contributory, and on proof to the satisfaction of the court that all proceedings in the winding up ought to be stayed or sisted, make an order staying or sisting the proceedings, either altogether or for a limited time, on such terms and conditions as the court thinks fit. 2 The court may, before making an order, require the official receiver to furnish to it a report with respect to any facts or matters which are in his opinion relevant to the application. 3 A copy of every order made under this section shall forthwith be forwarded by the company, or otherwise as may be prescribed, to the registrar of companies, who shall enter it in his records relating to the company. Settlement of list of contributories and application of assets. 148 1 As soon as may be after making a winding-up order, the court shall settle a list of contributories, with power to rectify the register of members in all cases where rectification is required . . . , and shall cause the company’s assets to be collected, and applied in discharge of its liabilities. 2 If it appears to the court that it will not be necessary to make calls on or adjust the rights of contributories, the court may dispense with the settlement of a list of contributories. 3 In settling the list, the court shall distinguish between persons who are contributories in their own right and persons who are contributories as being representatives of or liable for the debts of others. Debts due from contributory to company. 149 1 The court may, at any time after making a winding-up order, make an order on any contributory for the time being on the list of contributories to pay, in manner directed by the order, any money due from him (or from the estate of the person who he represents) to the company, exclusive of any money payable by him or the estate by virtue of any call . . . . 2 The court in making such an order may— a in the case of an unlimited company, allow to the contributory by way of set-off any money due to him or the estate which he represents from the company on any independent dealing or contract with the company, but not any money due to him as a member of the company in respect of any dividend or profit, and b in the case of a limited company, make to any director or manager whose liability is unlimited or to his estate the like allowance. 3 In the case of any company, whether limited or unlimited, when all the creditors are paid in full (together with interest at the official rate) any money due on any account whatever to a contributory from the company may be allowed to him by way of set-off against any subsequent call. Power to make calls. 150 1 The court may, at any time after making a winding-up order, and either before or after it has ascertained the sufficiency of the company’s assets, make calls on all or any of the contributories for the time being settled on the list of the contributories to the extent of their liability, for payment of any money which the court considers necessary to satisfy the company’s debts and liabilities, and the expenses of winding up, and for the adjustment of the rights of the contributories among themselves, and make an order for payment of any calls so made. 2 In making a call the court may take into consideration the probability that some of the contributories may partly or wholly fail to pay it. Payment into bank of money due to company. 151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order on contributory to be conclusive evidence. 152 1 An order made by the court on a contributory is conclusive evidence that the money (if any) thereby appearing to be due or ordered to be paid is due, but subject to any right of appeal. 2 All other pertinent matters stated in the order are to be taken as truly stated as against all persons and in all proceedings except proceedings in Scotland against the heritable estate of a deceased contributory; and in that case the order is only prima facie evidence for the purpose of charging his heritable estate, unless his heirs or legatees of heritage were on the list of contributories at the time of the order being made. Power to exclude creditors not proving in time. 153 The court may fix a time or times within which creditors are to prove their debts or claims or to be excluded from the benefit of any distribution made before those debts are proved. Adjustment of rights of contributories. 154 The court shall adjust the rights of the contributories among themselves and distribute any surplus among the persons entitled to it. Inspection of books by creditors, etc. 155 1 The court may, at any time after making a winding-up order, make such order for inspection of the company’s books and papers by creditors and contributories as the court thinks just; and any books and papers in the company’s possession may be inspected by creditors and contributories accordingly, but not further or otherwise. 2 Nothing in this section excludes or restricts any statutory rights of a government department or person acting under the authority of a government department. 3 For the purposes of subsection (2) above, references to a government department shall be construed as including references to any part of the Scottish Administration. Payment of expenses of winding up. 156 The court may, in the event of the assets being insufficient to satisfy the liabilities, make an order as to the payment out of the assets of the expenses incurred in the winding up in such order of priority as the court thinks just. Attendance at company meetings (Scotland). 157 In the winding up by the court of a company registered in Scotland, the court has power to require the attendance of any officer of the company at any meeting of creditors or of contributories, or of a liquidation committee, for the purpose of giving information as to the trade, dealings, affairs or property of the company. Power to arrest absconding contributory. 158 The court, at any time either before or after making a winding-up order, on proof of probable cause for believing that a contributory is about to quit the United Kingdom or otherwise to abscond or to remove or conceal any of his property for the purpose of evading payment of calls, may cause the contributory to be arrested and his books and papers and moveable personal property to be seized and him and them to be kept safely until such time as the court may order. Powers of court to be cumulative. 159 Powers conferred on the court by this Act are in addition to, and not in restriction of, any existing powers of instituting proceedings against a contributory or debtor of the company, or the estate of any contributory or debtor, for the recovery of any call or other sums. Delegation of powers to liquidator (England and Wales). 160 1 Provision may be made by rules for enabling or requiring all or any of the powers and duties conferred and imposed on the court in England and Wales ... in respect of the following matters— a the seeking of decisions on any matter from creditors and contributories, b the settling of lists of contributories and the rectifying of the register of members where required, and the collection and application of the assets, c the payment, delivery, conveyance, surrender or transfer of money, property, books or papers to the liquidator, d the making of calls, e the fixing of a time within which debts and claims must be proved, to be exercised or performed by the liquidator as an officer of the court, and subject to the court’s control. 2 But the liquidator shall not, without the special leave of the court, rectify the register of members, and shall not make any call without either that special leave or the sanction of the liquidation committee. Enforcement of, and appeal from, orders Orders for calls on contributories (Scotland). 161 1 In Scotland, where an order, interlocutor or decree has been made for winding up a company by the court, it is competent to the court, on production by the liquidators of a list certified by them of the names of the contributories liable in payment of any calls, and of the amount due by each contributory, and of the date when that amount became due, to pronounce forthwith a decree against those contributories for payment of the sums so certified to be due, with interest from that date until payment (at 5 per cent. per annum) in the same way and to the same effect as if they had severally consented to registration for execution, on a charge of 6 days, of a legal obligation to pay those calls and interest. 2 The decree may be extracted immediately, and no suspension of it is competent, except on caution or consignation, unless with special leave of the court. Appeals from orders in Scotland. 162 1 Subject to the provision of this section and to rules of court, an appeal from any order or decision made or given in the winding up of a company by the court in Scotland under this Act lies in the same manner and subject to the same conditions as an appeal from an order or decision of the court in cases within its ordinary jurisdiction. 2 In regard to orders of judgments pronounced by the judge acting as vacation judge in pursuance of section 4 of the Administration of Justice (Scotland) Act 1933 — a none of the orders specified in Part I of Schedule 3 to this Act are subject to review, reduction, suspension or stay of execution, and b every other order or judgment (except as mentioned below) may be submitted to review by the Inner House by reclaiming motion enrolled within 14 days from the date of the order or judgment. 3 However, an order being one of those specified in Part II of that Schedule shall, from the date of the order and notwithstanding that it has been submitted to review as above, be carried out and receive effect until the Inner House have disposed of the matter. 4 In regard to orders or judgments pronounced in Scotland by a Lord Ordinary before whom proceedings in a winding up are being taken, any such order or judgment may be submitted to review by the Inner House by reclaiming motion enrolled within 14 days from its date; but should it not be so submitted to review during session, the provisions of this section in regard to orders or judgments pronounced by the judge acting as vacation judge apply. 5 Nothing in this section affects provisions of the Companies Acts or this Act in reference to decrees in Scotland for payment of calls in the winding up of companies, whether voluntary or by the court. Chapter VII Liquidators Preliminary Style and title of liquidators. 163 The liquidator of a company shall be described— a where a person other than the official receiver is liquidator, by the style of “the liquidator” of the particular company, or b where the official receiver is liquidator, by the style of “the official receiver and liquidator” of the particular company; and in neither case shall he be described by an individual name. Corrupt inducement affecting appointment. 164 A person who gives, or agrees or offers to give, to any member or creditor of a company any valuable consideration with a view to securing his own appointment or nomination, or to securing or preventing the appointment or nomination of some person other than himself, as the company’s liquidator is liable to a fine. Liquidator’s powers and duties Voluntary winding up. 165 1 This section has effect where a company is being wound up voluntarily, but subject to section 166 below in the case of a creditor’s voluntary winding up. 2 The liquidator may exercise any of the powers specified in Parts 1 to 3 of Schedule 4. 4 The liquidator may— a exercise the court’s power of settling a list of contributories (which list is prima facie evidence of the liability of the persons named in it to be contributories), b exercise the court’s power of making calls, c summon general meetings of the company for the purpose of obtaining its sanction by special resolution or for any other purpose he may think fit. 5 The liquidator shall pay the company’s debts and adjust the rights of the contributories among themselves. 6 Where the liquidator in exercise of the powers conferred on him by this Act disposes of any property of the company to a person who is connected with the company (within the meaning of section 249 in Part VII), he shall, if there is for the time being a liquidation committee, give notice to the committee of that exercise of his powers. Creditors’ voluntary winding up. 166 1 This section applies where, in the case of a creditors’ voluntary winding up, a liquidator has been nominated by the company. 1A The exercise by the liquidator of the power specified in paragraph 6 of Schedule 4 to this Act (power to sell any of the company's property) shall not be challengeable on the ground of any prior inhibition. 2 The powers conferred on the liquidator by section 165 shall not be exercised, except with the sanction of the court, before— a the company's creditors under section 100 nominate a person to be liquidator, or b the procedure by which the company's creditors were to have made such a nomination concludes without a nomination having been made. 3 Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to the power of the liquidator— a to take into his custody or under his control all the property to which the company is or appears to be entitled; b to dispose of perishable goods and other goods the value of which is likely to diminish if they are not immediately disposed of; and c to do all such other things as may be necessary for the protection of the company’s assets. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 If the directors fail to comply with— a section 99(1), (2) or (2A), or b section 100(1B), the liquidator shall, within 7 days of the relevant day, apply to the court for directions as to the manner in which that default is to be remedied. 6 “ The relevant day ” means the day on which the liquidator was nominated by the company or the day on which he first became aware of the default, whichever is the later. 7 If the liquidator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine. Winding up by the court. 167 1 Where a company is being wound up by the court, the liquidator may exercise any of the powers specified in Parts 1 to 3 of Schedule 4. 2 Where the liquidator (not being the official receiver), in exercise of the powers conferred on him by this Act— a disposes of any property of the company to a person who is connected with the company (within the meaning of section 249 in Part VII) or b employs a solicitor to assist him in the carrying out of his functions, he shall, if there is for the time being a liquidation committee, give notice to the committee of that exercise of his powers. 3 The exercise by the liquidator in a winding up by the court of the powers conferred by this section is subject to the control of the court, and any creditor or contributory may apply to the court with respect to any exercise or proposed exercise of any of those powers. Supplementary powers (England and Wales). 168 1 This section applies in the case of a company which is being wound up by the court in England and Wales. 2 The liquidator may seek a decision on any matter from the company's creditors or contributories; and must seek a decision on a matter— a from the company's creditors, if requested to do so by one-tenth in value of the creditors; b from the company's contributories, if requested to do so by one-tenth in value of the contributories. 3 The liquidator may apply to the court (in the prescribed manner) for directions in relation to any particular matter arising in the winding up. 4 Subject to the provisions of this Act, the liquidator shall use his own discretion in the management of the assets and their distribution among the creditors. 5 If any person is aggrieved by an act or decision of the liquidator, that person may apply to the court; and the court may confirm, reverse or modify the act or decision complained of, and make such order in the case as it thinks just. 5A Where at any time after a winding-up petition has been presented to the court against any person (including an insolvent partnership or other body which may be wound up under Part V of the Act as an unregistered company), whether by virtue of the provisions of the Insolvent Partnerships Order 1994 or not, the attention of the court is drawn to the fact that the person in question is a member of an insolvent partnership, the court may make an order as to the future conduct of the insolvency proceedings and any such order may apply any provisions of that Order with any necessary modifications. 5B Any order or directions under subsection (5A) may be made or given on the application of the official receiver, any responsible insolvency practitioner, the trustee of the partnership or any other interested person and may include provisions as to the administration of the joint estate of the partnership, and in particular how it and the separate estate of any member are to be administered. 5C Where the court makes an order for the winding up of an insolvent partnership under— a section 72(1)(a) of the Financial Services Act 1986; b section 92(1)(a) of the Banking Act 1987; or c section 367(3)(a) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, the court may make an order as to the future conduct of the winding up proceedings, and any such order may apply any provisions of the Insolvent Partnerships Order 1994 with any necessary modifications. Supplementary powers (Scotland). 169 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 In a winding up by the court in Scotland, the liquidator has (subject to the rules) the same powers as a trustee on a bankrupt estate. Enforcement of liquidator’s duty to make returns, etc. 170 1 If a liquidator who has made any default— a in filing, delivering or making any return, account or other document, or b in giving any notice which he is by law required to file, deliver, make or give, fails to make good the default within 14 days after the service on him of a notice requiring him to do so, the court has the following powers. 2 On an application made by any creditor or contributory of the company, or by the registrar of companies, the court may make an order directing the liquidator to make good the default within such time as may be specified in the order. 3 The court’s order may provide that all costs of and incidental to the application shall be borne by the liquidator. 4 Nothing in this section prejudices the operation of any enactment imposing penalties on a liquidator in respect of any such default as is mentioned above. Removal; vacation of office Removal, etc. (voluntary winding up). 171 1 This section applies with respect to the removal from office and vacation of office of the liquidator of a company which is being wound up voluntarily. 2 Subject to the next subsection, the liquidator may be removed from office only by an order of the court or— a in the case of a members’ voluntary winding up, by a general meeting of the company summoned specially for that puropose, or b in the case of a creditors’ voluntary winding up, by a decision of the company's creditors made by a qualifying decision procedure instigated specially for that purpose in accordance with the rules. 3 Where the liquidator in a members' voluntary winding up was appointed by the court under section 108, a meeting such as is mentioned in subsection (2)(a) shall be summoned only if— a the liquidator thinks fit, b the court so directs, or c the meeting is requested in accordance with the rules by members representing not less than one-half of the total voting rights of all the members having at the date of the request a right to vote at the meeting. 3A Where the liquidator in a creditors' voluntary winding up was appointed by the court under section 108, a qualifying decision procedure such as is mentioned in subsection (2)(b) is to be instigated only if— a the liquidator thinks fit, b the court so directs, or c it is requested in accordance with the rules by not less than one-half in value of the company's creditors. 4 A liquidator shall vacate office if he ceases to be a person who is qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company. 5 A liquidator may, in the prescribed circumstances, resign his office by giving notice of his resignation to the registrar of companies. 6 In the case of a members' voluntary winding up where the liquidator has produced an account of the winding up under section 94 (final account), the liquidator vacates office as soon as the liquidator has complied with section 94(3) (requirement to send final account to registrar). 7 In the case of a creditors' voluntary winding up where the liquidator has produced an account of the winding up under section 106 (final account), the liquidator vacates office as soon as the liquidator has complied with section 106(3) (requirement to send final account etc. to registrar). Removal, etc. (winding up by the court). 172 1 This section applies with respect to the removal from office and vacation of office of the liquidator of a company which is being wound up by the court, or of a provisional liquidator. 2 Subject as follows, the liquidator may be removed from office only by an order of the court or by a decision of the company's creditors made by a qualifying decision procedure instigated specially for that purpose in accordance with the rules; and a provisional liquidator may be removed from office only by an order of the court. 3 Where— a the official receiver is liquidator otherwise than in succession under section 136(3) to a person who held office as a result of a nomination by ... the company’s creditors or contributories, or b the liquidator was appointed by the court otherwise than under section 139(4)(a) or 140(1), or was appointed by the Secretary of State, a qualifying decision procedure such as is mentioned in subsection (2) shall be instigated only if the liquidator thinks fit, the court so directs, or it is requested, in accordance with the rules, by not less than one-quarter, in value, of the creditors. 4 If appointed by the Secretary of State, the liquidator may be removed from office by a direction of the Secretary of State. 5 A liquidator or provisional liquidator, not being the official receiver, shall vacate office if he ceases to be a person who is qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company. 6 A liquidator may, in the prescribed circumstances, resign his office by giving notice of his resignation to the court. 7 Where an order is made under section 204 (early dissolution in Scotland) for the dissolution of the company, the liquidator shall vacate office when the dissolution of the company takes effect in accordance with that section. 8 Where the liquidator has produced an account of the winding up under section 146 (final account), the liquidator vacates office as soon as the liquidator has complied with section 146(4) (requirement to send account etc. to registrar and to court). 9 Subsection (10) applies where, immediately before a liquidator gives notice to the court and the registrar under subsection (8) (or, where the liquidator gives notice to the court and the registrar on different days, immediately before the liquidator gives the first of those notices), there are EU insolvency proceedings open in respect of the company in one or more other member States. 10 The liquidator must send to the court and the registrar, with the notice, a statement— a identifying those proceedings, b identifying the member State liquidator appointed in each of those proceedings, and c indicating, in relation to each of those member State liquidators, whether that member State liquidator consents to the company being dissolved. Release of liquidator Release (voluntary winding up). 173 1 This section applies with respect to the release of the liquidator of a company which is being wound up voluntarily. 2 A person who has ceased to be a liquidator shall have his release with effect from the following time, that is to say— a in the following cases, the time at which notice is given to the registrar of companies in accordance with the rules that the person has ceased to hold office— i the person has been removed from office by a general meeting of the company, ii the person has been removed from office by a decision of the company's creditors and the company's creditors have not decided against his release, iii the person has died; b in the following cases, such time as the Secretary of State may, on the application of the person, determine— i the person has been removed from office by a decision of the company's creditors and the company's creditors have decided against his release, ii the person has been removed from office by the court, iii the person has vacated office under section 171(4); c in the case of a person who has resigned, such time as may be prescribed; d in the case of a person who has vacated office under subsection (6) of section 171, the time at which he vacated office; e in the case of a person who has vacated office under section 171(7)— i if any of the company's creditors objected to the person's release before the end of the period for so objecting prescribed by the rules, such time as the Secretary of State may, on an application by that person, determine, and ii otherwise, the time at which the person vacated office. 2A Where the person is removed from office by a decision of the company's creditors, any decision of the company's creditors as to whether the person should have his release must be made by a qualifying decision procedure. 3 In the application of subsection (2) to the winding up of a company registered in Scotland, the references to a determination by the Secretary of State as to the time from which a person who has ceased to be liquidator shall have his release are to be read as references to such a determination by the Accountant of Court. 4 Where a liquidator has his release under subsection (2), he is, with effect from the time specified in that subsection, discharged from all liability both in respect of acts or omissions of his in the winding up and otherwise in relation to his conduct as liquidator. But nothing in this section prevents the exercise, in relation to a person who has had his release under subsection (2), of the court’s powers under section 212 of this Act (summary remedy against delinquent directors, liquidators, etc.). Release (winding up by the court). 174 1 This section applies with respect to the release of the liquidator of a company which is being wound up by the court, or of a provisional liquidator. 2 Where the official receiver has ceased to be liquidator and a person becomes liquidator in his stead, the official receiver has his release with effect from the following time, that is to say— a in a case where that person was nominated by the company's creditors or contributories, or was appointed by the Secretary of State, the time at which the official receiver gives notice to the court that he has been replaced; b in a case where that person is appointed by the court, such time as the court may determine. 3 If the official receiver while he is a liquidator gives notice to the Secretary of State that the winding up is for practical purposes complete, he has his release with effect from such time as the Secretary of State may determine. 4 A person other than the official receiver who has ceased to be a liquidator has his release with effect from the following time, that is to say— a in the following cases, the time at which notice is given to the court in accordance with the rules that the person has ceased to hold office— i the person has been removed from office by a decision of the company's creditors and the company's creditors have not decided against his release, ii the person has died; b in the following cases, such time as the Secretary of State may, on the application of the person, determine— i the person has been removed from office by a decision of the company's creditors and the company's creditors have decided against his release; ii the person has been removed from office by the court or the Secretary of State; iii the person has vacated office under section 172(5) or (7); c in the case of a person who has resigned, such time as may be prescribed; d in the case of a person who has vacated office under section 172(8)— i if any of the company's creditors objected to the person's release before the end of the period for so objecting prescribed by the rules, such time as the Secretary of State may, on an application by that person, determine, and ii otherwise, the time at which the person vacated office. 4ZA Where the person is removed from office by a decision of the company's creditors, any decision of the company's creditors as to whether the person should have his release must be made by a qualifying decision procedure. 4A Where a winding-up order made by the court in England and Wales is rescinded, the person (whether the official receiver or another person) who is the liquidator of the company at the time the order is rescinded has his release with effect from such time as the court may determine. 5 A person who has ceased to hold office as a provisional liquidator has his release with effect from such time as the court may, on an application by him, determine. 6 Where the official receiver or a liquidator or provisional liquidator has his release under this section, he is, with effect from the time specified in the preceding provisions of this section, discharged from all liability both in respect of acts or omissions of his in the winding up and otherwise in relation to his conduct as liquidator or provisional liquidator. But nothing in this section prevents the exercise, in relation to a person who has had his release under this section, of the court’s powers under section 212 (summary remedy against delinquent directors, liquidators, etc.). 7 In the application of this section to a case where the order for winding up has been made by the court in Scotland, the references to a determination by the Secretary of State as to the time from which a person who has ceased to be liquidator has his release are to such a determination by the Accountant of Court. Chapter VIII Provisions of General Application in Winding Up Moratorium: order of priority of payment of debts Moratorium debts etc: priority 174A 1 This section applies where proceedings for the winding up of a company are begun before the end of the period of 12 weeks beginning with the day after the end of any moratorium for the company under Part A1. 2 In the winding up, the following are payable out of the company’s assets (in the order of priority shown) in preference to all other claims— a any prescribed fees or expenses of the official receiver acting in any capacity in relation to the company; b moratorium debts and priority pre-moratorium debts. 3 In subsection (2)(b) “priority pre-moratorium debt” means— a any pre-moratorium debt that is payable in respect of— i the monitor’s remuneration or expenses, ii goods or services supplied during the moratorium, iii rent in respect of a period during the moratorium, or iv wages or salary arising under a contract of employment, so far as relating to a period of employment before or during the moratorium, b any pre-moratorium debt that— i consists of a liability to make a redundancy payment, and ii fell due before or during the moratorium, and c any pre-moratorium debt that— i arises under a contract or other instrument involving financial services, ii fell due before or during the moratorium, and iii is not relevant accelerated debt (see subsection (4)). 4 For the purposes of subsection (3)(c)— “relevant accelerated debt” means any pre-moratorium debt that fell due during the relevant period by reason of the operation of, or the exercise of rights under, an acceleration or early termination clause in a contract or other instrument involving financial services; “the relevant period” means the period— beginning with the day on which the statement under section A6(1)(e) is made, and ending with the last day of the moratorium. 5 The rules may make provision as to the order in which the debts mentioned in subsection (2)(b) rank among themselves in a case where the assets of the company are insufficient to meet them in full. 6 The Secretary of State may by regulations made by statutory instrument amend this section for the purposes of changing the definition of “moratorium debt” or “priority pre-moratorium debt” in this section. 7 Regulations under subsection (6) may make consequential, supplementary, incidental or transitional provision or savings. 8 A statutory instrument containing regulations under subsection (6) may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before and approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament. 9 For the purposes of this section proceedings for the winding up of a company are begun when— a a winding-up petition is presented, or b a resolution for voluntary winding up is passed. 10 Any rules made under section A18(4) (meaning of supply of goods or services) apply also for the purposes of subsection (3)(a)(ii) of this section. 11 In this section— “acceleration or early termination clause”, in relation to a contract or other instrument involving financial services, means a provision of the contract or other instrument— under which, on the happening of an event— a debt or other liability falls due earlier than it otherwise would, or a debt or other liability is terminated and replaced by another debt or liability, or which confers on a party a right which, if exercised, will result in — a debt or other liability falling due earlier than it otherwise would, or a debt or other liability being terminated and replaced by another debt or liability; “contract or other instrument involving financial services” has the same meaning as it has for the purposes of section A18 (see Schedule ZA2); “monitor’s remuneration or expenses” has the meaning given by section A18; “moratorium debt” has the meaning given by section A53; “pre-moratorium debt” has the meaning given by section A53; “redundancy payment” has the meaning given by section A18; “wages or salary” has the meaning given by section A18. Preferential debts Preferential debts (general provision). 175 1 In a winding up the company’s preferential debts ... shall be paid in priority to all other debts after the payment of— a any liabilities to which section 174A applies, and b expenses of the winding up. 1A Ordinary preferential debts rank equally among themselves ... and shall be paid in full, unless the assets are insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions. 1B Secondary preferential debts rank equally among themselves after the ordinary preferential debts and shall be paid in full, unless the assets are insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions. 2 Preferential debts— a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b so far as the assets of the company available for payment of general creditors are insufficient to meet them, have priority over the claims of holders of debentures secured by, or holders of, any floating charge created by the company, and shall be paid accordingly out of any property comprised in or subject to that charge. 3 In this section “preferential debts”, “ordinary preferential debts” and “secondary preferential debts” each has the meaning given in section 386 in Part 12. Preferential charge on goods distrained , etc . 176 1 This section applies where a company is being wound up by the court in England and Wales, and is without prejudice to section 128 (avoidance of attachments, etc.). 2 Subsection (2A) applies where— a any person (whether or not a landlord or person entitled to rent) has distrained upon the goods or effects of the company, or b Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs has been paid any amount from an account of the company under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction from accounts), in the period of 3 months ending with the date of the winding-up order. 2A Where this subsection applies— a in a case within subsection (2)(a), the goods or effects, or the proceeds of their sale, and b in a case within subsection (2)(b), the amount in question, is charged for the benefit of the company with the preferential debts of the company to the extent that the company's property is for the time being insufficient for meeting those debts. 3 Where by virtue of a charge under subsection (2A) any person surrenders any goods or effects to a company or makes a payment to a company, that person ranks, in respect of the amount of the proceeds of sale of those goods or effects by the liquidator or (as the case may be) the amount of the payment, as a preferential creditor of the company, except as against so much of the company’s property as is available for the payment of preferential creditors by virtue of the surrender or payment. Non-preferential debts Non-preferential debts of financial institutions 176AZA 1 This section applies in the winding up of a company which is a relevant financial institution. 2 The company’s ordinary non-preferential debts shall be paid in priority to its secondary non-preferential debts. 3 The company’s secondary non-preferential debts— a shall be paid in priority to its tertiary non-preferential debts, and b rank equally among themselves after the ordinary non-preferential debts and shall be paid in full, unless the assets are insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions. 4 See section 387A for definitions relevant to this section. Property subject to floating charge Payment of expenses of winding up (England and Wales) 176ZA 1 The expenses of winding up in England and Wales, so far as the assets of the company available for payment of general creditors are insufficient to meet them, have priority over any claims to property comprised in or subject to any floating charge created by the company and shall be paid out of any such property accordingly. 2 In subsection (1)— a the reference to assets of the company available for payment of general creditors does not include any amount made available under section 176A(2)(a); b the reference to claims to property comprised in or subject to a floating charge is to the claims of— i the holders of debentures secured by, or holders of, the floating charge, and ii any preferential creditors entitled to be paid out of that property in priority to them. 3 Provision may be made by rules restricting the application of subsection (1), in such circumstances as may be prescribed, to expenses authorised or approved— a by the holders of debentures secured by, or holders of, the floating charge and by any preferential creditors entitled to be paid in priority to them, or b by the court. 4 References in this section to the expenses of the winding up are to all expenses properly incurred in the winding up, including the remuneration of the liquidator. Application of proceeds of office-holder claims 176ZB 1 This section applies where— a there is a floating charge (whether created before or after the coming into force of this section) which relates to property of a company which— i is in administration, or ii has gone into liquidation; and b the administrator or the liquidator (referred to in this section as “ the office-holder ”) has— i brought a claim under any provision mentioned in subsection (3), or ii made an assignment (or, in Scotland, assignation) in relation to a right of action under any such provision under section 246ZD. 2 The proceeds of the claim or assignment (or, in Scotland, assignation) are not to be treated as part of the company's net property, that is to say the amount of its property which would be available for satisfaction of claims of holders of debentures secured by, or holders of, any floating charge created by the company. 3 The provisions are— a section 213 or 246ZA (fraudulent trading); b section 214 or 246ZB (wrongful trading); c section 238 (transactions at an undervalue (England and Wales)); d section 239 (preferences (England and Wales)); e section 242 (gratuitous alienations (Scotland)); f section 243 (unfair preferences (Scotland)); g section 244 (extortionate credit transactions). 4 Subsection (2) does not apply to a company if or in so far as it is disapplied by— a a voluntary arrangement in respect of the company, or b a compromise or arrangement agreed under Part 26 or 26A of the Companies Act 2006 (arrangements and reconstructions). Share of assets for unsecured creditors 176A 1 This section applies where a floating charge relates to property of a company— a which has gone into liquidation, b which is in administration, c of which there is a provisional liquidator, or d of which there is a receiver. 2 The liquidator, administrator or receiver— a shall make a prescribed part of the company’s net property available for the satisfaction of unsecured debts, and b shall not distribute that part to the proprietor of a floating charge except in so far as it exceeds the amount required for the satisfaction of unsecured debts. 3 Subsection (2) shall not apply to a company if— a the company’s net property is less than the prescribed minimum, and b the liquidator, administrator or receiver thinks that the cost of making a distribution to unsecured creditors would be disproportionate to the benefits. 4 Subsection (2) shall also not apply to a company if or in so far as it is disapplied by— a a voluntary arrangement in respect of the company, or b a compromise or arrangement agreed under Part 26 or 26A of the Companies Act 2006 (arrangements and reconstructions) . 5 Subsection (2) shall also not apply to a company if— a the liquidator, administrator or receiver applies to the court for an order under this subsection on the ground that the cost of making a distribution to unsecured creditors would be disproportionate to the benefits, and b the court orders that subsection (2) shall not apply. 6 In subsections (2) and (3) a company’s net property is the amount of its property which would, but for this section, be available for satisfaction of claims of holders of debentures secured by, or holders of, any floating charge created by the company. 7 An order under subsection (2) prescribing part of a company’s net property may, in particular, provide for its calculation— a as a percentage of the company’s net property, or b as an aggregate of different percentages of different parts of the company’s net property. 8 An order under this section— a must be made by statutory instrument, and b shall be subject to annulment pursuant to a resolution of either House of Parliament. 9 In this section— “ floating charge ” means a charge which is a floating charge on its creation and which is created after the first order under subsection (2)(a) comes into force, and “ prescribed ” means prescribed by order by the Secretary of State. 10 An order under this section may include transitional or incidental provision. Special managers Power to appoint special manager. 177 1 Where a company has gone into liquidation or a provisional liquidator has been appointed, the court may, on an application under this section, appoint any person to be the special manager of the business or property of the company. 2 The application may be made by the liquidator or provisional liquidator in any case where it appears to him that the nature of the business or property of the company, or the interests of the company’s creditors or contributories or members generally, require the appointment of another to manage the company’s business or property. 3 The special manager has such powers as may be entrusted to him by the court. 4 The court’s power to entrust powers to the special manager includes power to direct that any provision of this Act that has effect in relation to the provisional liquidator or liquidator of a company shall have the like effect in relation to the special manager for the purposes of the carrying out by him of any of the functions of the provisional liquidator or liquidator. 5 The special manager shall— a give such security or, in Scotland, caution, as may be prescribed; b prepare and keep such accounts as may be prescribed; and c produce those accounts in accordance with the rules to the Secretary of State or to such other persons as may be prescribed. Disclaimer (England and Wales only) Power to disclaim onerous property. 178 1 This and the next two sections apply to a company that is being wound up in England and Wales. 2 Subject as follows, the liquidator may, by the giving of the prescribed notice, disclaim any onerous property and may do so notwithstanding that he has taken possession of it, endeavoured to sell it, or otherwise exercised rights of ownership in relation to it. 3 The following is onerous property for the purposes of this section— a any unprofitable contract, and b any other property of the company which is unsaleable or not readily saleable or is such that it may give rise to a liability to pay money or perform any other onerous act. 4 A disclaimer under this section— a operates so as to determine, as from the date of the disclaimer, the rights, interests and liabilities of the company in or in respect of the property disclaimed; but b does not, except so far as is necessary for the purpose of releasing the company from any liability, affect the rights or liabilities of any other person. 5 A notice of disclaimer shall not be given under this section in respect of any property if— a a person interested in the property has applied in writing to the liquidator or one of his predecessors as liquidator requiring the liquidator or that predecessor to decide whether he will disclaim or not, and b the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which that application was made, or such longer period as the court may allow, has expired without a notice of disclaimer having been given under this section in respect of that property. 6 Any person sustaining loss or damage in consequence of the operation of a disclaimer under this section is deemed a creditor of the company to the extent of the loss or damage and accordingly may prove for the loss or damage in the winding up. Disclaimer of leaseholds. 179 1 The disclaimer under section 178 of any property of a leasehold nature does not take effect unless a copy of the disclaimer has been served (so far as the liquidator is aware of their addresses) on every person claiming under the company as underlessee or mortgagee and either— a no application under section 181 below is made with respect to that property before the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day on which the last notice served under this subsection was served; or b where such an application has been made, the court directs that the disclaimer shall take effect. 2 Where the court gives a direction under subsection (1)(b) it may also, instead of or in addition to any order it makes under section 181, make such orders with respect to fixtures, tenant’s improvements and other matters arising out of the lease as it thinks fit. Land subject to rentcharge. 180 1 The following applies where, in consequence of the disclaimer under section 178 of any land subject to a rentcharge, that land vests by operation of law in the Crown or any other person (referred to in the next subsection as “ the proprietor ”). 2 The proprietor and the successors in title of the proprietor are not subject to any personal liability in respect of any sums becoming due under the rentcharge except sums becoming due after the proprietor, or some person claiming under or through the proprietor, has taken possession or control of the land or has entered into occupation of it. Powers of court (general). 181 1 This section and the next apply where the liquidator has disclaimed property under section 178. 2 An application under this section may be made to the court by— a any person who claims an interest in the disclaimed property, or b any person who is under any liability in respect of the disclaimed property, not being a liability discharged by the disclaimer. 3 Subject as follows, the court may on the application make an order, on such terms as it thinks fit, for the vesting of the disclaimed property in, or for its delivery to— a a person entitled to it or a trustee for such a person, or b a person subject to such a liability as is mentioned in subsection (2)(b) or a trustee for such a person. 4 The court shall not make an order under subsection (3)(b) except where it appears to the court that it would be just to do so for the purpose of compensating the person subject to the liability in respect of the disclaimer. 5 The effect of any order under this section shall be taken into account in assessing for the purpose of section 178(6) the extent of any loss or damage sustained by any person in consequence of the disclaimer. 6 An order under this section vesting property in any person need not be completed by conveyance, assignment or transfer. Powers of court (leaseholds). 182 1 The court shall not make an order under section 181 vesting property of a leasehold nature in any person claiming under the company as underlessee or mortgagee except on terms making that person— a subject to the same liabilities and obligations as the company was subject to under the lease at the commencement of the winding up, or b if the court thinks fit, subject to the same liabilities and obligations as that person would be subject to if the lease had been assigned to him at the commencement of the winding up. 2 For the purposes of an order under section 181 relating to only part of any property comprised in a lease, the requirements of subsection (1) apply as if the lease comprised only the property to which the order relates. 3 Where subsection (1) applies and no person claiming under the company as underlessee or mortgagee is willing to accept an order under section 181 on the terms required by virtue of that subsection, the court may, by order under that section, vest the company’s estate or interest in the property in any person who is liable (whether personally or in a representative capacity, and whether alone or jointly with the company) to perform the lessee’s covenants in the lease. The court may vest that estate and interest in such a person freed and discharged from all estates, incumbrances and interests created by the company. 4 Where subsection (1) applies and a person claiming under the company as underlessee or mortgagee declines to accept an order under section 181, that person is excluded from all interest in the property. Execution, attachment and the Scottish equivalents Effect of execution or attachment (England and Wales). 183 1 Where a creditor has issued execution against the goods or land of a company or has attached any debt due to it, and the company is subsequently wound up, he is not entitled to retain the beneift of the execution or attachment against the liquidator unless he has completed the execution or attachment before the commencement of the winding up. 2 However— a if a creditor has had notice of a meeting having been called at which a resolution for voluntary winding up is to be proposed, the date on which he had notice is substituted, for the purpose of subsection (1), for the date of commencement of the winding up; b a person who purchases in good faith under a sale by the enforcement officer or other officer charged with the execution of the writ any goods of a company on which execution has been levied in all cases acquires a good title to them against the liquidator; and c the rights conferred by subsection (1) on the liquidator may be set aside by the court in favour of the creditor to such extent and subject to such terms as the court thinks fit. 3 For purposes of this Act— a an execution against goods is completed by seizure and sale, or by making of a charging order under section 1 of the Charging Orders Act 1979; b an attachment of a debt is completed by receipt of the debt; and c an execution against land is completed by seizure, by the appointment of a receiver, or by the making of a charging order under section 1 of the Act above-mentioned. 4 In this section “ goods ” includes all chattels personal; and “ enforcement officer ” means an individual who is authorised to act as an enforcement officer under the Courts Act2003 . 4A For the purposes of this section, Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs is to be regarded as having attached a debt due to a company if it has taken action under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction for accounts) as a result of which an amount standing to the credit of an account held by the company is— a subject to arrangements made under paragraph 6(3) of that Schedule, or b the subject of a deduction notice under paragraph 13 of that Schedule. 5 This section does not apply in the case of a winding up in Scotland. Duties of officers charged with execution of writs and other processes (England and Wales). 184 1 The following applies where a company’s goods are taken in execution and, before their sale or the completion of the execution (by the receipt or recovery of the full amount of the levy), notice is served on the enforcement officer, or other officer, charged with execution of the writ or other process, that a provisional liquidator has been appointed or that a winding-up order has been made, or that a resolution for voluntary winding up has been passed. 2 The enforcement officer or other officer shall, on being so required, deliver the goods and any money seized or received in part satisfaction of the execution to the liquidator; but the costs of execution are a first charge on the goods or money so delivered, and the liquidator may sell the goods, or a sufficient part of them for the purpose of satisfying the charge. 3 If under an execution in respect of a judgement for a sum exceeding £500 a company’s goods are sold or money is paid in order to avoid sale, the enforcement officer or other officer shall deduct the costs of the execution from the proceeds of sale or the money paid and retain the balance for 14 days. 4 If within that time notice is served on the enforcement officer or other officer of a petition for the winding up of the company having been presented, or of a meeting having been called at which there is to be proposed a resolution for voluntary winding up, and an order is made or a resolution passed (as the case may be), the enforcement officer or other officer shall pay the balance to the liquidator, who is entitled to retain it as against the execution creditor. 5 The rights conferred by this section on the liquidator may be set aside by the court in favour of the creditor to such extent and subject to such terms as the court thinks fit. 6 In this section, “ goods ” includes all chattels personal; and “ enforcement officer ” means an individual who is authorised to act as an enforcement officer under the Courts Act 2003. 7 The money sum for the time being specified in subsection (3) is subject to increase or reduction by order under section 416 in Part XV. 8 This section does not apply in the case of a winding up in Scotland. Effect of diligence (Scotland) 185 1 In the winding up of a company registered in Scotland, the following provisions of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016— a subsections (3) to (10) of section 23A (effect of sequestration on land attachment) and section 24 (effect of sequestration on diligence generally); and b subsections (6), (7), (10) and (11) of section 109 (management and realisation of estate), apply so far as consistent with this Act, in like manner as they apply in the sequestration of a debtor’s estate, with the substitutions specified below and with any other necessary modifications. 2 The substitutions to be made in those sections of the Act of 2016 are as follows— a for references to the debtor, substitute references to the company; b for references to the sequestration, substitute references to the winding up; c for references to the date of sequestration, substitute references to the commencement of the winding up of the company; and d for references to the permanent trustee, substitute references to the liquidator. 3 In this section, “ the commencement of the winding up of the company ” means, where it is being wound up by the court, the day on which the winding-up order is made. 4 This section, so far as relating to any estate or effects of the company situated in Scotland, applies in the case of a company registered in England and Wales as in the case of one registered in Scotland. Miscellaneous matters Rescission of contracts by the court. 186 1 The court may, on the application of a person who is, as against the liquidator, entitled to the benefit or subject to the burden of a contract made with the company, make an order rescinding the contract on such terms as to payment by or to either party of damages for the non-performance of the contract, or otherwise as the court thinks just. 2 Any damages payable under the order to such a person may be proved by him as a debt in the winding up. Power to make over assets to employees. 187 1 On the winding up of a company (whether by the court or voluntarily), the liquidator may, subject to the following provisions of this section, make any payment which the company has, before the commencement of the winding up, decided to make under section 247 of the Companies Act 2006 (power to provide for employees or former employees on cessation or transfer of business). 2 The liquidator may, after the winding up has commenced, make any such provision as is mentioned in section 247(1) if— a the company's liabilities have been fully satisfied and provision has been made for the expenses of the winding up, b the exercise of the power has been sanctioned by a resolution of the company, and c any requirements of the company's articles as to the exercise of the power conferred by section 247(1) are complied with. 3 Any payment which may be made by a company under this section (that is, a payment after the commencement of its winding up) may be made out of the company’s assets which are available to the members on the winding up. 4 On a winding up by the court, the exercise by the liquidator of his powers under this section is subject to the court’s control, and any creditor or contributory may apply to the court with respect to any exercise or proposed exercise of the power. 5 Subsections (1) and (2) above have effect notwithstanding anything in any rule of law or in section 107 of this Act (property of company after satisfaction of liabilities to be distributed among members). Notification that company is in liquidation. 188 1 When a company is being wound up, whether by the court or voluntarily— a every invoice, order for goods or services , business letter or order form (whether in hard copy, electronic or any other form) issued by or on behalf of the company, or a liquidator of the company or a receiver or manager of the company's property, . . . and b all the company's websites, must contain a statement that the company is being wound up. 2 If default is made in complying with this section, the company and any of the following persons who knowingly and wilfully authorises or permits the default, namely, any officer of the company, any liquidator of the company and any receiver or manager, is liable to a fine. Interest on debts. 189 1 In a winding up interest is payable in accordance with this section on any debt proved in the winding up, including so much of any such debt as represents interest on the remainder. 2 Any surplus remaining after the payment of the debts proved in a winding up shall, before being applied for any other purpose, be applied in paying interest on those debts in respect of the periods during which they have been outstanding since the company went into liquidation. 3 All interest under this section ranks equally, whether or not the debts on which it is payable rank equally. 4 The rate of interest payable under this section in respect of any debt (“ the official rate ” for the purposes of any provision of this Act in which that expression is used) is whichever is the greater of— a the rate specified in section 17of the Judgments Act 1838 on the day on which the company went into liquidation, and b the rate applicable to that debt apart from the winding up. 5 In the application of this section to Scotland— a references to a debt proved in a winding up have effect as references to a claim accepted in a winding up, and b the reference to section 17 of the Judgments Act 1838 has effect as a reference to the rules. Documents exempt from stamp duty. 190 1 In the case of a winding up by the court, or of a creditors’ voluntary winding up, the following has effect as regards exemption from duties chargeable under the enactments relating to stamp duties. 2 If the company is registered in England and Wales, the following documents are exempt from stamp duty— a every assurance relating solely to freehold or leasehold property, or to any estate, right or interest in, any real or personal property, which forms part of the company’s assets and which, after the execution of the assurance, either at law of in equity, is or remains part of those assets, and b every writ, order, certificate, or other instrument or writing relating solely to the property of any company which is being wound up as mentioned in subsection (1), or to any proceeding under such a winding up. “Assurance” here includes deed, conveyance, assignment and surrender. 3 If the company is registered in Scotland, the following documents are exempt from stamp duty— a every conveyance relating solely to property which forms part of the company’s assets and which, after the execution of the conveyance, is or remains the company’s property for the benefit of its creditors, b any articles of roup of sale, submission and every other instrument and writing whatsoever relating solely to the company’s property, and c every deed or writing forming part of the proceedings in the winding up. “Conveyance” here includes assignation, instrument, discharge, writing and deed. Company’s books to be evidence. 191 Where a company is being wound up, all books and papers of the company and of the liquidators are, as between the contributories of the company, prima facie evidence of the truth of all matters purporting to be recorded in them. Information as to pending liquidations. 192 1 If the winding up of a company is not concluded within one year after its commencement, the liquidator shall, at such intervals as may be prescribed, until the winding up is concluded, send to the registrar of companies a statement in the prescribed form and containing the prescribed particulars with respect to the proceedings in, and position of, the liquidation. 2 If a liquidator fails to comply with this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Unclaimed dividends (Scotland). 193 1 The following applies where a company registered in Scotland has been wound up, and is about to be dissolved. 2 The liquidator shall lodge in an appropriate bank or institution as defined in section 228(1) of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 (not being a bank or institution in or of which the liquidator is acting partner, manager, agent or cashier) in the name of the Accountant of Court the whole unclaimed dividends and unapplied or undistributable balances, and the deposit receipts shall be transmitted to the Accountant of Court. 3 The provisions of section 150 of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 (so far as consistent with this Act and the Companies Acts ) apply with any necessary modifications to sums lodged in a bank or institution under this section as they apply to sums deposited under section 148 of the Act first mentioned. Resolutions passed at adjourned meetings. 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Court's powers to ascertain wishes of creditors or contributories. 195 1 The court may— a as to all matters relating to the winding up of a company, have regard to the wishes of the creditors or contributories (as proved to it by any sufficient evidence), and b if it thinks fit, for the purpose of ascertaining those wishes, direct qualifying decision procedures to be instigated or the deemed consent procedure to be used in accordance with any directions given by the court, and appoint a person to report the result to the court . 2 In the case of creditors, regard shall be had to the value of each creditor’s debt. 3 In the case of contributories, regard shall be had to the number of votes conferred on each contributory . . . . Judicial notice of court documents. 196 In all proceedings under this Part, all courts, judges and persons judicially acting, and all officers, judicial or ministerial, of any court, or employed in enforcing the process of any court shall take judicial notice— a of the signature of any officer of the High Court or of the county court in England and Wales, or of the Court of Session or a sheriff court in Scotland, or of the High Court in Northern Ireland, and also b of the official seal or stamp of the several offices of the High Court in England and Wales or Northern Ireland, or of the Court of Session, appended to or impressed on any document made, issued or signed under the provisions of this Act or the Companies Acts , or any official copy of such a document. Commission for receiving evidence. 197 1 When a company is wound up in England and Wales or in Scotland, the court may refer the whole or any part of the examination of witnesses— a to the county court in England and Wales, or b to the sheriff principal for a specified sheriffdom in Scotland, or c to the High Court in Northern Ireland or a specified Northern Ireland County Court, (“ specified ” meaning specified in the order of the winding-up court). 2 Any person exercising jurisdiction as a judge of the court to which the reference is made (or, in Scotland, the sheriff principal to whom it is made) shall then, by virtue of this section, be a commissioner for the purpose of taking the evidence of those witnesses. 3 The judge or sheriff principal has in the matter referred the same power of summoning and examining witnesses, of requiring the production and delivery of documents, of punishing defaults by witnesses, and of allowing costs and expenses to witnesses, as the court which made the winding-up order. These powers are in addition to any which the judge or sheriff principal might lawfully exercise apart from this section. 4 The examination so taken shall be returned or reported to the court which made the order in such manner as that court requests. 5 This section extends to Northern Ireland. Court order for examination of persons in Scotland. 198 1 The court may direct the examination in Scotland of any person for the time being in Scotland (whether a contributory of the company or not), in regard to the trade, dealings, affairs or property of any company in course of being wound up, or of any person being a contributory of the company, so far as the company may be interested by reason of his being a contributory. 2 The order or commission to take the examination shall be directed to the sheriff principal of the sheriffdom in which the person to be examined is residing or happens to be for the time; and the sheriff principal shall summon the person to appear before him at a time and place to be specified in the summons for examination on oath as a witness or as a haver, and to produce any books or papers called for which are in his possession or power. 3 The sheriff principal may take the examination either orally or on written interrogatories, and shall report the same in writing in the usual form to the court, and shall transmit with the report the books and papers produced, if the originals are required and specified by the order or commission, or otherwise copies or extracts authenticated by the sheriff. 4 If a person so summoned fails to appear at the time and place specified, or refuses to be examined or to make the production required, the sheriff principal shall proceed against him as a witness or haver duly cited; and failing to appear or refusing to give evidence or make production may be proceeded against by the law of Scotland. 5 The sheriff principal is entitled to such fees, and the witness is entitled to such allowances, as sheriffs principal when acting as commissioners under appointment from the Court of Session and as witnesses and havers are entitled to in the like cases according to the law and practice of Scotland. 6 If any objection is stated to the sheriff principal by the witness, either on the ground of his incompetency as a witness, or as to the production required, or on any other ground, the sheriff principal may, if he thinks fit, report the objection to the court, and suspend the examination of the witness until it has been disposed of by the court. Costs of application for leave to proceed (Scottish companies). 199 Where a petition or application for leave to proceed with an action or proceeding against a company which is being wound up in Scotland is unopposed and is granted by the court, the costs of the petition or application shall, unless the court otherwise directs, be added to the amount of the petitioner’s or applicant’s claim against the company. Affidavits etc. in United Kingdom and overseas. 200 1 An affidavit required to be sworn under or for the purposes of this Part may be sworn in the United Kingdom, or elsewhere in Her Majesty’s dominions, before any court, judge or person lawfully authorised to take and receive affidavits, or before any of Her Majesty’s consuls or vice-consuls in any place outside Her dominions. 2 All courts, judges, justices, commissioners and persons acting judicially shall take judicial notice of the seal or stamp or signature (as the case may be) of any such court, judge, person, consul or vice-consul attached, appended or subscribed to any such affidavit, or to any other document to be used for the purposes of this Part. Chapter IX Dissolution of Companies After Winding Up Dissolution (voluntary winding up). 201 1 This section applies, in the case of a company wound up voluntarily, where the liquidator has sent to the registrar of companies his final account ... under section 94 (members’ voluntary) or his final account and statement under section 106 (creditors’ voluntary). 2 The registrar on receiving the account , or the account and statement, ... shall forthwith register it or them; and on the expiration of 3 months from the registration of the account the company is deemed to be dissolved .... 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 However, the court may, on the application of the liquidator or any other person who appears to the court to be interested, make an order deferring the date at which the dissolution of the company is to take effect for such time as the court thinks fit. 4 It is the duty of the person on whose application an order of the court under this section is made within 7 days after the making of the order to deliver to the registrar a copy of the order for registration; and if that person fails to do so he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Early dissolution (England and Wales). 202 1 This section applies where an order for the winding up of a company has been made by the court in England and Wales. 2 The official receiver, if— a he is the liquidator of the company, and b it appears to him— i that the realisable assets of the company are insufficient to cover the expenses of the winding up, and ii that the affairs of the company do not require any further investigation, may at any time apply to the registrar of companies for the early dissolution of the company. 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Before making an application under subsection (2) , the official receiver shall give not less than 28 days’ notice of his intention to do so to the company’s creditors , other than opted-out creditors, and contributories and, if there is an administrative receiver of the company, to that receiver. 4 With the giving of that notice the official receiver ceases (subject to any directions under the next section) to be required to perform any duties imposed on him in relation to the company, its creditors or contributories by virtue of any provision of this Act, apart from a duty to make an application under subsection (2) .... 5 On the receipt of the official receivers’ application under subsection (2) ... the registrar shall forthwith register it ... and, at the end of the period of 3 months beginning with the day of the registration of the application, the company shall be dissolved .... 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 However, the Secretary of State may, on the application of the official receiver or any other person who appears to the Secretary of State to be interested, give directions under section 203 at any time before the end of the period in subsection (5) ... . Consequence of notice under s. 202. 203 1 Where a notice has been given under section 202(3), the official receiver or any creditor or contributory of the company, or the administrative receiver of the company (if there is one) may apply to the Secretary of State for directions under this section. 2 The grounds on which that application may be made are— a that the realisable assets of the company are sufficient to cover the expenses of the winding up; b that the affairs of the company do require further investigation; or c that for any other reason the early dissolution of the company is inappropriate. 3 Directions under this section— a are directions making such provision as the Secretary of State thinks fit for enabling the winding up of the company to proceed as if no notice had been given under section 202(3), and b may, in the case of an application under section 202(8) , include a direction deferring the date at which the dissolution of the company is to take effect for such period as the Secretary of State thinks fit. 4 An appeal to the court lies from any decision of the Secretary of State on an application for directions under this section. 5 It is the duty of the person on whose application any directions are given under this section, or in whose favour an appeal with respect to an application for such directions is determined, within 7 days after the giving of the directions or the determination of the appeal, to deliver to the registrar of companies for registration such a copy of the directions or determination as is prescribed. 6 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to deliver a copy as required by subsection (5), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Early dissolution (Scotland). 204 1 This section applies where a winding-up order has been made by the court in Scotland. 2 If after a liquidator has been appointed under section 138 (appointment of liquidator in Scotland) it appears to the liquidator that the realisable assets of the company are insufficient to cover the expenses of the winding up, he may apply the liquidator may at any time apply to the court for an order that the company be dissolved. 3 Where the liquidator makes that application, if the court is satisfied that the realisable assets of the company are insufficient to cover the expenses of the winding up and it appears to the court appropriate to do so, the court shall make an order that the company be dissolved in accordance with this section. 4 A copy of the order shall within 14 days from its date be forwarded by the liquidator to the registrar of companies, who shall forthwith register it; and, at the end of the period of 3 months beginning with the day of the registration of the order, the company shall be dissolved. 4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 The court may, on an application by any person who appears to the court to have an interest, order that the date at which the dissolution of the company is to take effect shall be deferred for such period as the court thinks fit. 6 It is the duty of the person on whose application an order is made under subsection (5), within 7 days after the making of the order, to deliver to the registrar of companies such a copy of the order as is prescribed. 7 If the liquidator without reasonable excuse fails to comply with the requirements of subsection (4), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. 8 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to deliver a copy as required by subsection (6), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Dissolution otherwise than under ss. 202-204. 205 1 This section applies where the registrar of companies receives— a a final account and statement sent under section 146(4) (final account); or b a notice, from the official receiver that the winding up of a company by the court is complete. 2 The registrar shall, on receipt of the final account and statement or the notice ..., forthwith register them or it on receipt of the notice and any statement sent under section 172(10), forthwith register it or them ; and, subject, as follows, at the end of the period of 3 months beginning with the day of the registration of the final account or notice ..., the company shall be dissolved. 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Secretary of State may, on the application of the official receiver or any other person who appears to the Secretary of State to be interested, give a direction deferring the date at which the dissolution of the company is to take effect for such period as the Secretary of State thinks fit. 4 An appeal to the court lies from any decision of the Secretary of State on an application for a direction under subsection (3). 5 Subsection (3) does not apply in a case where the winding-up order was made by the court in Scotland, but in such a case the court may, on an application by any person appearing to the court to have an interest, order that the date at which the dissolution of the company is to take effect shall be deferred for such period as the court thinks fit. 6 It is the duty of the person— a on whose application a direction is given under subsection (3); b in whose favour an appeal with respect to an application for such a direction is determined; or c on whose application an order is made under subsection (5), within 7 days after the giving of the direction, the determination of the appeal or the making of the order, to deliver to the registrar for registration such a copy of the direction, determination or order as is prescribed. 7 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to deliver a copy as required by subsection (6), he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Chapter X Malpractice before and during Liquidation; Penalisation of Companies and Company Officers; Investigations and Prosecutions Offences of fraud, deception, etc. Fraud, etc. in anticipation of winding up. 206 1 When a company is ordered to be wound up by the court, or passes a resolution for voluntary winding up, any person, being a past or present officer of the company, is deemed to have committed an offence if, within the 12 months immediately preceding the commencement of the winding up, he has— a concealed any part of the company’s property to the value of £500 or more, or concealed any debt due to or from the company, or b fraudulently removed any part of the company’s property to the value of £500 or more, or c concealed, destroyed, mutilated or falsified any book or paper affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs, or d made any false entry in any book or paper affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs, or e fraudulently parted with, altered or made any omission in any document affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs, or f pawned, pledged or disposed of any property of the company which has been obtained on credit and has not been paid for (unless the pawning, pledging or disposal was in the ordinary way of the company’s business). 2 Such a person is deemed to have committed an offence if within the period above mentioned he has been privy to the doing by others of any of the things mentioned in paragraphs (c), (d) and (e) of subsection (1); and he commits an offence if, at any time after the commencement of the winding up, he does any of the things mentioned in paragraphs (a) to (f) of that subsection, or is privy to the doing by others of any of the things mentioned in paragraphs (c) to (e) of it. 3 For purposes of this section, “ officer ” includes a shadow director. 4 It is a defence— a for a person charged under paragraph (a) or (f) of subsection (1) (or under subsection (2) in respect of the things mentioned in either of those two paragraphs) to prove that he had no intent to defraud, and b for a person charged under paragraph (c) or (d) of subsection (1) (or under subsection (2) in respect of the things mentioned in either of those two paragraphs) to prove that he had no intent to conceal the state of affairs of the company or to defeat the law. 5 Where a person pawns, pledges or disposes of any property in circumstances which amount to an offence under subsection (1)(f), every person who takes in pawn or pledge, or otherwise receives, the property knowing it to be pawned, pledged or disposed of in such circumstances, is guilty of an offence. 6 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. 7 The money sums specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of subsection (1) are subject to increase or reduction by order under section 416 in Part XV. Transactions in fraud of creditors. 207 1 When a company is ordered to be wound up by the court or passes a resolution for voluntary winding up, a person is deemed to have committed an offence if he, being at the time an officer of the company— a has made or caused to be made any gift or transfer of, or charge on, or has caused or connived at the levying of any execution against, the company’s property, or b has concealed or removed any part of the company’s property since, or within 2 months before, the date of any unsatisfied judgment or order for the payment of money obtained against the company. 2 A person is not guilty of an offence under this section— a by reason of conduct constituting an offence under subsection (1)(a) which occurred more than 5 years before the commencement of the winding up, or b if he proves that, at the time of the conduct constituting the offence, he had no intent to defraud the company’s creditors. 3 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Misconduct in course of winding up. 208 1 When a company is being wound up, whether by the court or voluntarily, any person, being a past or present officer of the company, commits an offence if he— a does not to the best of his knowledge and belief fully and truly discover to the liquidator all the company’s property, and how and to whom and for what consideration and when the company disposed of any part of that property (except such part as has been disposed of in the ordinary way of the company’s business), or b does not deliver up to the liquidator (or as he directs) all such part of the company’s property as is in his custody or under his control, and which he is required by law to deliver up, or c does not deliver up to the liquidator (or as he directs) all books and papers in his custody or under his control belonging to the company and which he is required by law to deliver up, or d knowing or believing that a false debt has been proved by any person in the winding up, fails to inform the liquidator as soon as practicable, or e after the commencement of the winding up, prevents the production of any book or paper affecting or relating to the company’s property or affairs. 2 Such a person commits an offence if after the commencement of the winding up he attempts to account for any part of the company’s property by fictitious losses or expenses; and he is deemed to have committed that offence if he has so attempted in connection with any qualifying decision procedure or deemed consent procedure of the company’s creditors within the 12 months immediately preceding the commencement of the winding up. 3 For purposes of this section, “ officer ” includes a shadow director. 4 It is a defence— a for a person charged under paragraph (a), (b) or (c) of subsection (1) to prove that he had no intent to defraud, and b for a person charged under paragraph (e) of that subsection to prove that he had no intent to conceal the state of affairs of the company or to defeat the law. 5 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Falsification of company’s books. 209 1 When a company is being wound up, an officer or contributory of the company commits an offence if he destroys, multilates, alters or falsifies any books, papers or securities, or makes or is privy to the making of any false or fraudulent entry in any register, book of account or document belonging to the company with intent to defraud or deceive any person. 2 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Material omissions from statement relating to company’s affairs. 210 1 When a company is being wound up, whether by the court or voluntarily, any person, being a past or present officer of the company, commits an offence if he makes any material omission in any statement relating to the company’s affairs. 2 When a company has been ordered to be wound up by the court, or has passed a resolution for voluntary winding up, any such person is deemed to have committed that offence if, prior to the winding up, he has made any material omission in any such statement. 3 For purposes of this section, “ officer ” includes a shadow director. 4 It is a defence for a person charged under this section to prove that he had no intent to defraud. 5 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. False representations to creditors. 211 1 When a company is being wound up, whether by the court or voluntarily, any person, being a past or present officer of the company— a commits an offence if he makes any false representation or commits any other fraud for the purpose of obtaining the consent of the company’s creditors or any of them to an agreement with reference to the company’s affairs or to the winding up, and b is deemed to have committed that offence if, prior to the winding up, he has made any false representation, or committed any other fraud, for that purpose. 2 For purposes of this section, “ officer ” includes a shadow director. 3 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Penalisation of directors and officers Summary remedy against delinquent directors, liquidators, etc. 212 1 This section applies if in the course of the winding up of a company it appears that a person who— a is or has been an officer of the company, b has acted as liquidator . . . or administrative receiver of the company, or c not being a person falling within paragraph (a) or (b), is or has been concerned, or has taken part, in the promotion, formation or management of the company, has misapplied or retained, or become accountable for, any money or other property of the company, or been guilty of any misfeasance or breach of any fiduciary or other duty in relation to the company. 2 The reference in subsection (1) to any misfeasance or breach of any fiduciary or other duty in relation to the company includes, in the case of a person who has acted as liquidator . . . of the company, any misfeasance or breach of any fiduciary or other duty in connection with the carrying out of his functions as liquidator . . . of the company. 3 The court may, on the application of the official receiver or the liquidator, or of any creditor or contributory, examine into the conduct of the person falling within subsection (1) and compel him— a to repay, restore or account for the money or property or any part of it, with interest at such rate as the court thinks just, or b to contribute such sum to the company’s assets by way of compensation in respect of the misfeasance or breach of fiduciary or other duty as the court thinks just. 4 The power to make an application under subsection (3) in relation to a person who has acted as liquidator . . . of the company is not exerciseable, except with the leave of the court, after he has had his release. 5 The power of a contributory to make an application under subsection (3) is not exercisable except with the leave of the court, but is exercisable notwithstanding that he will not benefit from any order the court may make on the application. Fraudulent trading. 213 1 If in the course of the winding up of a company it appears that any business of the company has been carried on with intent to defraud creditors of the company or creditors of any other person, or for any fraudulent purpose, the following has effect. 2 The court, on the application of the liquidator may declare that any persons who were knowingly parties to the carrying on of the business in the manner above-mentioned are to be liable to make such contributions (if any) to the company’s assets as the court thinks proper. Wrongful trading. 214 1 Subject to subsection (3) below, if in the course of the winding up of a company it appears that subsection (2) of this section applies in relation to a person who is or has been a director of the company, the court, on the application of the liquidator, may declare that that person is to be liable to make such contribution (if any) to the company’s assets as the court thinks proper. 2 This subsection applies in relation to a person if— a the company has gone into insolvent liquidation, b at some time before the commencement of the winding up of the company, that person knew or ought to have concluded that there was no reasonable prospect that the company would avoid going into insolvent liquidation or entering insolvent administration , and c that person was a director of the company at that time; but the court shall not make a declaration under this section in any case where the time mentioned in paragraph (b) above was before 28th April 1986. 3 The court shall not make a declaration under this section with respect to any person if it is satisfied that after the condition specified in subsection (2)(b) was first satisfied in relation to him that person took every step with a view to minimising the potential loss to the company’s creditors as ( on the assumption that he had knowledge of the matter mentioned in subsection (2)(b) ) he ought to have taken. 4 For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), the facts which a director of a company ought to know or ascertain, the conclusions which he ought to reach and the steps which he ought to take are those which would be known or ascertained, or reached or taken, by a reasonably diligent person having both— a the general knowledge, skill and experience that may reasonably be expected of a person carrying out the same functions as are carried out by that director in relation to the company, and b the general knowledge, skill and experience that that director has. 5 The reference in subsection (4) to the functions carried out in relation to a company by a director of the company includes any functions which he does not carry out but which have been entrusted to him. 6 For the purposes of this section a company goes into insolvent liquidation if it goes into liquidation at a time when its assets are insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the winding up. 6A For the purposes of this section a company enters insolvent administration if it enters administration at a time when its assets are insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the administration. 7 In this section “ director ” includes a shadow director. 8 This section is without prejudice to section 213. Proceedings under ss. 213, 214. 215 1 On the hearing of an application under section 213 or 214, the liquidator may himself give evidence or call witnesses. 2 Where under either section the court makes a declaration, it may give such further directions as it thinks proper for giving effect to the declaration; and in particular, the court may— a provide for the liability of any person under the declaration to be a charge on any debt or obligation due from the company to him, or on any mortgage or charge or any interest in a mortgage or charge on assets of the company held by or vested in him, or any person on his behalf, or any person claiming as assignee from or through the person liable or any person acting on his behalf, and b from time to time make such further order as may be necessary for enforcing any charge imposed under this subsection. 3 For the purposes of subsection (2), “ assignee ”— a includes a person to whom or in whose favour, by the directions of the person made liable, the debt, obligation, mortgage or charge was created, issued or transferred or the interest created, but b does not include an assignee for valuable consideration (not including consideration by way of marriage or the formation of a civil partnership ) given in good faith and without notice of any of the matters on the ground of which the declaration is made. 4 Where the court makes a declaration under either section in relation to a person who is a creditor of the company, it may direct that the whole or any part of any debt owed by the company to that person and any interest thereon shall rank in priority after all other debts owed by the company and after any interest on those debts. 5 Sections 213 and 214 have effect notwithstanding that the person concerned may be criminally liable in respect of matters on the ground of which the declaration under the section is to be made. Restriction on re-use of company names. 216 1 This section applies to a person where a company (“the liquidating company”) has gone into insolvent liquidation on or after the appointed day and he was a director or shadow director of the company at any time in the period of 12 months ending with the day before it went into liquidation. 2 For the purposes of this section, a name is a prohibited name in relation to such a person if— a it is a name by which the liquidating company was known at any time in that period of 12 months, or b it is a name which is so similar to a name falling within paragraph (a) as to suggest an association with that company. 3 Except with leave of the court or in such circumstances as may be prescribed, a person to whom this section applies shall not at any time in the period of 5 years beginning with the day on which the liquidating company went into liquidation— a be a director of any other company that is known by a prohibited name, or b in any way, whether directly or indirectly, be concerned or take part in the promotion, formation or management of any such company, or c in any way, whether directly or indirectly, be concerned or take part in the carrying on of a business carried on (otherwise than by a company) under a prohibited name. 4 If a person acts in contravention of this section, he is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. 5 In subsection (3) “ the court ” means any court having jurisdiction to wind up companies; and on an application for leave under that subsection, the Secretary of State or the official receiver may appear and call the attention of the court to any matters which seem to him to be relevant. 6 References in this section, in relation to any time, to a name by which a company is known are to the name of the company at that time or to any name under which the company carries on business at that time. 7 For the purposes of this section a company goes into insolvent liquidation if it goes into liquidation at at time when its assets are insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the winding up. 8 In this section “ company ” includes a company which may be wound up under Part V of this Act. Personal liability for debts, following contravention of s. 216. 217 1 A person is personally responsible for all the relevant debts of a company if at any time— a in contravention of section 216, he is involved in the management of the company, or b as a person who is involved in the management of the company, he acts or is willing to act on instructions given (without the leave of the court) by a person whom he knows at that time to be in contravention in relation to the company of section 216. 2 Where a person is personally responsible under this section for the relevant debts of a company, he is jointly and severally liable in respect of those debts with the company and any other person who, whether under this section or otherwise, is so liable. 3 For the purposes of this section the relevant debts of a company are— a in relation to a person who is personally responsible under paragraph (a) of subsection (1), such debts and other liabilities of the company as are incurred at a time when that person was involved in the management of the company, and b in relation to a person who is personally responsible under paragraph (b) of that subsection, such debts and other liabilities of the company as are incurred at a time when that person was acting or was willing to act on instructions given as mentioned in that paragraph. 4 For the purposes of this section, a person is involved in the management of a company if he is a director of the company or if he is concerned, whether directly or indirectly, or takes part, in the management of the company. 5 For the purposes of this section a person who, as a person involved in the management of a company, has at any time acted on instructions given (without the leave of the court) by a person whom he knew at that time to be in contravention in relation to the company of section 216 is presumed, unless the contrary is shown, to have been willing at any time thereafter to act on any instructions given by that person. 6 In this section “ company ” includes a company which may be wound up under Part V. Investigation and prosecution of malpractice Prosecution of delinquent officers and members of company. 218 1 If it appears to the court in the course of a winding up by the court that any past or present officer, or any member, of the company has been guilty of any offence in relation to the company for which he is criminally liable, the court may (either on the application of a person interested in the winding up or of its own motion) direct the liquidator to refer the matter a in the case of a winding up in England and Wales, to the Secretary of State, and b in the case of a winding up in Scotland, to the Lord Advocate 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 If in the case of a winding up by the court in England and Wales it appears to the liquidator, not being the official receiver, that any past or present officer of the company, or any member of it, has been guilty of an offence in relation to the company for which he is criminally liable, the liquidator shall report the matter to the official receiver. 4 If it appears to the liquidator in the course of a voluntary winding up that any past or present officer of the company, or any member of it, has been guilty of an offence in relation to the company for which he is criminally liable, he shall forthwith report the matter— a in the case of a winding up in England and Wales, to the Secretary of State, and b in the case of a winding up in Scotland, to the Lord Advocate, and shall furnish to the Secretary of State or (as the case may be) the Lord Advocate such information and give to him such access to and facilities for inspecting and taking copies of documents (being information or documents in the possession or under the control of the liquidator and relating to the matter in question) as the Secretary of State or (as the case may be) the Lord Advocate requires. 5 Where a report is made to the Secretary of State under subsection (4) he may, for the purpose of investigating the matter reported to him and such other matters relating to the affairs of the company as appear to him to require investigation, exercise any of the powers which are exercisable by inspectors appointed under section 431 or 432 of the the Companies Act 1985 to investigate a company’s affairs. 6 If it appears to the court in the course of a voluntary winding up that— a any past or present officer of the company, or any member of it, has been guilty as above-mentioned, and b no report with respect to the matter has been made by the liquidator . . . under subsection (4), the court may (on the application of any person interested in the winding up or of its own motion) direct the liquidator to make such a report. On a report being made accordingly, this section has effect as though the report had been made in pursuance of subsection (4). Obligations arising under s. 218. 219 1 For the purpose of an investigation by the Secretary of State in consequence of a report made to him under section 218(4) , any obligation imposed on a person by any provision of the Companies Act 1985 to produce documents or give information to, or otherwise to assist, inspectors appointed as mentioned in section 218(5) is to be regarded as an obligation similarly to assist the Secretary of State in his investigation. 2 An answer given by a person to a question put to him in exercise of the powers conferred by section 218(5) may be used in evidence against him. 2A However, in criminal proceedings in which that person is charged with an offence to which this subsection applies— a no evidence relating to the answer may be adduced, and b no question relating to it may be asked, by or on behalf of the prosecution, unless evidence relating to it is adduced, or a question relating to it is asked, in the proceedings by or on behalf of that person. 2B Subsection (2A) applies to any offence other than— a an offence under section 2 or 5 of the Perjury Act 1911 (false statements made on oath otherwise than in judicial proceedings or made otherwise than on oath), or b an offence under section 44(1) or (2) of the Criminal Law (Consolidation) (Scotland) Act 1995 (false statements made on oath or otherwise than on oath). 3 Where criminal proceedings are instituted by the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Lord Advocate or the Secretary of State following any report or reference under section 218, it is the duty of the liquidator and every officer and agent of the company past and present (other than the defendant or defender) to give to the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Lord Advocate or the Secretary of State (as the case may be) all assistance in connection with the prosecution which he is reasonably able to give. For this purpose “ agent ” includes any banker or solicitor of the company and any person employed by the company as auditor, whether that person is or is not an officer of the company. 4 If a person fails or neglects to give assistance in the manner required by subsection (3), the court may, on the application of the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Lord Advocate or the Secretary of State (as the case may be) direct the person to comply with that subsection; and if the application is made with respect to a liquidator, the court may (unless it appears that the failure or neglect to comply was due to the liquidator not having in his hands sufficient assets of the company to enable him to do so) direct that the costs shall be borne by the liquidator personally. Part V Winding Up of Unregistered Companies Meaning of “unregistered company”. 220 For the purposes of this Part “ unregistered company ” includes any association and any company, with the exception of a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 in any part of the United Kingdom. Winding up of unregistered companies. 221 1 Subject to the provisions of this Part, any unregistered company may be wound up under this Act; and all the provisions of this Act . . . about winding up apply to an unregistered company with the exceptions and additions mentioned in the following subsections. 2 If an unregistered company has a principal place of business situated in Northern Ireland, it shall not be wound up under this Part unless it has a principal place of business situated in England and Wales or Scotland, or in both England and Wales and Scotland. 3 For the purpose of determining a court’s winding-up jurisdiction, an unregistered company is deemed— a to be registered in England and Wales or Scotland, according as its principal place of business is situated in England and Wales or Scotland, or b if it has a principal place of business situated in both countries, to be registered in both countries; and the principal place of business situated in that part of Great Britain in which proceedings are being instituted is, for all purposes of the winding up, deemed to be the registered office of the company. 4 No unregistered company shall be wound up under this Act voluntarily , except in accordance with the EU Regulation . 5 The circumstances in which an unregistered company may be wound up are as follows— a if the company is dissolved, or has ceased to carry on business, or is carrying on business only for the purpose of winding up its affairs; b if the company is unable to pay its debts; c if the court is of opinion that it is just and equitable that the company should be wound up. 6 A petition for winding up a trustee savings bank may be presented by the Trustee Savings Banks Central Board or by a commissioner appointed under section 35 of the Trustee Savings Banks Act 1981 as well as by any person authorised under Part IV of this Act to present a petition for the winding up of a company. On such day as the Treasury appoints by order under section 4(3) of the Trustee Savings Banks Act 1985, this subsection ceases to have effect and is hereby repealed. 7 In Scotland, an unregistered company which the Court of Session has jurisdiction to wind up may be wound up by the court if there is subsisting a floating charge over property comprised in the company’s property and undertaking, and the court is satisfied that the security of the creditor entitled to the benefit of the floating charge is in jeopardy. For this purpose a creditor’s security is deemed to be in jeopardy if the court is satisfied that events have occurred or are about to occur which render it unreasonable in the creditor’s interests that the company should retain power to dispose of the property which is subject to the floating charge. Inability to pay debts: unpaid creditor for £750 or more. 222 1 An unregistered company is deemed (for the purposes of section 221) unable to pay its debts if there is a creditor, by assignment or otherwise, to whom the company is indebted in a sum exceeding £750 then due and— a the creditor has served on the company, by leaving at its principal place of business, or by delivering to the secretary or some director, manager or principal officer of the company, or by otherwise serving in such manner as the court may approve or direct, a written demand in the prescribed form requiring the company to pay the sum due, and b the company has for 3 weeks after the service of the demand neglected to pay the sum or to secure or compound for it to the creditor’s satisfaction. 2 The money sum for the time being specified in subsection (1) is subject to increase or reduction by regulations under section 417 in Part XV; but no increase in the sum so specified affects any case in which the winding-up petition was presented before the coming into force of the increase. Inability to pay debts: debt remaining unsatisfed after action brought. 223 An unregistered company is deemed (for the purposes of section 221) unable to pay its debts if an action or other proceeding has been instituted against any member for any debt or demand due, or claimed to be due, from the company, or from him in his character of member, and— a notice in writing of the institution of the action or proceeding has been served on the company by leaving it at the company’s principal place of business (or by delivering it to the secretary, or some director, manager or principal officer of the company, or by otherwise serving it in such manner as the court may approve or direct), and b the company has not within 3 weeks after service of the notice paid, secured or compounded for the debt or demand, or procured the action or proceeding to be stayed or sisted, or indemnified the defendant or defender to his reasonable satisfaction against the action or proceeding, and against all costs, damages and expenses to be incurred by him because of it. Inability to pay debts: other cases. 224 1 An unregistered company is deemed (for purposes of section 221) unable to pay its debts— a if in England and Wales execution or other process issued on a judgment, decree or order obtained in any court in favour of a creditor against the company, or any member of it as such, or any person authorised to be sued as nominal defendant on behalf of the company, is returned unsatisfied; b if in Scotland the induciae of a charge for payment on an extract decree, or an extract registered bond, or an extract registered protest, have expired without payment being made; c if in Northern Ireland a certificate of unenforceability has been granted in respect of any judgment, decree or order obtained as mentioned in paragraph (a); d if it is otherwise proved to the satisfaction of the court that the company is unable to pay its debts as they fall due. 2 An unregistered company is also deemed unable to pay its debts if it is proved to the satisfaction of the court that the value of the company’s assets is less than the amount of its liabilities, taking into account its contingent and prospective liabilities. Company incorporated outside Great Britain may be wound up though dissolved. 225 1 Where a company incorporated outside Great Britain which has been carrying on business in Great Britain ceases to carry on business in Great Britain, it may be wound up as an unregistered company under this Act, notwithstanding that it has been dissolved or otherwise ceased to exist as a company under or by virtue of the laws of the country under which it was incorporated. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contributories in winding up of unregistered company. 226 1 In the event of an unregistered company being wound up, every person is deemed a contributory who is liable to pay or contribute to the payment of any debt or liability of the company, or to pay or contribute to the payment of any sum for the adjustment of the rights of members among themselves, or to pay or contribute to the payment of the expenses of winding up the company. 2 Every contributory is liable to contribute to the company’s assets all sums due from him in respect of any such liability as is mentioned above. 3 In the case of an unregistered company engaged in or formed for working mines within the stannaries, a past member is not liable to contribute to the assets if he has ceased to be a member for 2 years or more either before the mine ceased to be worked or before the date of the winding-up order. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power of court to stay, sist or restrain proceedings. 227 The provisions of this Part with respect to staying, sisting or restraining actions and proceedings against a company at any time after the presentation of a petition for winding up and before the making of a winding-up order extend, in the case of an unregistered company, where the application to stay, sist or restrain is presented by a creditor, to actions and proceedings against any contributory of the company. Actions stayed on winding-up order. 228 Where an order has been made for winding up an unregistered company, no action or proceding shall be proceeded with or commenced against any contributory of the company in respect of any debt of the company, except by leave of the court, and subject to such terms as the court may impose. Provisions of this Part to be cumulative. 229 1 The provisions of this Part with respect to unregistered companies are in addition to and not in restriction of any provisions in Part IV with respect to winding up companies by the court; and the court or liquidator may exercise any powers or do any act in the case of unregistered companies which might be exercised or done by it or him in winding up companies registered under the Companies Act 2006 in England and Wales or Scotland . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part VI Miscellaneous Provisions Applying to Companies Which are Insolvent or in Liquidation Office-holders Holders of office to be qualified insolvency practitioners. 230 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Where an administrative receiver of a company is appointed, he must be a person who is so qualified. 3 Where a company goes into liquidation, the liquidator must be a person who is so qualified. 4 Where a provisional liquidator is appointed, he must be a person who is so qualified. 5 Subsections (3) and (4) are without prejudice to any enactment under which the official receiver is to be, or may be, liquidator or provisional liquidator. Appointment to office of two or more persons. 231 1 This section applies if an appointment or nomination of any person to the office of . . . administrative receiver, liquidator or provisional liquidator— a relates to more than one person, or b has the effect that the office is to be held by more than one person. 2 The appointment or nomination shall declare whether any act required or authorised under any enactment to be done by the . . . administrative receiver, liquidator or provisional liquidator is to be done by all or any one or more of the persons for the time being holding the office in question. Validity of office-holder’s acts. 232 The acts of an individual as . . . administrative receiver, liquidator or provisional liquidator of a company are valid notwithstanding any defect in his appointment, nomination or qualifications. Management by administrators, liquidators, etc. Supplies of gas, water, electricity, etc. 233 1 This section applies in the case of a company where— a the company enters administration, b an administrative receiver is appointed, or ba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c a voluntary arrangement approved under Part I , has taken effect, or d the company goes into liquidation, or e a provisional liquidator is appointed; and “ the office-holder ” means the administrator, the administrative receiver, ... the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement, the liquidator or the provisional liquidator, as the case may be. 2 If a request is made by or with the concurrence of the office-holder for the giving, after the effective date, of any of the supplies mentioned in the next subsection, the supplier— a may make it a condition of the giving of the supply that the office-holder personally guarantees the payment of any charges in respect of the supply, but b shall not make it a condition of the giving of the supply, or do anything which has the effect of making it a condition of the giving of the supply, that any outstanding charges in respect of a supply given to the company before the effective date are paid. 3 The supplies referred to in subsection (2) are— a a supply of gas by a gas supplier within the meaning of Part I of the Gas Act 1986; aa a supply of gas by a person within paragraph 1 of Schedule 2A to the Gas Act 1986 (supply by landlords etc. ); b a supply of electricity by an electricity supplier within the meaning of Part I of the Electricity Act 1989; ba a supply of electricity by a class of person within Class A (small suppliers) or Class B (resale) of Schedule 4 to the Electricity (Class Exemptions from the Requirement for a Licence) Order 2001 (S.I. 2001/3270); c a supply of water by a water undertaker or, in Scotland, Scottish Water , ca a supply of water by a water supply licensee within the meaning of the Water Industry Act 1991; cb a supply of water by a water services provider within the meaning of the Water Services etc. (Scotland) Act 2005; cc a supply of water by a person who has an interest in the premises to which the supply is given; d a supply of communications services by a provider of a public electronic communications service. e a supply of communications services by a person who carries on a business which includes giving such supplies; f a supply of goods or services mentioned in subsection (3A) by a person who carries on a business which includes giving such supplies, where the supply is for the purpose of enabling or facilitating anything to be done by electronic means. 3A The goods and services referred to in subsection (3)(f) are— a point of sale terminals; b computer hardware and software; c information, advice and technical assistance in connection with the use of information technology; d data storage and processing; e website hosting. 4 “ The effective date ” for the purposes of this section is whichever is applicable of the following dates— a the date on which the company entered administration b the date on which the administative receiver was appointed (or, if he was appointed in succession to another administrative receiver, the date on which the first of his predecessors was appointed), ba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c the date on which the voluntary arrangement took effect , d the date on which the company went into liquidation, e the date on which the provisional liquidator was appointed. 5 The following applies to expressions used in subsection (3)— a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d “communications services” do not include electronic communications services to the extent that they are used to broadcast or otherwise transmit programme services (within the meaning of the Communications Act 2003). Further protection of essential supplies 233A 1 An insolvency-related term of a contract for the supply of essential goods or services to a company ceases to have effect if— a the company enters administration, or b a voluntary arrangement approved under Part 1 takes effect in relation to the company. 2 An insolvency-related term of a contract does not cease to have effect by virtue of subsection (1) to the extent that— a it provides for the contract or the supply to terminate, or any other thing to take place, because the company becomes subject to an insolvency procedure other than administration or a voluntary arrangement; b it entitles a supplier to terminate the contract or the supply, or do any other thing, because the company becomes subject to an insolvency procedure other than administration or a voluntary arrangement; or c it entitles a supplier to terminate the contract or the supply because of an event that occurs, or may occur, after the company enters administration or the voluntary arrangement takes effect. 3 Where an insolvency-related term of a contract ceases to have effect under this section the supplier may— a terminate the contract, if the condition in subsection (4) is met; b terminate the supply, if the condition in subsection (5) is met. 4 The condition in this subsection is that— a the insolvency office-holder consents to the termination of the contract, b the court grants permission for the termination of the contract, or c any charges in respect of the supply that are incurred after the company entered administration or the voluntary arrangement took effect are not paid within the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which payment is due. The court may grant permission under paragraph (b) only if satisfied that the continuation of the contract would cause the supplier hardship. 5 The condition in this subsection is that— a the supplier gives written notice to the insolvency office-holder that the supply will be terminated unless the office-holder personally guarantees the payment of any charges in respect of the continuation of the supply after the company entered administration or the voluntary arrangement took effect, and b the insolvency office-holder does not give that guarantee within the period of 14 days beginning with the day the notice is received. 6 For the purposes of securing that the interests of suppliers are protected, where— a an insolvency-related term of a contract (the “original term”) ceases to have effect by virtue of subsection (1), and b the company subsequently enters administration, or a voluntary arrangement subsequently has effect in relation to it, the contract is treated for the purposes of subsections (1) to (5) as if, immediately before the subsequent administration is entered into or the subsequent voluntary arrangement takes effect, it included an insolvency-related term identical to the original term. 7 A contract for the supply of essential goods or services is a contract for a supply mentioned in section 233(3). 8 An insolvency-related term of a contract for the supply of essential goods or services to a company is a provision of the contract under which— a the contract or the supply would terminate, or any other thing would take place, because the company enters administration or the voluntary arrangement takes effect, b the supplier would be entitled to terminate the contract or the supply, or to do any other thing, because the company enters administration or the voluntary arrangement takes effect, or c the supplier would be entitled to terminate the contract or the supply because of an event that occurred before the company enters administration or the voluntary arrangement takes effect. 9 In this section “insolvency office-holder” means— a in a case where a company enters administration, the administrator; b in a case where a voluntary arrangement under Part 1 takes effect in relation to a company, the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement. 10 Subsection (1) does not have effect in relation to a contract entered into before 1st October 2015. Protection of supplies of goods and services 233B 1 This section applies where a company becomes subject to a relevant insolvency procedure. 2 A company becomes subject to a relevant insolvency procedure for the purposes of this section where— a a moratorium under Part A1 comes into force for the company, b the company enters administration, c an administrative receiver of the company is appointed (otherwise than in succession to another administrative receiver), d a voluntary arrangement approved under Part 1 takes effect in relation to the company, e the company goes into liquidation, f a provisional liquidator of the company is appointed (otherwise than in succession to another provisional liquidator), or g a court order is made under section 901C(1) of the Companies Act 2006 in relation to the company (order summoning meeting relating to compromise or arrangement). 3 A provision of a contract for the supply of goods or services to the company ceases to have effect when the company becomes subject to the relevant insolvency procedure if and to the extent that, under the provision— a the contract or the supply would terminate, or any other thing would take place, because the company becomes subject to the relevant insolvency procedure, or b the supplier would be entitled to terminate the contract or the supply, or to do any other thing, because the company becomes subject to the relevant insolvency procedure. 4 Where— a under a provision of a contract for the supply of goods or services to the company the supplier is entitled to terminate the contract or the supply because of an event occurring before the start of the insolvency period, and b the entitlement arises before the start of that period, the entitlement may not be exercised during that period. 5 Where a provision of a contract ceases to have effect under subsection (3) or an entitlement under a provision of a contract is not exercisable under subsection (4), the supplier may terminate the contract if— a in a case where the company has become subject to a relevant insolvency procedure as specified in subsection (2)(b), (c), (e) or (f), the office-holder consents to the termination of the contract, b in any other case, the company consents to the termination of the contract, or c the court is satisfied that the continuation of the contract would cause the supplier hardship and grants permission for the termination of the contract. 6 Where a provision of a contract ceases to have effect under subsection (3) and the company becomes subject to a further relevant insolvency procedure, the supplier may terminate the contract in accordance with subsection (5)(a) to (c). 7 The supplier shall not make it a condition of any supply of goods and services after the time when the company becomes subject to the relevant insolvency procedure, or do anything which has the effect of making it a condition of such a supply, that any outstanding charges in respect of a supply made to the company before that time are paid. 8 In this section “the insolvency period”, in relation to a relevant insolvency procedure, means the period beginning when the company becomes subject to the relevant insolvency procedure and ending— a in the case of a moratorium under Part A1, when the moratorium comes to an end, b in the case of the company entering administration, when the appointment of the administrator ceases to have effect under— i paragraphs 76 to 84 of Schedule B1, or ii an order under section 901F of the Companies Act 2006, c in the case of the appointment of an administrative receiver of the company, when the receiver or any successor to the receiver ceases to hold office without a successor being appointed, d in the case of a voluntary arrangement approved under Part 1 taking effect in relation to the company, when the arrangement ceases to have effect, e in the case of the company going into liquidation, when— i the liquidator complies with section 94(2), 106(2) or 146(3) (duties relating to final account), or ii the appointment of the liquidator ceases to have effect under an order under section 901F of the Companies Act 2006, f in the case of the appointment of a provisional liquidator for the company, when the provisional liquidator or any successor to the provisional liquidator ceases to hold office without a successor being appointed, and g in the case of the making of a court order under section 901C(1) of the Companies Act 2006 in relation to the company, when— i an order made by the court under section 901F of that Act takes effect, or ii the court decides not to make such an order. 9 In this section “office-holder”, in relation to a company which has entered into an insolvency procedure as specified in subsection (2)(b), (c), (e) or (f), means the administrator, administrative receiver, liquidator or provisional liquidator respectively. 10 Schedule 4ZZA provides for exclusions from the operation of this section. Powers to amend section 233B and Schedule 4ZZA 233C 1 The Secretary of State may by regulations omit any of paragraphs (a) to (g) of section 233B(2) (relevant insolvency procedures). 2 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend Schedule 4ZZA so as to— a remove or amend any exclusion from section 233B for the time being specified there, or b add further exclusions from section 233B. 3 In subsection (2), references to exclusions from section 233B are to circumstances in which section 233B, or any provision of that section, does not apply. 4 The circumstances referred to in subsection (3) may be framed by reference to kinds of company, supplier, contract, goods or services or in any other way. 5 Regulations under this section may make— a different provision for different purposes; b consequential provision; c transitional and supplementary provision. 6 Regulations under this section made by virtue of subsection (5) may in particular make provision amending this Act or any other enactment whenever passed or made (including, if paragraph 1(1) or (2) of Schedule 4ZZA is omitted, provision omitting section 233A or 233 respectively). 7 Regulations under subsection (1) may not omit section 233B(2)(c) unless the Secretary of State has first consulted the Scottish Ministers. 8 In this section “enactment” includes an Act of the Scottish Parliament and an instrument made under such an Act. 9 Regulations under this section are to be made by statutory instrument. 10 A statutory instrument containing regulations under this section may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before and approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament. Getting in the company’s property. 234 1 This section applies in the case of a company where— a the company enters administration, b an administrative receiver is appointed, or c the company goes into liquidation, or d a provisional liquidator is appointed; and “ the office-holder ” means the administrator, the administrative receiver, the liquidator or the provisional liquidator, as the case may be. 2 Where any person has in his possession or control any property, books, papers or records to which the company appears to be entitled, the court may require that person forthwith (or within such period as the court may direct) to pay, deliver, convey, surrender or transfer the property, books, papers or records to the office-holder. 3 Where the office-holder— a seizes or disposes of any property which is not property of the company, and b at the time of seizure or disposal believes, and has reasonable grounds for believing, that he is entitled (whether in pursuance of an order of the court or otherwise) to seize or dispose of that property, the next subsection has effect. 4 In that case the office-holder— a is not liable to any person in respect of any loss or damage resulting from the seizure or disposal except in so far as that loss or damage is caused by the office-holder’s own negligence, and b has a lien on the property, or the proceeds of its sale, for such expenses as were incurred in connection with the seizure or disposal. Duty to co-operate with office-holder. 235 1 This section applies as does section 234; and it also applies, in the case of a company in respect of which a winding-up order has been made by the court in England and Wales, as if references to the office-holder included the official receiver, whether or not he is the liquidator. 2 Each of the persons mentioned in the next subsection shall— a give to the office-holder such information concerning the company and its promotion, formation, business, dealings, affairs or property as the office-holder may at any time after the effective date reasonably require, and b attend on the office-holder at such times as the latter may reasonably require. 3 The persons referred to above are— a those who are or have at any time been officers of the company, b those who have taken part in the formation of the company at any time within one year before the effective date, c those who are in the employment of the company, or have been in its employment (including employment under a contract for services) within that year, and are in the office-holder’s opinion capable of giving information which he requires, d those who are, or have within that year been, officers of, or in the employment (including employment under a contract for services) of, another company which is, or within that year was, an officer of the company in question, and e in the case of a company being wound up by the court, any person who has acted as administrator, administrative receiver or liquidator of the company. 4 For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), “ the effective date ” is whichever is applicable of the following dates— a the date on which the company entered administration, b the date on which the administrative receiver was appointed or, if he was appointed in succession to another administrative receiver, the date on which the first of his predecessors was appointed, c the date on which the provisional liquidator was appointed, and d the date on which the company went into liquidation. 5 If a person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed by this section, he is liable to a fine and, for continued contravention, to a daily default fine. Inquiry into company’s dealings, etc. 236 1 This section applies as does section 234; and it also applies in the case of a company in respect of which a winding-up order has been made by the court in England and Wales as if references to the office-holder included the official receiver, whether or not he is the liquidator. 2 The court may, on the application of the office-holder, summon to appear before it— a any officer of the company, b any person known or suspected to have in his possession any property of the company or supposed to be indebted to the company, or c any person whom the court thinks capable of giving information concerning the promotion, formation, business, dealings, affairs or property of the company. 3 The court may require any such person as is mentioned in subsection (2)(a) to (c) to submit to the court an account of his dealings with the company or to produce any books, papers or other records in his possession or under his control relating to the company or the matters mentioned in paragraph (c) of the subsection. 3A An account submitted to the court under subsection (3) must be contained in— a a witness statement verified by a statement of truth (in England and Wales), and b an affidavit (in Scotland). 4 The following applies in a case where— a a person without reasonable excuse fails to appear before the court when he is summoned to do so under this section, or b there are reasonable grounds for believing that a person has absconded, or is about to abscond, with a view to avoiding his appearance before the court under this section. 5 The court may, for the purpose of bringing that person and anything in his possession before the court, cause a warrant to be issued to a constable or prescribed officer of the court— a for the arrest of that person, and b for the seizure of any books, papers, records, money or goods in that person’s possession. 6 The court may authorise a person arrested under such a warrant to be kept in custody, and anything seized under such a warrant to be held, in accordance with the rules, until that person is brought before the court under the warrant or until such other time as the court may order. Court’s enforcement powers under s. 236. 237 1 If it appears to the court, on consideration of any evidence obtained under section 236 or this section, that any person has in his possession any property of the company, the court may, on the application of the office-holder, order that person to deliver the whole or any part of the property to the office-holder at such time, in such manner and on such terms as the court thinks fit. 2 If it appears to the court, on consideration of any evidence so obtained, that any person is indebted to the company, the court may, on the application of the office-holder, order that person to pay to the office holder,at such time and in such manner as the court may direct, the whole or any part of the amount due, whether in full discharge of the debt or otherwise, as the court thinks fit. the court may, if it thinks fit, order that any person who if within the jurisdiction of the court would be liable to be summoned to appear before it under section 236 or this section shall be examined in any part of the United Kingdom where he may for the time being be, or in a place outside the United Kingdom. 4 Any person who appears or is brought before the court under section 236 or this section may be examined on oath, either orally or (except in Scotland) by interrogatories, concerning the company or the matters mentioned in section 236(2)(c). Adjustment of prior transactions (administration and liquidation) Transactions at an undervalue (England and Wales). 238 1 This section applies in the case of a company where— a the company enters administration, b the company goes into liquidation; and “ the office-holder ” means the administrator or the liquidator, as the case may be. 2 Where the company has at a relevant time (defined in section 240) entered into a transaction with any person at an undervalue, the office-holder may apply to the court for an order under this section. 3 Subject as follows, the court shall, on such an application, make such order as it thinks fit for restoring the position to what it would have been if the company had not entered into that transaction. 4 For the purposes of this section and section 241, a company enters into a transaction with a person at an undervalue if— a the company makes a gift to that person or otherwise enters into a transaction with that person on terms that provide for the company to receive no consideration, or b the company enters into a transaction with that person for a consideration the value of which, in money or money’s worth, is significantly less than the value, in money or money’s worth, of the consideration provided by the company. 5 The court shall not make an order under this section in respect of a transaction at an undervalue if it is satisfied— a that the company which entered into the transaction did so in good faith and for the purpose of carrying on its business, and b that at the time it did so there were reasonable grounds for believing that the transaction would benefit the company. Preferences (England and Wales). 239 1 This section applies as does section 238. 2 Where the company has at a relevant time (defined in the next section) given a preference to any person, the office-holder may apply to the court for an order under this section. 3 Subject as follows, the court shall, on such an application, make such order as it thinks fit for restoring the position to what it would have been if the company had not given that preference. 4 For the purposes of this section and section 241, a company gives a preference to a person if— a that person is one of the company’s creditors or a surety or guarantor for any of the company’s debts or other liabilities, and b the company does anything or suffers anything to be done which (in either case) has the effect of putting that person into a position which, in the event of the company going into insolvent liquidation, will be better than the position he would have been in if that thing had not been done. 5 The court shall not make an order under this section in respect of a preference given to any person unless the company which gave the preference was influenced in deciding to give it by a desire to produce in relation to that person the effect mentioned in subsection (4)(b). 6 A company which has given a preference to a person connected with the company (otherwise than by reason only of being its employee) at the time the preference was given is presumed, unless the contrary is shown, to have been influenced in deciding to give it by such a desire as is mentioned in subsection (5). 7 The fact that something has been done in pursuance of the order of a court does not, without more, prevent the doing or suffering of that thing from constituting the giving of a preference. “Relevant time” under ss. 238, 239. 240 1 Subject to the next subsection, the time at which a company enters into a transaction at an undervalue or gives a preference is a relevant time if the transaction is entered into, or the preference given— a in the case of a transaction at an undervalue or of a preference which is given to a person who is connected with the company (otherwise than by reason only of being its employee), at a time in the period of 2 years ending with the onset of insolvency (which expression is defined below), b in the case of a preference which is not such a transaction and is not so given, at a time in the period of 6 months ending with the onset of insolvency, . . . c in either case, at a time between the making of an administration application in respect of the company and the making of an administration order on that application, and d in either case, at a time between the filing with the court of a copy of notice of intention to appoint an administrator under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 and the making of an appointment under that paragraph. 2 Where a company enters into a transaction at an undervalue or gives a preference at a time mentioned in subsection (1)(a) or (b), that time is not a relevant time for the purposes of section 238 or 239 unless the company— a is at that time unable to pay its debts within the meaning of section 123 in Chapter VI of Part IV, or b becomes unable to pay its debts within the meaning of that section in consequence of the transaction or preference; but the requirements of this subsection are presumed to be satisfied, unless the contrary is shown, in relation to any transaction at an undervalue which is entered into by a company with a person who is connected with the company. 3 For the purposes of subsection (1), the onset of insolvency is— a in a case where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of an administrator of a company being appointed by administration order, the date on which the administration application is made, b in a case where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of an administrator of a company being appointed under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 following filing with the court of a copy of a notice of intention to appoint under that paragraph, the date on which the copy of the notice is filed, c in a case where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of an administrator of a company being appointed otherwise than as mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b), the date on which the appointment takes effect, d in a case where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of a company going into liquidation ... at the time when the appointment of an administrator ceases to have effect, the date on which the company entered administration (or, if relevant, the date on which the application for the administration order was made or a copy of the notice of intention to appoint was filed), and e in a case where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of a company going into liquidation at any other time, the date of the commencement of the winding up. Orders under ss. 238, 239. 241 1 Without prejudice to the generality of sections 238(3) and 239(3), an order under either of those sections with respect to a transaction or preference entered into or given by a company may (subject to the next subsection)— a require any property transferred as part of the transaction, or in connection with the giving of the preference, to be vested in the company, b require any property to be so vested if it represents in any person’s hands the application either of the proceeds of sale of property so transferred or of money so transferred, c release or discharge (in whole or in part) any security given by the company, d require any person to pay, in respect of benefits received by him from the company, such sums to the office-holder as the court may direct, e provide for any surety or guarantor whose obligations to any person were released or discharged (in whole or in part) under the transaction, or by the giving of the preference, to be under such new or revived obligations to that person as the court thinks appropriate, f provide for security to be provided for the discharge of any obligation imposed by or arising under the order, for such an obligation to be charged on any property and for the security or charge to have the same priority as a security or charge released or discharged (in whole or in part) under the transaction or by the giving of the preference, and g provide for the extent to which any person whose property is vested by the order in the company, or on whom obligations are imposed by the order, is to be able to prove in the winding up of the company for debts or other liabilities which arose from, or were released or discharged (in whole or in part) under or by, the transaction or the giving of the preference. 2 An order under section 238 or 239 may affect the property of, or impose any obligation on, any person whether or not he is the person with whom the company in question entered into the transaction or (as the case may be) the person to whom the preference was given; but such an order— a shall not prejudice any interest in property which was acquired from a person other than the company and was acquired in good faith and for value , or prejudice any interest deriving from such an interest, and b shall not require a person who received a benefit from the transaction or preference in good faith and for value to pay a sum to the office-holder, except where that person was a party to the transaction or the payment is to be in respect of a preference given to that person at a time when he was a creditor of the company. 2A Where a person has acquired an interest in property from a person other than the company in question, or has received a benefit from the transaction or preference, and at the time of that acquisition or receipt— a he had notice of the relevant surrounding circumstances and of the relevant proceedings, or b he was connected with, or was an associate of, either the company in question or the person with whom that company entered into the transaction or to whom that company gave the preference, then, unless the contrary is shown, it shall be presumed for the purposes of paragraph (a) or (as the case may be) paragraph (b) of subsection (2) that the interest was acquired or the benefit was received otherwise than in good faith. 3 For the purposes of subsection (2A)(a), the relevant surrounding circumstances are (as the case may require)— a the fact that the company in question entered into the transaction at an undervalue; or b the circumstances which amounted to the giving of the preference by the company in question; and subsections (3A) to (3C) have effect to determine whether, for those purposes, a person has notice of the relevant proceedings. 3A Where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of a company’s entering administration, a person has notice of the relevant proceedings if he has notice that— a an administration application has been made, b an administration order has been made, c a copy of a notice of intention to appoint an administrator under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 has been filed, or d notice of the appointment of an administrator has been filed under paragraph 18 or 29 of that Schedule. 3B Where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of a company’s going into liquidation at the time when the appointment of an administrator of the company ceases to have effect, a person has notice of the relevant proceedings if he has notice that— a an administration application has been made, b an administration order has been made, c a copy of a notice of intention to appoint an administrator under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 has been filed, d notice of the appointment of an administrator has been filed under paragraph 18 or 29 of that Schedule, or e the company has gone into liquidation. 3C In a case where section 238 or 239 applies by reason of the company in question going into liquidation at any other time, a person has notice of the relevant proceedings if he has notice— a where the company goes into liquidation on the making of a winding-up order, of the fact that the petition on which the winding-up order is made has been presented or of the fact that the company has gone into liquidation; b in any other case, of the fact that the company has gone into liquidation. 4 The provisions of sections 238 to 241 apply without prejudice to the availability of any other remedy, even in relation to a transaction or preference which the company had no power to enter into or give. Gratuitous alienations (Scotland). 242 1 Where this subsection applies and— a the winding up of a company has commenced, an alienation by the company is challengeable by— i any creditor who is a creditor by virtue of a debt incurred on or before the date of such commencement, or ii the liquidator; b a company enters administration , an alienation by the company is challengeable by the administrator. 2 Subsection (1) applies where— a by the alienation, whether before or after 1st April 1986 (the coming into force of section75 of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 1985), any part of the company’s property is transferred or any claim or right of the company is discharged or renounced, and b the alienation takes place on a relevant day. 3 For the purposes of subsection (2)(b), the day on which an alienation takes place is the day on which it becomes completely effectual; and in that subsection “ relevant day ” means, if the alienation has the effect of favouring— a a person who is an associate (within the meaning of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 ) of the company, a day not earlier than 5 years before the date on which— i the winding up of the company commences, or ii as the case may be, the company enters administration ; or b any other person, a day not earlier than 2 years before that date. 4 On a challenge being brought under subsection (1), the court shall grant decree of reduction or for such restoration of property to the company’s assets or other redress as may be appropriate; but the court shall not grant such a decree if the person seeking to uphold the alienation establishes— a that immediately, or at any other time, after the alienation the company’s assets were greater than its liabilities, or b that the alienation was made for adequate consideration, or c that the alienation— i was a birthday, Christmas or other conventional gift, or ii was a gift made, for a charitable purpose, to a person who is not an associate of the company, which, having regard to all the circumstances, it was reasonable for the company to make: Provided that this subsection is without prejudice to any right or interest acquired in good faith and for value from or through the transferee in the alienation. 5 In subsection (4) above, “ charitable purpose ” means any charitable, benevolent or philanthropic purpose, whether or not it is charitable within the meaning of any rule of law. 6 For the purposes of the foregoing provisions of this section, an alienation in implementation of a prior obligation is deemed to be one for which there was no consideration or no adequate consideration to the extent that the prior obligation was undertaken for no consideration or no adequate consideration. 7 A liquidator and an administrator have the same right as a creditor has under any rule of law to challenge an alienation of a company made for no consideration or no adequate consideration. 8 This section applies to Scotland only. Unfair preferences (Scotland). 243 1 Subject to subsection (2) below, subsection (4) below applies to a transaction entered into by a company, whether before or after 1st April 1986, which has the effect of creating a preference in favour of a creditor to the prejudice of the general body of creditors, being a preference created not earlier than 6 months before the commencement of the winding up of the company or the company enters administration . 2 Subsection (4) below does not apply to any of the following transactions— a a transaction in the ordinary course of trade or business; b a payment in cash for a debt which when it was paid had become payable, unless the transaction was collusive with the purpose of prejudicing the general body of creditors; c a transaction whereby the parties to it undertake reciprocal obligations (whether the performance by the parties of their respective obligations occurs at the same time or at different times) unless the transaction was collusive as aforesaid; d the granting of a mandate by a company authorising an arrestee to pay over the arrested funds or part thereof to the arrester where— i there has been a decree for payment or a warrant for summary diligence, and ii the decree or warrant has been preceded by an arrestment on the dependence of the action or followed by an arrestment in execution. 3 For the purposes of subsection (1) above, the day on which a preference was created is the day on which the preference became completely effectual. 4 A transaction to which this subsection applies is challengeable by— a in the case of a winding up— i any creditor who is a creditor by virtue of a debt incurred on or before the date of commencement of the winding up, or ii the liquidator; and b where the company has entered administration , the administrator. 5 On a challenge being brought under subsection (4) above, the court, if satisfied that the transaction challenged is a transaction to which this section applies, shall grant decree of reduction or for such restoration of property to the company’s assets or other redress as may be appropriate; Provided that this subsection is without prejudice to any right or interest acquired in good faith and for value from or through the creditor in whose favour the preference was created. 6 A liquidator and an administrator have the same right as a creditor has under any rule of law to challenge a preference created by a debtor. 7 This section applies to Scotland only. Extortionate credit transactions. 244 1 This section applies as does section 238, and where the company is, or has been, a party to a transaction for, or involving, the provision of credit to the company. 2 The court may, on the application of the office-holder, make an order with respect to the transaction if the transaction is or was extortionate and was entered into in the period of 3 years ending with the day on which the company entered administration or went into liquidation . 3 For the purposes of this section a transaction is extortionate if, having regard to the risk accepted by the person providing the credit— a the terms of it are or were such as to require grossly exorbitant payments to be made (whether unconditionally or in certain contingencies) in respect of the provision of the credit, or b it otherwise grossly contravened ordinary principles of fair dealing; and it shall be presumed, unless the contrary is proved, that a transaction with respect to which an application is made under this section is or, as the case may be, was extortionate. 4 An order under this section with respect to any transaction may contain such one or more of the following as the court thinks fit, that is to say— a provision setting aside the whole or part of any obligation created by the transaction, b provision otherwise varying the terms of the transaction or varying the terms on which any security for the purposes of the transaction is held, c provision requiring any person who is or was a party to the transaction to pay to the office-holder any sums paid to that person, by virtue of the transaction, by the company, d provision requiring any person to surrender to the office-holder any property held by him as security for the purposes of the transaction, e provision directing accounts to be taken between any persons. 5 The powers conferred by this section are exercisable in relation to any transaction concurrently with any powers exercisable in relation to that transaction as a transaction at an undervalue or under section 242 (gratuitious alienations in Scotland). Avoidance of certain floating charges. 245 1 This section applies as does section 238, but applies to Scotland as well as to England and Wales. 2 Subject as follows, a floating charge on the company’s undertaking or property created at a relevant time is invalid except to the extent of the aggregate of— a the value of so much of the consideration for the creation of the charge as consists of money paid, or goods or services supplied, to the company at the same time as, or after, the creation of the charge, b the value of so much of that consideration as consists of the discharge or reduction, at the same time as, or after, the creation of the charge, of any debt of the company, and c the amount of such interest (if any) as is payable on the amount falling within paragraph (a) or (b) in pursuance of any agreement under which the money was so paid, the goods or services were so supplied or the debt was so discharged or reduced. 3 Subject to the next subsection, the time at which a floating charge is created by a company is a relevant time for the purposes of this section if the charge is created— a in the case of a charge which is created in favour of a person who is connected with the company, at a time in the period of 2 years ending with the onset of insolvency, b in the case of a charge which is created in favour of any other person, at a time in the period of 12 months ending with the onset of insolvency, . . . c in either case, at a time between the making of an administration application in respect of the company and the making of an administration order on that application, or d in either case, at a time between the filing with the court of a copy of notice of intention to appoint an administrator under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 and the making of an appointment under that paragraph. 4 Where a company creates a floating charge at a time mentioned in subsection (3)(b) and the person in favour of whom the charge is created is not connected with the company, that time is not a relevant time for the purposes of this section unless the company— a is at that time unable to pay its debts within the meaning of section 123 in Chapter VI of Part IV, or b becomes unable to pay its debts within the meaning of that section in consequence of the transaction under which the charge is created. 5 For the purposes of subsection (3), the onset of insolvency is— a in a case where this section applies by reason of an administrator of a company being appointed by administration order, the date on which the administration application is made, b in a case where this section applies by reason of an administrator of a company being appointed under paragraph 14 or 22 of Schedule B1 following filing with the court of a copy of notice of intention to appoint under that paragraph, the date on which the copy of the notice is filed, c in a case where this section applies by reason of an administrator of a company being appointed otherwise than as mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b), the date on which the appointment takes effect, and d in a case where this section applies by reason of a company going into liquidation, the date of the commencement of the winding up. 6 For the purposes of subsection (2)(a) the value of any goods or services supplied by way of consideration for a floating charge is the amount in money which at the time they were supplied could reasonably have been expected to be obtained for supplying the goods or services in the ordinary course of business and on the same terms (apart from the consideration) as those on which they were supplied to the company. Unenforceability of liens on books, etc. 246 1 This section applies in the case of a company where— a the company enters administration, b the company goes into liquidation, or c a provisional liquidator is appointed; and “ the office-holder ” means the administrator, the liquidator or the provisional liquidator, as the case may be. 2 Subject as follows, a lien or other right to retain possession of any of the books, papers or other records of the company is unenforceable to the extent that its enforcement would deny possession of any books, papers or other records to the office-holder. 3 This does not apply to a lien on documents which give a title to property and are held as such. Administration: penalisation of directors etc Fraudulent trading: administration 246ZA 1 If while a company is in administration it appears that any business of the company has been carried on with intent to defraud creditors of the company or creditors of any other person, or for any fraudulent purpose, the following has effect. 2 The court, on the application of the administrator, may declare that any persons who were knowingly parties to the carrying on of the business in the manner mentioned in subsection (1) are to be liable to make such contributions (if any) to the company's assets as the court thinks proper. Wrongful trading: administration 246ZB 1 Subject to subsection (3), if while a company is in administration it appears that subsection (2) applies in relation to a person who is or has been a director of the company, the court, on the application of the administrator, may declare that that person is to be liable to make such contribution (if any) to the company's assets as the court thinks proper. 2 This subsection applies in relation to a person if— a the company has entered insolvent administration, b at some time before the company entered administration, that person knew or ought to have concluded that there was no reasonable prospect that the company would avoid entering insolvent administration or going into insolvent liquidation, and c the person was a director of the company at that time. 3 The court must not make a declaration under this section with respect to any person if it is satisfied that, after the condition specified in subsection (2)(b) was first satisfied in relation to the person, the person took every step with a view to minimising the potential loss to the company's creditors as (on the assumption that the person had knowledge of the matter mentioned in subsection (2)(b)) the person ought to have taken. 4 For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), the facts which a director of a company ought to know or ascertain, the conclusions which the director ought to reach and the steps which the director ought to take are those which would be known or ascertained, or reached or taken, by a reasonably diligent person having both— a the general knowledge, skill and experience that may reasonably be expected of a person carrying out the same functions as are carried out by that director in relation to the company, and b the general knowledge, skill and experience that that director has. 5 The reference in subsection (4) to the functions carried out in relation to a company by a director of the company includes any functions which the director does not carry out but which have been entrusted to the director. 6 For the purposes of this section— a a company enters insolvent administration if it enters administration at a time when its assets are insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the administration; b a company goes into insolvent liquidation if it goes into liquidation at a time when its assets are insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the winding up. 7 In this section “ director ” includes shadow director. 8 This section is without prejudice to section 246ZA. Proceedings under section 246ZA or 246ZB 246ZC Section 215 applies for the purposes of an application under section 246ZA or 246ZB as it applies for the purposes of an application under section 213 but as if the reference in subsection (1) of section 215 to the liquidator was a reference to the administrator. Power to assign certain causes of action Power to assign 246ZD 1 This section applies in the case of a company where— a the company enters administration, or b the company goes into liquidation; and “ the office-holder ” means the administrator or the liquidator, as the case may be. 2 The office-holder may assign a right of action (including the proceeds of an action) arising under or by virtue of any of the following— za section A43 (challenges to monitor remuneration in subsequent insolvency proceedings); a section 213 or 246ZA (fraudulent trading); b section 214 or 246ZB (wrongful trading); c section 238 (transactions at an undervalue (England and Wales)); d section 239 (preferences (England and Wales)); e section 242 (gratuitous alienations (Scotland)); f section 243 (unfair preferences (Scotland)); g section 244 (extortionate credit transactions). Decisions by creditors and contributories Decisions by creditors and contributories: general 246ZE 1 This section applies where, for the purposes of this Group of Parts, a person (“P”) seeks a decision about any matter from a company's creditors or contributories. 2 The decision may be made by any qualifying decision procedure P thinks fit, except that it may not be made by a creditors' meeting or (as the case may be) a contributories' meeting unless subsection (3) applies. 3 This subsection applies if at least the minimum number of creditors or (as the case may be) contributories make a request to P in writing that the decision be made by a creditors' meeting or (as the case may be) a contributories' meeting. 4 If subsection (3) applies P must summon a creditors' meeting or (as the case may be) a contributories' meeting. 5 Subsection (2) is subject to any provision of this Act, the rules or any other legislation, or any order of the court— a requiring a decision to be made, or prohibiting a decision from being made, by a particular qualifying decision procedure (other than a creditors' meeting or a contributories' meeting); b permitting or requiring a decision to be made by a creditors' meeting or a contributories' meeting. 6 Section 246ZF provides that in certain cases the deemed consent procedure may be used instead of a qualifying decision procedure. 7 For the purposes of subsection (3) the “minimum number” of creditors or contributories is any of the following— a 10% in value of the creditors or contributories; b 10% in number of the creditors or contributories; c 10 creditors or contributories. 8 The references in subsection (7) to creditors are to creditors of any class, even where a decision is sought only from creditors of a particular class. 9 In this section references to a meeting are to a meeting where the creditors or (as the case may be) contributories are invited to be present together at the same place (whether or not it is possible to attend the meeting without being present at that place). 10 Except as provided by subsection (8), references in this section to creditors include creditors of a particular class. 11 In this Group of Parts “ qualifying decision procedure ” means a procedure prescribed or authorised under paragraph 8A of Schedule 8. Deemed consent procedure 246ZF 1 The deemed consent procedure may be used instead of a qualifying decision procedure where a company's creditors or contributories are to make a decision about any matter, unless— a a decision about the matter is required by virtue of this Act, the rules, or any other legislation to be made by a qualifying decision procedure, or b the court orders that a decision about the matter is to be made by a qualifying decision procedure. 2 If the rules provide for a company's creditors or contributories to make a decision about the remuneration of any person, they must provide that the decision is to be made by a qualifying decision procedure. 3 The deemed consent procedure is that the relevant creditors (other than opted-out creditors) or (as the case may be) the relevant contributories are given notice of— a the matter about which they are to make a decision, b the decision that the person giving the notice proposes should be made (the “proposed decision”), c the effect of subsections (4) and (5), and d the procedure for objecting to the proposed decision. 4 If less than the appropriate number of relevant creditors or (as the case may be) relevant contributories object to the proposed decision in accordance with the procedure set out in the notice, the creditors or (as the case may be) the contributories are to be treated as having made the proposed decision. 5 Otherwise— a the creditors or (as the case may be) the contributories are to be treated as not having made a decision about the matter in question, and b if a decision about that matter is again sought from the creditors or (as the case may be) the contributories, it must be sought using a qualifying decision procedure. 6 For the purposes of subsection (4) the “appropriate number” of relevant creditors or relevant contributories is 10% in value of those creditors or contributories. 7 “ Relevant creditors ” means the creditors who, if the decision were to be made by a qualifying decision procedure, would be entitled to vote in the procedure. 8 “ Relevant contributories ” means the contributories who, if the decision were to be made by a qualifying decision procedure, would be entitled to vote in the procedure. 9 In this section references to creditors include creditors of a particular class. 10 The rules may make further provision about the deemed consent procedure. Power to amend sections 246ZE and 246ZF 246ZG 1 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend section 246ZE so as to change the definition of— a the minimum number of creditors; b the minimum number of contributories. 2 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend section 246ZF so as to change the definition of— a the appropriate number of relevant creditors; b the appropriate number of relevant contributories. 3 Regulations under this section may define the minimum number or the appropriate number by reference to any one or more of— a a proportion in value, b a proportion in number, c an absolute number, and the definition may include alternative, cumulative or relative requirements. 4 Regulations under subsection (1) may define the minimum number of creditors or contributories by reference to all creditors or contributories, or by reference to creditors or contributories of a particular description. 5 Regulations under this section may make provision that will result in section 246ZE or 246ZF having different definitions for different cases, including— a for creditors and for contributories, b for different kinds of decisions. 6 Regulations under this section may make transitional provision. 7 The power of the Secretary of State to make regulations under this section is exercisable by statutory instrument. 8 A statutory instrument containing regulations under this section may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before, and approved by a resolution of, each House of Parliament. Remote attendance at meetings Remote attendance at meetings 246A 1 Subject to subsection (2), this section applies to any meeting of the members of a company summoned by the office-holder under this Act or the rules, other than a meeting of the members of the company in a members' voluntary winding up. 2 This section does not apply where— a a company is being wound up in Scotland, or b a receiver is appointed under section 51 in Chapter 2 of Part 3. 3 Where the person summoning a meeting (“the convener”) considers it appropriate, the meeting may be conducted and held in such a way that persons who are not present together at the same place may attend it. 4 Where a meeting is conducted and held in the manner referred to in subsection (3), a person attends the meeting if that person is able to exercise any rights which that person may have to speak and vote at the meeting. 5 For the purposes of this section— a a person is able to exercise the right to speak at a meeting when that person is in a position to communicate to all those attending the meeting, during the meeting, any information or opinions which that person has on the business of the meeting; and b a person is able to exercise the right to vote at a meeting when— i that person is able to vote, during the meeting, on resolutions put to the vote at the meeting, and ii that person's vote can be taken into account in determining whether or not such resolutions are passed at the same time as the votes of all the other persons attending the meeting. 6 The convener of a meeting which is to be conducted and held in the manner referred to in subsection (3) shall make whatever arrangements the convener considers appropriate to— a enable those attending the meeting to exercise their rights to speak or vote, and b ensure the identification of those attending the meeting and the security of any electronic means used to enable attendance. 7 Where in the reasonable opinion of the convener— a a meeting will be attended by persons who will not be present together at the same place, and b it is unnecessary or inexpedient to specify a place for the meeting, any requirement under this Act or the rules to specify a place for the meeting may be satisfied by specifying the arrangements the convener proposes to enable persons to exercise their rights to speak or vote. 8 In making the arrangements referred to in subsection (6) and in forming the opinion referred to in subsection (7)(b), the convener must have regard to the legitimate interests of the members and others attending the meeting in the efficient despatch of the business of the meeting. 9 If— a the notice of a meeting does not specify a place for the meeting, b the convener is requested in accordance with the rules to specify a place for the meeting, and c that request is made by members representing not less than ten percent of the total voting rights of all the members having at the date of the request a right to vote at the meeting, it shall be the duty of the convener to specify a place for the meeting. 10 In this section, “ the office-holder ”, in relation to a company, means— za the monitor in relation to a moratorium under Part A1, a its liquidator, provisional liquidator, administrator, receiver (appointed under section 51) or administrative receiver, or b where a voluntary arrangement in relation to the company is proposed or has taken effect under Part 1, the nominee or the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement. Giving of notices etc by office-holders Use of websites 246B 1 Subject to subsection (2), where any provision of this Act or the rules requires the office-holder to give, deliver, furnish or send a notice or other document or information to any person, that requirement is satisfied by making the notice, document or information available on a website— a in accordance with the rules, and b in such circumstances as may be prescribed. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 In this section, “ the office-holder ” means— za the monitor in relation to a moratorium under Part A1, a the liquidator, provisional liquidator, administrator, receiver (appointed under section 51), or administrative receiver of a company, or b where a voluntary arrangement in relation to a company is proposed or has taken effect under Part 1, the nominee or the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement. Creditors' ability to opt out of receiving certain notices 246C 1 Any provision of the rules which requires an office-holder of a company to give a notice to creditors of the company does not apply, in circumstances prescribed by the rules, in relation to opted-out creditors. 2 Subsection (1)— a does not apply in relation to a notice of a distribution or proposed distribution to creditors; b is subject to any order of the court requiring a notice to be given to all creditors (or all creditors of a particular category). 3 Except as provided by the rules, a creditor may participate and vote in a qualifying decision procedure or a deemed consent procedure even though, by virtue of being an opted-out creditor, the creditor does not receive notice of it. 4 In this section— “ give ” includes deliver, furnish or send; “ notice ” includes any document or information in any other form; “ office-holder ”, in relation to a company, means— a liquidator, provisional liquidator, administrator or administrative receiver of the company, a receiver appointed under section 51 in relation to any property of the company, or the supervisor of a voluntary arrangement which has taken effect under Part 1 in relation to the company. Part VII Interpretation for First Group of Parts “Insolvency” and “go into liquidation”. 247 1 In this Group of Parts, except in so far as the context otherwise requires, “ insolvency ”, in relation to a company, includes the coming into force of a moratorium for the company under Part A1, the approval of a voluntary arrangement under Part I, or the appointment of an administrator or administrative receiver . 2 For the purposes of any provision in this Group of Parts, a company goes into liquidation if it passes a resolution for voluntary winding up or an order for its winding up is made by the court at a time when it has not already gone into liquidation by passing such a resolution. 3 The reference to a resolution for voluntary winding up in subsection (2) includes a reference to a resolution which is deemed to occur by virtue of— a paragraph 83(6)(b) of Schedule B1, ... b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Secured creditor”, etc. 248 In this Group of Parts, except in so far as the context otherwiserequires— a “ secured creditor ”, in relation to a company, means a creditor of the company who holds in respect of his debt a security over property of the company, and “ unsecured creditor ” is to be read accordingly; and b “ security ” means— i in relation to England and Wales, any mortgage, charge, lien or other security, and ii in relation to Scotland, any security (whether heritable or moveable), any floating charge and any right of lien or preference and any right of retention (other than a right of compensation or set off). “Opted-out creditor” 248A 1 For the purposes of this Group of Parts “ opted-out creditor ”, in relation to an office-holder of a company, means a person who— a is a creditor of the company, and b in accordance with the rules has elected (or is deemed to have elected) to be (and not to cease to be) an opted-out creditor in relation to the office-holder. 2 In this section, “ office-holder ”, in relation to a company, means— a a liquidator, provisional liquidator, administrator or administrative receiver of the company, b a receiver appointed under section 51 in relation to any property of the company, or c the supervisor of a voluntary arrangement which has taken effect under Part 1 in relation to the company. “Connected” with a company. 249 For the purposes of any provision in this Group of Parts, a person is connected with a company if— a he is a director or shadow director of the company or an associate of such a director or shadow director, or b he is an associate of the company, and “ associate ” has the meaning given by section 435 in Part XVIII of this Act. “Member” of a company. 250 For the purposes of any provision in this Group of Parts, a person who is not a member of a company but to whom shares in the company have been transferred, or transmitted by operation of law, is to be regarded as a member of the company, and references to a member or members are to be read accordingly. Expressions used generally. 251 In this Group of Parts, except in so far as the context otherwise requires— “ administative receiver ” means— an administrative receiver as defined by section 29(2) in Chapter I of Part III, or a receiver appointed under section 51 in Chapter II of that Part in a case where the whole (or substantially the whole) of the company’s property is attached by the floating charge; “ agent ” does not include a person's counsel acting as such; “books and papers” and “ books or papers ” includes accounts, deeds, writing and documents; “ business day ” means any day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, Christmas Day, Good Friday or a day which is a bank holiday in any part of Great Britain; “ chattel leasing agreement ” means an agreement for the bailment or, in Scotland, the hiring of goods which is capable of subsisting for more than 3 months; “ contributory ” has the meaning given by section 79; “ the court ”, in relation to a company, means a court having jurisdiction to wind up the company; “ deemed consent procedure ” means the deemed consent procedure provided for by section 246ZF; “ director ” includes any person occupying the position of director, by whatever name called; “ document ” includes summons, notice, order and other legal process, and registers; ... “ floating charge ” means a charge which, as created, was a floating charge an includes a floating charge within section 462 of the Companies Act (Scottish floating charges); “ the Gazette ” means— as respects companies registered in England and Wales, the London Gazette; as respects companies registered in Scotland, the Edinburgh Gazette; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... “ officer ”, in relation to a body corporate, includes a director, manager or secretary; “ the official rate ”, in relation to interest, means the rate payable under section 189(4); “ prescribed ” means prescribed by the rules; “ qualifying decision procedure ” has the meaning given by section 246ZE(11); “receiver”, in the expression “ receiver or manager ”, does not include a receiver appointed under section 51 in Chapter II of Part III; “ retention of title agreement ” means an agreement for the sale of goods to a company, being an agreement— which does not constitute a charge on the goods, but under which, if the seller is not paid and the company is wound up, the seller will have priority over all other creditors of the company as respects the goods or any property representing the goods; “ the rules ” means rules under section 411 in Part XV; and “ shadow director ”, in relation to a company, means a person in accordance with whose directions or instructions the directors of the company are accustomed to act , but so that a person is not deemed a shadow director by reason only that the directors act— on advice given by that person in a professional capacity; in accordance with instructions, a direction, guidance or advice given by that person in the exercise of a function conferred by or under an enactment (within the meaning given by section 1293 of the Companies Act 2006); in accordance with guidance or advice given by that person in that person's capacity as a Minister of the Crown (within the meaning of the Ministers of the Crown Act 1975) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Second Group of Parts Insolvency of Individuals; Bankruptcy Part 7A Debt relief orders Preliminary Debt relief orders 251A 1 An individual who is unable to pay his debts may apply for an order under this Part (“a debt relief order”) to be made in respect of his qualifying debts. 2 In this Part “ qualifying debt ” means (subject to subsection (3)) a debt which— a is for a liquidated sum payable either immediately or at some certain future time; and b is not an excluded debt. 3 A debt is not a qualifying debt to the extent that it is secured. 4 In this Part “ excluded debt ” means a debt of any description prescribed for the purposes of this subsection. Applications for a debt relief order Making of application 251B 1 An application for a debt relief order must be made to the official receiver through an approved intermediary. 2 The application must include— a a list of the debts to which the debtor is subject at the date of the application, specifying the amount of each debt (including any interest, penalty or other sum that has become payable in relation to that debt on or before that date) and the creditor to whom it is owed; b details of any security held in respect of any of those debts; and c such other information about the debtor's affairs (including his creditors, debts and liabilities and his income and assets) as may be prescribed. 3 The rules may make further provision as to— a the form of an application for a debt relief order; b the manner in which an application is to be made; and c information and documents to be supplied in support of an application. 4 For the purposes of this Part an application is not to be regarded as having been made until— a the application has been submitted to the official receiver; and b any fee required in connection with the application by an order under section 415 has been paid to such person as the order may specify. Duty of official receiver to consider and determine application 251C 1 This section applies where an application for a debt relief order is made. 2 The official receiver may stay consideration of the application until he has received answers to any queries raised with the debtor in relation to anything connected with the application. 3 The official receiver must determine the application by— a deciding whether to refuse the application; b if he does not refuse it, by making a debt relief order in relation to the specified debts he is satisfied were qualifying debts of the debtor at the application date; but he may only refuse the application if he is authorised or required to do so by any of the following provisions of this section. 4 The official receiver may refuse the application if he considers that— a the application does not meet all the requirements imposed by or under section 251B; b any queries raised with the debtor have not been answered to the satisfaction of the official receiver within such time as he may specify when they are raised; c the debtor has made any false representation or omission in making the application or on supplying any information or documents in support of it. 5 The official receiver must refuse the application if he is not satisfied that— a the debtor is an individual who is unable to pay his debts; b at least one of the specified debts was a qualifying debt of the debtor at the application date; c each of the conditions set out in Part 1 of Schedule 4ZA is met. 6 The official receiver may refuse the application if he is not satisfied that each condition specified in Part 2 of Schedule 4ZA is met. 7 If the official receiver refuses an application he must give reasons for his refusal to the debtor in the prescribed manner. 8 In this section “ specified debt ” means a debt specified in the application. Presumptions applicable to the determination of an application 251D 1 The following presumptions are to apply to the determination of an application for a debt relief order. 2 The official receiver must presume that the debtor is an individual who is unable to pay his debts at the determination date if— a that appears to the official receiver to be the case at the application date from the information supplied in the application and he has no reason to believe that the information supplied is incomplete or inaccurate; and b he has no reason to believe that, by virtue of a change in the debtor's financial circumstances since the application date, the debtor may be able to pay his debts. 3 The official receiver must presume that a specified debt (of the amount specified in the application and owed to the creditor so specified) is a qualifying debt at the application date if— a that appears to him to be the case from the information supplied in the application; and b he has no reason to believe that the information supplied is incomplete or inaccurate. 4 The official receiver must presume that the condition specified in paragraph 1 of Schedule 4ZA is met if— a that appears to him to be the case from the information supplied in the application; b any prescribed verification checks relating to the condition have been made; and c he has no reason to believe that the information supplied is incomplete or inaccurate. 5 The official receiver must presume that any other condition specified in Part 1 or 2 of Schedule 4ZA is met if— a that appears to him to have been the case as at the application date from the information supplied in the application and he has no reason to believe that the information supplied is incomplete or inaccurate; b any prescribed verification checks relating to the condition have been made; and c he has no reason to believe that, by virtue of a change in circumstances since the application date, the condition may no longer be met. 6 References in this section to information supplied in the application include information supplied to the official receiver in support of the application. 7 In this section “ specified debt ” means a debt specified in the application. Making and effect of debt relief order Making of debt relief orders 251E 1 This section applies where the official receiver makes a debt relief order on determining an application under section 251C. 2 The order must be made in the prescribed form. 3 The order must include a list of the debts which the official receiver is satisfied were qualifying debts of the debtor at the application date, specifying the amount of the debt at that time and the creditor to whom it was then owed. 4 The official receiver must— a give a copy of the order to the debtor; and b make an entry for the order in the register containing the prescribed information about the order or the debtor. 5 The rules may make provision as to other steps to be taken by the official receiver or the debtor on the making of the order. 6 Those steps may include in particular notifying each creditor to whom a qualifying debt specified in the order is owed of— a the making of the order and its effect, b the grounds on which a creditor may object under section 251K, and c any other prescribed information. 7 In this Part the date on which an entry relating to the making of a debt relief order is first made in the register is referred to as “ the effective date ”. Effect of debt relief order on other debt management arrangements 251F 1 This section applies if— a a debt relief order is made, and b immediately before the order is made, other debt management arrangements are in force in respect of the debtor. 2 The other debt management arrangements cease to be in force when the debt relief order is made. 3 In this section “ other debt management arrangements ” means— a an administration order under Part 6 of the County Courts Act 1984; b an enforcement restriction order under Part 6A of that Act; c a debt repayment plan arranged in accordance with a debt management scheme that is approved under Chapter 4 of Part 5 of the Tribunals, Courts and Enforcement Act 2007. Moratorium from qualifying debts 251G 1 A moratorium commences on the effective date for a debt relief order in relation to each qualifying debt specified in the order (“a specified qualifying debt”). 2 During the moratorium, the creditor to whom a specified qualifying debt is owed— a has no remedy in respect of the debt, and b may not— i commence a creditor's petition in respect of the debt, or ii otherwise commence any action or other legal proceedings against the debtor for the debt, except with the permission of the court and on such terms as the court may impose. 3 If on the effective date a creditor to whom a specified qualifying debt is owed has any such petition, action or other proceeding as mentioned in subsection (2)(b) pending in any court, the court may— a stay the proceedings on the petition, action or other proceedings (as the case may be), or b allow them to continue on such terms as the court thinks fit. 4 In subsection (2)(a) and (b) references to the debt include a reference to any interest, penalty or other sum that becomes payable in relation to that debt after the application date. 5 Nothing in this section affects the right of a secured creditor of the debtor to enforce his security. The moratorium period 251H 1 The moratorium relating to the qualifying debts specified in a debt relief order continues for the period of one year beginning with the effective date for the order, unless— a the moratorium terminates early; or b the moratorium period is extended by the official receiver under this section or by the court under section 251M. 2 The official receiver may only extend the moratorium period for the purpose of— a carrying out or completing an investigation under section 251K; b taking any action he considers necessary (whether as a result of an investigation or otherwise) in relation to the order; or c in a case where he has decided to revoke the order, providing the debtor with the opportunity to make arrangements for making payments towards his debts. 3 The official receiver may not extend the moratorium period for the purpose mentioned in subsection (2)(a) without the permission of the court. 4 The official receiver may not extend the moratorium period beyond the end of the period of three months beginning after the end of the initial period of one year mentioned in subsection (1). 5 The moratorium period may be extended more than once, but any extension (whether by the official receiver or by the court) must be made before the moratorium would otherwise end. 6 References in this Part to a moratorium terminating early are to its terminating before the end of what would otherwise be the moratorium period, whether on the revocation of the order or by virtue of any other enactment. Discharge from qualifying debts 251I 1 Subject as follows, at the end of the moratorium applicable to a debt relief order the debtor is discharged from all the qualifying debts specified in the order (including all interest, penalties and other sums which may have become payable in relation to those debts since the application date). 2 Subsection (1) does not apply if the moratorium terminates early. 3 Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to any qualifying debt which the debtor incurred in respect of any fraud or fraudulent breach of trust to which the debtor was a party. 4 The discharge of the debtor under subsection (1) does not release any other person from— a any liability (whether as partner or co-trustee of the debtor or otherwise) from which the debtor is released by the discharge; or b any liability as surety for the debtor or as a person in the nature of such a surety. 5 If the order is revoked by the court under section 251M after the end of the moratorium period, the qualifying debts specified in the order shall (so far as practicable) be treated as though subsection (1) had never applied to them. Duties of debtor Providing assistance to official receiver etc 251J 1 The duties in this section apply to a debtor at any time after the making of an application by him for a debt relief order. 2 The debtor must— a give to the official receiver such information as to his affairs, b attend on the official receiver at such times, and c do all such other things, as the official receiver may reasonably require for the purpose of carrying out his functions in relation to the application or, as the case may be, the debt relief order made as a result of the application. 3 The debtor must notify the official receiver as soon as reasonably practicable if he becomes aware of— a any error in, or omission from, the information supplied to the official receiver in, or in support of, the application; b any change in his circumstances between the application date and the determination date that would affect (or would have affected) the determination of the application. 4 The duties under subsections (2) and (3) apply after (as well as before) the determination of the application, for as long as the official receiver is able to exercise functions of the kind mentioned in subsection (2). 5 If a debt relief order is made as a result of the application, the debtor must notify the official receiver as soon as reasonably practicable if— a there is an increase in his income during the moratorium period applicable to the order; b he acquires any property or any property is devolved upon him during that period; c he becomes aware of any error in or omission from any information supplied by him to the official receiver after the determination date. 6 A notification under subsection (3) or (5) must give the prescribed particulars (if any) of the matter being notified. Objections, investigations and revocation Objections and investigations 251K 1 Any person specified in a debt relief order as a creditor to whom a specified qualifying debt is owed may object to— a the making of the order; b the inclusion of the debt in the list of the debtor's qualifying debts; or c the details of the debt specified in the order. 2 An objection under subsection (1) must be— a made during the moratorium period relating to the order and within the prescribed period for objections; b made to the official receiver in the prescribed manner; c based on a prescribed ground; d supported by any information and documents as may be prescribed; and the prescribed period mentioned in paragraph (a) must not be less than 28 days after the creditor in question has been notified of the making of the order. 3 The official receiver must consider every objection made to him under this section. 4 The official receiver may— a as part of his consideration of an objection, or b on his own initiative, carry out an investigation of any matter that appears to the official receiver to be relevant to the making of any decision mentioned in subsection (5) in relation to a debt relief order or the debtor. 5 The decisions to which an investigation may be directed are— a whether the order should be revoked or amended under section 251L; b whether an application should be made to the court under section 251M; or c whether any other steps should be taken in relation to the debtor. 6 The power to carry out an investigation under this section is exercisable after (as well as during) the moratorium relating to the order. 7 The official receiver may require any person to give him such information and assistance as he may reasonably require in connection with an investigation under this section. 8 Subject to anything prescribed in the rules as to the procedure to be followed in carrying out an investigation under this section, an investigation may be carried out by the official receiver in such manner as he thinks fit. Power of official receiver to revoke or amend a debt relief order 251L 1 The official receiver may revoke or amend a debt relief order during the applicable moratorium period in the circumstances provided for by this section. 2 The official receiver may revoke the order on the ground that— a any information supplied to him by the debtor— i in, or in support of, the application, or ii after the determination date, was incomplete, incorrect or otherwise misleading; b the debtor has failed to comply with a duty under section 251J; c a bankruptcy order has been made in relation to the debtor; or d the debtor has made a proposal under Part 8 (or has notified the official receiver of his intention to do so). 3 The official receiver may revoke the order on the ground that he should not have been satisfied— a that the debts specified in the order were qualifying debts of the debtor as at the application date; b that the conditions specified in Part 1 of Schedule 4ZA were met; c that the conditions specified in Part 2 of that Schedule were met or that any failure to meet such a condition did not prevent his making the order. 4 The official receiver may revoke the order on the ground that either or both of the conditions in paragraphs 7 and 8 of Schedule 4ZA (monthly surplus income and property) are not met at any time after the order was made. For this purpose those paragraphs are to be read as if references to the determination date were references to the time in question. 5 Where the official receiver decides to revoke the order, he may revoke it either— a with immediate effect, or b with effect from such date (not more than three months after the date of the decision) as he may specify. 6 In considering when the revocation should take effect the official receiver must consider (in the light of the grounds on which the decision to revoke was made and all the other circumstances of the case) whether the debtor ought to be given the opportunity to make arrangements for making payments towards his debts. 7 If the order has been revoked with effect from a specified date the official receiver may, if he thinks it appropriate to do so at any time before that date, revoke the order with immediate effect. 8 The official receiver may amend a debt relief order for the purpose of correcting an error in or omission from anything specified in the order. 9 But subsection (8) does not permit the official receiver to add any debts that were not specified in the application for the debt relief order to the list of qualifying debts. 10 The rules may make further provision as to the procedure to be followed by the official receiver in the exercise of his powers under this section. Role of the court Powers of court in relation to debt relief orders 251M 1 Any person may make an application to the court if he is dissatisfied by any act, omission or decision of the official receiver in connection with a debt relief order or an application for such an order. 2 The official receiver may make an application to the court for directions or an order in relation to any matter arising in connection with a debt relief order or an application for such an order. 3 The matters referred to in subsection (2) include, among other things, matters relating to the debtor's compliance with any duty arising under section 251J. 4 An application under this section may, subject to anything in the rules, be made at any time. 5 The court may extend the moratorium period applicable to a debt relief order for the purposes of determining an application under this section. 6 On an application under this section the court may dismiss the application or do one or more of the following— a quash the whole or part of any act or decision of the official receiver; b give the official receiver directions (including a direction that he reconsider any matter in relation to which his act or decision has been quashed under paragraph (a)); c make an order for the enforcement of any obligation on the debtor arising by virtue of a duty under section 251J; d extend the moratorium period applicable to the debt relief order; e make an order revoking or amending the debt relief order; f make an order under section 251N; or g make such other order as the court thinks fit. 7 An order under subsection (6)(e) for the revocation of a debt relief order— a may be made during the moratorium period applicable to the debt relief order or at any time after that period has ended; b may be made on the court's own motion if the court has made a bankruptcy order in relation to the debtor during that period; c may provide for the revocation of the order to take effect on such terms and at such a time as the court may specify. 8 An order under subsection (6)(e) for the amendment of a debt relief order may not add any debts that were not specified in the application for the debt relief order to the list of qualifying debts. Inquiry into debtor's dealings and property 251N 1 An order under this section may be made by the court on the application of the official receiver. 2 An order under this section is an order summoning any of the following persons to appear before the court— a the debtor; b the debtor's spouse or former spouse or the debtor's civil partner or former civil partner; c any person appearing to the court to be able to give information or assistance concerning the debtor or his dealings, affairs and property. 3 The court may require a person falling within subsection (2)(c)— a to provide a written account of his dealings with the debtor; or b to produce any documents in his possession or under his control relating to the debtor or to the debtor's dealings, affairs or property. 4 Subsection (5) applies where a person fails without reasonable excuse to appear before the court when he is summoned to do so by an order under this section. 5 The court may cause a warrant to be issued to a constable or prescribed officer of the court— a for the arrest of that person, and b for the seizure of any records or other documents in that person's possession. 6 The court may authorise a person arrested under such a warrant to be kept in custody, and anything seized under such a warrant to be held, in accordance with the rules, until that person is brought before the court under the warrant or until such other time as the court may order. Offences False representations and omissions 251O 1 A person who makes an application for a debt relief order is guilty of an offence if he knowingly or recklessly makes any false representation or omission in making the application or providing any information or documents to the official receiver in support of the application. 2 A person who makes an application for a debt relief order is guilty of an offence if— a he intentionally fails to comply with a duty under section 251J(3) in connection with the application; or b he knowingly or recklessly makes any false representation or omission in providing any information to the official receiver in connection with such a duty or otherwise in connection with the application. 3 It is immaterial for the purposes of an offence under subsection (1) or (2) whether or not a debt relief order is made as a result of the application. 4 A person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made is guilty of an offence if— a he intentionally fails to comply with a duty under section 251J(5) in connection with the order; or b he knowingly or recklessly makes any false representation or omission in providing information to the official receiver in connection with such a duty or otherwise in connection with the performance by the official receiver of functions in relation to the order. 5 It is immaterial for the purposes of an offence under subsection (4)— a whether the offence is committed during or after the moratorium period; and b whether or not the order is revoked after the conduct constituting the offence takes place. Concealment or falsification of documents 251P 1 A person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made is guilty of an offence if, during the moratorium period in relation to that order— a he does not provide, at the request of the official receiver, all his books, papers and other records of which he has possession or control and which relate to his affairs; b he prevents the production to the official receiver of any books, papers or other records relating to his affairs; c he conceals, destroys, mutilates or falsifies, or causes or permits the concealment, destruction, mutilation or falsification of, any books, papers or other records relating his affairs; d he makes, or causes or permits the making of, any false entries in any book, document or record relating to his affairs; or e he disposes of, or alters or makes any omission in, or causes or permits the disposal, altering or making of any omission in, any book, document or record relating to his affairs. 2 A person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made is guilty of an offence if— a he did anything falling within paragraphs (c) to (e) of subsection (1) during the period of 12 months ending with the application date; or b he did anything falling within paragraphs (b) to (e) of subsection (1) after that date but before the effective date. 3 A person is not guilty of an offence under this section if he proves that, in respect of the conduct constituting the offence, he had no intent to defraud or to conceal the state of his affairs. 4 In its application to a trading record subsection (2)(a) has effect as if the reference to 12 months were a reference to two years. 5 In subsection (4) “ trading record ” means a book, document or record which shows or explains the transactions or financial position of a person's business, including— a a periodic record of cash paid and received, b a statement of periodic stock-taking, and c except in the case of goods sold by way of retail trade, a record of goods sold and purchased which identifies the buyer and seller or enables them to be identified. 6 It is immaterial for the purposes of an offence under this section whether or not the debt relief order in question is revoked after the conduct constituting the offence takes place (but no offence is committed under this section by virtue of conduct occurring after the order is revoked). Fraudulent disposal of property 251Q 1 A person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made is guilty of an offence if he made or caused to be made any gift or transfer of his property during the period between— a the start of the period of two years ending with the application date; and b the end of the moratorium period. 2 The reference in subsection (1) to making a transfer of any property includes causing or conniving at the levying of any execution against that property. 3 A person is not guilty of an offence under this section if he proves that, in respect of the conduct constituting the offence, he had no intent to defraud or to conceal the state of his affairs. 4 For the purposes of subsection (3) a person is to be taken to have proved that he had no such intent if— a sufficient evidence is adduced to raise an issue as to whether he had such intent; and b the contrary is not proved beyond reasonable doubt. 5 It is immaterial for the purposes of this section whether or not the debt relief order in question is revoked after the conduct constituting an offence takes place (but no offence is committed by virtue of conduct occurring after the order is revoked). Fraudulent dealing with property obtained on credit 251R 1 A person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made is guilty of an offence if during the relevant period he disposed of any property which he had obtained on credit and, at the time he disposed of it, had not paid for it. 2 Any other person is guilty of an offence if during the relevant period he acquired or received property from a person in respect of whom a debt relief order was made (the “debtor”) knowing or believing— a that the debtor owed money in respect of the property, and b that the debtor did not intend, or was unlikely to be able, to pay the money he so owed. 3 In subsections (1) and (2) “ relevant period ” means the period between— a the start of the period of two years ending with the application date; and b the determination date. 4 A person is not guilty of an offence under subsection (1) or (2) if the disposal, acquisition or receipt of the property was in the ordinary course of a business carried on by the debtor at the time of the disposal, acquisition or receipt. 5 In determining for the purposes of subsection (4) whether any property is disposed of, acquired or received in the ordinary course of a business carried on by the debtor, regard may be had, in particular, to the price paid for the property. 6 A person is not guilty of an offence under subsection (1) if he proves that, in respect of the conduct constituting the offence, he had no intent to defraud or to conceal the state of his affairs. 7 In this section references to disposing of property include pawning or pledging it; and references to acquiring or receiving property shall be read accordingly. 8 It is immaterial for the purposes of this section whether or not the debt relief order in question is revoked after the conduct constituting an offence takes place (but no offence is committed by virtue of conduct occurring after the order is revoked). Obtaining credit or engaging in business 251S 1 A person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made is guilty of an offence if, during the relevant period— a he obtains credit (either alone or jointly with any other person) without giving the person from whom he obtains the credit the relevant information about his status; or b he engages directly or indirectly in any business under a name other than that in which the order was made without disclosing to all persons with whom he enters into any business transaction the name in which the order was made. 2 For the purposes of subsection (1)(a) the relevant information about a person's status is the information that— a a moratorium is in force in relation to the debt relief order, b a debt relief restrictions order is in force in respect of him, or c both a moratorium and a debt relief restrictions order is in force, as the case may be. 3 In subsection (1) “ relevant period ” means— a the moratorium period relating to the debt relief order, or b the period for which a debt relief restrictions order is in force in respect of the person in respect of whom the debt relief order is made, as the case may be. 4 Subsection (1)(a) does not apply if the amount of the credit is less than the prescribed amount (if any). 5 The reference in subsection (1)(a) to a person obtaining credit includes the following cases— a where goods are bailed to him under a hire-purchase agreement, or agreed to be sold to him under a conditional sale agreement; b where he is paid in advance (in money or otherwise) for the supply of goods or services. Offences: supplementary 251T 1 Proceedings for an offence under this Part may only be instituted by the Secretary of State or by or with the consent of the Director of Public Prosecutions. 2 It is not a defence in proceedings for an offence under this Part that anything relied on, in whole or in part, as constituting the offence was done outside England and Wales. 3 A person guilty of an offence under this Part is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both (but see section 430). Supplementary Approved intermediaries 251U 1 In this Part “ approved intermediary ” means an individual for the time being approved by a competent authority to act as an intermediary between a person wishing to make an application for a debt relief order and the official receiver. 2 In this section “ competent authority ” means a person or body for the time being designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of granting approvals under this section. 3 Designation as a competent authority may be limited so as to permit the authority only to approve persons of a particular description. 4 The Secretary of State may by regulations make provision as to— a the procedure for designating persons or bodies as competent authorities; b descriptions of individuals who are ineligible to be approved under this section; c the procedure for granting approvals under this section; d the withdrawal of designations or approvals under this section; and provision made under paragraph (a) or (c) may include provision requiring the payment of fees. 5 The rules may make provision about the activities to be carried out by an approved intermediary in connection with an application for a debt relief order, which may in particular include— a assisting the debtor in making the application; b checking that the application has been properly completed; c sending the application to the official receiver. 6 The rules may also make provision about other activities to be carried out by approved intermediaries. 7 An approved intermediary may not charge a debtor any fee in connection with an application for a debt relief order. 8 An approved intermediary is not liable to any person in damages for anything done or omitted to be done when acting (or purporting to act) as an approved intermediary in connection with a particular application by a debtor for a debt relief order. 9 Subsection (8) does not apply if the act or omission was in bad faith. 10 Regulations under subsection (4) shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Debt relief restrictions orders and undertakings 251V Schedule 4ZB (which makes provision about debt relief restrictions orders and debt relief restrictions undertakings) has effect. Register of debt relief orders etc 251W The Secretary of State must maintain a register of matters relating to— a debt relief orders; b debt relief restrictions orders; and c debt relief restrictions undertakings. Interpretation 251X 1 In this Part— “ the application date ”, in relation to a debt relief order or an application for a debt relief order, means the date on which the application for the order is made to the official receiver; “ approved intermediary ” has the meaning given in section 251U(1); “ debt relief order ” means an order made by the official receiver under this Part; “ debtor ” means— in relation to an application for a debt relief order, the applicant; and in relation to a debt relief order, the person in relation to whom the order is made; “debt relief restrictions order” and “ debt relief restrictions undertaking ” means an order made, or an undertaking accepted, under Schedule 4ZB; “ the determination date ”, in relation to a debt relief order or an application for a debt relief order, means the date on which the application for the order is determined by the official receiver; “ the effective date ” has the meaning given in section 251E(7); “ excluded debt ” is to be construed in accordance with section 251A; “moratorium” and “moratorium period” are to be construed in accordance with sections 251G and 251H; “ qualifying debt ”, in relation to a debtor, has the meaning given in section 251A(2); “ the register ” means the register maintained under section 251W; “ specified qualifying debt ” has the meaning given in section 251G(1). 2 In this Part references to a creditor specified in a debt relief order as the person to whom a qualifying debt is owed by the debtor include a reference to any person to whom the right to claim the whole or any part of the debt has passed, by assignment or operation of law, after the date of the application for the order. Part VIII Individual Voluntary Arrangements Moratorium for insolvent debtor Interim order of court. 252 1 In the circumstances specified below, the court may in the case of a debtor (being an individual) make an interim order under this section. 2 An interim order has the effect that, during the period for which it is in force— a no bankruptcy petition relating to the debtor may be presented or proceeded with, aa no landlord or other person to whom rent is payable may exercise any right of forfeiture by peaceable re-entry in relation to premises let to the debtor in respect of a failure by the debtor to comply with any term or condition of his tenancy of such premises, except with the leave of the court and b no other proceedings, and no execution or other legal process, may be commenced or continued and no distress may be levied against the debtor or his property except with leave of the court. Application for interim order. 253 1 Application to the court for an interim order may be made where the debtor intends to make a proposal under this Part, that is, a proposal to his creditors for a composition in satisfaction of his debts or a scheme of arrangement of his affairs (from here on referred to, in either case, as a “voluntary arrangement”). 2 The proposal must provide for some person (“the nominee”) to act in relation to the voluntary arrangement either as trustee or otherwise for the purpose of supervising its implementation and the nominee must be a person who is qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner, or authorised to act as nominee, in relation to the voluntary arrangement . 3 Subject as follows, the application may be made— a if the debtor is an undischarged bankrupt, by the debtor, the trustee of his estate, or the official receiver, and b in any other case, by the debtor. 4 An application shall not be made under subsection (3)(a) unless the debtor has given notice of the proposal to the official receiver and, if there is one, the trustee of his estate. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of application. 254 1 At any time when an application under section 253 for an interim order is pending a no landlord or other person to whom rent is payable may exercise any right of forfeiture by peaceable re-entry in relation to premises let to the debtor in respect of a failure by the debtor to comply with any term or condition of his tenancy of such premises, except with the leave of the court, and b , the court may forbid the levying of any distress on the debtor’s property or its subsequent sale, or both, and stay any action, execution or other legal process against the property or person of the debtor. 2 Any court in which proceedings are pending against an individual may, on proof that an application under that section has been made in respect of that individual, either stay the proceedings or allow them to continue on such terms as it thinks fit. Cases in which interim order can be made. 255 1 The court shall not make an interim order on an application under section 253 unless it is satisfied— a that the debtor intends to make a proposal under this Part ; b that on the day of the making of the application the debtor was an undischarged bankrupt or was able to make a bankruptcy application ; c that no previous application has been made by the debtor for an interim order in the period of 12 months ending with that day; and d that the nominee under the debtor’s proposal . . . is willing to act in relation to the proposal. 2 The court may make an order if it thinks that it would be appropriate to do so for the purpose of facilitating the consideration and implementation of the debtor’s proposal. 3 Where the debtor is an undischarged bankrupt, the interim order may contain provision as to the conduct of the bankruptcy, and the administration of the bankrupt’s estate, during the period for which the order is in force. 4 Subject as follows, the provision contained in an interim order by virtue of subsection (3) may include provision staying proceedings in the bankruptcy or modifying any provision in this Group of Parts, and any provision of the rules in their application to the debtor’s bankruptcy. 5 An interim order shall not, in relation to a bankrupt, make provision relaxing or removing any of the requirements of provisions in this Group of Parts, or of the rules, unless the court is satisfied that that provision is unlikely to result in any significant diminution in, or in the value of, the debtor’s estate for the purposes of the bankruptcy. 6 Subject to the following provisions of this Part, an interim order made on an application under section 253 ceases to have effect at the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day after the making of the order. Nominee’s report on debtor’s proposal. 256 1 Where an interim order has been made on an application under section 253, the nominee shall, before the order ceases to have effect, submit a report to the court stating— a whether, in his opinion, the voluntary arrangement which the debtor is proposing has a reasonable prospect of being approved and implemented, and aa whether, in his opinion, the debtor's creditors should consider the debtors’ proposal ... b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 For the purpose of enabling the nominee to prepare his report the debtor shall submit to the nominee— a a document setting out the terms of the voluntary arrangement which the debtor is proposing, and b a statement of his affairs containing— i such particulars of his creditors and of his debts and other liabilities and of his assets as may be prescribed, and ii such other information as may be prescribed. 3 The court may— a on an application made by the debtor in a case where the nominee has failed to submit the report required by this section or has died, or b on an application made by the debtor or the nominee in a case where it is impracticable or inappropriate for the nominee to continue to act as such, direct that the nominee shall be replaced as such by another person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner, or authorised to act as nominee, in relation to the voluntary arrangement. 3A The court may, on an application made by the debtor in a case where the nominee has failed to submit the report required by this section, direct that the interim order shall continue, or (if it has ceased to have effect) be renewed, for such further period as the court may specify in the direction. 4 The court may, on the application of the nominee, extend the period for which the interim order has effect so as to enable the nominee to have more time to prepare his report. 5 If the court is satisfied on receiving the nominee’s report that the debtor's creditors should consider the debtor’s proposal, the court shall direct that the period for which the interim order has effect shall be extended, for such further period as it may specify in the direction, for the purpose of enabling the debtor’s proposal to be considered by his creditors in accordance with the following provisions of this Part. 6 The court may discharge the interim order if it is satisfied, on the application of the nominee— a that the debtor has failed to comply with his obligations under subsection (2), or b that for any other reason it would be inappropriate for the debtor's creditors to consider the debtor’s proposal. Procedure where no interim order made Debtor’s proposal and nominee’s report. 256A 1 This section applies where a debtor (being an individual)— a intends to make a proposal under this Part (but an interim order has not been made in relation to the proposal and no application for such an order is pending), and b if he is an undischarged bankrupt, has given notice of the proposal to the official receiver and, if there is one, the trustee of his estate, ... 2 For the purpose of enabling the nominee to prepare a report under subsection (3) , the debtor shall submit to the nominee— a a document setting out the terms of the voluntary arrangement which the debtor is proposing, and b a statement of his affairs containing— i such particulars of his creditors and of his debts and other liabilities and of his assets as may be prescribed, and ii such other information as may be prescribed. 3 If the nominee is of the opinion that the debtor is an undischarged bankrupt, or is able to make a bankruptcy application , the nominee shall, within 14 days (or such longer period as the court may allow) after receiving the document and statement mentioned in subsection (2), submit a report to the debtor's creditors stating— a whether, in his opinion, the voluntary arrangement which the debtor is proposing has a reasonable prospect of being approved and implemented, and b whether, in his opinion, the debtor's creditors should consider the debtor’s proposal ... c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 The court may— a on an application made by the debtor in a case where the nominee has failed to submit the report required by this section or has died, or b on an application made by the debtor or the nominee in a case where it is impracticable or inappropriate for the nominee to continue to act as such, direct that the nominee shall be replaced as such by another person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner, or authorised to act as nominee, in relation to the voluntary arrangement. 5 The court may, on an application made by the nominee, extend the period within which the nominee is to submit his report. Creditors’ decisions Consideration of debtor's proposal by creditors 257 1 This section applies where it has been reported to the court under section 256 or to the debtor's creditors under section 256A that the debtor's creditors should consider the debtor's proposal. 2 The nominee (or the nominee's replacement under section 256(3) or 256A(4)) must seek a decision from the debtor's creditors as to whether they approve the proposed voluntary arrangement (unless, in the case of a report to which section 256 applies, the court otherwise directs). 2A The decision is to be made by a creditors' decision procedure. 2B Notice of the creditors' decision procedure must be given to every creditor of the debtor of whose claim and address the nominee (or the nominee's replacement) is aware. 3 For this purpose the creditors of a debtor who is an undischarged bankrupt include— a every person who is a creditor of the bankrupt in respect of a bankruptcy debt, and b every person who would be such a creditor if the bankruptcy had commenced on the date on which notice of the creditors' decision procedure is given. Consideration and implementation of debtor’s proposal Approval of debtor's proposal 258 1 This section applies where under section 257 the debtor's creditors are asked to decide whether to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement. 2 The creditors may approve the proposed voluntary arrangement with or without modifications, but shall not approve it with modifications unless the debtor consents to each modification. 3 The modifications subject to which the proposed voluntary arrangement may be approved may include one conferring the functions proposed to be conferred on the nominee on another person qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner or authorised to act as nominee, in relation to the voluntary arrangement . But they shall not include any modification by virtue of which the proposal ceases to be a proposal under this Part . 4 The creditors shall not approve any proposal or modification which affects the right of a secured creditor of the debtor to enforce his security, except with the concurrence of the creditor concerned. 5 Subject as follows, the creditors shall not approve any proposal or modification under which— a any preferential debt of the debtor is to be paid otherwise than in priority to such of his debts as are not preferential debts, ... aa any ordinary preferential debt of the debtor is to be paid otherwise than in priority to any secondary preferential debts that the debtor may have, b a preferential creditor of the debtor is to be paid an amount in respect of an ordinary preferential debt that bears to that debt a smaller proportion than is borne to another ordinary preferential debt by the amount that is to be paid in respect of that other debt , ... c a preferential creditor of the debtor is to be paid an amount in respect of a secondary preferential debt that bears to that debt a smaller proportion than is borne to another secondary preferential debt by the amount that is to be paid in respect of that other debt. or d if the debtor is a relevant financial institution (see section 387A), any non-preferential debt is to be paid otherwise than in accordance with the rules in section 328(3A) (reading references to the bankrupt as references to the debtor), However, the creditors may approve such a proposal or modification with the concurrence of the ... creditor concerned. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 In this section “ preferential debt ” , "ordinary preferential debt” and “secondary preferential debt” each has the meaning given by section 386 in Part XII; and “ preferential creditor ” is to be construed accordingly. Report of decisions to court. 259 1 When pursuant to section 257 the debtor's creditors have decided whether to approve the debtor's proposal (with or without modifications), the nominee (or the nominee's replacement under section 256(3) or 256A(4)) must— a give notice of the creditors' decision to such persons as may be prescribed, and b where the creditors considered the debtor's proposal pursuant to a report to the court under section 256(1)(aa), report the creditors' decision to the court. 2 If the report is that the creditors have declined (with or without modifications) to approve the voluntary arrangement proposed under section 256 , the court may discharge any interim order which is in force in relation to the debtor. Effect of approval. 260 1 This section has effect where pursuant to section 257 the debtor's creditors decide to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement (with or without modifications). 2 The approved arrangement— a takes effect as if made by the debtor at the time the creditors decided to approve the proposal , and b binds every person who in accordance with the rules— i was entitled to vote in the creditors' decision procedure by which the decision to approve the proposal was made , or ii would have been so entitled if he had had notice of it, as if he were a party to the arrangement. 2A If— a when the arrangement ceases to have effect any amount payable under the arrangement to a person bound by virtue of subsection (2)(b)(ii) has not been paid, and b the arrangement did not come to an end prematurely, the debtor shall at that time become liable to pay to that person the amount payable under the arrangement. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Any interim order in force in relation to the debtor immediately before the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which the report with respect to the creditors’ decision was made to the court under section 259 ceases to have effect at the end of that period. This subsection applies except to such extent as the court may direct for the purposes of any application under section 262 below. 5 Where proceedings on a bankruptcy petition have been stayed by an interim order which ceases to have effect under subsection (4), that petition is deemed, unless the court otherwise orders, to have been dismissed. Additional effect on undischarged bankrupt 261 1 This section applies where— a pursuant to section 257 the debtor's creditors decide to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement (with or without modifications), and b the debtor is an undischarged bankrupt. 2 Where this section applies the court shall annul the bankruptcy order on an application made— a by the bankrupt, or b where the bankrupt has not made an application within the prescribed period, by the official receiver. 3 An application under subsection (2) may not be made— a during the period specified in section 262(3)(a) during which the creditors' decision can be challenged by application under section 262, b while an application under that section is pending, or c while an appeal in respect of an application under that section is pending or may be brought. 4 Where this section applies the court may give such directions about the conduct of the bankruptcy and the administration of the bankrupt’s estate as it thinks appropriate for facilitating the implementation of the approved voluntary arrangement. Challenge of creditors' decision. 262 1 Subject to this section, an application to the court may be made, by any of the persons specified below, on one or both of the following grounds, namely— a that a voluntary arrangement approved by a decision of the debtor's creditors pursuant to section 257 unfairly prejudices the interests of a creditor of the debtor; b that there has been some material irregularity in relation to a creditors' decision procedure instigated under that section . 2 The persons who may apply under this section are— a the debtor; b a person who— i was entitled, in accordance with the rules, to vote in the creditors' decision procedure , or ii would have been so entitled if he had had notice of it c the nominee (or his replacement under section 256(3), 256A(4) or 258(3)); and d if the debtor is an undischarged bankrupt, the trustee of his estate or the official receiver. 3 An application under this section shall not be made a after the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which the creditors decided whether to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement or, where a report was required to be made to the court under section 259(1)(b), the day on which the report was made or b in the case of a person who was not given notice of the creditors' decision procedure , after the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which he became aware that a decision as to whether to approve the proposed voluntary arrangement had been made , but (subject to that) an application made by a person within subsection (2)(b)(ii) on the ground that the arrangement prejudices his interests may be made after the arrangement has ceased to have effect, unless it has come to an end prematurely. 4 Where on an application under this section the court is satisfied as to either of the grounds mentioned in subsection (1), it may do one or both of the following, namely— a revoke or suspend any approval given by a decision of the debtor's creditors ; b direct any person to seek a decision from the debtor's creditors (using a creditors' decision procedure) as to whether they approve— i any revised proposal the debtor may make, or ii in a case falling within subsection (1)(b), the debtor's original proposal. 5 Where at any time after giving a direction under subsection (4)(b) in relation to a revised proposal the court is satisfied that the debtor does not intend to submit such a proposal, the court shall revoke the direction and revoke or suspend any approval previously given by the debtor's creditors . 6 Where the court gives a direction under subsection (4)(b), it may also give a direction continuing or, as the case may require, renewing, for such period as may be specified in the direction, the effect in relation to the debtor of any interim order. 7 In any case where the court, on an application made under this section with respect to a creditors’ decision , gives a direction under subsection (4)(b) or revokes or suspends an approval under subsection (4)(a) or (5), the court may give such supplemental directions as it thinks fit and, in particular, directions with respect to— a things done since the decision under any voluntary arrangement approved by the meeting, and b such things done since the decision as could not have been done if any interim order had been in force in relation to the debtor when they were done. 8 Except in pursuance of the preceding provisions of this section, the approval of a voluntary arrangement by a decision of the debtor's creditors pursuant to section 257 is not invalidated by any irregularity in relation to the creditors' decision procedure by which the decision was made. False representations etc. 262A 1 If for the purpose of obtaining the approval of his creditors to a proposal for a voluntary arrangement, the debtor— a makes any false representation, or b fraudulently does, or omits to do, anything, he commits an offence. 2 Subsection (1) applies even if the proposal is not approved. 3 A person guilty of an offence under this section is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Prosecution of delinquent debtors. 262B 1 This section applies where a voluntary arrangement approved by a decision of the debtor's creditors pursuant to section 257 has taken effect. 2 If it appears to the nominee or supervisor that the debtor has been guilty of any offence in connection with the arrangement for which he is criminally liable, he shall forthwith— a report the matter to the Secretary of State, and b provide the Secretary of State with such information and give the Secretary of State such access to and facilities for inspecting and taking copies of documents (being information or documents in his possession or under his control and relating to the matter in question) as the Secretary of State requires. 3 Where a prosecuting authority institutes criminal proceedings following any report under subsection (2), the nominee or, as the case may be, supervisor shall give the authority all assistance in connection with the prosecution which he is reasonably able to give. For this purpose, “ prosecuting authority ” means the Director of Public Prosecutions or the Secretary of State. 4 The court may, on the application of the prosecuting authority, direct a nominee or supervisor to comply with subsection (3) if he has failed to do so. Arrangements coming to an end prematurely. 262C For the purposes of this Part, a voluntary arrangement approved by a decision of the debtor's creditors pursuant to section 257 comes to an end prematurely if, when it ceases to have effect, it has not been fully implemented in respect of all persons bound by the arrangement by virtue of section 260(2)(b)(i). Implementation and supervision of approved voluntary arrangement. 263 1 This section applies where a voluntary arrangement approved by a decision of the debtor's creditors pursuant to section 257 has taken effect. 2 The person who is for the time being carrying out, in relation to the voluntary arrangement, the functions conferred by virtue of the approval on the nominee (or his replacement under section 256(3), 256A(4) or 258(3)) shall be known as the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement. 3 If the debtor, any of his creditors or any other person is dissatisfied by any act, omission or decision of the supervisor, he may apply to the court; and on such an application the court may— a confirm, reverse or modify any act or decision of the supervisor, b give him directions, or c make such other order as it thinks fit. 4 The supervisor may apply to the court for directions in relation to any particular matter arising under the voluntary arrangement. 5 The court may, whenever— a it is expedient to appoint a person to carry out the functions of the supervisor, and b it is inexpedient, difficult or impracticable for an appointment to be made without the assistance of the court, make an order appointing a person who is qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner or authorised to act as supervisor, in relation to the voluntary arrangement , either in substitution for the existing supervisor or to fill a vacancy. ... 6 The power conferred by subsection (5) is exercisable so as to increase the number of persons exercising the functions of the supervisor or, where there is more than one person exercising those functions, so as to replace one or more of those persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Availability 263A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decision 263B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Result 263C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approval of voluntary arrangement 263D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementation 263E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revocation 263F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offences 263G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part IX Bankruptcy CHAPTER A1 Adjudicators: bankruptcy applications by debtors and bankruptcy orders Bankruptcy applications to an adjudicator 263H 1 An individual may make an application to an adjudicator in accordance with this Chapter for a bankruptcy order to be made against him or her. 2 An individual may make a bankruptcy application only on the ground that the individual is unable to pay his or her debts. Debtors against whom an adjudicator may make a bankruptcy order 263I 1 An adjudicator has jurisdiction to determine a bankruptcy application only if— a the centre of the debtor's main interests is in England and Wales, or ab the centre of the debtor's main interests is in a member State (other than Denmark) and the debtor has an establishment in England and Wales, or b ... the test in subsection (2) is met. 2 The test is that— a the debtor is domiciled in England and Wales, or b at any time in the period of three years ending with the day on which the application is made to the adjudicator, the debtor— i has been ordinarily resident, or has had a place of residence, in England and Wales, or ii has carried on business in England and Wales. 3 The reference in subsection (2) to the debtor carrying on business includes— a the carrying on of business by a firm or partnership of which the debtor is a member, and b the carrying on of business by an agent or manager for the debtor or for such a firm or partnership. 4 In this section, references to the centre of the debtor's main interests have the same meaning as in Article 3 of the EU Regulation . 5 In this section “ establishment ” has the same meaning as in Article 2(10) of the EU Regulation. Conditions applying to bankruptcy application 263J 1 A bankruptcy application must include— a such particulars of the debtor's creditors, debts and other liabilities, and assets, as may be prescribed, and b such other information as may be prescribed. 2 A bankruptcy application is not to be regarded as having been made unless any fee or deposit required in connection with the application by an order under section 415 has been paid to such person, and within such period, as may be prescribed. 3 A bankruptcy application may not be withdrawn. 4 A debtor must notify the adjudicator if, at any time before a bankruptcy order is made against the debtor or the adjudicator refuses to make such an order— a the debtor becomes able to pay his or her debts, or b a bankruptcy petition has been presented to the court in relation to the debtor. Determination of bankruptcy application 263K 1 After receiving a bankruptcy application, an adjudicator must determine whether the following requirements are met— a the adjudicator had jurisdiction under section 263I to determine the application on the date the application was made, b the debtor is unable to pay his or her debts at the date of the determination, c no bankruptcy petition is pending in relation to the debtor at the date of the determination, and d no bankruptcy order has been made in respect of any of the debts which are the subject of the application at the date of the determination. 2 If the adjudicator is satisfied that each of the requirements in subsection (1) are met, the adjudicator must make a bankruptcy order against the debtor. 3 If the adjudicator is not so satisfied, the adjudicator must refuse to make a bankruptcy order against the debtor. 4 The adjudicator must make a bankruptcy order against the debtor or refuse to make such an order before the end of the prescribed period (“the determination period”). Adjudicator's requests for further information 263L 1 An adjudicator may at any time during the determination period request from the debtor information that the adjudicator considers necessary for the purpose of determining whether a bankruptcy order must be made. 2 The adjudicator may specify a date before which information requested under subsection (1) must be provided; but that date must not be after the end of the determination period. 3 If the rules so prescribe, a request under subsection (1) may include a request for information to be given orally. 4 The rules may make provision enabling or requiring an adjudicator to request information from persons of a prescribed description in prescribed circumstances. Making of bankruptcy order 263M 1 This section applies where an adjudicator makes a bankruptcy order as a result of a bankruptcy application. 2 The order must be made in the prescribed form. 3 The adjudicator must— a give a copy of the order to the debtor, and b give notice of the order to persons of such description as may be prescribed. Refusal to make a bankruptcy order: review and appeal etc. 263N 1 Where an adjudicator refuses to make a bankruptcy order on a bankruptcy application, the adjudicator must give notice to the debtor— a giving the reasons for the refusal, and b explaining the effect of subsections (2) to (5). 2 If requested by the debtor before the end of the prescribed period, the adjudicator must review the information which was available to the adjudicator when the determination that resulted in the refusal was made. 3 Following a review under subsection (2) the adjudicator must— a confirm the refusal to make a bankruptcy order, or b make a bankruptcy order against the debtor. 4 Where the adjudicator confirms a refusal under subsection (3), the adjudicator must give notice to the debtor— a giving the reasons for the confirmation, and b explaining the effect of subsection (5). 5 If the refusal is confirmed under subsection (3), the debtor may appeal against the refusal to the court before the end of the prescribed period. False representations and omissions 263O 1 It is an offence knowingly or recklessly to make any false representation or omission in— a making a bankruptcy application to an adjudicator, or b providing any information to an adjudicator in connection with a bankruptcy application. 2 It is an offence knowingly or recklessly to fail to notify an adjudicator of a matter in accordance with a requirement imposed by or under this Part. 3 It is immaterial for the purposes of an offence under this section whether or not a bankruptcy order is made as a result of the application. 4 It is not a defence in proceedings for an offence under this section that anything relied on, in whole or in part, as constituting the offence was done outside England and Wales. 5 Proceedings for an offence under this section may only be instituted— a by the Secretary of State, or b by or with the consent of the Director of Public Prosecutions. Chapter I The court: bankruptcy petitions and bankruptcy orders Preliminary Who may present a bankruptcy petition. 264 1 A petition for a bankruptcy order to be made against an individual may be presented to the court in accordance with the following provisions of this Part— a by one of the individual’s creditors or jointly by more than one of them, b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c by the supervisor of, or any person (other than the individual) who is for the time being bound by, a voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual and approved under Part VIII, or d where a criminal bankruptcy order has been made against the individual, by the Official Petitioner or by any person specified in the order in pursuance of section 39(3)(b) of the Powers of Criminal Courts Act 1973. 2 Subject to those provisions, the court may make a bankruptcy order on any such petition. Creditor's petition: debtors against whom the court may make a bankruptcy order. 265 1 A bankruptcy petition may be presented to the court under section 264(1)(a) only if— a the centre of the debtor's main interests is in England and Wales, or ab the centre of the debtor's main interests is in a member State (other than Denmark) and the debtor has an establishment in England and Wales, or b ... the test in subsection (2) is met. 2 The test is that— a the debtor is domiciled in England and Wales, or b at any time in the period of three years ending with the day on which the petition is presented, the debtor— i has been ordinarily resident, or has had a place of residence, in England and Wales, or ii has carried on business in England and Wales. 3 The reference in subsection (2) to the debtor carrying on business includes— a the carrying on of business by a firm or partnership of which the debtor is a member, and b the carrying on of business by an agent or manager for the debtor or for such a firm or partnership. 4 In this section, references to the centre of the debtor's main interests have the same meaning as in Article 3 of the EU Regulation . 5 In this section “ establishment ” has the same meaning as in Article 2(10) of the EU Regulation. Other preliminary conditions. 266 1 Where a bankruptcy petition relating to an individual is presented by a person who is entitled to present a petition under two or more paragraphs of section 264(1), the petition is to be treated for the purposes of this Part as a petition under such one of those paragraphs as may be specified in the petition. 2 A bankruptcy petition shall not be withdrawn without the leave of the court. 3 The court has a general power, if it appears to it appropriate to do so on the grounds that there has been a contravention of the rules or for any other reason, to dismiss a bankruptcy petition or to stay proceedings on such a petition; and, where it stays proceedings on a petition, it may do so on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit. 4 Without prejudice to subsection (3), where a petition under section 264(1)(a) ... or (c) in respect of an individual is pending at a time when a criminal bankruptcy order is made against him, or is presented after such an order has been so made, the court may on the application of the Official Petitioner dismiss the petition if it appears to it appropriate to do so. Creditor’s petition Grounds of creditor’s petition. 267 1 A creditor’s petition must be in respect of one or more debts owed by the debtor, and the petitioning creditor or each of the petitioning creditors must be a person to whom the debt or (as the case may be) at least one of the debts is owed. 2 Subject to the next three sections, a creditor’s petition may be presented to the court in respect of a debt or debts only if, at the time the petition is presented— a the amount of the debt, or the aggregate amount of the debts, is equal to or exceeds the bankruptcy level, b the debt, or each of the debts, is for a liquidated sum payable to the petitioning creditor, or one or more of the petitioning creditors, either immediately or at some certain, future time, and is unsecured, c the debt, or each of the debts, is a debt which the debtor appears either to be unable to pay or to have no reasonable prospect of being able to pay, and d there is no outstanding application to set aside a statutory demand served (under section 268 below) in respect of the debt or any of the debts. 3 A debt is not to be regarded for the purposes of subsection (2) as a debt for a liquidated sum by reason only that the amount of the debt is specified in a criminal bankruptcy order. 4 “ The bankruptcy level ” is £5,000 but the Secretary of State may by order in a statutory instrument substitute any amount specified in the order for that amount or (as the case may be) for the amount which by virtue of such an order is for the time being the amount of the bankruptcy level. 5 An order shall not be made under subsection (4) unless a draft of it has been laid before, and approved by a resolution of, each House of Parliament. Definition of “inability to pay”, etc.; the statutory demand. 268 1 For the purposes of section 267(2)(c), the debtor appears to be unable to pay a debt if, but only if, the debt is payable immediately and either— a the petitioning creditor to whom the debt is owed has served on the debtor a demand (known as “ the statutory demand ”) in the prescribed form requiring him to pay the debt or to secure or compound for it to the satisfaction of the creditor, at least 3 weeks have elapsed since the demand was served and the demand has been neither complied with nor set aside in accordance with the rules, or b execution or other process issued in respect of the debt on a judgment or order of any court in favour of the petitioning creditor, or one or more of the petitioning creditors to whom the debt is owed, has been returned unsatisfied in whole or in part. 2 For the purposes of section 267(2)(c) the debtor appears to have no reasonable prospect of being able to pay a debt if, but only if, the debt is not immediately payable and— a the petitioning creditor to whom it is owed has served on the debtor a demand (also known as “ the statutory demand ”) in the prescribed form requiring him to establish to the satisfaction of the creditor that there is a reasonable prospect that the debtor will be able to pay the debt when it falls due, b at least 3 weeks have elapsed since the demand was served, and c the demand has been neither complied with nor set aside in accordance with the rules. Creditor with security. 269 1 A debt which is the debt, or one of the debts, in respect of which a creditor’s petition is presented need not be unsecured if either— a the petition contains a statement by the person having the right to enforce the security that he is willing, in the event of a bankruptcy order being made, to give up his security for the benefit of all the bankrupt’s creditors, or b the petition is expressed not to be made in respect of the secured part of the debt and contains a statement by that person of the estimated value at the date of the petition of the security for the secured part of the debt. 2 In a case falling within subsection (1)(b) the secured and unsecured parts of the debt are to be treated for the purposes of sections 267 to 270 as separate debts. Expedited petition. 270 In the case of a creditor’s petition presented wholly or partly in respect of a debt which is the subject of a statutory demand under section 268, the petition may be presented before the end of the 3-week period there mentioned if there is a serious possibility that the debtor’s property or the value of any of his property will be significantly diminished during that period and the petition contains a statement to that effect. Proceedings on creditor’s petition. 271 1 The court shall not make a bankruptcy order on a creditor’s petition unless it is satisfied that the debt, or one of the debts, in respect of which the petition was presented is either— a a debt which, having been payable at the date of the petition or having since become payable, has been neither paid nor secured or compounded for, or b a debt which the debtor has no reasonable prospect of being able to pay when it falls due. 2 In a case in which the petition contains such a statement as is required by section 270, the court shall not make a bankruptcy order until at least 3 weeks have elapsed since the service of any statutory demand under section 268. 3 The court may dismiss the petition if it is satisfied that the debtor is able to pay all his debts or is satisfied— a that the debtor has made an offer to secure or compound for a debt in respect of which the petition is presented, b that the acceptance of that offer would have required the dismissal of the petition, and c that the offer has been unreasonably refused; and, in determining for the purposes of this subsection whether the debtor is able to pay all his debts, the court shall take into account his contingent and prospective liabilities. 4 In determining for the purposes of this section what constitutes a reasonable prospect that a debtor will be able to pay a debt when it falls due, it is to be assumed that the prospect given by the facts and other matters known to the creditor at the time he entered into the transaction resulting in the debt was a reasonable prospect. 5 Nothing in sections 267 to 271 prejudices the power of the court, in accordance with the rules, to authorise a creditor’s petition to be amended by the omission of any creditor or debt and to be proceeded with as if things done for the purposes of those sections had been done only by or in relation to the remaining creditors or debts. ... Grounds of debtor’s petition. 272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appointment of insolvency practitioner by the court. 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action on report of insolvency practitioner. 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Debtor who meets conditions for a debt relief order 274A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary administration. 275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other cases for special consideration Default in connection with voluntary arrangement. 276 1 The court shall not make a bankruptcy order on a petition under section 264(1)(c) (supervisor of, or person bound by, voluntary arrangement proposed and approved) unless it is satisfied— a that the debtor has failed to comply with his obligations under the voluntary arrangement, or b that information which was false or misleading in any material particular or which contained material omissions— i was contained in any statement of affairs or other document supplied by the debtor under Part VIII to any person, or ii was otherwise made available by the debtor to his creditors in connection with a creditors' decision procedure instigated under that Part, or c that the debtor has failed to do all such things as may for the purposes of the voluntary arrangement have been reasonably required of him by the supervisor of the arrangement. 2 Where a bankruptcy order is made on a petition under section 264(1)(c), any expenses properly incurred as expenses of the administration of the voluntary arrangement in question shall be a first charge on the bankrupt’s estate. Petition based on criminal bankruptcy order. 277 1 Subject to section 266(3), the court shall make a bankruptcy order on a petition under section 264(1)(d) on production of a copy of the criminal bankruptcy order on which the petition is based. This does not apply if it appears to the court that the criminal bankruptcy order has been rescinded on appeal. 2 Subject to the provisions of this Part, the fact that an appeal is pending against any conviction by virtue of which a criminal bankruptcy order was made does not affect any proceedings on a petition under section 264(1)(d) based on that order. 3 For the purposes of this section, an appeal against a conviction is pending— a in any case, until the expiration of the period of 28 days beginning with the date of conviction; b if notice of appeal to the Court of Appeal is given during that period and during that period the appellant notifies the official receiver of it, until the determination of the appeal and thereafter for so long as an appeal to the Supreme Court is pending within the meaning of subsection (4). 4 For the purposes of subsection (3)(b) an appeal to the Supreme Court shall be treated as pending until any application for leave to appeal is disposed of and, if leave to appeal is granted, until the appeal is disposed of; and for the purposes of this subsection an application for leave to appeal shall be treated as disposed of at the expiration of the time within which it may be made, if it is not made within that time. Chapter IA Commencement and duration of bankruptcy Commencement and continuance. 278 The bankruptcy of an individual against whom a bankruptcy order has been made— a commences with the day on which the order is made, and b continues until the individual is discharged under ... this Chapter. Duration 279 1 A bankrupt is discharged from bankruptcy at the end of the period of one year beginning with the date on which the bankruptcy commences. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 On the application of the official receiver or the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate, the court may order that the period specified in subsection (1) shall cease to run until— a the end of a specified period, or b the fulfilment of a specified condition. 4 The court may make an order under subsection (3) only if satisfied that the bankrupt has failed or is failing to comply with an obligation under this Part. 5 In subsection (3)(b) “ condition ” includes a condition requiring that the court be satisfied of something. 6 In the case of an individual who is made bankrupt on a petition under section 264(1)(d)— a subsections (1) to (5) shall not apply, and b the bankrupt is discharged from bankruptcy by an order of the court under section 280. 7 This section is without prejudice to any power of the court to annul a bankruptcy order. Discharge by order of the court. 280 1 An application for an order of the court discharging an individual from bankruptcy in a case falling within section 279(6) may be made by the bankrupt at any time after the end of the period of 5 years beginning with the date on which the bankruptcy commences . 2 On an application under this section the court may— a refuse to discharge the bankrupt from bankruptcy, b make an order discharging him absolutely, or c make an order discharging him subject to such conditions with respect to any income which may subsequently become due to him, or with respect to property devolving upon him, or acquired by him, after his discharge, as may be specified in the order. 3 The court may provide for an order falling within subsection (2)(b) or (c) to have immediate effect or to have its effect suspended for such period, or until the fulfilment of such conditions (including a condition requiring the court to be satisfied as to any matter), as may be specified in the order. Effect of discharge. 281 1 Subject as follows, where a bankrupt is discharged, the discharge releases him from all the bankruptcy debts, but has no effect— a on the functions (so far as they remain to be carried out) of the trustee of his estate, or b on the operation, for the purposes of the carrying out of those functions, of the provisions of this Part; and, in particular, discharge does not affect the right of any creditor of the bankrupt to prove in the bankruptcy for any debt from which the bankrupt is released. 2 Discharge does not affect the right of any secured creditor of the bankrupt to enforce his security for the payment of a debt from which the bankrupt is released. 3 Discharge does not release the bankrupt from any bankruptcy debt which he incurred in respect of, or forbearance in respect of which was secured by means of, any fraud or fraudulent breach of trust to which he was a party. 4 Discharge does not release the bankrupt from any liability in respect of a fine imposed for an offence or from any liability under a recognisance except, in the case of a penalty imposed for an offence under an enactment relating to the public revenue or of a recognisance, with the consent of the Treasury. 4A In subsection (4) the reference to a fine imposed for an offence includes a reference to — a a charge ordered to be paid under section 46 of the Sentencing Code (criminal courts charge), whether on conviction or otherwise; b a confiscation order under Part 2, 3 or 4 of the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002. 5 Discharge does not, except to such extent and on such conditions as the court may direct, release the bankrupt from any bankruptcy debt which— a consists in a liability to pay damages for negligence, nuisance or breach of a statutory, contractual or other duty, or to pay damages by virtue of Part I of the Consumer Protection Act 1987, being in either case damages in respect of personal injuries to any person, or b arises under any order made in family proceedings or under a maintenance calculation made under the Child Support Act 1991 . . .. 6 Discharge does not release the bankrupt from such other bankruptcy debts, not being debts provable in his bankruptcy, as are prescribed. 7 Discharge does not release any person other than the bankrupt from any liability (whether as partner or co-trustee of the bankrupt or otherwise) from which the bankrupt is released by the discharge, or from any liability as surety for the bankrupt or as a person in the nature of such a surety. 8 In this section— “ family proceedings ” means— a proceedings in the family court; and b family proceedings within the meaning of Part V of the Matrimonial and Family Proceedings Act 1984. “ fine ” means the same as in the Magistrates’ Courts Act 1980; and “ personal injuries ” includes death and any disease or other impairment of a person’s physical or mental condition. Post-discharge restrictions 281A Schedule 4A to this Act (bankruptcy restrictions order and bankruptcy restrictions undertaking) shall have effect. Court’s power to annul bankruptcy order. 282 1 The court may annul a bankruptcy order if it at any time appears to the court— a that, on any grounds existing at the time the order was made, the order ought not to have been made, or b that, to the extent required by the rules, the bankruptcy debts and the expenses of the bankruptcy have all, since the making of the order, been either paid or secured for to the satisfaction of the court. 2 The court may annul a bankruptcy order made against an individual on a petition under paragraph (a) ... or (c) of section 264(1) or on a bankruptcy application if it at any time appears to the court, on an application by the Official Petitioner— a that the petition was pending or the application was ongoing at a time when a criminal bankruptcy order was made against the individual or was presented after such an order was so made, and b no appeal is pending (within the meaning of section 277) against the individual’s conviction of any offence by virtue of which the criminal bankruptcy order was made; and the court shall annul a bankruptcy order made on a petition under section 264(1)(d) if it at any time appears to the court that the criminal bankruptcy order on which the petition was based has been rescinded in consequence of an appeal. 3 The court may annul a bankruptcy order whether or not the bankrupt has been discharged from the bankruptcy. 4 Where the court annuls a bankruptcy order (whether under this section or under section 261 ... in Part VIII)— a any sale or other disposition of property, payment made or other thing duly done, under any provision in this Group of Parts, by or under the authority of the official receiver or a trustee of the bankrupt’s estate or by the court is valid, but b if any of the bankrupt’s estate is then vested, under any such provision, in such a trustee, it shall vest in such person as the court may appoint or, in default of any such appointment, revert to the bankrupt on such terms (if any) as the court may direct; and the court may include in its order such supplemental provisions as may be authorised by the rules. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter II Protection of Bankrupt’s Estate and Investigation of His Affairs Definition of bankrupt’s estate. 283 1 Subject as follows, a bankrupt’s estate for the purposes of any of this Group of Parts comprises— a all property belonging to or vested in the bankrupt at the commencement of the bankruptcy, and b any property which by virtue of any of the following provisions of this Part is comprised in that estate or is treated as falling with the preceding paragraph. 2 Subsection (1) does not apply to— a such tools, books, vehicles and other items of equipment as are necessary to the bankrupt for use personally by him in his employment, business or vocation; b such clothing, bedding, furniture, household equipment and provisions as are necessary for satisfying the basic domestic needs of the bankrupt and his family. This subsection is subject to section 308 in Chapter IV (certain excluded property reclaimable by trustee). 3 Subsection (1) does not apply to— a property held by the bankrupt on trust for any other person, or b the right of nomination to a vacant ecclesiastical benefice. 3A Subject to section 308A in Chapter IV , subsection (1) does not apply to— a a tenancy which is an assured tenancy or an assured agricultural occupancy, within the meaning of Part I of the Housing Act 1988, and the terms of which inhibit an assignment as mentioned in section 127(5) of the Rent Act 1977, or aa a standard contract within the meaning of section 8 of the Renting Homes (Wales) Act 2016 (anaw 1) and the terms of which inhibit an assignment as mentioned in section 127(5) of the Rent Act 1977 (c. 42) , or b a protected tenancy, within the meaning of the Rent Act 1977, in respect of which, by virtue of any provision of Part IX of that Act, no premium can lawfully be required as a condition of assignment, or c a tenancy of a dwelling-house by virtue of which the bankrupt is, within the meaning of the Rent (Agriculture) Act 1976, a protected occupier of the dwelling-house, and the terms of which inhibit an assignment as mentioned in section 127(5) of the Rent Act 1977, or d a secure tenancy, within the meaning of Part IV of the Housing Act 1985, which is not capable of being assigned, except in the cases mentioned in section 91(3) of that Act , or e a secure contract within the meaning of section 8 of the Renting Homes (Wales) Act 2016 (anaw 1) which is not capable of being assigned, except— i in the cases mentioned in section 251 (family property order) of that Act, ii in accordance with section 92 (assignment by way of exchange) of the Housing Act 1985 (c. 68) , or iii to a person who would be qualified to succeed the contract-holder if the contract-holder died immediately before the assignment. 4 References in any of this Group of Parts to property, in relation to a bankrupt, include references to any power exercisable by him over or in respect of property except in so far as the power is exercisable over or in respect of property not for the time being comprised in the bankrupt’s estate and— a is so exercisable at a time after either the official receiver has had his release in respect of that estate under section 299(2) in chapter III or the trustee of that estate has vacated office under section 298(8) , or b cannot be so exercised for the benefit of the bankrupt; and a power exercisable over or in respect of property is deemed for the purposes of any of this Group of Parts to vest in the person entitled to exercise it at the time of the transaction or event by virtue of which it is exercisable by that person (whether or not it becomes so exercisable at that time). 5 For the purposes of any such provision in this Group of Parts, property comprised in a bankrupt’s estate is so comprised subject to the rights of any person other than the bankrupt (whether as a secured creditor of the bankrupt or otherwise) in relation thereto, but disregarding— a any rights in relation to which a statement such as is required by section 269(1)(a) was made in the petition on which the bankrupt was made bankrupt, and b any rights which have been otherwise given up in accordance with the rules. 6 This section has effect subject to the provisions of any enactment not contained in this Act under which any property is to be excluded from a bankrupt’s estate. Bankrupt’s home ceasing to form part of estate 283A 1 This section applies where property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate consists of an interest in a dwelling-house which at the date of the bankruptcy was the sole or principal residence of— a the bankrupt, b the bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner , or c a former spouse or former civil partner of the bankrupt. 2 At the end of the period of three years beginning with the date of the bankruptcy the interest mentioned in subsection (1) shall— a cease to be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate, and b vest in the bankrupt (without conveyance, assignment or transfer). 3 Subsection (2) shall not apply if during the period mentioned in that subsection— a the trustee realises the interest mentioned in subsection (1), b the trustee applies for an order for sale in respect of the dwelling-house, c the trustee applies for an order for possession of the dwelling-house, d the trustee applies for an order under section 313 in Chapter IV in respect of that interest, or e the trustee and the bankrupt agree that the bankrupt shall incur a specified liability to his estate (with or without the addition of interest from the date of the agreement) in consideration of which the interest mentioned in subsection (1) shall cease to form part of the estate. 4 Where an application of a kind described in subsection (3)(b) to (d) is made during the period mentioned in subsection (2) and is dismissed, unless the court orders otherwise the interest to which the application relates shall on the dismissal of the application— a cease to be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate, and b vest in the bankrupt (without conveyance, assignment or transfer). 5 If the bankrupt does not inform the trustee or the official receiver of his interest in a property before the end of the period of three months beginning with the date of the bankruptcy, the period of three years mentioned in subsection (2)— a shall not begin with the date of the bankruptcy, but b shall begin with the date on which the trustee or official receiver becomes aware of the bankrupt’s interest. 6 The court may substitute for the period of three years mentioned in subsection (2) a longer period— a in prescribed circumstances, and b in such other circumstances as the court thinks appropriate. 7 The rules may make provision for this section to have effect with the substitution of a shorter period for the period of three years mentioned in subsection (2) in specified circumstances (which may be described by reference to action to be taken by a trustee in bankruptcy). 8 The rules may also, in particular, make provision— a requiring or enabling the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate to give notice that this section applies or does not apply; b about the effect of a notice under paragraph (a); c requiring the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate to make an application to the Chief Land Registrar. 9 Rules under subsection (8)(b) may, in particular— a disapply this section; b enable a court to disapply this section; c make provision in consequence of a disapplication of this section; d enable a court to make provision in consequence of a disapplication of this section; e make provision (which may include provision conferring jurisdiction on a court or tribunal) about compensation. Restrictions on dispositions of property. 284 1 Where a person is made bankrupt, any disposition of property made by that person in the period to which this section applies is void except to the extent that it is or was made with the consent of the court, or is or was subsequently ratified by the court. 2 Subsection (1) applies to a payment (whether in cash or otherwise) as it applies to a disposition of property and, accordingly, where any payment is void by virtue of that subsection, the person paid shall hold the sum paid for the bankrupt as part of his estate. 3 This section applies to the period beginning with the day of the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition and ending with the vesting, under Chapter IV of this Part, of the bankrupt’s estate in a trustee. 4 The preceding provisions of this section do not give a remedy against any person— a in respect of any property or payment which he received before the commencement of the bankruptcy in good faith, for value and without notice that the bankruptcy application had been made or (as the case may be) that the bankruptcy petition had been presented, or b in respect of any interest in property which derives from an interest in respect of which there is, by virtue of this subsection, no remedy. 5 Where after the commencement of his bankruptcy the bankrupt has incurred a debt to a banker or other person by reason of the making of a payment which is void under this section, that debt is deemed for the purposes of any of this Group of Parts to have been incurred before the commencement of the bankruptcy unless— a that banker or person had notice of the bankruptcy before the debt was incurred, or b it is not reasonably practicable for the amount of the payment to be recovered from the person to whom it was made. 6 A disposition of property is void under this section notwithstanding that the property is not or, as the case may be, would not be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate; but nothing in this section affects any disposition made by a person of property held by him on trust for any other person. Restriction on proceedings and remedies. 285 1 At any time when proceedings on a bankruptcy application are ongoing or proceedings on a bankruptcy petition are pending or an individual has been made bankrupt the court may stay any action, execution or other legal process against the property or person of the debtor or, as the case may be, of the bankrupt. 2 Any court in which proceedings are pending against any individual may, on proof that a bankruptcy application has been made or a bankruptcy petition has been presented in respect of that individual or that he is an undischarged bankrupt, either stay the proceedings or allow them to continue on such terms as it thinks fit. 3 After the making of a bankruptcy order no person who is a creditor of the bankrupt in respect of a debt provable in the bankruptcy shall— a have any remedy against the property or person of the bankrupt in respect of that debt, or b before the discharge of the bankrupt, commence any action or other legal proceedings against the bankrupt except with the leave of the court and on such terms as the court may impose. This is subject to sections 346 (enforcement procedures) and 347 (limited right to distress). 4 Subject as follows, subsection (3) does not affect the right of a secured creditor of the bankrupt to enforce his security. 5 Where any goods of an undischarged bankrupt are held by any person by way of pledge, pawn or other security, the official receiver may, after giving notice in writing of his intention to do so, inspect the goods. Where such a notice has been given to any person, that person is not entitled, without leave of the court, to realise his security unless he has given the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate a reasonable opportunity of inspecting the goods and of exercising the bankrupt’s right of redemption. 6 References in this section to the property or goods of the bankrupt are to any of his property or goods, whether or not comprised in his estate. Power to appoint interim receiver. 286 1 The court may, if it is shown to be necessary for the protection of the debtor’s property, at any time after the presentation of a bankruptcy petition and before making a bankruptcy order, appoint the official receiver or an insolvency practitioner to be interim receiver of the debtor’s property. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The court may by an order appointing any person to be an interim receiver direct that his powers shall be limited or restricted in any respect; but, save as so directed, an interim receiver has, in relation to the debtor’s property, all the rights, powers, duties and immunities given by the next section. 4 An order of the court appointing any person to be an interim receiver shall require that person to take immediate possession of the debtor’s property or, as the case may be, the part of it to which his powers as interim receiver are limited. 5 Where an interim receiver has been appointed, the debtor shall give him such inventory of his property and such other information, and shall attend on the interim receiver at such times, as the latter may for the purpose of carrying out his functions under this section reasonably require. 6 Where an interim receiver is appointed, section 285(3) applies for the period between the appointment and the making of a bankruptcy order on the petition, or the dismissal of the petition, as if the appointment were the making of such an order. 7 A person ceases to be interim receiver of a debtor’s property if the bankruptcy petition relating to the debtor is dismissed, if a bankruptcy order is made on the petition or if the court by order otherwise terminates the appointment. 8 References in this section to the debtor’s property are to all his property, whether or not it would be comprised in his estate if he were made bankrupt. Powers of interim receiver . 287 1 An interim receiver appointed under section 286 is the receiver and (subject to section 370 (special manager)) the manager of the debtor's property and is under a duty to act as such. 2 The function of an interim receiver while acting as receiver or manager of the debtor's property under this section is to protect the property ; and for this purpose— a he has the same powers as if he were a receiver or manager appointed by the High Court, and b he is entitled to sell or otherwise dispose of any perishable goods comprised in the property and any other goods so comprised the value of which is likely to diminish if they are not disposed of. 3 An interim receiver while acting as receiver or manager of the debtor's property under this section— a shall take all such steps as he thinks fit for protecting the debtor's property, b is not required to do anything that involves his incurring expenditure, except in pursuance of directions given by— i the Secretary of State, where the official receiver is the interim receiver, or ii the court, in any other case, c may, if he thinks fit (and shall, if so directed by the court) at any time seek a decision on a matter from the debtor's creditors. 4 Where— a an interim receiver acting as receiver or manager of the debtor's property under this section seizes or disposes of any property which is not the debtor's property, and b at the time of the seizure or disposal the interim receiver believes, and has reasonable grounds for believing, that he is entitled (whether in pursuance of an order of the court or otherwise) to seize or dispose of that property, the interim receiver is not to be liable to any person in respect of any loss or damage resulting from the seizure or disposal except in so far as that loss or damage is caused by his negligence; and he has a lien on the property, or the proceeds of its sale, for such of the expenses of the interim receivership as were incurred in connection with the seizure or disposal. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statement of affairs. 288 1 Where a bankruptcy order has been made otherwise than on a bankruptcy application , the official receiver may at any time before the discharge of the bankrupt require the bankrupt to submit to the official receiver a statement of affairs. 2 The statement of affairs shall contain— a such particulars of the bankrupt’s creditors and of his debts and other liabilities and of his assets as may be prescribed, and b such other information as may be prescribed. 2A Where a bankrupt is required under subsection (1) to submit a statement of affairs to the official receiver, the bankrupt shall do so (subject to subsection (3)) before the end of the period of 21 days beginning with the day after that on which the prescribed notice of the requirement is given to the bankrupt by the official receiver. 3 The official receiver may, if he thinks fit— a release a bankrupt from an obligation imposed on the bankrupt under subsection (1), or b either when giving the notice mentioned in subsection (2A) or subsequently, extend the period mentioned in that subsection, and where the official receiver has refused to exercise a power conferred by this section, the court, if it thinks fit, may exercise it. 4 A bankrupt who— a without reasonable excuse fails to comply with an obligation imposed under his section, or b without reasonable excuse submits a statement of affairs that does not comply with the prescribed requirements, is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly (in addition to any other punishment to which he may be subject). Investigatory duties of official receiver 289 1 The official receiver shall— a investigate the conduct and affairs of each bankrupt (including his conduct and affairs before the making of the bankruptcy order), and b make such report (if any) to the court as the official receiver thinks fit. 2 Subsection (1) shall not apply to a case in which the official receiver thinks an investigation under that subsection unnecessary. 3 Where a bankrupt makes an application for discharge under section 280— a the official receiver shall make a report to the court about such matters as may be prescribed, and b the court shall consider the report before determining the application. 4 A report by the official receiver under this section shall in any proceedings be prima facie evidence of the facts stated in it. Public examination of bankrupt. 290 1 Where a bankruptcy order has been made, the official receiver may at any time before the discharge of the bankrupt apply to the court for the public examination of the bankrupt. 2 Unless the court otherwise orders, the official receiver shall make an application under subsection (1) if notice requiring him to do so is given to him, in accordance with the rules, by one of the bankrupt’s creditors with the concurrence of not less than one-half, in value, of those creditors (including the creditor giving notice). 3 On an application under subsection (1), the court shall direct that a public examination of the bankrupt shall be held on a day appointed by the court; and the bankrupt shall attend on that day and be publicly examined as to his affairs, dealings and property. 4 The following may take part in the public examination of the bankrupt and may question him concerning his affairs, dealings and property and the causes of his failure, namely— a the official receiver and, in the case of an individual made bankrupt on a petition under section 264(1)(d), the Official Petitioner, b the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, if his appointment has taken effect, c any person who has been appointed as special manager of the bankrupt’s estate or business, d any creditor of the bankrupt who has tendered a proof in the bankruptcy. 5 If a bankrupt without reasonable excuse fails at any time to attend his public examination under this section he is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly (in addition to any other punishment to which he may be subject). Duties of bankrupt in relation to official receiver. 291 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 The bankrupt shall give the official receiver such inventory of his estate and such other information, and shall attend on the official receiver at such times, as the official receiver may reasonably require— a for a purpose of this Chapter, or b in connection with the making of a bankruptcy restrictions order. 5 Subsection (4) applies to a bankrupt after his discharge. 6 If the bankrupt without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed by this section, he is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly (in addition to any other punishment to which he may be subject). Chapter III Trustees in Bankruptcy Tenure of office as trustee First trustee in bankruptcy 291A 1 On the making of a bankruptcy order the official receiver becomes trustee of the bankrupt's estate, unless the court appoints another person under subsection (2). 2 If when the order is made there is a supervisor of a voluntary arrangement approved in relation to the bankrupt under Part 8, the court may on making the order appoint the supervisor of the arrangement as the trustee. 3 Where a person becomes trustee of a bankrupt's estate under this section, the person must give notice of that fact to the bankrupt's creditors (or, if the court so allows, advertise it in accordance with the court's directions). 4 A notice or advertisement given by a trustee appointed under subsection (2) must explain the procedure for establishing a creditors' committee under section 301. Appointment of trustees: general provision 292 1 This section applies to any appointment of a person (other than the official receiver) as trustee of a bankrupt's estate. 2 No person may be appointed as trustee of a bankrupt’s estate unless he is, at the time of the appointment, qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the bankrupt. 3 Any power to appoint a person as trustee of a bankrupt’s estate includes power to appoint two or more persons as joint trustees; but such an appointment must make provision as to the circumstances in which the trustees must act together and the circumstances in which one or more of them may act for the others. 4 The appointment of any person as trustee takes effect only if that person accepts the appointment in accordance with the rules. Subject to this, the appointment of any person as trustee takes effect at the time specified in his certificate of appointment. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summoning of meeting to appoint first trustee. 293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power of creditors to requisition meeting. 294 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Failure of meeting to appoint trustee. 295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appointment of trustee by Secretary of State. 296 1 At any time when the official receiver is the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate by virtue of any provision of this Chapter ... he may apply to the Secretary of State for the appointment of a person as trustee instead of the official receiver. 2 On an application under subsection (1) the Secretary of State shall either make an appointment or decline to make one. 3 Such an application may be made notwithstanding that the Secretary of State has declined to make an appointment either on a previous application under subsection (1) ... or under section 300(4) below. 4 Where the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate has been appointed by the Secretary of State (whether under this section or otherwise), the trustee shall give notice to the bankrupt’s creditors of his appointment or, if the court so allows, shall advertise his appointment in accordance with the court’s directions. 5 In that notice or advertisement the trustee shall explain the procedure for establishing a creditors' committee under section 301. Special cases. 297 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal of trustee; vacation of office. 298 1 Subject as follows, the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate may be removed from office only by an order of the court or by a decision of the bankrupt's creditors made by a creditors' decision procedure instigated specially for that purpose in accordance with the rules. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Where the official receiver is trustee by virtue of section 291A(1) or a trustee is appointed by the Secretary of State or (otherwise than under section 291A(2) ) by the court, a creditors' decision procedure may be instigated for the purpose of removing the trustee only if— a the trustee thinks fit, or b the court so directs, or c ... one of the bankrupt’s creditors so requests, with the concurrence of not less than one-quarter, in value, of the creditors (including the creditor making the request). 4A Where the bankrupt's creditors decide to remove a trustee, they may in accordance with the rules appoint another person as trustee in his place. 4B Where the decision to remove a trustee is made under subsection (4), the decision does not take effect until the bankrupt's creditors appoint another person as trustee in his place. 5 If the trustee was appointed by the Secretary of State, he may be removed by a direction of the Secretary of State. 6 The trustee (not being the official receiver) shall vacate office if he ceases to be a person who is for the time being qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the bankrupt. 7 The trustee may, in the prescribed circumstances, resign his office by giving notice of his resignation to the prescribed person . 8 The trustee shall vacate office on giving notice to the prescribed person that the trustee has given notice under section 331(2). 8A A notice under subsection (8)— a must not be given before the end of the period prescribed by the rules as the period within which the bankrupt's creditors may object to the trustee's release, and b must state whether any of the bankrupt's creditors objected to the trustee's release. 9 The trustee shall vacate office if the bankruptcy order is annulled. Release of trustee. 299 1 Where the official receiver has ceased to be the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate and a person is appointed in his stead, the official receiver shall have his release with effect from the following time, that is to say— a where that person is appointed by ... the bankrupt’s creditors or by the Secretary of State, the time at which the official receiver gives notice under this paragraph to the prescribed person that he has been replaced, and b where that person is appointed by the court, such time as the court may determine. 2 If the official receiver while he is the trustee gives notice to the Secretary of State that the administration of the bankrupt’s estate in accordance with Chapter IV of this Part is for practical purposes complete, he shall have his release with effect from such time as the Secretary of State may determine. 3 A person other than the official receiver who has ceased to be the trustee shall have his release with effect from the following time, that is to say— a in the following cases , the time at which notice is given to the prescribed person in accordance with the rules that that person has ceased to hold office — i the person has been removed from office by a decision of the bankrupt's creditors and the creditors have not decided against his release, ii the person has died; b in the following cases, such time as the Secretary of State may, on an application by the person, determine— i the person has been removed from office by a decision of the bankrupt's creditors and the creditors have decided against his release, ii the person has been removed from office by the court or by the Secretary of State, iii the person has vacated office under section 298(6); c in the case of a person who has resigned, such time as may be prescribed; d in the case of a person who has vacated office under section 298(8)— i if any of the bankrupt's creditors objected to the person's release before the end of the period for so objecting prescribed by the rules, such time as the Secretary of State may, on an application by that person, determine, and ii otherwise, the time at which the person vacated office. 3A Where the person is removed from office by a decision of the bankrupt's creditors, any decision of the bankrupt's creditors as to whether the person should have his release must be made by a creditors' decision procedure. 4 Where a bankruptcy order is annulled, the trustee at the time of the annulment has his release with effect from such time as the court may determine. 5 Where the offical receiver or the trustee has his release under this section, he shall, with effect from the time specified in the preceeding provisions of this section, be discharged from all liability both in respect of acts or omissions of his in the administration of the estate and otherwise in relation to his conduct as trustee. But nothing in this section prevents the exercise, in relation to a person who has had his release under this section, of the court’s powers under section 304. Vacancy in office as trustee. 300 1 This section applies where the appointment of any person as trustee of a bankrupt’s estate fails to take effect or, such an appointment having taken effect, there is otherwise a vacancy in the office of trustee. 2 The official receiver shall be trustee until the vacancy is filled. 3 The official receiver may ask the bankrupt's creditors to appoint a person as trustee, and must do so if so requested by not less than one tenth in value of the bankrupt's creditors. 3A If the official receiver makes such a request the bankrupt's creditors may in accordance with the rules appoint a person as trustee. 4 If at the end of the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which the vacancy first came to the offical receiver’s attention he has not asked, and is not proposing to ask, the bankrupt's creditors to appoint a person as trustee , he shall refer the need for an appointment to the Secretary of State. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 On a reference to the Secretary of State under subsection (4) . . . the Secretary of State shall either make an appointment or decline to make one. 7 If on a reference under subsection (4) . . . no appointment is made, the official receiver shall continue to be trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, but without prejudice to his power to make a further reference. 8 References in this section to a vacancy include a case where it is necessary, in relation to any property which is or may be comprised in a bankrupt’s estate, to revive the trusteeship of that estate after the vacation of office by the trustee under section 298(8) or the giving by the official receiver of notice under section 299(2). Control of trustee Creditors’ committee. 301 1 Subject as follows, a bankrupt's creditors may, in accordance with the rules, establish a committee (known as “ the creditors’ committee ”) to exercise the functions conferred on it by or under this Act. 2 The bankrupt’s creditors shall not establish such a committee, or confer any functions on such a committee, at any time when the official receiver is the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, except in connection with the appointment of a person to be trustee instead of the official receiver. Exercise by Secretary of State of functions of creditors’ committee. 302 1 The creditors’ committee is not to be able or required to carry out its functions at any time when the official receiver is trustee of the bankrupt’s estate; but at any such time the functions of the committee under this Act shall be vested in the Secretary of State, except to the extent that the rules otherwise provide. 2 Where in the case of any bankruptcy there is for the time being no creditors’ committee and the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate is a person other than the official receiver, the functions of such a committee shall be vested in the Secretary of State, except to the extent that the rules otherwise provide. General control of trustee by the court. 303 1 If a bankrupt or any of his creditors or any other person is dissatisfied by any act, omission or decision of a trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, he may apply to the court; and on such an application the court may confirm, reverse or modify any act or decision of the trustee, may give him directions or may make such other order as it thinks fit. 2 The trustee of a bankrupt’s estate may apply to the court for directions in relation to any particular matter arising under the bankruptcy. 2A Where at any time after a bankruptcy petition has been presented to the court against any person, whether under the provisions of the Insolvent Partnerships Order 1994 or not, the attention of the court is drawn to the fact that the person in question is a member of an insolvent partnership, the court may make an order as to the future conduct of the insolvency proceedings and any such order may apply any provisions of that Order with any necessary modifications. 2B Where a bankruptcy petition has been presented against more than one individual in the circumstances mentioned in subsection (2A) above, the court may give such directions for consolidating the proceedings, or any of them, as it thinks just. 2C Any order or directions under subsection (2A) or (2B) may be made or given on the application of the official receiver, any responsible insolvency practitioner, the trustee of the partnership or any other interested person and may include provisions as to the administration of the joint estate of the partnership, and in particular how it and the separate estate of any member are to be administered. Liability of trustee. 304 1 Where on an application under this section the court is satisfied— a that the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate has misapplied or retained, or become accountable for, any money or other property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate, or b that a bankrupt’s estate has suffered any loss in consequence of any misfeasance or breach of fiduciary or other duty by a trustee of the estate in the carrying out of his functions, the court may order the trustee, for the benefit of the estate, to repay, restore or account for money or other property (together with interest at such rate as the court thinks just) or, as the case may require, to pay such sum by way of compensation in respect of the misfeasance or breach of fiduciary or other duty as the court thinks just. This is without prejudice to any liability arising apart from this section. 2 An application under this section may be made by the official receiver, the Secretary of State, a creditor of the bankrupt or (whether or not there is, or is likely to be, a surplus for the purposes of section 330(5) (final distribution)) the bankrupt himself. But the leave of the court is required for the making of an application if it is to be made by the bankrupt or if it is to be made after the trustee has had his release under section 299. 3 Where— a the trustee seizes or disposes of any property which is not comprised in the bankrupts estate, and b at the time of the seizure or disposal the trustee believes, and has reasonable grounds for believing, that he is entitled (whether in pursuance of an order of the court or otherwise) to seize or dispose of that property, the trustee is not liable to any person (whether under this section or otherwise) in respect of any loss or damage resulting from the seizure or disposal except in so far as that loss or damage is caused by the negligence of the trustee; and he has a lien on the property, or the proceeds of its sale, for such of the expenses of the bankruptcy as were incurred in connection with the seizure or disposal. Chapter IV Administration by Trustee Preliminary General functions of trustee. 305 1 This Chapter applies in relation to any bankruptcy where either— a the appointment of a person as trustee of a bankrupt’s estate takes effect, or b the official receiver becomes trustee of a bankrupt’s estate. 2 The function of the trustee is to get in, realise and distribute the bankrupt’s estate in accordance with the following provisions of this Chapter; and in the carrying out of that function and in the management of the bankrupt’s estate the trustee is entitled, subject to those provisions, to use his own discretion. 3 It is the duty of the trustee, if he is not the official receiver— a to furnish the official receiver with such information, b to produce to the offical receiver, and permit inspection by the official receiver of, such books, papers and other records, and c to give the official receiver such other assistance, as the official receiver may reasonably require for the purpose of enabling him to carry out his functions in relation to the bankruptcy. 4 The official name of the trustee shall be “the trustee of the estate of ............, a bankrupt” (inserting the name of the bankrupt); but he may be referred to as “ the trustee in bankruptcy ” of the particular bankrupt. Acquisition, control and realisation of bankrupt’s estate Vesting of bankrupt’s estate in trustee. 306 1 The bankrupt’s estate shall vest in the trustee immediately on his appointment taking effect or, in the case of the official receiver, on his becoming trustee. 2 Where any property which is, or is to be, comprised in the bankrupt’s estate vests in the trustee (whether under this section or under any other provision of this Part), it shall so vest without any conveyance, assignment or transfer. Property subject to restraint order 306A 1 This section applies where— a property is excluded from the bankrupt’s estate by virtue of section 417(2)(a) of the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002 (property subject to a restraint order), b an order under section 50, 67A, 128, 131A, 198 or 215A of that Act has not been made in respect of the property, ... c the restraint order is discharged , and d immediately after the discharge of the restraint order the property is not detained under or by virtue of section 44A, 47J, 122A, 127J, 193A or 195J of that Act. 2 The property vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt's estate. 3 But subsection (2) does not apply to the proceeds of property realised by a management receiver under section 49(2)(d) or 197(2)(d) of that Act (realisation of property to meet receiver’s remuneration and expenses). Property released from detention 306AA 1 This section applies where— a property is excluded from the bankrupt's estate by virtue of section 417(2)(b) of the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002 (property detained under certain provisions), b no order is in force in respect of the property under section 41, 50, 120, 128, 190 or 198 of that Act, and c the property is released. 2 The property vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt's estate. Property in respect of which receivership or administration order made 306B 1 This section applies where— a property is excluded from the bankrupt’s estate by virtue of section 417(2)(c) of the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002 (property in respect of which an order for the appointment of a receiver or administrator under certain provisions of that Act is in force), b a confiscation order is made under section 6, 92 or 156 of that Act, c the amount payable under the confiscation order is fully paid, and d any of the property remains in the hands of the receiver or administrator (as the case may be). 2 The property vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt’s estate. Property in respect of which realisation order made 306BA 1 This section applies where— a property is excluded from the bankrupt's estate by virtue of section 417(2)(d) of the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002 (property in respect of which an order has been made authorising realisation of the property by an appropriate officer), b a confiscation order is made under section 6, 92 or 156 of that Act, c the amount payable under the confiscation order is fully paid, and d any of the property remains in the hands of the appropriate officer. 2 The property vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt's estate. Property subject to certain orders where confiscation order discharged or quashed 306C 1 This section applies where— a property is excluded from the bankrupt’s estate by virtue of section 417(2)(a), (b), (c) or (d) of the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002 (property excluded from bankrupt's estate ), b a confiscation order is made under section 6, 92 or 156 of that Act, and c the confiscation order is discharged under section 30, 114 or 180 of that Act (as the case may be) or quashed under that Act or in pursuance of any enactment relating to appeals against conviction or sentence. 2 Any such property vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt's estate if it is in the hands of— a a receiver appointed under Part 2 or 4 of that Act, b an administrator appointed under Part 3 of that Act, c an appropriate officer (within the meaning of section 41A, 120A or 190A of that Act). 3 But subsection (2) does not apply to the proceeds of property realised by a management receiver under section 49(2)(d) or 197(2)(d) of that Act (realisation of property to meet receiver’s remuneration and expenses). After-acquired property. 307 1 Subject to this section and section 309, the trustee may by notice in writing claim for the bankrupt’s estate any property which has been acquired by, or has devolved upon, the bankrupt since the commencement of the bankruptcy. 2 A notice under this section shall not be served in respect of— a any property falling within subsection (2) or (3) of section 283 in Chapter II, aa any property vesting in the bankrupt by virtue of section 283A in Chapter II , b any property which by virtue of any other enactment is excluded from the bankrupt’s estate, or c without prejudice to section 280(2)(c) (order of court on application for discharge), any property which is acquired by, or devolves upon, the bankrupt after his discharge. 3 Subject to subsections (4) and (4A) , upon the service on the bankrupt of a notice under this section the property to which the notice relates shall vest in the trustee as part of the bankrupt’s estate; and the trustee’s title to that property has relation back to the time at which the property was acquired by, or devolved upon, the bankrupt. 4 Where, whether before or after service on the bankrupt of a notice under this section— a a person acquires property in good faith, for value and without notice of the bankruptcy, ... b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the trustee is not in respect of that property ... entitled by virtue of this section to any remedy against that person ..., or any person whose title to any property derives from that person .... 4A Where a banker enters into a transaction before service on the banker of a notice under this section (and whether before or after service on the bankrupt of a notice under this section) the trustee is not in respect of that transaction entitled by virtue of this section to any remedy against the banker. This subsection applies whether or not the banker has notice of the bankruptcy. 5 References in this section to property do not include any property which, as part of the bankrupt’s income, may be the subject of an income payments order under section 310. Vesting in trustee of certain items of excess value. 308 1 Subject to section 309 , where— a property is excluded by virtue of section 283(2) (tools of trade, household effects, etc.) from the bankrupt’s estate, and b it appears to the trustee that the realisable value of the whole or any part of that property exceeds the cost of a reasonable replacement for that property or that part of it, the trustee may by notice in writing claim that property or, as the case may be, that part of it, for the bankrupt’s estate. 2 Upon the service on the bankrupt of a notice under this section, the property to which the notice relates vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt’s estate; and, except against a purchaser in good faith, for value and without notice of the bankruptcy, the trustee’s title to that property has relation back to the commencement of the bankruptcy. 3 The trustee shall apply funds comprised in the estate to the purchase by or on behalf of the bankrupt of a reasonable replacement for any property vested in the trustee under this section; and the duty imposed by this subsection has priority over the obligation of the trustee to distribute the estate. 4 For the purposes of this section property is a reasonable replacement for other property if it is reasonably adequate for meeting the needs met by the other property. Vesting in trustee of certain tenancies. 308A Upon the service on the bankrupt by the trustee of a notice in writing under this section, any tenancy— a which is excluded by virtue of section 283(3A) from the bankrupt’s estate, and b to which the notice relates, vests in the trustee as part of the bankrupt’s estate; and, except against a purchaser in good faith, for value and without notice of the bankruptcy, the trustee’s title to that tenancy has relation back to the commencement of the bankruptcy. Time-limit for notice under s. 307 or 308. 309 1 Except with the leave of the court, a notice shall not be served— a under section 307, after the end of the period of 42 days beginning with the day on which it first came to the knowledge of the trustee that property in question had been acquired by, or had devolved upon, the bankrupt; b under section 308 or section 308A , after the end of the period of 42 days beginning with the day on which the property or tenancy in question first came to the knowledge of the trustee. 2 For the purposes of this section— a any thing which comes to the knowledge of the trustee is deemed in relation to any successor of his as trustee to have come to the knowledge of the sucessor at the same time; and b any thing which comes (otherwise than under paragraph (a)) to the knowledge of a person before he is the trustee is deemed to come to his knowledge on his appointment taking effect or, in the case of the official receiver, on his becoming trustee. Income payments orders. 310 1 The court may . . . make an order (“an income payments order”) claiming for the bankrupt’s estate so much of the income of the bankrupt during the period for which the order is in force as may be specified in the order. 1A An income payments order may be made only on an application instituted— a by the trustee, and b before the discharge of the bankrupt. 2 The court shall not make an income payments order the effect of which would be to reduce the income of the bankrupt when taken together with any payments to which subsection (8) applies below what appears to the court to be necessary for meeting the reasonable domestic needs of the bankrupt and his family. 3 An income payments order shall, in respect of any payment of income to which it is to apply, either— a require the bankrupt to pay the trustee an amount equal to so much of that payment as is claimed by the order, or b require the person making the payment to pay so much of it as is so claimed to the trustee, instead of to the bankrupt. 4 Where the court makes an income payments order it may, if it thinks fit, discharge or vary any attachment of earnings order that is for the time being in force to secure payments by the bankrupt. 5 Sums received by the trustee under an income payments order form part of the bankrupt’s estate. 6 An income payments order must specify the period during which it is to have effect; and that period— a may end after the discharge of the bankrupt, but b may not end after the period of three years beginning with the date on which the order is made. 6A An income payments order may (subject to subsection (6)(b)) be varied on the application of the trustee or the bankrupt (whether before or after discharge). 7 For the purposes of this section the income of the bankrupt comprises every payment in the nature of income which is from time to time made to him or to which he from time to time becomes entitled, including any payment in respect of the carrying on of any business or in respect of any office or employment and (despite anything in section 11 or 12 of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999) any payment under a pension scheme but excluding any payment to which subsection (8) applies.. 8 This subsection applies to— a payments by way of guaranteed minimum pension; ... b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 In this section, “ guaranteed minimum pension ” has the same meaning as in the Pension Schemes Act 1993. Income payments agreement 310A 1 In this section “ income payments agreement ” means a written agreement between a bankrupt and his trustee or between a bankrupt and the official receiver which provides— a that the bankrupt is to pay to the trustee or the official receiver an amount equal to a specified part or proportion of the bankrupt’s income for a specified period, or b that a third person is to pay to the trustee or the official receiver a specified proportion of money due to the bankrupt by way of income for a specified period. 2 A provision of an income payments agreement of a kind specified in subsection (1)(a) or (b) may be enforced as if it were a provision of an income payments order. 3 While an income payments agreement is in force the court may, on the application of the bankrupt, his trustee or the official receiver, discharge or vary an attachment of earnings order that is for the time being in force to secure payments by the bankrupt. 4 The following provisions of section 310 shall apply to an income payments agreement as they apply to an income payments order— a subsection (5) (receipts to form part of estate), and b subsections (7) to (9) (meaning of income). 5 An income payments agreement must specify the period during which it is to have effect; and that period— a may end after the discharge of the bankrupt, but b may not end after the period of three years beginning with the date on which the agreement is made. 6 An income payments agreement may (subject to subsection (5)(b)) be varied— a by written agreement between the parties, or b by the court on an application made by the bankrupt, the trustee or the official receiver. 7 The court— a may not vary an income payments agreement so as to include provision of a kind which could not be included in an income payments order, and b shall grant an application to vary an income payments agreement if and to the extent that the court thinks variation necessary to avoid the effect mentioned in section 310(2). Acquisition by trustee of control. 311 1 The trustee shall take possession of all books, papers and other records which relate to the bankrupt’s estate or affairs and which belong to him or are in his possession or under his control (including any which would be privileged from disclosure in any proceedings). 2 In relation to, and for the purpose of acquiring or retaining possession of, the bankrupt’s estate, the trustee is in the same position as if her were a receiver of property appointed by the High Court; and the court may, on his application, enforce such acquisition or retention accordingly. 3 Where any part of the bankrupt’s estate consists of stock or shares in a company, shares in a ship or any other property transferable in the books of a company, office or person, the trustee may exercise the right to transfer the property to the same extent as the bankrupt might have exercised it if he had not become bankrupt. 4 Where any part of the estate consists of things in action, they are deemed to have been assigned to the trustee; but notice of the deemed assignment need not be given except in so far as it is necessary, in a case where the deemed assignment is from the bankrupt himself for protecting the priority of the trustee. 5 Where any goods comprised in the estate are held by any person by way of pledge, pawn or other security and no notice has been served in respect of those goods by the official receiver under subsection (5) of section 285 (restriction on realising security), the trustee may serve such a notice in respect of the goods; and whether or not a notice has been served under this subsection or that subsection, the trustee may, if he thinks fit, exercise the bankrupt’s right of redemption in respect of any such goods. 6 A notice served by the trustee under subsection (5) has the same effect as a notice served by the official receiver under section 285(5). Obligation to surrender control to trustee. 312 1 The bankrupt shall deliver up to the trustee possession of any property, books, papers or other records of which he has possession or control and of which the trustee is required to take possession. This is without prejudice to the general duties of the bankrupt under section 333 in this Chapter. 2 If any of the following is in possession of any property, books, papers or other records of which the trustee is required to take possession, namely— a the official receiver, b a person who has ceased to be trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, or c a person who has been the supervisor of a voluntary arrangement approved in relation to the bankrupt under Part VIII, the official receiver or, as the case may be, that person shall deliver up possession of the property, books, papers or records to the trustee. 3 Any banker or agent of the bankrupt or any other person who holds any property to the account of, or for, the bankrupt shall pay or deliver to the trustee all property in his possession or under his control which forms part of the bankrupt’s estate and which he is not by law entitled to retain as against the bankrupt or trustee. 4 If any person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed by this section, he is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly (in addition to any other punishment to which he may be subject). Charge on bankrupt’s home. 313 1 Where any property consisting of an interest in a dwelling house which is occupied by the bankrupt or by his spouse or former spouse or by his civil partner or former civil partner is comprised in the bankrupt’s estate and the trustee is, for any reason, unable for the time being to realise that property, the trustee may apply to the court for an order imposing a charge on the property for the benefit of the bankrupt’s estate. 2 If on an application under this section the court imposes a charge on any property, the benefit of that charge shall be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate and is enforceable , up to the charged value from time to time, for the payment of any amount which is payable otherwise than to the bankrupt out of the estate and of interest on that amount at the prescribed rate. 2A In subsection (2) the charged value means— a the amount specified in the charging order as the value of the bankrupt’s interest in the property at the date of the order, plus b interest on that amount from the date of the charging order at the prescribed rate. 2B In determining the value of an interest for the purposes of this section the court shall disregard any matter which it is required to disregard by the rules. 3 An order under this section made in respect of property vested in the trustee shall provide, in accordance with the rules, for the property to cease to be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate and, subject to the charge (and any prior charge), to vest in the bankrupt. 4 Subsection (1), (2), (4), (5) and (6) of section 3 of the Charging Orders Act 1979 (supplemental provisions with respect to charging orders) have effect in relation to orders under this section as in relation to charging orders under that Act. 5 But an order under section 3(5) of that Act may not vary a charged value. Low value home: application for sale, possession or charge 313A 1 This section applies where— a property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate consists of an interest in a dwelling-house which at the date of the bankruptcy was the sole or principal residence of— i the bankrupt, ii the bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner , or iii a former spouse or former civil partner of the bankrupt, and b the trustee applies for an order for the sale of the property, for an order for possession of the property or for an order under section 313 in respect of the property. 2 The court shall dismiss the application if the value of the interest is below the amount prescribed for the purposes of this subsection. 3 In determining the value of an interest for the purposes of this section the court shall disregard any matter which it is required to disregard by the order which prescribes the amount for the purposes of subsection (2). Powers of trustee. 314 1 The trustee may exercise any of the powers specified in Parts 1 and 2 of Schedule 5. 2 ... the trustee may appoint the bankrupt— a to superintend the management of his estate or any part of it, b to carry on his business (if any) for the benefit of his creditors, or c in any other respect to assist in administering the estate in such manner and on such terms as the trustee may direct. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Part III of Schedule 5 to this Act has effect with respect to the things which the trustee is able to do for the purposes of, or in connection with, the exercise of any of his powers under any of his Group of Parts. 6 Where the trustee (not being the official receiver) in exercise of the powers conferred on him by any provision in this Group of Parts— a disposes of any property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate to an associate of the bankrupt, or b employs a solicitor, he shall, if there is for the time being a creditor’s committee, give notice to the committee of that exercise of his powers. 7 Without prejudice to the generality of subsection (5) and Part III of Schedule 5, the trustee may, if he thinks fit, at any time seek a decision on a matter from the bankrupt’s creditors. Subject to the preceding provisions in this Group of Parts, he shall seek a decision on a matter if he is requested to do so by a creditor of the bankrupt and the request is made with the concurrence of not less than one-tenth, in value, of the bankrupt’s creditors (including the creditor making the request). 8 Nothing in this Act is to be construed as restricting the capacity of the trustee to exercise any of his powers outside England and Wales. Disclaimer of onerous property Disclaimer (general power). 315 1 Subject as follows, the trustee may, by the giving of the prescribed notice, disclaim any onerous property and may do so notwithstanding that he has taken possession of it, endeavoured to sell it or otherwise exercised rights of ownership in relation to it. 2 The following is onerous property for the purposes of this section, that is to say— a any unprofitable contract, and b any other property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate which is unsaleable or not readily saleable, or is such that it may give rise to a liability to pay money or perform any other onerous act. 3 A disclaimer under this section— a operates so as to determine, as from the date of the disclaimer, the rights, interests and liabilities of the bankrupt and his estate in or in respect of the property disclaimed, and b discharges the trustee from all personal liability in respect of that property as from the commencement of his trusteeship, but does not, except so far as is necessary for the purpose of releasing the bankrupt, the bankrupt’s estate and the trustee from any liability, affect the rights or liabilities of any other person. 4 A notice of disclaimer shall not be given under this section in respect of any property that has been claimed for the estate under section 307 (after-acquired property) or 308 (personal property of bankrupt exceeding reasonable replacement value) or 308A , except with the leave of the court. 5 Any person sustaining loss or damage in consequence of the operation of a disclaimer under this section is deemed to be a creditor of the bankrupt to the extent of the loss or damage and accordingly may prove for the loss or damage as a bankruptcy debt. Notice requiring trustee’s decision. 316 1 Notice of disclaimer shall not be given under section 315 in respect of any property if— a a person interested in the property has applied in writing to the trustee or one of his predecessors as trustee requiring the trustee or that predecessor to decide whether he will disclaim or not, and b the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which that application was made has expired without a notice of disclaimer having been given under section 315 in respect of that property. 2 The trustee is deemed to have adopted any contract which by virtue of this section he is not entitled to disclaim. Disclaimer of leaseholds. 317 1 The disclaimer of any property of a leasehold nature does not take effect unless a copy of the disclaimer has been served (so far as the trustee is aware of their addresses) on every person claiming under the bankrupt as underlessee or mortgagee and either— a no application under section 320 below is made with respect to the property before the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day on which the last notice served under this subsection was served, or b where such an application has been made, the court directs that the disclaimer is to take effect. 2 Where the court gives a direction under subsection (1)(b) it may also, instead of or in addition to any order it makes under section 320, make such orders with respect to fixtures, tenant’s improvements and other matters arising out of the lease as it thinks fit. Disclaimer of dwelling house. 318 Without prejudice to section 317, the disclaimer of any property in a dwelling house does not take effect unless a copy of the disclaimer has been served (so far as the trustee is aware of their addresses) on every person in occupation of or claiming a right to occupy the dwelling house and either— a no application under section 320 is made with respect to the property before the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day on which the last notice served under this section was served, or b where such an application has been made, the court directs that the disclaimer is to take effect. Disclaimer of land subject to rentcharge. 319 1 The following applies where, in consequence of the disclaimer under section 315 of any land subject to a rentcharge, that land vests by operation of law in the Crown or any other person (referred to in the next subsection as “ the proprietor ”). 2 The proprietor, and the successors in title of the proprietor, are not subject to any personal liability in respect of any sums becoming due under the rentcharge, except sums becoming due after the proprietor, or some person claiming under or through the proprietor, has taken possession or control of the land or has entered into occupation of it. Court order vesting disclaimed property. 320 1 This section and the next apply where the trustee has disclaimed property under section 315. 2 An application may be made to the court under this section by— a any person who claims an interest in the disclaimed property, b any person who is under any liability in respect of the disclaimed property, not being a liability discharged by the disclaimer, or c where the disclaimed property is property in a dwelling house, any person who at the time when the bankruptcy application was made or (as the case may be) the bankruptcy petition was presented was in occupation of or entitled to occupy the dwelling house. 3 Subject as follows in this section and the next, the court may, on an application under this section, make an order on such terms as it thinks fit for the vesting of the disclaimed property in, or for its delivery to— a a person entitled to it or a trustee for such a person, b a person subject to such a liability as is mentioned in subsection (2)(b) or a trustee for such a person, or c where the disclaimed property is property in a dwelling house, any person who at the time when the bankruptcy application was made or (as the case may be) the bankruptcy petition was presented was in occupation of or entitled to occupy the dwelling house. 4 The court shall not make an order by virtue of subsection (3)(b) except where it appears to the court that it would be just to do so for the purpose of compensating the person subject to the liability in respect of the disclaimer. 5 The effect of any order under this section shall be taken into account in assessing for the purposes of section 315(5) the extent of any loss or damage sustained by any person in consequence of the disclaimer. 6 An order under this section vesting property in any person need not be completed by any conveyance, assignment or transfer. Order under s. 320 in respect of leaseholds. 321 1 The court shall not make an order under section 320 vesting property of a leasehold nature in any person, except on terms making that person— a subject to the same liabilities and obligations as the bankrupt was subject to under the lease on the day the bankruptcy application was made or (as the case may be) the bankruptcy petition was presented, or b if the court thinks fit, subject to the same liabilities and obligations as that person would be subject to if the lease had been assigned to him on that day. 2 For the purposes of an order under section 320 relating to only part of any property comprised in a lease, the requirements of subsection (1) apply as if the lease comprised only the property to which the order relates. 3 Where subsection (1) applies and no person is willing to accept an order under section 320 on the terms required by that subsection, the court may (by order under section 320) vest the estate or interest in the bankrupt in the property in any person who is liable (whether personally or in a representative capacity and whether alone or jointly with the bankrupt) to perform the lessee’s covenants in the lease. The court may by virtue of this subsection vest that estate and interest in such a person freed and discharged from all estates, incumbrances and interests created by the bankrupt. 4 Where subsection (1) applies and a person declines to accept any order under section 320, that person shall be excluded from all interest in the property. Distribution of bankrupt’s estate Proof of debts. 322 1 Subject to this section and the next, the proof of any bankruptcy debt by a secured or unsecured creditor of the bankrupt and the admission or rejection of any proof shall take place in accordance with the rules. 2 Where a bankruptcy debt bears interest, that interest is provable as part of the debt except in so far as it is payable in respect of any period after the commencement of the bankruptcy. 3 The trustee shall estimate the value of any bankruptcy debt which, by reason of its being subject to any contingency or contingencies or for any other reason, does not bear a certain value. 4 Where the value of a bankruptcy debt is estimated by the trustee under subsection (3) or, by virtue of section 303 in Chapter III, by the court, the amount provable in the bankruptcy in respect of the debt is the amount of the estimate. Mutual credit and set-off. 323 1 This section applies where before the commencement of the bankruptcy there have been mutual credits, mutual debts or other mutual dealings between the bankruptcy and any creditor of the bankrupt proving or claiming to prove for a bankruptcy debt. 2 An account shall be taken of what is due from each party to the other in respect of the mutual dealings and the sums due from one party shall be set off against the sums due from the other. 3 Sums due from the bankrupt to another party shall not be included in the account taken under subsection (2) if that other party had notice at the time they became due that proceedings on a bankruptcy application relating to the bankrupt were ongoing or that a bankruptcy petition relating to the bankrupt was pending. 4 Only the balance (if any) of the account taken under subsection (2) is provable as a bankruptcy debt or, as the case may be, to be paid to the trustee as part of the bankrupt’s estate. Distribution by means of dividend. 324 1 Whenever the trustee has sufficient funds in hand for the purpose he shall, subject to the retention of such sums as may be necessary for the expenses of the bankruptcy, declare and distribute dividends among the creditors in respect of the bankruptcy debts which they have respectively proved. 2 The trustee shall give notice of his intention to declare and distribute a dividend. 3 Where the trustee has declared a dividend, he shall give notice of the dividend and of how it is proposed to distribute it; and a notice given under this subsection shall contain the prescribed particulars of the bankrupt’s estate. 4 In the calculation and distribution of a dividend the trustee shall make provision— a for any bankruptcy debts which appear to him to be due to persons who, by reason of the distance of their place of residence, may not have had sufficient time to tender and establish their proofs, b for any bankruptcy debts which are the subject of claims which have not yet been determined, and c for disputed proofs and claims. Claims by unsatisfied creditors. 325 1 A creditor who has not proved his debt before the declaration of any dividend is not entitled to disturb, by reason that he has not participated in it, the distribution of that dividend or any other dividend declared before his debt was proved, but— a when he has proved that debt he is entitled to be paid, out of any money for the time being available for the payment of any further dividend, any dividend or dividends which he has failed to receive; and b any dividend or dividends payable under paragraph (a) shall be paid before that money is applied to the payment of any such further dividend. 2 No action lies against the trustee for a dividend,but if the trustee refuses to pay a dividend the court may, if it thinks fit, order him to pay it and also to pay, out of his own money— a interest on the dividend, at the rate for the time being specified in section 17 of the JudgmentsAct 1838, from the time it was withheld, and b the costs of the proceedings in which the order to pay is made. Distribution of property in specie. 326 1 Without prejudice to sections 315 to 319 (disclaimer), the trustee may, with the permission of the creditors’ committee, divide in its existing form amongst the bankrupt’s creditors, according to its estimated value, any property which from its peculiar nature or other special circumstances cannot be readily or advantageously sold. 2 A permission given for the purposes of subsection (1) shall not be a general permission but shall relate to a particular proposed exercise of the power in question; and a person dealing with the trustee in good faith and for value is not to be concerned to enquire whether any permission required by subsection (1) has been given. 3 Where the trustee has done anything without the permission required by subsection (1), the court or the creditors’ committee may, for the purpose of enabling him to meet his expenses out of the bankrupt’s estate, ratify what the trustee has done. But the committee shall not do so unless it is satisfied that the trustee acted in a case of urgency and has sought its ratification without undue delay. Distribution in criminal bankruptcy. 327 Where the bankruptcy order was made on a petition under section 264(1)(d) (criminal bankruptcy), no distribution shall be made under sections 324 to 326 so long as an appeal is pending (within the meaning of section 277) against the bankrupt’s conviction of any offence by virtue of which the criminal bankruptcy order on which the petition was based was made. Priority of debts. 328 1 In the distribution of the bankrupt’s estate, his preferential debts ... shall be paid in priority to other debts. 1A Ordinary preferential debts rank equally among themselves after the expenses of the bankruptcy and shall be paid in full, unless the bankrupt’s estate is insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions between themselves. 1B Secondary preferential debts rank equally among themselves after the ordinary preferential debts and shall be paid in full, unless the bankrupt’s estate is insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions between themselves. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Debts which are neither preferential debts nor debts to which the next section applies also rank equally between themselves and, after the preferential debts, shall be paid in full unless the bankrupt’s estate is insufficient for meeting them, in which case they abate in equal proportions between themselves. 3A If the bankrupt is a relevant financial institution, subsection (3) does not apply but— a the bankrupt’s ordinary non-preferential debts shall be paid in priority to the bankrupt’s secondary non-preferential debts, b the bankrupt’s ordinary non-preferential debts rank equally among themselves after the secondary preferential debts and shall be paid in full, unless the bankrupt’s estate is insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions, c the bankrupt’s secondary non-preferential debts shall be paid in priority to the bankrupt’s tertiary non-preferential debts, and d the bankrupt’s secondary non-preferential debts rank equally among themselves after the ordinary non-preferential debts and shall be paid in full, unless the bankrupt’s estate is insufficient to meet them, in which case they abate in equal proportions. See section 387A for definitions relevant to this subsection. 4 Any surplus remaining after the payment of the debts — a where subsection (3) applies, that are preferential or rank equally under that subsection, or b where subsection (3A) applies, that are preferential or are referred to in that subsection, shall be applied in paying interest on those debts in respect of the periods during which they have been outstanding since the commencement of the bankruptcy; and interest on preferential debts ranks equally with interest on debts other than preferential debts. 5 The rate of interest payable under subsection (4) in respect of any debt is whichever is the greater of the following— a the rate specified in section 17 of the Judgments Act 1838 at the commencement of the bankruptcy, and b the rate applicable to that debt apart from the bankruptcy. 6 This section and the next are without prejudice to any provision of this Act or any other Act under which the payment of any debt or the making of any other payment is, in the event of bankruptcy, to have a particular priority or to be postponed. 7 In this section “preferential debts”, “ordinary preferential debts” and “secondary preferential debts” each has the meaning given in section 386 in Part 12. Debts to spouse. 329 1 This section applies to bankruptcy debts owed in respect of credit provided by a person who (whether or not the bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner at the time the credit was provided) was the bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner at the commencement of the bankruptcy. 2 Such debts— a rank in priority after the ... interest required to be paid in pursuance of section 328(4) , and b are payable with interest at the rate specified in section 328(5) in respect of the period during which they have been outstanding since the commencement of the bankruptcy; and the interest payable under paragraph (b) has the same priority as the debts on which it is payable. Final distribution. 330 1 When the trustee has realised all the bankrupt’s estate or so much of it as can, in the trustee’s opinion, be realised without needlessly protracting the trusteeship, he shall give notice in the prescribed manner either— a of his intention to declare a final dividend, or b that no dividend, or further dividend, will be declared. 1A A notice under subsection (1)(b) need not be given to opted-out creditors. 2 The notice under subsection (1) shall contain the prescribed particulars and shall require claims against the bankrupt’s estate to be established by a date (“the final date”) specified in the notice. 3 The court may, on the application of any person, postpone the final date. 4 After the final date, the trustee shall— a defray any outstanding expenses of the bankruptcy out of the bankrupt’s estate, and b if he intends to declare a final dividend, declare and distribute that dividend without regard to the claim of any person in respect of a debt not already proved in the bankruptcy. 5 If a surplus remains after payment in full and with interest of all the bankrupt’s creditors and the payment of the expenses of the bankruptcy, the bankrupt is entitled to the surplus. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final report . 331 1 Subject as follows in this section and the next, this section applies where— a it appears to the trustee that the administration of the bankrupt’s estate in accordance with this Chapter is for practical purposes complete, and b the trustee is not the official receiver. 2 The trustee must give the bankrupt's creditors (other than opted-out creditors) notice that it appears to the trustee that the administration of the bankrupt's estate is for practical purposes complete. 2A The notice must— a be accompanied by a report of the trustee's administration of the bankrupt's estate; b explain the effect of section 299(3)(d) and how the creditors may object to the trustee's release. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving for bankrupt’s home. 332 1 This section applies where— a there is comprised in the bankrupt’s estate property consisting of an interest in a dwelling house which is occupied by the bankrupt or by his spouse or former spouse or by his civil partner or former civil partner , and b the trustee has been unable for any reason to realise that property. 2 The trustee shall not give notice under section 331(2) unless either— a the court has made an order under section 313 imposing a charge on that property for the benefit of the bankrupt’s estate, or b the court has declined, on an application under that section, to make such an order, or c the Secretary of State has issued a certificate to the trustee stating that it would be inappropriate or inexpedient for such an application to be made in the case in question. Supplemental Duties of bankrupt in relation to trustee. 333 1 The bankrupt shall— a give to the trustee such information as to his affairs, b attend on the trustee at such times, and c do all such other things, as the trustee may for the purposes of carrying out his functions under any of this Group of Parts reasonably require. 2 Where at any time after the commencement of the bankruptcy any property is acquired by, or devolves upon, the bankrupt or there is an increase of the bankrupt’s income, the bankrupt shall, within the prescribed period, give the trustee notice of the property or, as the case may be, of the increase. 3 Subsection (1) applies to a bankrupt after his discharge. 4 If the bankrupt without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed by this section, he is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly (in addition to any other punishment to which he may be subject). Stay of distribution in case of second bankruptcy. 334 1 This section and the next apply where a bankruptcy order is made against an undischarged bankrupt; and in both sections— a “ the later bankruptcy ” means the bankruptcy arising from that order, b “ the earlier bankruptcy ” means the bankruptcy (or, as the case may be, most recent bankruptcy) from which the bankrupt has not been discharged at the commencement of the later bankruptcy, and c “ the existing trustee ” means the trustee (if any) of the bankrupt’s estate for the purposes of the earlier bankruptcy. 2 Where the existing trustee has been given the prescribed notice of the making of the application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the petition of the later bankruptcy, any distribution or other disposition by him of anything to which the next subsection applies, if made after the giving of the notice, is void except to the extent that it was made with the consent of the court or is or was subsequently ratified by the court. This is without prejudice to section 284 (restrictions on dispositions of property following bankruptcy order). 3 This subsection applies to— a any property which is vested in the existing trustee under section 307(3) (after-acquired property); b any money paid to the existing trustee in pursuance of an income payments order under section 310; and c any property or money, which is, or in the hands of the existing trustee represents, the proceeds of sale or application of property or money falling within paragraph (a) or (b) of this subsection. Adjustment between earlier and later bankruptcy estates. 335 1 With effect from the commencement of the later bankruptcy anthing to which section 334(3) applies which, immediately before the commencement of that bankruptcy, is comprised in the bankrupt’s estate for the purposes of the earlier bankruptcy is to be treated as comprised in the bankrupt’s estate for the purposes of the later bankruptcy and, until there is a trustee of that estate, is to be dealt with by the existing trustee in accordance with the rules. 2 Any sums which in pursuance of an income payments order under section 310 are payable after the commencement of the later bankruptcy to the existing trustee shall form part of the bankrupt’s estate for the purposes of the later bankruptcy; and the court may give such consequential directions for the modification of the order as it thinks fit. 3 Anything comprised in a bankrupt’s estate by virtue of subsection (1) or (2) is so comprised subject to a first charge in favour of the existing trustee for any bankruptcy expenses incurred by him in relation thereto. 4 Except as provided above and in section 334, property which is, or by virtue of section 308 (personal property of bankrupt exceeding reasonable replacement value) or section 308A (vesting in trustee of certain tenancies) is capable of being, comprised in the bankrupt’s estate for the purposes of the earlier bankruptcy, or of any bankruptcy prior to it, shall not be comprised in his estate for the purposes of the later bankruptcy. 5 The creditors of the bankrupt in the earlier bankruptcy and the creditors of the bankrupt in any bankruptcy prior to the earlier one, are not to be creditors of his in the later bankruptcy in respect of the same debts; but the existing trustee may prove in the later bankruptcy for— a the unsatisfied balance of the debts (including any debt under this subsection) provable against the bankrupt’s estate in the earlier bankruptcy; b any interest payable on that balance; and c any unpaid expenses of the earlier bankruptcy. 6 Any amount provable under subsection (5) ranks in priority after all the other debts provable in the later bankruptcy and after interest on those debts and, accordingly, shall not be paid unless those debts and that interest have first been paid in full. Chapter V Effect of Bankruptcy on Certain Rights Transacttions, Etc. Rights under trusts of land Rights under trusts of land. 335A 1 Any application by a trustee of a bankrupt’s estate under section 14 of the Trusts of Land and Appointment of Trustees Act 1996 (powers of court in relation to trusts of land) for an order under that section for the sale of land shall be made to the court having jurisdiction in relation to the bankruptcy. 2 On such an application the court shall make such order as it thinks just and reasonable having regard to— a the interests of the bankrupt’s creditors; b where the application is made in respect of land which includes a dwelling house which is or has been the home of the bankrupt or the bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner or former spouse or former civil partner — i the conduct of the spouse, civil partner, former spouse or former civil partner , so far as contributing to the bankruptcy, ii the needs and financial resources of the spouse, civil partner, former spouse or former civil partner , and iii the needs of any children; and c all the circumstances of the case other than the needs of the bankrupt. 3 Where such an application is made after the end of the period of one year beginning with the first vesting under Chapter IV of this Part of the bankrupt’s estate in a trustee, the court shall assume, unless the circumstances of the case are exceptional, that the interests of the bankrupt’s creditors outweigh all other considerations. 4 The powers conferred on the court by this section are exercisable on an application whether it is made before or after the commencement of this section. Rights of occupation Rights of occupation etc. of bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner . 336 1 Nothing occurring in the initial period of the bankruptcy (that is to say, the period beginning with the day of the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition and ending with the vesting of the bankrupt’s estate in a trustee) is to be taken as having given rise to any home rights under Part IV of the Family Law Act 1996 in relation to a dwelling house comprised in the bankrupt’s estate. 2 Where a spouse’s or civil partner’s home rights under the Act of 1996 are a charge on the estate or interest of the other spouse or civil partner , or of trustees for the other spouse or civil partner , and the other spouse or civil partner is made bankrupt— a the charge continues to subsist notwithstanding the bankruptcy and, subject to the provisions of that Act, binds the trustee of the bankrupts’s estate and persons deriving title under the trustee, and b any application for an order under section 33 of that Act shall be made to the court having jurisdiction in relation to the bankruptcy. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 On such an application as is mentioned in subsection (2) . . . the court shall make such order under section 33 of the Act of 1996 . . . as it thinks just and reasonable having regard to— a the interests of the bankrupt’s creditors, b the conduct of the spouse or former spouse or civil partner or former civil partner , so far as contributing to the bankruptcy, c the needs and financial resources of the spouse or former spouse or civil partner or former civil partner , d the needs of any children, and e all the circumstances of the case other than the needs of the bankrupt. 5 Where such an application is made after the end of the period of one year beginning with the first vesting under Chapter IV of this Part of the bankrupt’s estate in a trustee, the court shall assume, unless the circumstances of the case are exceptional, that the interests of the bankrupt’s creditors outweigh all other considerations. Rights of occupation of bankrupt. 337 1 This section applies where— a a person who is entitled to occupy a dwelling house by virtue of a beneficial estate or interest is made bankrupt, and b any persons under the age of 18 with whom that person had at some time occupied that dwelling house had their home with that person at the time when the bankruptcy application was made or (as the case may be) the bankruptcy petition was presented and at the commencement of the bankruptcy. 2 Whether or not the bankrupt’s spouse or civil partner (if any) has home rights under Part IV of the Family Law Act 1996 — a the bankrupt has the followng rights as against the trustee of his estate— i if in occupation, a right not to be evicted or excluded from the dwelling house or any part of it, except with the leave of the court, ii if not in occupation, a right with the leave of the court to enter into and occupy the dwelling house, and b the bankrupt’s rights are a charge, having the like priority as an equitable interest created immediately before the commencement of the bankruptcy, on so much of his estate or interest in the dwelling house as vests in the trustee. 3 The Act of 1996 has effect, with the necessary modifications, as if— a the rights conferred by paragraph (a) of subsection (2) were home rights under that Act, b any application for such leave as is mentioned in that paragraph were an application for an order under section 33 of that Act, and c any charge under paragraph (b) of that subsection on the estate or interest of the trustee were a charge under that Act on the estate or interest of a spouse or civil partner . 4 Any application for leave such as is mentioned in subsection (2)(a) or otherwise by virtue of this section for an order under section 33 of the Act of 1996 shall be made to the court having jurisdiction in relation to the bankruptcy. 5 On such an application the court shall make such order under section 33 of the Act of 1996 as it thinks just and reasonable having regard to the interests of the creditors, to the bankrupt’s financial resources, to the needs of the children and to all the circumstances of the case other than the needs of the bankrupt. 6 Where such an application is made after the end of the period of one year beginning with the first vesting (under Chapter IV of this Part) of the bankrupt’s estate in a trustee, the court shall assume, unless the circumstances of the case are exceptional, that the interests of the bankrupt’s creditors outweigh all other considerations. Payments in respect of premises occupied by bankrupt. 338 Where any premises comprised in a bankrupt’s estate are occupied by him (whether by virtue of the preceding section or otherwise) on condition that he makes payments towards satisfying any liability arising under a mortgage of the premises or otherwise towards the outgoings of the premises, the bankrupt does not, by virtue of those payments, acquire any interest in the premises. Adjustment of prior transactions, etc. Transactions at an undervalue. 339 1 Subject as follows in this section and sections 341 and 342, where an individual is made bankrupt and he has at a relevant time (defined in section 341) entered into a transaction with any person at an undervalue, the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate may apply to the court for an order under this section. 2 The court shall, on such an application, make such order as it thinks fit for restoring the position to what it would have been if that individual had not entered into that transaction. 3 For the purposes of this section and sections 341 and 342, an individual enters into a transaction with a person at an undervalue if— a he makes a gift to that person or he otherwise enters into a transaction with that person on terms that provide for him to receive no consideration, b he enters into a transaction with that person in consideration of marriage or the formation of a civil partnership , or c he enters into a transaction with that person for a consideration the value of which, in money or money’s worth, is significantly less than the value, in money or money’s worth, of the consideration provided by the individual. Preferences. 340 1 Subject as follows in this and the next two sections, where an individual is made bankrupt and he has at a relevant time (defined in section 341) given a preference to any person, the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate may apply to the court for an order under this section. 2 The court shall, on such an application, make such order as it thinks fit for restoring the position to what it would have been if that individual had not given that preference. 3 For the purposes of this and the next two sections, an individual gives a preference to a person if— a that person is one of the individual’s creditors or a surety or guarantor for any of his debts or other liabilities, and b the individual does anything or suffers anything to be done which (in either case) has the effect of putting that person into a position which, in the event of the individual’s bankruptcy, will be better than the position he would have been in if that thing had not been done. 4 The court shall not make an order under this section in respect of a preference given to any person unless the individual who gave the preference was influenced in deciding to give it by a desire to produce in relation to that person the effect mentioned in subsection (3)(b) above. 5 An individual who has given a preference to a person who, at the time the preference was given, was an associate of his (otherwise than by reason only of being his employee) is presumed, unless the contrary is shown, to have been influenced in deciding to give it by such a desire as is mentioned in subsection (4). 6 The fact that something has been done in pursuance of the order of a court does not, without more, prevent the doing or suffering of that thing from constituting the giving of a preference. “Relevant time” under ss. 339, 340. 341 1 Subject as follows, the time at which an individual enters into a transaction at an undervalue or gives a preference is a relevant time if the transaction is entered into or the preference given— a in the case of a transaction at an undervalue, at a time in the period of 5 years ending with the day of the making of the bankruptcy application as a result of which, or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition on which, the individual is made bankrupt, b in the case of a preference which is not a transaction at an undervalue and is given to a person who is an associate of the individual (otherwise than by reason only of being his employee), at a time in the period of 2 years ending with that day, and c in any other case of a preference which is not a transaction at an undervalue, at a time in the period of 6 months ending with that day. 2 Where an individual enters into a transaction at an undervalue or gives a preference at a time mentioned in paragraph (a), (b) or (c) of subsection (1) (not being, in the case of a transaction at an undervalue, a time less than 2 years before the end of the period mentioned in paragraph (a)), that time is not a relevant time for the purposes of sections 339 and 340 unless the individual— a is insolvent at that time, or b becomes insolvent in consequence of the transaction or preference; but the requirements of this subsection are presumed to be satisfied, unless the contrary is shown, in relation to any transaction at an undervalue which is entered into by an individual with a person who is an associate of his (otherwise than by reason only of being his employee). 3 For the purposes of subsection (2), an individual is insolvent if— a he is unable to pay his debts as they fall due, or b the value of his assets is less than the amount of his liabilities, taking into account his contingent and prospective liabilities. 4 A transaction entered into or preference given by a person who is subsequently adjudged bankrupt on a petition under section 264(1)(d) (criminal bankruptcy) is to be treated as having been entered into or given at a relevant time for the purposes of sections 339 and 340 if it was entered into or given at any time on or after the date specified for the purposes of this subsection in the criminal bankruptcy order on which the petition was based. 5 No order shall be made under section 339 or 340 by virtue of subsection (4) of this section where an appeal is pending (within the meaning of section 277) against the individual’s conviction of any offence by virtue of which the criminal bankruptcy order was made. Orders under ss. 339, 340. 342 1 Without prejudice to the generality of section 339(2) or 340(2), an order under either of those sections with respect to a transaction or preference entered into or given by an individual who is subsequently made bankrupt may (subject as follows)— a require any property transferred as part of the transaction, or in connection with the giving of the preference, to be vested in the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate as part of that estate; b require any property to be so vested it if represents in any person’s hands the application either of the proceeds of sale of property so transferred or of money so transferred; c release or discharge (in whole or in part) any security given by the individual; d require any person to pay, in respect of benefits received by him from the individual, such sums to the trustee of his estate as the court may direct; e provide for any surety or guarantor whose obligations to any person were released or discharged (in whole or in part) under the transaction or by the giving of the preference to be under such new or revived obligations to that person as the court thinks appropriate; f provide for security to be provided for the discharge of any obligation imposed by or arising under the order, for such an obligation to be charged on any property and for the security or charge to have the same priority as a security or charge released or discharged (in whole or in part) under the transaction or by the giving of the preference; and g provide for the extent to which any person whose property is vested by the order in the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, or on whom obligations are imposed by the order, is to be able to prove in the bankruptcy for debts or other liabilities which arose from, or were released or discharged (in whole or in part) under or by, the transaction or the giving of the preference. 2 An order under section 339 or 340 may affect the property of, or impose any obligation on, any person whether or not he is the person with whom the individual in question entered into the transaction or, as the case may be the person to whom the preference was given; but such an order— a shall not prejudice any interest in property which was acquired from a person other than that individual and was acquired in good faith and for value , or prejudice any interest deriving from such an interest, and b shall not require a person who received a benefit from the transaction or preference in good faith and for value to pay a sum to the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate except where he was a party to the transaction or the payment is to be in respect of a preference given to that person at a time when he was a creditor of that individual. 2A Where a person has acquired an interest in property from a person other than the individual in question, or has received a benefit from the transaction or preference, and at the time of that acquisition or receipt— a he had notice of the relevant surrounding circumstances and of the relevant proceedings, or b he was an associate of, or was connected with, either the individual in question or the person with whom that individual entered into the transaction or to whom that individual gave the preference, then, unless the contrary is shown, it shall be presumed for the purposes of paragraph (a) or (as the case may be) paragraph (b) of subsection (2) that the interest was acquired or the benefit was received otherwise than in good faith. 3 Any sums required to be paid to the trustee in accordance with an order under section 339 or 340 shall be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate. 4 For the purposes of subsection (2A)(a), the relevant surrounding circumstances are (as the case may require)— a the fact that the individual in question entered into the transaction at an undervalue; or b the circumstances which amounted to the giving of the preference by the individual in question. 5 For the purposes of subsection (2A)(a), a person has notice of the relevant proceedings if he has notice— a of the fact that the bankruptcy application as a result of which, or (as the case may be) the bankruptcy petition on which, the individual in question is made bankrupt has been made or presented; or b of the fact that the individual in question has been made bankrupt. 6 Section 249 in Part VII of this Act shall apply for the purposes of subsection (2A)(b) as it applies for the purposes of the first Group of Parts. Recovery of excessive pension contributions. 342A 1 Where an individual who is made bankrupt— a has rights under an approved pension arrangement, or b has excluded rights under an unapproved pension arrangement, the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate may apply to the court for an order under this section. 2 If the court is satisfied— a that the rights under the arrangement are to any extent, and whether directly or indirectly, the fruits of relevant contributions, and b that the making of any of the relevant contributions (“ the excessive contributions ”) has unfairly prejudiced the individual’s creditors, the court may make such order as it thinks fit for restoring the position to what it would have been had the excessive contributions not been made. 3 Subsection (4) applies where the court is satisfied that the value of the rights under the arrangement is, as a result of rights of the individual under the arrangement or any other pension arrangement having at any time become subject to a debit under section 29(1)(a) of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999 (debits giving effect to pension-sharing), less than it would otherwise have been. 4 Where this subsection applies— a any relevant contributions which were represented by the rights which became subject to the debit shall, for the purposes of subsection (2), be taken to be contributions of which the rights under the arrangement are the fruits, and b where the relevant contributions represented by the rights under the arrangement (including those so represented by virtue of paragraph (a)) are not all excessive contributions, relevant contributions which are represented by the rights under the arrangement otherwise than by virtue of paragraph (a) shall be treated as excessive contributions before any which are so represented by virtue of that paragraph. 5 In subsections (2) to (4) “ relevant contributions ” means contributions to the arrangement or any other pension arrangement— a which the individual has at any time made on his own behalf, or b which have at any time been made on his behalf. 6 The court shall, in determining whether it is satisfied under subsection (2)(b), consider in particular— a whether any of the contributions were made for the purpose of putting assets beyond the reach of the individual’s creditors or any of them, and b whether the total amount of any contributions— i made by or on behalf of the individual to pension arrangements, and ii represented (whether directly or indirectly) by rights under approved pension arrangements or excluded rights under unapproved pension arrangements, is an amount which is excessive in view of the individual’s circumstances when those contributions were made. 7 For the purposes of this section and sections 342B and 342C (“ the recovery provisions ”), rights of an individual under an unapproved pension arrangement are excluded rights if they are rights which are excluded from his estate by virtue of regulations under section 12 of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999. 8 In the recovery provisions— “ approved pension arrangement ” has the same meaning as in section 11 of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999; “ unapproved pension arrangement ” has the same meaning as in section 12 of that Act. Orders under section 342A. 342B 1 Without prejudice to the generality of section 342A(2), an order under section 342A may include provision— a requiring the person responsible for the arrangement to pay an amount to the individual’s trustee in bankruptcy, b adjusting the liabilities of the arrangement in respect of the individual, c adjusting any liabilities of the arrangement in respect of any other person that derive, directly or indirectly, from rights of the individual under the arrangement, d for the recovery by the person responsible for the arrangement (whether by deduction from any amount which that person is ordered to pay or otherwise) of costs incurred by that person in complying in the bankrupt’s case with any requirement under section 342C(1) or in giving effect to the order. 2 In subsection (1), references to adjusting the liabilities of the arrangement in respect of a person include (in particular) reducing the amount of any benefit or future benefit to which that person is entitled under the arrangement. 3 In subsection (1)(c), the reference to liabilities of the arrangement does not include liabilities in respect of a person which result from giving effect to an order or provision falling within section 28(1) of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999 (pension sharing orders and agreements). 4 The maximum amount which the person responsible for an arrangement may be required to pay by an order under section 342A is the lesser of— a the amount of the excessive contributions, and b the value of the individual’s rights under the arrangement (if the arrangement is an approved pension arrangement) or of his excluded rights under the arrangement (if the arrangement is an unapproved pension arrangement). 5 An order under section 342A which requires the person responsible for an arrangement to pay an amount (“ the restoration amount ”) to the individual’s trustee in bankruptcy must provide for the liabilities of the arrangement to be correspondingly reduced. 6 For the purposes of subsection (5), liabilities are correspondingly reduced if the difference between— a the amount of the liabilities immediately before the reduction, and b the amount of the liabilities immediately after the reduction, is equal to the restoration amount. 7 An order under section 342A in respect of an arrangement— a shall be binding on the person responsible for the arrangement, and b overrides provisions of the arrangement to the extent that they conflict with the provisions of the order. Orders under section 342A: supplementary. 342C 1 The person responsible for— a an approved pension arrangement under which a bankrupt has rights, b an unapproved pension arrangement under which a bankrupt has excluded rights, or c a pension arrangement under which a bankrupt has at any time had rights, shall, on the bankrupt’s trustee in bankruptcy making a written request, provide the trustee with such information about the arrangement and rights as the trustee may reasonably require for, or in connection with, the making of applications under section 342A. 2 Nothing in— a any provision of section 159 of the Pension Schemes Act 1993 or section 91 of the Pensions Act 1995 (which prevent assignment and the making of orders that restrain a person from receiving anything which he is prevented from assigning), b any provision of any enactment (whether passed or made before or after the passing of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999) corresponding to any of the provisions mentioned in paragraph (a), or c any provision of the arrangement in question corresponding to any of those provisions, applies to a court exercising its powers under section 342A. 3 Where any sum is required by an order under section 342A to be paid to the trustee in bankruptcy, that sum shall be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate. 4 Regulations may, for the purposes of the recovery provisions, make provision about the calculation and verification of— a any such value as is mentioned in section 342B(4)(b); b any such amounts as are mentioned in section 342B(6)(a) and (b). 5 The power conferred by subsection (4) includes power to provide for calculation or verification— a in such manner as may, in the particular case, be approved by a prescribed person; or b in accordance with guidance from time to time prepared by a prescribed person. 6 References in the recovery provisions to the person responsible for a pension arrangement are to— a the trustees, managers or provider of the arrangement, or b the person having functions in relation to the arrangement corresponding to those of a trustee, manager or provider. 7 In this section and sections 342A and 342B— “ prescribed ” means prescribed by regulations; “ the recovery provisions ” means this section and sections 342A and 342B; “ regulations ” means regulations made by the Secretary of State. 8 Regulations under the recovery provisions may— a make different provision for different cases; b contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 9 Regulations under the recovery provisions shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Recovery of excessive contributions in pension-sharing cases. 342D 1 For the purposes of sections 339, 341 and 342, a pension-sharing transaction shall be taken— a to be a transaction, entered into by the transferor with the transferee, by which the appropriate amount is transferred by the transferor to the transferee; and b to be capable of being a transaction entered into at an undervalue only so far as it is a transfer of so much of the appropriate amount as is recoverable. 2 For the purposes of sections 340 to 342, a pension-sharing transaction shall be taken— a to be something (namely a transfer of the appropriate amount to the transferee) done by the transferor; and b to be capable of being a preference given to the transferee only so far as it is a transfer of so much of the appropriate amount as is recoverable. 3 If on an application under section 339 or 340 any question arises as to whether, or the extent to which, the appropriate amount in the case of a pension-sharing transaction is recoverable, the question shall be determined in accordance with subsections (4) to (8). 4 The court shall first determine the extent (if any) to which the transferor’s rights under the shared arrangement at the time of the transaction appear to have been (whether directly or indirectly) the fruits of contributions (“ personal contributions ”)— a which the transferor has at any time made on his own behalf, or b which have at any time been made on the transferor’s behalf, to the shared arrangement or any other pension arrangement. 5 Where it appears that those rights were to any extent the fruits of personal contributions, the court shall then determine the extent (if any) to which those rights appear to have been the fruits of personal contributions whose making has unfairly prejudiced the transferor’s creditors (“ the unfair contributions ”). 6 If it appears to the court that the extent to which those rights were the fruits of the unfair contributions is such that the transfer of the appropriate amount could have been made out of rights under the shared arrangement which were not the fruits of the unfair contributions, then the appropriate amount is not recoverable. 7 If it appears to the court that the transfer could not have been wholly so made, then the appropriate amount is recoverable to the extent to which it appears to the court that the transfer could not have been so made. 8 In making the determination mentioned in subsection (5) the court shall consider in particular— a whether any of the personal contributions were made for the purpose of putting assets beyond the reach of the transferor’s creditors or any of them, and b whether the total amount of any personal contributions represented, at the time the pension-sharing transaction was made, by rights under pension arrangements is an amount which is excessive in view of the transferor’s circumstances when those contributions were made. 9 In this section and sections 342E and 342F— “ appropriate amount ”, in relation to a pension-sharing transaction, means the appropriate amount in relation to that transaction for the purposes of section 29(1) of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999 (creation of pension credits and debits); “ pension-sharing transaction ” means an order or provision falling within section 28(1) of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999 (orders and agreements which activate pension-sharing); “ shared arrangement ”, in relation to a pension-sharing transaction, means the pension arrangement to which the transaction relates; “ transferee ”, in relation to a pension-sharing transaction, means the person for whose benefit the transaction is made; “ transferor ”, in relation to a pension-sharing transaction, means the person to whose rights the transaction relates. Orders under section 339 or 340 in respect of pension-sharing transactions. 342E 1 This section and section 342F apply if the court is making an order under section 339 or 340 in a case where— a the transaction or preference is, or is any part of, a pension-sharing transaction, and b the transferee has rights under a pension arrangement (“ the destination arrangement ”, which may be the shared arrangement or any other pension arrangement) that are derived, directly or indirectly, from the pension-sharing transaction. 2 Without prejudice to the generality of section 339(2) or 340(2), or of section 342, the order may include provision— a requiring the person responsible for the destination arrangement to pay an amount to the transferor’s trustee in bankruptcy, b adjusting the liabilities of the destination arrangement in respect of the transferee, c adjusting any liabilities of the destination arrangement in respect of any other person that derive, directly or indirectly, from rights of the transferee under the destination arrangement, d for the recovery by the person responsible for the destination arrangement (whether by deduction from any amount which that person is ordered to pay or otherwise) of costs incurred by that person in complying in the transferor’s case with any requirement under section 342F(1) or in giving effect to the order, e for the recovery, from the transferor’s trustee in bankruptcy, by the person responsible for a pension arrangement, of costs incurred by that person in complying in the transferor’s case with any requirement under section 342F(2) or (3). 3 In subsection (2), references to adjusting the liabilities of the destination arrangement in respect of a person include (in particular) reducing the amount of any benefit or future benefit to which that person is entitled under the arrangement. 4 The maximum amount which the person responsible for the destination arrangement may be required to pay by the order is the smallest of— a so much of the appropriate amount as, in accordance with section 342D, is recoverable, b so much (if any) of the amount of the unfair contributions (within the meaning given by section 342D(5)) as is not recoverable by way of an order under section 342A containing provision such as is mentioned in section 342B(1)(a), and c the value of the transferee’s rights under the destination arrangement so far as they are derived, directly or indirectly, from the pension-sharing transaction. 5 If the order requires the person responsible for the destination arrangement to pay an amount (“ the restoration amount ”) to the transferor’s trustee in bankruptcy it must provide for the liabilities of the arrangement to be correspondingly reduced. 6 For the purposes of subsection (5), liabilities are correspondingly reduced if the difference between— a the amount of the liabilities immediately before the reduction, and b the amount of the liabilities immediately after the reduction, is equal to the restoration amount. 7 The order— a shall be binding on the person responsible for the destination arrangement, and b overrides provisions of the destination arrangement to the extent that they conflict with the provisions of the order. Orders under section 339 or 340 in pension-sharing cases: supplementary. 342F 1 On the transferor’s trustee in bankruptcy making a written request to the person responsible for the destination arrangement, that person shall provide the trustee with such information about— a the arrangement, b the transferee’s rights under it, and c where the destination arrangement is the shared arrangement, the transferor’s rights under it, as the trustee may reasonably require for, or in connection with, the making of applications under sections 339 and 340. 2 Where the shared arrangement is not the destination arrangement, the person responsible for the shared arrangement shall, on the transferor’s trustee in bankruptcy making a written request to that person, provide the trustee with such information about— a the arrangement, and b the transferor’s rights under it, as the trustee may reasonably require for, or in connection with, the making of applications under sections 339 and 340. 3 On the transferor’s trustee in bankruptcy making a written request to the person responsible for any intermediate arrangement, that person shall provide the trustee with such information about— a the arrangement, and b the transferee’s rights under it, as the trustee may reasonably require for, or in connection with, the making of applications under sections 339 and 340. 4 In subsection (3) “ intermediate arrangement ” means a pension arrangement, other than the shared arrangement or the destination arrangement, in relation to which the following conditions are fulfilled— a there was a time when the transferee had rights under the arrangement that were derived (directly or indirectly) from the pension-sharing transaction, and b the transferee’s rights under the destination arrangement (so far as derived from the pension-sharing transaction) are to any extent derived (directly or indirectly) from the rights mentioned in paragraph (a). 5 Nothing in— a any provision of section 159 of the Pension Schemes Act 1993 or section 91 of the Pensions Act 1995 (which prevent assignment and the making of orders which restrain a person from receiving anything which he is prevented from assigning), b any provision of any enactment (whether passed or made before or after the passing of the Welfare Reform and Pensions Act 1999) corresponding to any of the provisions mentioned in paragraph (a), or c any provision of the destination arrangement corresponding to any of those provisions, applies to a court exercising its powers under section 339 or 340. 6 Regulations may, for the purposes of sections 339 to 342, sections 342D and 342E and this section, make provision about the calculation and verification of— a any such value as is mentioned in section 342E(4)(c); b any such amounts as are mentioned in section 342E(6)(a) and (b). 7 The power conferred by subsection (6) includes power to provide for calculation or verification— a in such manner as may, in the particular case, be approved by a prescribed person; or b in accordance with guidance from time to time prepared by a prescribed person. 8 In section 342E and this section, references to the person responsible for a pension arrangement are to— a the trustees, managers or provider of the arrangement, or b the person having functions in relation to the arrangement corresponding to those of a trustee, manager or provider. 9 In this section— “ prescribed ” means prescribed by regulations; “ regulations ” means regulations made by the Secretary of State. 10 Regulations under this section may— a make different provision for different cases; b contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 11 Regulations under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Extortionate credit transactions. 343 1 This section applies where a person is made bankrupt who is or has been a party to a transaction for, or involving, the provision to him of credit. 2 The court may, on the application of the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, make an order with respect to the transaction if the transaction is or was extortionate and was not entered into more than 3 years before the commencement of the bankruptcy. 3 For the purposes of this section a transaction is extortionate if, having regard to the risk accepted by the person providing the credit— a the terms of it are or were such as to require grossly exorbitant payments to be made (whether unconditionally or in certain contingencies) in respect of the provision of the credit, or b it otherwise grossly contravened ordinary principles of fair dealing; and it shall be presumed, unless the contrary is proved, that a transaction, with respect to which an application is made under this section is or, as the case may be, was extortionate. 4 An order under this section with respect to any transaction may contain such one or more of the following as the court thinks fit, that is to say— a provision setting aside the whole or part of any obligation created by the transaction; b provision otherwise varying the terms of the transaction or varying the terms on which any security for the purposes of the transaction is held; c provision requiring any person who is or was party to the transaction to pay to the trustee any sums paid to that person, by virtue of the transaction, by the bankrupt; d provision requiring any person to surrender to the trustee any property held by him as security for the purposes of the transaction; e provision directing accounts to be taken between any persons. 5 Any sums or property required to be paid or surrendered to the trustee in accordance with an order under this section shall be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate. 6 . . . . . . the powers conferred by this section are exercisable in relation to any transaction concurrently with any powers exerciseable under this Act in relation to that transaction as a transaction at an undervalue. Avoidance of general assignment of book debts. 344 1 The following applies where a person engaged in any business makes a general assignment to another person of his existing or future book debts, or any class of them, and is subsequently made bankrupt. 2 The assignment is void against the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate as regards book debts which were not paid before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition, unless the assignment has been registered under the Bills of Sale Act 1878. 3 For the purposes of subsections (1) and (2)— a “ assignment ” includes an assignment by way of security or charge on book debts, and b “ general assignment ” does not include— i an assignment of book debts due at the date of the assignment from specified debtors or of debts becoming due under specified contracts, or ii an assignment of book debts included either in a transfer of a business made in good faith and for value or in an assignment of assets for the benefit of creditors generally. 4 For the purposes of registration under the Act of 1878 an assignment of book debts is to be treated as if it were a bill of sale given otherwise than by way of security for the payment of a sum of money; and the provisions of that Act with respect to the registration of bills of sale apply accordingly with such necessary modifications as may be made by rules under that Act. Contracts to which bankrupt is a party. 345 1 The following applies where a contract has been made with a person who is subsequently made bankrupt. 2 The court may, on the application of any other paty to the contract, make an order discharging obligations under the contract on such terms as to payment by the applicant or the bankrupt of damages for non-performance or otherwise as appear to the court to be equitable. 3 Any damages payable by the bankrupt by virtue of an order of the court under this section are provable as a bankruptcy debt. 4 Where an undischarged bankrupt is a contractor in respect of any contract jointly with any person, that person may sue or be sued in respect of the contract without the joinder of the bankrupt. Enforcement procedures. 346 1 Subject to section 285 in Chapter II (restriction on proceedings and remedies) and to the following provisions of this section, where the creditor of any person who is made bankrupt has, before the commencement of the bankruptcy— a issued execution against the goods or land of that person, or b attached a debt due to that person from another person, that creditor is not entitled, as against the official reciever or trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, to retain the benefit of the execution or attachment, or any sums paid to avoid it, unless the execution or attachment was completed, or the sums were paid, before the commencement of the bankruptcy. 1A For the purposes of this section, Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs is to be regarded as having attached a debt due to a person if it has taken action under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction from accounts) as a result of which an amount standing to the credit of an account held by that person is— a subject to arrangements made under paragraph 6(3) of that Schedule, or b the subject of a deduction notice under paragraph 13 of that Schedule. 2 Subject as follows, where any goods of a person have been taken in execution, then, if before the completion of the execution notice is given to the enforcement officer or other officer charged with the execution that that person has been made bankrupt— a the enforcement officer or other officer shall on request deliver to the official receiver or trustee of the bankrupt’s estate the goods and any money seized or recovered in part satisfaction of the execution, but b the costs of the execution are a first charge on the goods or money so delivered and the official receiver or trustee may sell the goods or a sufficient part of them for the purpose of satisfying the charge. 3 Subject to subsection (6) below, where— a under an execution in respect of a judgment for a sum exceeding such sum as may be prescribed for the purposes of this subsection, the goods of any person are sold or money is paid in order to avoid a sale, and b before the end of the period of 14 days beginning with the day of the sale or payment the enforcement officer or other officer charged with the execution is given notice that a bankruptcy application has been made or a bankruptcy petition has been presented in relation to that person, and c a bankruptcy order is or has been made as a result of that application or on that petition, the balance of the proceeds of sale or money paid, after deducting the costs of execution, shall (in priority to the claim of the execution creditor) be comprised in the bankrupt’s estate. 4 Accordingly, in the case of an execution in respect of a judgment for a sum exceeding the sum prescribed for the purposes of subsection (3), the enforcement officer or other officer charged with the execution— a shall not dispose of the balance mentioned in subsection (3) at any time within the period of 14 days so mentioned or while proceedings on a bankruptcy application are ongoing or (as the case may be) there is pending a bankruptcy petition of which he has been given notice under that subsection, and b shall pay that balance, where by virtue of that subsection it is comprised, in the bankrupt’s estate, to the official receiver or (if there is one) to the trustee or that estate. 5 For the purposes of this section— a an execution against goods is completed by seizure and sale or by the making of a charging order under section 1 of the Charging Orders Act 1979; b an execution against land is completed by seizure, by the appointment of a receiver or by the making of a charging order under that section; c an attachment of a debt is completed by the receipt of the debt. 6 The rights conferred by subsections (1) to (3) on the official receiver or the trustee may, to such extent and on such terms as it thinks fit, be set aside by the court in favour of the creditor who has issued the execution or attached the debt. 7 Nothing in this section entitles the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate to claim goods from a person who has acquired them in good faith under a sale by an enforcement officer or other officer charged with an execution. 8 Neither subsection (2) nor subsection (3) applies in relation to any execution against property which has been acquired by or has devolved upon the bankrupt since the commencement of the bankruptcy, unless, at the time the execution is issued or before it is completed— a the property has been or is claimed for the bankrupt’s estate under section 307 (after-acquired property), and b a copy of the notice given under that section has been or is served on the enforcement officer or other officer charged with the execution. 9 In this section “ enforcement officer ” means an individual who is authorised to act as an enforcement officer under the Courts Act 2003. Distress, etc. 347 1 CRAR (the power of commercial rent arrears recovery under section 72(1) of the Tribunals, Courts and Enforcement Act 2007) is exercisable where the tenant is an undischarged bankrupt (subject to sections 252(2)(b) and 254(1) above and subsection (5) below) against goods and effects comprised in the bankrupt’s estate, but only for 6 months’ rent accrued due before the commencement of the bankruptcy. 2 Where CRAR has been exercised to recover rent from an individual to whom a bankruptcy application or a bankruptcy petition relates and a bankruptcy order is subsequently made as a result of that application or on that petition, any amount recovered by way of CRAR which— a is in excess of the amount which by virtue of subsection (1) would have been recoverable after the commencement of the bankruptcy, or b is in respect of rent for a period or part of a period after goods were taken control of under CRAR , shall be held for the bankrupt as apart of his estate. 3 Subsection (3A) applies where— a any person (whether or not a landlord or person entitled to rent) has distrained upon the goods or effects of an individual who is made bankrupt before the end of the period of 3 months beginning with the distraint, or b Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs has been paid any amount from an account of an individual under Part 1 of Schedule 8 to the Finance ( No. 2) Act 2015 (enforcement by deduction from accounts) and the individual is adjudged bankrupt before the end of the period of 3 months beginning with the payment. 3A Where this subsection applies— a in a case within subsection (3)(a), the goods or effects, or the proceeds of their sale, and b in a case within subsection (3)(b), the amount in question, is charged for the benefit of the bankrupt's estate with the preferential debts of the bankrupt to the extent that the bankrupt's estate is for the time being insufficient for meeting them. 4 Where by virtue of any charge under subsection (3A) any person surrenders any goods or effects to the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate or makes a payment to such a trustee, that person ranks, in respect of the amount of the proceeds of the sale of those goods or effects by the trustee or, as the case may be, the amount of the payment, as a preferential creditor of the bankrupt, except as against so much of the bankrupt’s estate as is available for the payment of preferential creditors by virtue of the surrender or payment. 5 CRAR is not exercisable at any time after the discharge of a bankrupt against any goods or effects comprised in the bankrupt’s estate. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Subject to sections 252(2)(b) and 254(1) above nothing in this Group of Parts affects any right to distrain otherwise than for rent; and any such right is at any time exerciseable without restriction against property comprised in a bankrupt’s estate, even if that right is expressed by any enactment to be exerciseable in like manner as a right to distrain for rent. 9 Any right to distrain against property comprised in a bankrupt’s estate is exerciseable notwithstanding that the propety has vested in the trustee. 10 The provisions of this section are without prejudice to a landlord’s right in a bankruptcy to prove for any bankruptcy debt in respect of rent. 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apprenticeships, etc. 348 1 This section applies where— a a bankruptcy order is made in respect of an individual to whom another individual was an apprentice or articled clerk at the time when the application for the order was made or (as the case may be) the petition for the order was presented, and b the bankrupt or the apprentice or clerk gives notice to the trustee terminating the apprenticeship or articles. 2 Subject to subsection (6) below, the indenture of apprenticeship or, as the case may be, the articles of agreement shall be discharged with effect from the commencement of the bankruptcy. 3 If any money has been paid by or on behalf of the apprentice or clerk to the bankrupt as a fee, the trustee may, on an application made by or on behalf of the apprentice or clerk, pay such sum to the apprentice or clerk as to the trustee thinks reasonable, having regard to— a the amount of the fee, b the proportion of the period in respect of which the fee was paid that has been served by the apprentice or clerk before the commencement of the bankruptcy, and c the other circumstances of the case. 4 The power of the trustee to make a payment under subsection (3) has priority over his obligation to distribute the bankrupt’s estate. 5 Instead of making a payment under subsection (3), the trustee may, if it appears to him expedient to do so on an application made by or on behalf of the apprentice or clerk, transfer the indenture or articles to a person other than the bankrupt. 6 Where a transfer is made under subsection (5), subsection (2) has effect only as between the apprentice or clerk and the bankrupt. Unenforceability of liens on books, etc. 349 1 Subject as follows, a lien or other right to retain possession of any of the books, papers or other records of a bankrupt is unenforceable to the extent that its enforcement would deny possession of any books, papers or other records to the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate. 2 Subsection (1) does not apply to a lien on documents which give a title to property and are held as such. Arbitration agreements to which bankrupt is party. 349A 1 This section applies where a bankrupt had become party to a contract containing an arbitration agreement before the commencement of his bankruptcy. 2 If the trustee in bankruptcy adopts the contract, the arbitration agreement is enforceable by or against the trustee in relation to matters arising from or connected with the contract. 3 If the trustee in bankruptcy does not adopt the contract and a matter to which the arbitration agreement applies requires to be determined in connection with or for the purposes of the bankruptcy proceedings— a the trustee with the consent of the creditors’ committee, or b any other party to the agreement, may apply to the court which may, if it thinks fit in all the circumstances of the case, order that the matter be referred to arbitration in accordance with the arbitration agreement. 4 In this section— “arbitration agreement” has the same meaning as in Part I of the Arbitration Act 1996; and “ the court ” means the court which has jurisdiction in the bankruptcy proceedings. Chapter VI Bankruptcy Offences Preliminary Scheme of this Chapter. 350 1 Subject to section 360(3) below, this Chapter applies — a where an adjudicator has made a bankruptcy order as a result of a bankruptcy application, or b where the court has made a bankruptcy order on a bankruptcy petition. 2 This Chapter applies whether or not the bankruptcy order is annulled, but proceedings for an offence under this Chapter shall not be instituted after the annulment. 3 Without prejudice to his liability in respect of a subsequent bankruptcy, the bankrupt is not guilty of an offence under this Chapter in respect of anything done after his discharge; but nothing in this Group of Parts prevents the institution of proceedings against a discharged bankrupt for an offence committed before his discharge. 3A Subsection (3) is without prejudice to any provision of this Chapter which applies to a person in respect of whom a bankruptcy restrictions order is in force. 4 It is not a defence in proceedings for an offence under this Chapter that anything relied on, in whole or in part, as constituting that offence was done outside England and Wales. 5 Proceedings for an offence under this Chapter or under the rules shall not be instituted except by the Secretary of State or by or with the consent of the Director of Public Prosecutions. 6 A person guilty of any offence under this Chapter is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Definitions. 351 In the following provisions of this Chapter— a references to property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate or to property possession of which is required to be delivered up to the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate include any property which would be such property if a notice in respect of it were given under section 307 (after-acquired property) , section 308 (personal property and effects of bankrupt having more than replacement value) or section 308A (vesting in trustee of certain tenancies) ; b “ the initial period ” means the period between the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition and the commencement of the bankruptcy; ... c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defence of innocent intention. 352 Where in the case of an offence under any provision of this Chapter it is stated that this section applies, a person is not guilty of the offence if he proves that, at the time of the conduct constituting the offence, he had no intent to defraud or to conceal the state of his affairs. Wrongdoing by the bankrupt before and after bankruptcy Non-disclosure. 353 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a he does not to the best of his knowledge and belief disclose all the property comprised in his estate to the official receiver or the trustee, or b he does not inform the official receiver or the trustee of any disposal of any property which but for the disposal would be so comprised, stating how, when, to whom and for what consideration the property was disposed of. 2 Subsection (1)(b) does not apply to any disposal in the ordinary course of a business carried on by the bankrupt or to any payment of the ordinary expenses of the bankrupt or his family. 3 Section 352 applies to this offence. Concealment of property. 354 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a he does not deliver up possession to the official receiver or trustee, or as the official receiver or trustee may direct, of such part of the property comprised in his estate as is in his possession or under his control and possession of which he is required by law so to deliver up, b he conceals any debt due to or from him or conceals any property the value of which is not less than the prescribed amount and possession of which he is required to deliver up to the official receiver or trustee, or c in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition, or in the initial period, he did anything which would have been an offence under paragraph (b) above if the bankruptcy order had been made immediately before he did it. Section 352 applies to this offence. 2 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if he removes, or in the initial period removed, any property the value of which was not less than the prescribed amount and possession of which he has or would have been required to deliver up to the official receiver or the trustee. Section 352 applies to this offence. 3 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if he without reasonable excuse fails, on being required to do so by the official receiver , the trustee or the court— a to account for the loss of any substantial part of his property incurred in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition or in the initial period, or b to give a satisfactory explanation of the manner in which such a loss was incurred. Concealment of books and papers; falsification. 355 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if he does not deliver up possession to the official receiver or the trustee, or as the official receiver or trustee may direct, of all books, papers and other records of which he has possession or control and which relate to his estate or his affairs. Section 352 applies to this offence. 2 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a he prevents, or in the initial period prevented, the production of any books, papers or records relating to his estate or affairs; b he conceals destroys, mutilates or falsifies, or causes or permits the concealment, destruction, mutilation or falsification of, any books, papers or other records relating to his estate or affairs; c he makes, or causes or permits the making of, any false entries in any book, document or record relating to his estate or affairs; or d in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition, or in the initial period, he did anything which would have been an offence under paragraph (b) or (c) above if the bankruptcy order had been made before he did it. Section 352 applies to this offence. 3 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a he disposes of, or alters or makes any omission in, or causes or permits the disposal, altering or making of any omission in, any book, document or record relating to his estate or affairs, or b in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition, or in the initial period, he did anything which would have been an offence under paragraph (a) if the bankruptcy order had been made before he did it. Section 352 applies to this offence. 4 In their application to a trading record subsections (2)(d) and (3)(b) shall have effect as if the reference to 12 months were a reference to two years. 5 In subsection (4) “ trading record ” means a book, document or record which shows or explains the transactions or financial position of a person’s business, including— a a periodic record of cash paid and received, b a statement of periodic stock-taking, and c except in the case of goods sold by way of retail trade, a record of goods sold and purchased which identifies the buyer and seller or enables them to be identified. False statements. 356 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if he makes or has made any material omission in any statement made under any provision in this Group of Parts and relating to his affairs. Section 352 applies to this offence. 2 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a knowing or believing that a false debt has been proved by any person under the bankruptcy, he fails to inform the trustee as soon as practicable; or b he attempts to account for any part of his property by fictitious losses or expenses; or c in connection with any creditors' decision procedure or deemed consent procedure in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition or (whether or not in connection with such a procedure ) at any time in the intial period, he did anything which would have been an offence under paragraph (b) if the bankruptcy order had been made before he did it; or d he is, or at any time has been, guilty of any false representation or other fraud for the purpose of obtaining the consent of his creditors, or any of them, to an agreement with reference to his affairs or to his bankruptcy. Fraudulent disposal of property. 357 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if he makes or causes to be made, or has in the period of 5 years ending with the commencement of the bankruptcy made or caused to be made, any gift or transfer of, or any charge on,his property. Section 352 applies to this offence. 2 The reference to making a transfer of or charge on any property includes causing or conniving at the levying of any execution against that property. 3 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if he conceals or removes, or has at any time before the commencement of the bankruptcy concealed or removed, any part of his property after, or within 2 months before, the date on which a judgment or order for the payment of money has been obtained against him, being a judgment or order which was not satisfied before the commencement of the bankruptcy. Section 352 applies to this offence. Absconding. 358 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a he leaves, or attempts or makes preparations to leave, England and Wales with any property the value of whichis not less than the prescribed amount and possession of which he is required to deliver up to the official receiver or the trustee, or b in the 6 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition, or in the initial period, he did anything which would have been an offence under paragraph (a) if the bankruptcy order had been made immediately before he did it. Section 352 applies to this offence. Fraudulent dealing with property obtained on credit. 359 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if, in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition, or in the initial period, he disposed of any property which he had obtained on credit and, at the time he disposed of it, had not paid for. Section 352 applies to this offence. 2 A person is guilty of an offence if, in the 12 months before the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition or in the initial period, he acquired or received property from the bankrupt knowing or believing— a that the bankrupt owed money in respect of the property, and b that the bankrupt did not intend, or was unlikely to be able, to pay the money he so owed. 3 A person is not guilty of an offence under subsection (1) or (2) if the disposal, acquisition or receipt of the property was in the ordinary course of a business carried on by the bankrupt at the time of the disposal, acquisition or receipt. 4 In determining for the purposes of this section whether any property is disposed of, acquired or received in the ordinary course of a business carried on by the bankrupt, regard may be had, in particular, to the price paid for the property. 5 In this section references to disposing of property include pawning or pledging it; and references to acquiring or receiving property shall be read accordingly. Obtaining credit; engaging in business. 360 1 The bankrupt is guilty of an offence if— a either alone or jointly with any other person, he obtains credit to the extent of the prescribed amount or more without giving the person from whom he obtains it the relevant information about his status; or b he engages (whether directly or indirectly) in any business under a name other than that in which he was made bankrupt without disclosing to all persons with whom he enters into any business transaction the name in which he was so adjudged. 2 The reference to the bankrupt obtaining credit includes the following cases— a where goods are bailed to him under a hire-purchase agreement, or agreed to be sold to him under a conditional sale agreement, and b where he is paid in advance (whether in money or otherwise) for the supply of goods or services. 3 A person whose estate has been sequestrated in Scotland, or who has been adjudged bankrupt in Northern Ireland, is guilty of an offence if, before his discharge, he does anything in England and Wales which would be an offence under subsection (1) if he were an undischarged bankrupt and the sequestration of his estate or the adjudication in Northern Ireland were an adjudication under this Part. 4 For the purposes of subsection (1)(a), the relevant information about the status of the person in question is the information that he is an undischarged bankrupt or, as the case may be, that his estate has been sequestrated in Scotland and that he has not been discharged. 5 This section applies to the bankrupt after discharge while a bankruptcy restrictions order is in force in respect of him. 6 For the purposes of subsection (1)(a) as it applies by virtue of subsection (5), the relevant information about the status of the person in question is the information that a bankruptcy restrictions order is in force in respect of him. Failure to keep proper accounts of business. 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gambling. 362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter VII Powers of Court In Bankruptcy General control of court. 363 1 Every bankruptcy is under the general control of the court and, subject to the provisions in this Group of Parts, the court has full power to decide all questions of priorities and all other questions, whether of law or fact, arising in any bankruptcy. 2 Without prejudice to any other provision in this Group of Parts, an undischarged bankrupt or a discharged bankrupt whose estate is still being administered under Chapter IV of this Part shall do all such things as he may be directed to do by the court for the purposes of his bankruptcy or, as the case may be, the administration of that estate. 3 The official receiver or the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate may at any time apply to the court for a direction under subsection (2). 4 If any person without reasonable excuse fails to comply with any obligation imposed on him by subsection (2), he is guilty of a contempt of court and liable to be punished accordingly (in addition to any other punishment to which may be subject). Power of arrest. 364 1 In the cases specified in the next subsection the court may cause a warrant to be issued to a constable or prescribed officer of the court— a for the arrest of a debtor to whom a bankruptcy application or a bankruptcy petition relates or of an undischarged bankrupt, or of a discharged bankrupt whose estate is still being administered under Chapter IV of this Part, and b for the seizure of any books, papers, records, money or goods in the possession of a person arrested under the warrant, and may authorise a person arrested under such a warrant to be kept in custody, and anything seized under such a warrant to be held, in accordance with the rules, until such time as the court may order. 2 The powers conferred by subsection (1) are exercisable in relation to a debtor or undischarged or discharged bankrupt if, at any time after the making of the bankruptcy application or the presentation of the bankruptcy petition relating to him or the making of the bankruptcy order against him, it appears to the court— a that there are reasonable grounds for believing that he has absconded, or is about to abscond, with a view to avoiding or delaying the payment of any of his debts or his appearance to a bankruptcy petition or to avoiding, delaying or disrupting any proceedings in bankruptcy against him or any examination of his affairs, or b that he is about to remove his goods with a view to preventing or delaying possession being taken of them by the official receiver or the trustee of his estate, or c that there are reasonable grounds for believing that he has concealed or destroyed, or is about to conceal or destroy, any of his goods or any books, papers or records which might be of use to his creditors in the course of his bankruptcy or in connection with the administration of his estate, or d that he has, without the leave of the official receiver or the trustee of his estate, removed any goods in his possession which exceed in value such sums as may be prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph or e that he has failed, without reasonable excuse, to attend any examination ordered by the court. Seizure of bankrupt’s property. 365 1 At any time after a bankruptcy order has been made, the court may, on the application of the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, issue a warrant authorising the person to whom it is directed to seize any property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate which is, or any books, papers or records relating to the bankrupt’s estate or affairs which are, in the possession or under the control of the bankrupt or any other person who is required to deliver the property, books, papers or records to the official receiver or trustee. 2 Any person executing a warrant under this section may, for the purpose of seizing any property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate or any books, papers or records relating to the bankrupt’s estate or affairs, break open any premises where the bankrupt or anything that may be seized under the warrant is or is believed to be and any receptacle of the bankrupt which contains or is believed to contain anything that may be so seized. 3 If, after a bankruptcy order has been made, the court is satisfied that any property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate is, or any books, papers or records relating to the bankrupt’s estate or affairs are, concealed in any premises not belonging to him, it may issue a warrant authorising any constable or prescribed officer of the court to search those premises for the property, books, papers or records. 4 A warrant under subsection (3) shall not be executed except in the prescribed manner and in accordance with its terms. Inquiry into bankrupt’s dealings and property. 366 1 At any time after a bankruptcy order has been made the court may, on the application of the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, summon to appear before it— a the bankrupt or the bankrupt’s spouse or former spouse or civil partner or former civil partner , b any person known or believed to have any property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate in his possession or to be indebted to the bankrupt, c any person appearing to the court to be able to give information concerning the bankrupt or the bankrupt’s dealings, affairs or property. The court may require any such person as is mentioned in paragraph (b) or (c) to submit a witness statement verified by a statement of truth to the court containing an account of his dealings with the bankrupt or to produce any documents in his possession or under his control relating to the bankrupt or the bankrupt’s dealings, affairs or property. 2 Without prejudice to section 364, the following applies in a case where— a a person without reasonable excuse fails to appear before the court when he is summoned to do so under this section, or b there are reasonable grounds for believing that a person has absconded, or is about to abscond, with a view to avoiding his appearance before the court under this section. 3 The court may, for the purpose of bringing that person and anything in his possession before the court, cause a warrant to be issued to a constable or prescribed officer of the court— a for the arrest of that person, and b for the seizure of any books, papers, records, money or goods in that person’s possession. 4 The court may authorise a person arrested under such a warrant to be kept in custody, and anything seized under such a warrant to be held, in accordance with the rules, until that person is brought before the court under the warrant or until such other times as the court may order. Court’s enforcement powers under s. 366. 367 1 If it appears to the court, on consideration of any evidence obtained under section 366 or this section, that any person has in his possession any property comprised in the bankrupt’s estate, the court may, on the application of the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, order that person to deliver the whole or any part of the property to the official receiver or the trustee at such time, in such manner and on such terms as the court thinks fit. 2 If it appears to the court, on consideration of any evidence obtained under section 366 or this section, that any person is indebted to the bankrupt, the court may, on the application of the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, order that person to pay to the official receiver or trustee, at such time and in such manner as the court may direct, the whole or part of the amount due, whether in full discharge of the debt or otherwise as the court thinks fit. 3 The court may, if it thinks fit, order that any person who if within the jurisdiction of the court would be liable to be summoned to appear before it under section 366 shall be examined in any part of the United Kingdom where he may be for the time being, or in any place outside the United Kingdom. 4 Any person who appears or is brought before the court under section 366 or this section may be examined on oath, either orally or by interrogatories, concerning the bankrupt or the bankrupt’s dealings, affairs and property. Provision corresponding to s. 366, where interim receiver appointed. 368 Sections 366 and 367 apply where an interim receiver has been appointed under section 286 as they apply where a bankruptcy order has been made, as if— a references to the official receiver or the trustee were to the interim receiver, and b references to the bankrupt and to his estate were (respectively) to the debtor and his property. Order for production of documents by inland revenue. 369 1 For the purposes of an examination under section 290 (public examination of bankrupt) or proceedings under sections 366 to 368, the court may, on the application of the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, order an inland revenue official to produce to the court— a any return, account or accounts submitted (whether before or after the commencement of the bankruptcy) by the bankrupt to any inland revenue official, b any assessment or determination made (whether before or after the commencement of the bankruptcy) in relation to the bankrupt by any inland revenue official, or c any correspondence (whether before or after the commencement of the bankruptcy) between the bankrupt and any inland revenue official. 2 Where the court has made an order under subsection (1) for the purposes of any examination or proceedings, the court may, at any time after the document to which the order relates is produced to it, by order authorised the disclosure of the document, or of any part of its contents, to the official receiver, the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate or the bankrupt’s creditors. 3 The court shall not address an order under subsection (1) to an inland revenue official unless it is satisfied that that official is dealing, or has dealt, with the affairs of the bankrupt. 4 Where any document to which an order under subsection (1) relates is not in the possession of the official to whom the order is addressed, it is the duty of that official to take all reasonable steps to secure possession of it and, if he fails to do so, to report the reasons for his failure to the court. 5 Where any document to which an order under subsection (1) relates is in the possession of an inland revenue official other than the one to whom the order is addressed, it is the duty of the official in possession of the document, at the request of the official to whom the order is addressed, to deliver it to the official making the request. 6 In this section “ inland revenue official ” means any inspector or collector of taxes appointed by the Commissioners of Inland Revenue or any person appointed by the Commissioners to serve in any other capacity. 7 This section does not apply for the purposes of an examination under sections 366 and 367 which takes places by virtue of section 368 (interim receiver). Power to appoint special manager. 370 1 The court may, on an application under this section, appoint any person to be the special manager— a of a bankrupt’s estate, or b of the business of an undischarged bankrupt, or c of the property or business of a debtor in whose case an interim receiver has been appointed under section 286. 2 An application under this section may be made by the interim receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate in any case where it appears to the interim receiver or trustee that the nature of the estate, property or business, or the interests of the creditors generally, require the appointment of another person to manage the estate, property or business. 3 A special manager appointed under this section has such powers as may be entrusted to him by the court. 4 The power of the court under subsection (3) to entrust powers to a special manager includes power to direct that any provision in ths Group of Parts that has effect in relation to the official receiver, interim receiver or trustee shall have the like effect in relation to the special manager for the purposes of the carrying out by the special manager of any of the functions of the official receiver, interim receiver or trustee. 5 A special manager appointed under this section shall— a give such security as may be prescribed, b prepare and keep such accounts as may be prescribed, and c produce those accounts in accordance with the rules to the Secretary of State or to such other persons as may be prescribed. Re-direction of bankrupt’s letters, etc. 371 1 Where a bankruptcy order has been made, the court may from time to time, on the application of the official receiver or the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate, order a postal operator (within the meaning of Part 3 of the Postal Services Act 2011 ) to re-direct and send or deliver to the official receiver or trustee or otherwise any postal packet (within the meaning of that Act ) which would otherwise be sent or delivered by the operator concerned to the bankrupt at such place or places as may be specified in the order. 2 An order under this section has effect for such period, not exceeding 3 months, as may be specified in the order. Part X Individual Insolvency: General Provisions Supplies of gas, water, electricity, etc. 372 1 This section applies where on any day (“the relevant day”)— a a bankruptcy order is made against an individual or an interim receiver of an individual’s property is appointed, or b a voluntary arrangement proposed by an individual is approved under Part VIII, ... c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and in this section “ the office-holder ” means the official receiver, the trustee in bankruptcy, the interim receiver or the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement , as the case may be. 2 If a request falling within the next subsection is made for the giving after the relevant day of any of the supplies mentioned in subsection (4), the supplier— a may make it a condition of the giving of the supply that the office-holder personally guarantees the payment of any charges in respect of the supply, but b shall not make it a condition of the giving of the supply, or do anything which has the effect of making it a condition of the giving of the supply, that any outstanding charges in respect of a supply given to the individual before the relevant day are paid. 3 A request falls within this subsection if it is made— a by or with the concurrence of the office-holder, and b for the purposes of any business which is or has been carried on by the individual, by a firm or partnership of which the individual is or was a member, or by an agent or manager for the individual or for such a firm or partnership. 4 The supplies referred to in subsection (2) are— a a supply of gas by a gas supplier within the meaning of Part I of the Gas Act 1986; aa a supply of gas by a person within paragraph 1 of Schedule 2A to the Gas Act 1986 (supply by landlords etc. ); b a supply of electricity by an electricity supplier within the meaning of Part I of the Electricity Act 1989; ba a supply of electricity by a class of person within Class A (small suppliers) or Class B (resale) of Schedule 4 to the Electricity (Class Exemptions from the Requirement for a Licence) Order 2001 ( S.I. 2001/3270 ); c a supply of water by a water undertaker , ca a supply of water by a water supply licensee within the meaning of the Water Industry Act 1991; cb a supply of water by a person who has an interest in the premises to which the supply is given; d a supply of communications services by a provider of a public electronic communications service. e a supply of communications services by a person who carries on a business which includes giving such supplies; f a supply of goods or services mentioned in subsection (4A) by a person who carries on a business which includes giving such supplies, where the supply is for the purpose of enabling or facilitating anything to be done by electronic means. 4A The goods and services referred to in subsection (4)(f) are— a point of sale terminals; b computer hardware and software; c information, advice and technical assistance in connection with the use of information technology; d data storage and processing; e website hosting. 5 The following applies to expressions used in subsection (4)— a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c “communications services” do not include electronic communications services to the extent that they are used to broadcast or otherwise transmit programme services (within the meaning of the Communications Act 2003). Further protection of essential supplies 372A 1 An insolvency-related term of a contract for the supply of essential goods or services to an individual ceases to have effect if— a a voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved under Part 8, and b the supply is for the purpose of a business which is or has been carried on by the individual, by a firm or partnership of which the individual is or was a member, or by an agent or manager for the individual or for such a firm or partnership. 2 An insolvency-related term of a contract does not cease to have effect by virtue of subsection (1) to the extent that— a it provides for the contract or the supply to terminate, or any other thing to take place, because the individual becomes subject to an insolvency procedure other than a voluntary arrangement; b it entitles a supplier to terminate the contract or the supply, or do any other thing, because the individual becomes subject to an insolvency procedure other than a voluntary arrangement; or c it entitles a supplier to terminate the contract or the supply because of an event that occurs, or may occur, after the voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved. 3 Where an insolvency-related term of a contract ceases to have effect under this section the supplier may— a terminate the contract, if the condition in subsection (4) is met; b terminate the supply, if the condition in subsection (5) is met. 4 The condition in this subsection is that— a the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement consents to the termination of the contract, b the court grants permission for the termination of the contract, or c any charges in respect of the supply that are incurred after the voluntary arrangement is approved are not paid within the period of 28 days beginning with the day on which payment is due. The court may grant permission under paragraph (b) only if satisfied that the continuation of the contract would cause the supplier hardship. 5 The condition in this subsection is that— a the supplier gives written notice to the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement that the supply will be terminated unless the supervisor personally guarantees the payment of any charges in respect of the continuation of the supply after the arrangement was approved, and b the supervisor does not give that guarantee within the period of 14 days beginning with the day the notice is received. 6 For the purposes of securing that the interests of suppliers are protected, where— a an insolvency-related term of a contract (the “original term”) ceases to have effect by virtue of subsection (1), and b a subsequent voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved, the contract is treated for the purposes of subsections (1) to (5) as if, immediately before the subsequent voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved, it included an insolvency-related term identical to the original term. 7 A contract for the supply of essential goods or services is a contract for a supply mentioned in section 372(4). 8 An insolvency-related term of a contract for the supply of essential goods or services to an individual is a provision of the contract under which— a the contract or the supply would terminate, or any other thing would take place, because the voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved, b the supplier would be entitled to terminate the contract or the supply, or to do any other thing, because the voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved, or c the supplier would be entitled to terminate the contract or the supply because of an event that occurred before the voluntary arrangement proposed by the individual is approved. 9 Subsection (1) does not have effect in relation to a contract entered into before 1st October 2015. Jurisdiction in relation to insolvent individuals. 373 1 The High Court and the county court have jurisdiction throughout England and Wales for the purposes of the Parts in this Group. 2 For the purposes of those Parts, the county court has, in addition to its ordinary jurisdiction, all the powers and jurisdiction of the High Court; and the orders of the court may be enforced accordingly in the prescribed manner. 3 Jurisdiction for the purposes of those Parts is exercised— a by the High Court or the county court in relation to the proceedings, which, in accordance with the rules, are allocated to the London insolvency district, and b by the county court in relation to the proceedings which are so allocated to any other insolvency district . 4 Subsection (3) is without prejudice to the transfer of proceedings from one court to another in the manner prescribed by the rules; and nothing in that subsection invalidates any proceedings on the grounds that they were initiated or continued in the wrong court. Insolvency districts. 374 1 The Lord Chancellor may , with the concurrence of the Lord Chief Justice, by order designate the areas which are for the time being to be comprised, for the purposes of the Parts in this Group, in the London insolvency district and the insolvency district , or districts, of the county court. 2 An order under this section may contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor and the Lord Chief Justice necessary or expedient. 3 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument and, after being made, shall be laid before each House of Parliament. 4 Subject to any order under this section— a the district which, immediately before the appointed day, is the London bankruptcy district becomes, on that day, the London insolvency district; b any district which immediately before that day is the bankruptcy district of a county court becomes, on that day, the insolvency district of that court, and c any county court which immediately before that day is excluded from having jurisdiction in bankruptcy is excluded, on and after that day, from having jurisdiction for the purposes of the Parts in this Group. 5 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Appeals etc. from courts exercising insolvency jurisdiction. 375 1 Every court having jurisdiction for the purposes of the Parts in this Group may review, rescind or vary any order made by it in the exercise of that jurisdiction. 2 An appeal from a decision made in the exercise of jurisdiction for the purposes of those Parts by the county court or by an insolvency and companies court judge lies to a single judge of the High Court; and an appeal from a decision of that judge on such an appeal lies . . . to the Court of Appeal. 3 The county court is not, in the exercise of its jurisdiction for the purposes of those Parts, to be subject to be restrained by the order of any other court, and no appeal lies from its decision in the exercise of that jurisdiction except as provided by this section. Time-limits. 376 Where by any provision in this Group of Parts or by the rules the time for doing anything (including anything in relation to a bankruptcy application) is limited, the court may extend the time, either before or after it has expired, on such terms, if any, as it thinks fit. Formal defects. 377 The acts of a person as the trustee of a bankrupt’s estate or as a special manager, and the acts of the creditors’ committee established for any bankruptcy, are valid notwithstanding any defect in the appointment, election or qualifications of the trustee or manager or, as the case may be, of any member of the committee. Exemption from stamp duty. 378 Stamp duty shall not be charged on— a any document, being a deed, conveyance, assignment, surrender, admission or other assurance relating solely to property which is comprised in a bankrupt’s estate and which, after the execution of that document, is or remains at law or in equity the property of the bankrupt or of the trustee of that estate, b any writ, order, certificate or other instrument relating solely to the property of a bankrupt or to any bankruptcy proceedings. Annual report. 379 As soon as practicable after the end of 1986 and each subsequent calendar year, the Secretary of State shall prepare and lay before each House of Parliament a report about the operation during that year of so much of this Act as is comprised in this Group of Parts .... Creditors' decisions Creditors' decisions: general 379ZA 1 This section applies where, for the purposes of this Group of Parts, a person (“P”) seeks a decision from an individual's creditors about any matter. 2 The decision may be made by any creditors' decision procedure P thinks fit, except that it may not be made by a creditors' meeting unless subsection (3) applies. 3 This subsection applies if at least the minimum number of creditors request in writing that the decision be made by a creditors' meeting. 4 If subsection (3) applies, P must summon a creditors' meeting. 5 Subsection (2) is subject to any provision of this Act, the rules or any other legislation, or any order of the court— a requiring a decision to be made, or prohibiting a decision from being made, by a particular creditors' decision procedure (other than a creditors' meeting); b permitting or requiring a decision to be made by a creditors' meeting. 6 Section 379ZB provides that in certain cases the deemed consent procedure may be used instead of a creditors' decision procedure. 7 For the purposes of subsection (3) the “minimum number” of creditors is any of the following— a 10% in value of the creditors; b 10% in number of the creditors; c 10 creditors. 8 The references in subsection (7) to creditors are to creditors of any class, even where a decision is sought only from creditors of a particular class. 9 In this section references to a meeting are to a meeting where the creditors are invited to be present together at the same place (whether or not it is possible to attend the meeting without being present at that place). 10 Except as provided by subsection (8), references in this section to creditors include creditors of a particular class. 11 In this Group of Parts “creditors' decision procedure” means a procedure prescribed or authorised under paragraph 11A of Schedule 9. Deemed consent procedure 379ZB 1 The deemed consent procedure may be used instead of a creditors' decision procedure where an individual's creditors are to make a decision about any matter, unless— a a decision about the matter is required by virtue of this Act, the rules or any other legislation to be made by a creditors' decision procedure, or b the court orders that a decision about the matter is to be made by a creditors' decision procedure. 2 If the rules provide for an individual's creditors to make a decision about the remuneration of any person, they must provide that the decision is to be made by a creditors' decision procedure. 3 The deemed consent procedure is that the relevant creditors (other than opted-out creditors) are given notice of— a the matter about which the creditors are to make a decision, b the decision the person giving the notice proposes should be made (the “proposed decision”), c the effect of subsections (4) and (5), and d the procedure for objecting to the proposed decision. 4 If less than the appropriate number of relevant creditors object to the proposed decision in accordance with the procedure set out in the notice, the creditors are to be treated as having made the proposed decision. 5 Otherwise— a the creditors are to be treated as not having made a decision about the matter in question, and b if a decision about that matter is again sought from the creditors, it must be sought using a creditors' decision procedure. 6 For the purposes of subsection (4) the “appropriate number” of relevant creditors is 10% in value of those creditors. 7 “ Relevant creditors ” means the creditors who, if the decision were to be made by a creditors' decision procedure, would be entitled to vote in the procedure. 8 In this section references to creditors include creditors of a particular class. 9 The rules may make further provision about the deemed consent procedure. Power to amend sections 379ZA and 379ZB 379ZC 1 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend section 379ZA so as to change the definition of the minimum number of creditors. 2 The Secretary of State may by regulations amend section 379ZB so as to change the definition of the appropriate number of relevant creditors. 3 Regulations under this section may define the minimum number or the appropriate number by reference to any one or more of— a a proportion in value, b a proportion in number, c an absolute number, and the definition may include alternative, cumulative or relative requirements. 4 Regulations under subsection (1) may define the minimum number of creditors by reference to all creditors, or by reference to creditors of a particular description. 5 Regulations under this section may make provision that will result in section 379ZA or 379ZB having different definitions for different cases, including for different kinds of decisions. 6 Regulations under this section may make transitional provision. 7 The power of the Secretary of State to make regulations under this section is exercisable by statutory instrument. 8 A statutory instrument containing regulations under this section may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before, and approved by a resolution of, each House of Parliament. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote attendance at meetings 379A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving of notices etc by office-holders Use of websites 379B 1 This section applies where— a a bankruptcy order is made against an individual or an interim receiver of an individual's property is appointed, or b a voluntary arrangement in relation to an individual is proposed or is approved under Part 8, and “ the office-holder ” means the official receiver, the trustee in bankruptcy, the interim receiver, the nominee or the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement, as the case may be. 2 Where any provision of this Act or the rules requires the office-holder to give, deliver, furnish or send a notice or other document or information to any person, that requirement is satisfied by making the notice, document or information available on a website— a in accordance with the rules, and b in such circumstances as may be prescribed. Creditors' ability to opt out of receiving certain notices 379C 1 Any provision of the rules which requires an office-holder to give a notice to creditors of an individual does not apply, in circumstances prescribed by the rules, in relation to opted-out creditors. 2 Subsection (1)— a does not apply in relation to a notice of a distribution or proposed distribution to creditors; b is subject to any order of the court requiring a notice to be given to all creditors (or all creditors of a particular category). 3 Except as provided by the rules, a creditor may participate and vote in a creditors' decision procedure or a deemed consent procedure even though, by virtue of being an opted-out creditor, the creditor does not receive notice of it. 4 In this section— “ give ” includes deliver, furnish or send; “ notice ” includes any document or information in any other form; “ office-holder ”, in relation to an individual, means— where a bankruptcy order is made against the individual, the official receiver or the trustee in bankruptcy; where an interim receiver of the individual's property is appointed, the interim receiver; the supervisor of a voluntary arrangement approved under Part 8 in relation to the individual. Part XI Interpretation for Second Group of Parts Introductory. 380 The next five sections have effect for the interpretation of the provisions of this Act which are comprised in this Group of Parts; and where a definition is provided for a particular expression, it applies except so far as the context otherwise requires. “Bankrupt” and associated terminology. 381 1 “ Bankrupt ” means an individual who has been made bankrupt and, in relation to a bankruptcy order, it means the individual made bankrupt by that order. 1A Bankruptcy application” means an application to an adjudicator for a bankruptcy order. 2 “ Bankruptcy order ” means an order making an individual bankrupt. 3 “ Bankruptcy petition ” means a petition to the court for a bankruptcy order. “Bankruptcy debt” , “liability” 382 1 “ Bankruptcy debt ”, in relation to a bankrupt, means (subject to the next subsection) any of the following— a any debt or liability to which he is subject at the commencement of the bankruptcy, b any debt or liability to which he may become subject after the commencement of the bankruptcy (including after his discharge from bankruptcy) by reason of any obligation incurred before the commencement of the bankruptcy, c any amount specified in pursuance of section 39(3)(c) of the Powers of Criminal Courts Act 1973 in any criminal bankruptcy order made against him before the commencement of the bankruptcy, and d any interest provable as mentioned in section 322(2) in Chapter IV of Part IX. 2 In determining for the purposes of any provision in this Group of Parts whether any liability in tort is a bankruptcy debt, the bankrupt is deemed to become subject to that liability by reason of an obligation incurred at the time when the cause of action accrued. 3 For the purposes of references in this Group of Parts to a debt or liability, it is immaterial whether the debt or liability is present or future, whether it is certain or contingent or whether its amount is fixed or liquidated, or is capable of being ascertained by fixed rules or as a matter of opinion; and references in this Group of Parts to owing a debt are to be read accordingly. 4 In this Group of Parts, except in so far as the context otherwise requires, “ liability ” means (subject to subsection (3) above) a liability to pay money or money’s worth, including any liability under an enactment, any liability for breach of trust, any liability in contract, tort or bailment and any liability arising out of an obligation to make restitution. 5 Liability under the Child Support Act 1991 to pay child support maintenance to any person is not a debt or liability for the purposes of Part 8. “Creditor”, “security”, etc. 383 1 “ Creditor ”— a in relation to a bankrupt, means a person to whom any of the bankruptcy debts is owed (being, in the case of an amount falling within paragraph (c) of the definition in section 382(1) or “bankruptcy debt”, the person in respect of whom that amount is specified in the criminal bankruptcy order in question), and b in relation to an individual to whom a bankruptcy application or bankruptcy petition relates, means a person who would be a creditor in the bankruptcy if a bankruptcy order were made on that application or petition. 2 Subject to the next two subsections and any provision of the rules requiring a creditor to give up his security for the purposes of proving a debt, a debt is secured for the purposes of this Group of Parts to the extent that the person to whom the debt is owed holds any security for the debt (whether a mortgage, charge, lien or other security) over any property of the person by whom the debt is owed. 3 Where a statement such as is mentioned in section 269(1)(a) in Chapter I of Part IX has been made by a secured creditor for the purposes of any bankruptcy petition and a bankruptcy order is subsequently made on that petition, the creditor is deemed for the purposes of the Parts in this Group to have given up the security specified in the statement. 4 In subsection (2) the reference to a security does not include a lien on books, papers or other records, except to the extent that they consist of documents which give a title to property and are held as such. “Opted-out creditor” 383A 1 For the purposes of this Group of Parts “ opted-out creditor ” in relation to an office-holder for an individual means a person who— a is a creditor of the individual, and b in accordance with the rules has elected (or is deemed to have elected) to be (and not to cease to be) an opted-out creditor in relation to the office-holder. 2 In this section, “ office-holder ”, in relation to an individual, means— a where a bankruptcy order is made against the individual, the official receiver or the trustee in bankruptcy; b where an interim receiver of the individual's property is appointed, the interim receiver; c the supervisor of a voluntary arrangement approved under Part 8 in relation to the individual. “Prescribed” and “the rules”. 384 1 Subject to the next subsection and sections 342C(7) and 342F(9) in Chapter V of Part IX , “ prescribed ” means prescribed by the rules; and “ the rules ” means rules made under section 412 in Part XV. 2 References in this Group of Parts to the amount prescribed for the purposes of any of the following provisions— section 251S(4); ... section 313A; section 346(3); section 354(1) and (2); section 358; section 360(1); section 361(2); . . . section 364(2)(d), paragraphs 6 to 8 of Schedule 4ZA, and references in those provisions to the prescribed amount are to be read in accordance with section 418 in Part XV and orders made under that section. Miscellaneous definitions. 385 1 The following definitions have effect— “ adjudicator ” means a person appointed by the Secretary of State under section 398A; “ the court ”, in relation to any matter, means the court to which, in accordance with section 373 in Part X and the rules, proceedings with respect to that matter are allocated or transferred; “ creditors' decision procedure ” has the meaning given by section 379ZA(11); “ creditor’s petition ” means a bankruptcy petition under section 264(1)(a); “ criminal bankruptcy order ” means an order under section 39(1) of the Powers of Criminal Courts Act 1973; “ debt ” is to be construed in accordance with section 382(3); “ the debtor ”— in relation to a debt relief order or an application for such an order, has the same meaning as in Part 7A, in relation to a proposal for the purposes of Part VIII, means the individual making or intending to make that proposal, and in relation to a bankruptcy application or a bankruptcy petition, means the individual to whom the application or petition relates; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “ debt relief order ” means an order made by the official receiver under Part 7A; “ deemed consent procedure ” means the deemed consent procedure provided for by section 379ZB; “ determination period ” has the meaning given in section 263K(4); “ dwelling house ” includes any building or part of a building which is occupied as a dwelling and any yard, garden, garage or outhouse belonging to the dwelling house and occupied with it; “ estate ”, in relation to a bankrupt is to be construed in accordance with section 283 in Chapter II of Part IX; “ family ”, in relation to a bankrupt, means the persons (if any) who are living with him and are dependent on him; “ insolvency administration order ” means an order for the administration in bankruptcy of the insolvent estate of a deceased debtor (being an individual at the date of his death); “ insolvency administration petition ” means a petition for an insolvency administration order; “ secured ” and related expressions are to be construed in accordance with section 383; “ the Rules ” means the Insolvency (England and Wales) Rules 2016 and “ the trustee ”, in relation to a bankruptcy and the bankrupt, means the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate. 2 References in this Group of Parts to a person’s affairs include his business, if any. The Third Group of Parts Miscellaneous Matters Bearing on Both Company and Individual Insolvency; General Interpretation; Final Provisions Part XII Preferential and non-preferential debts in Company and Individual Insolvency Categories of preferential debts. 386 1 A reference in this Act to the preferential debts of a company or an individual is to the debts listed in Schedule 6 to this Act (contributions to occupational pension schemes; remuneration, &c. of employees; levies on coal and steel production ; debts owed to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme ; deposits covered by Financial Services Compensation Scheme ; other deposits ; certain HMRC debts ) ; and references to preferential creditors are to be read accordingly. 1A A reference in this Act to the “ordinary preferential debts” of a company or an individual is to the preferential debts listed in any of paragraphs 8 to 15B of Schedule 6 to this Act. 1B A reference in this Act to the “secondary preferential debts” of a company or an individual is to the preferential debts listed in paragraph 15BA , 15BB or 15D of Schedule 6 to this Act. 2 In Schedule 6 “ the debtor ” means the company or the individual concerned. 3 Schedule 6 is to be read with Schedule 4 to the Pension Schemes Act 1993 (occupational pension scheme contributions). “The relevant date”. 387 1 This section explains references in Schedule 6 to the relevant date (being the date which determines the existence and amount of a preferential debt). 2 For the purposes of section 4 in Part I ( consideration of company voluntary arrangement), the relevant date in relation to a company which is not being wound up is— a if the company is in administration, the date on which it entered administration, and b if the company is not in administration, the date on which the voluntary arrangement takes effect. 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 In relation to a company which is being wound up, the following applies— a if the winding up is by the court, and the winding-up order was made immediately upon the discharge of an administration order, the relevant date is the date on which the company entered administration ; aa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b if the case does not fall within paragraph (a) ... and the company— i is being wound up by the court, and ii had not commenced to be wound up voluntarily before the date of the making of the winding-up order, the relevant date is the date of the appointment (or first appointment) of a provisional liquidator or, if no such appointment has been made, the date of the winding-up order; ba if the case does not fall within paragraph (a) ... or (b) and the company is being wound up following administration pursuant to paragraph 83 of Schedule B1, the relevant date is the date on which the company entered administration; c if the case does not fall within paragraph (a) ..., (b) or (ba) , the relevant date is the date of the passing of the resolution for the winding up of the company. 3A In relation to a company which is in administration (and to which no other provision of this section applies) the relevant date is the date on which the company enters administration. 4 In relation to a company in receivership (where section 40 or, as the case may be, section 59 applies), the relevant date is— a in England and Wales, the date of the appointment of the receiver by debenture-holders, and b in Scotland, the date of the appointment of the receiver under section 53(6) or (as the case may be) 54(5). 5 For the purposes of section 258 in Part VIII (individual voluntary arrangements), the relevant date is, in relation to a debtor who is not an undischarged bankrupt a where an interim order has been made under section 252 with respect to his proposal, the date of that order, and b in any other case, the date on which the voluntary arrangement takes effect. 6 In relation to a bankrupt, the following applies— a where at the time the bankruptcy order was made there was an interim receiver appointed under section 286, the relevant date is the date on which the interim receiver was first appointed after the making of the bankruptcy application or (as the case may be) the presentation of the bankruptcy petition; b otherwise, the relevant date is the date of the making of the bankruptcy order. Financial institutions and their non-preferential debts 387A 1 In this Act “relevant financial institution” means any of the following— a a credit institution, b an investment firm, c a financial holding company, d a mixed financial holding company, da an investment holding company, e a financial institution which is— i a subsidiary of an entity referred to in paragraphs (a) to (da), and ii covered by the supervision of that entity on a consolidated basis by the Financial Conduct Authority in accordance with Part 9C rules or by the Prudential Regulation Authority in accordance with Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms or CRR rules, or, f a mixed-activity holding company. 2 The definitions in Article 4 of Regulation (EU) No. 575/2013 apply for the purposes of subsection (1) , except for the definitions of “consolidated basis” and “consolidated situation” . 2A For the purposes of subsection (1)— “ on a consolidated basis ” means on the basis of the consolidated situation; “ consolidated situation ” means the situation that results from an entity being treated, for the purposes of Part 9C rules, Regulation (EU) 575/2013 or CRR rules (as appropriate), as if that entity and one or more other entities formed a single entity; “ CRR rules ” has the meaning given in section 144A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000; “ Part 9C rules ” has the meaning given in section 143F of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. 3 In this Act, in relation to a relevant financial institution— a “ordinary non-preferential debts” means non-preferential debts which are neither secondary non-preferential debts nor tertiary non-preferential debts; b “secondary non-preferential debts” means non-preferential debts issued under an instrument where— i the original contractual maturity of the instrument is of at least one year, ii the instrument is not a derivative and contains no embedded derivative, and iii the relevant contractual documentation and where applicable the prospectus related to the issue of the debts explain the priority of the debts under this Act, and c “tertiary non-preferential debts” means all subordinated debts, including (but not limited to) debts under Common Equity Tier 1 instruments, Additional Tier 1 instruments and Tier 2 instruments (all within the meaning of Part 1 of the Banking Act 2009). 4 In subsection (3)(b), “derivative” has the same meaning as in Article 2(5) of Regulation (EU) No 648/2012. 5 For the purposes of subsection (3)(b)(ii) an instrument does not contain an embedded derivative merely because— a it provides for a variable interest rate derived from a broadly used reference rate, or b it is not denominated in the domestic currency of the person issuing the debt (provided that the principal, repayment and interest are denominated in the same currency). Part XIII Insolvency Practitioners and their Qualification Restrictions on unqualified persons acting as liquidator, trustee in bankruptcy, etc. Meaning of “act as insolvency practitioner” 388 1 A person acts as an insolvency practitioner in relation to a company by acting— a as its liquidator, provisional liquidator, administrator , administrative receiver or monitor , or b where a voluntary arrangement in relation to the company is proposed or approved under Part I, as nominee or supervisor 2 A person acts as an insolvency practitioner in relation to an individual by acting— a as his trustee in bankruptcy or interim receiver of his property or as trustee (or interim trustee) in the sequestration of his estate; or b as trustee under a deed which is ..., in Scotland, a trust deed for his creditor; or c where a voluntary arrangement in relation to the individual is proposed or approved under Part VIII, as nominee or supervisor d in the case of a deceased individual to the administration of whose estate this section applies by virtue of an order under section 421 (application of provisions of this Act to insolvent estates of deceased persons), as administrator of that estate. 2A A person acts as an insolvency practitioner in relation to an insolvent partnership by acting— a as its liquidator, provisional liquidator or administrator, or b as trustee of the partnership under article 11 of the Insolvent Partnerships Order 1994, or c where a voluntary arrangement in relation to the insolvent partnership is proposed or approved under Part I of the Act, as nominee or supervisor. 2B In relation to a voluntary arrangement proposed under Part I or VIII , a person acts as nominee if he performs any of the functions conferred on nominees under the Part in question. 3 References in this section to an individual include, except in so far as the context otherwise requires, references . . . to any debtor within the meaning of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 . 4 In this section— “ administrative receiver ” has the meaning given by section 251 in Part VII; “ company ” means— a company registered under the Companies Act 2006 in England and Wales or Scotland, or a company that may be wound up under Part 5 of this Act (unregistered companies). “monitor” has the same meaning as in Part A1 (moratorium); “sequestration” means sequestration under the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 5 Nothing in this section applies to anything done by— a the official receiver; or b the Accountant in Bankruptcy (within the meaning of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 ). 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acting without qualification an offence. 389 1 A person who acts as an insolvency practitioner in relation to a company or an individual at a time when he is not qualified to do so is liable to imprisonment or a fine, or to both. 1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 This section does not apply to the official receiver or the Accountant in Bankruptcy (within the meaning of the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 ). . Authorisation of nominees and supervisors. 389A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Official receiver as nominee or supervisor 389B 1 The official receiver is authorised to act as nominee or supervisor in relation to a voluntary arrangement approved under Part VIII provided that the debtor is an undischarged bankrupt when the arrangement is proposed. 2 The Secretary of State may by order repeal the proviso in subsection (1). 3 An order under subsection (2)— a must be made by statutory instrument, and b shall be subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Persons not qualified to act as insolvency practitioners. 390 1 A person who is not an individual is not qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner. 2 A person is not qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner at any time unless at that time the person is appropriately authorised under section 390A. 3 A person is not qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to another person at any time unless— a there is in force at that time security or, in Scotland, caution for the proper performance of his functions, and b that security or caution meets the prescribed requirements with respect to his so acting in relation to that other person. 4 A person is not qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner at any time if at that time— a he has been made bankrupt under this Act or the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 or sequestration of his estate has been awarded and (in either case) he has not been discharged, aa a moratorium period under a debt relief order under this Act or the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 applies in relation of him, b he is subject to a disqualification order made or a disqualification undertaking accepted under the Company Directors Disqualification Act 1986 or the Company Directors Disqualification (Northern Ireland) Order 2002, c he is a patient within the meaning of . . . section 329(1) of the Mental Health (Care and Treatment)(Scotland) Act 2003 or has had a guardian appointed to him under the Adults with Incapacity (Scotland) Act 2000 (asp 4). , or d he lacks capacity (within the meaning of the Mental Capacity Act 2005) to act as an insolvency practitioner. 5 A person is not qualified to act as an insolvency practitioner while there is in force in respect of that person— a a bankruptcy restrictions order under this Act, the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 1985 or the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 or the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989, or b a debt relief restrictions order under this Act or that Order. Authorisation 390A 1 In this Part— “ partial authorisation ” means authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner— only in relation to companies, or only in relation to individuals; “ full authorisation ” means authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to companies, individuals and insolvent partnerships; “partially authorised” and “fully authorised” are to be construed accordingly. 2 A person is fully authorised under this section to act as an insolvency practitioner— a by virtue of being a member of a professional body recognised under section 391(1) and being permitted to act as an insolvency practitioner for all purposes by or under the rules of that body, or b by holding an authorisation granted by the Department of Enterprise, Trade and Investment in Northern Ireland under Article 352 of the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989. 3 A person is partially authorised under this section to act as an insolvency practitioner— a by virtue of being a member of a professional body recognised under section 391(1) and being permitted to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation only to companies or only to individuals by or under the rules of that body, or b by virtue of being a member of a professional body recognised under section 391(2) and being permitted to act as an insolvency practitioner by or under the rules of that body. Partial authorisation: acting in relation to partnerships 390B 1 A person who is partially authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to companies may nonetheless not accept an appointment to act in relation to a company if at the time of the appointment the person is aware that the company— a is or was a member of a partnership, and b has outstanding liabilities in relation to the partnership. 2 A person who is partially authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to individuals may nonetheless not accept an appointment to act in relation to an individual if at the time of the appointment the person is aware that the individual— a is or was a member of a partnership other than a Scottish partnership, and b has outstanding liabilities in relation to the partnership. 3 Subject to subsection (9), a person who is partially authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to companies may nonetheless not continue to act in relation to a company if the person becomes aware that the company— a is or was a member of a partnership, and b has outstanding liabilities in relation to the partnership, unless the person is granted permission to continue to act by the court. 4 Subject to subsection (9), a person who is partially authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to individuals may nonetheless not continue to act in relation to an individual if the person becomes aware that the individual— a is or was a member of a partnership other than a Scottish partnership, and b has outstanding liabilities in relation to the partnership, unless the person is granted permission to continue to act by the court. 5 The court may grant a person permission to continue to act for the purposes of subsection (3) or (4) if it is satisfied that the person is competent to do so. 6 A person who is partially authorised and becomes aware as mentioned in subsection (3) or (4) may alternatively apply to the court for an order (a “ replacement order ” ) appointing in his or her place a person who is fully authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner in relation to the company or (as the case may be) the individual. 7 A person may apply to the court for permission to continue to act or for a replacement order under— a where acting in relation to a company, this section or, if it applies, section 168(5B) (member of insolvent partnership: England and Wales); b where acting in relation to an individual, this section or, if it applies, section 303(2C) (member of insolvent partnership: England and Wales). 8 A person who acts as an insolvency practitioner in contravention of any of subsections (1) to (4) is guilty of an offence under section 389 (acting without qualification). 9 A person does not contravene subsection (3) or (4) by continuing to act as an insolvency practitioner during the permitted period if, within the period of 7 business days beginning with the day after the day on which the person becomes aware as mentioned in the subsection, the person— a applies to the court for permission to continue to act, or b applies to the court for a replacement order. 10 For the purposes of subsection (9)— “ business day ” means any day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, Christmas Day, Good Friday or a day which is a bank holiday in any part of Great Britain; “ permitted period ” means the period beginning with the day on which the person became aware as mentioned in subsection (3) or (4) and ending on the earlier of— the expiry of the period of 6 weeks beginning with the day on which the person applies to the court as mentioned in subsection (9)(a) or (b), and the day on which the court disposes of the application (by granting or refusing it); “ replacement order ” has the meaning given by subsection (6). Recognised professional bodies 391 1 The Secretary of State may by order, if satisfied that a body meets the requirements of subsection (4), declare the body to be a recognised professional body which is capable of providing its insolvency specialist members with full authorisation or partial authorisation. 2 The Secretary of State may by order, if satisfied that a body meets the requirements of subsection (4), declare the body to be a recognised professional body which is capable of providing its insolvency specialist members with partial authorisation only of the kind specified in the order (as to which, see section 390A(1)). 3 Section 391A makes provision about the making by a body of an application to the Secretary of State for an order under this section. 4 The requirements are that— a the body regulates (or is going to regulate) the practice of a profession, b the body has rules which it is going to maintain and enforce for securing that its insolvency specialist members— i are fit and proper persons to act as insolvency practitioners, and ii meet acceptable requirements as to education and practical training and experience, and c the body's rules and practices for or in connection with authorising persons to act as insolvency practitioners, and its rules and practices for or in connection with regulating persons acting as such, are designed to ensure that the regulatory objectives are met (as to which, see section 391C). 5 An order of the Secretary of State under this section has effect from such date as is specified in the order. 6 An order under this section may be revoked by an order under section 391L or 391N (and see section 415A(1)(b)). 7 In this Part— a references to members of a recognised professional body are to persons who, whether members of that body or not, are subject to its rules in the practice of the profession in question; b references to insolvency specialist members of a professional body are to members who are permitted by or under the rules of the body to act as insolvency practitioners. 8 A reference in this Part to a recognised professional body is to a body recognised under this section (and see sections 391L(6) and 391N(5)). Application for recognition as recognised professional body 391A 1 An application for an order under section 391(1) or (2) must— a be made to the Secretary of State in such form and manner as the Secretary of State may require, b be accompanied by such information as the Secretary of State may require, and c be supplemented by such additional information as the Secretary of State may require at any time between receiving the application and determining it. 2 The requirements which may be imposed under subsection (1) may differ as between different applications. 3 The Secretary of State may require information provided under this section to be in such form, and verified in such manner, as the Secretary of State may specify. 4 An application for an order under section 391(1) or (2) must be accompanied by— a a copy of the applicant's rules, b a copy of the applicant's policies and practices, and c a copy of any guidance issued by the applicant in writing. 5 The reference in subsection (4)(c) to guidance issued by the applicant is a reference to guidance or recommendations which are— a issued or made by it which will apply to its insolvency specialist members or to persons seeking to become such members, b relevant for the purposes of this Part, and c intended to have continuing effect, including guidance or recommendations relating to the admission or expulsion of members. 6 The Secretary of State may refuse an application for an order under section 391(1) or (2) if the Secretary of State considers that recognition of the body concerned is unnecessary having regard to the existence of one or more other bodies which have been or are likely to be recognised under section 391. 7 Subsection (8) applies where the Secretary of State refuses an application for an order under section 391(1) or (2); and it applies regardless of whether the application is refused on the ground mentioned in subsection (6), because the Secretary of State is not satisfied as mentioned in section 391(1) or (2) or because a fee has not been paid (see section 415A(1)(b)). 8 The Secretary of State must give the applicant a written notice of the Secretary of State's decision; and the notice must set out the reasons for refusing the application. Regulatory objectives Application of regulatory objectives 391B 1 In discharging regulatory functions, a recognised professional body must, so far as is reasonably practicable, act in a way— a which is compatible with the regulatory objectives, and b which the body considers most appropriate for the purpose of meeting those objectives. 2 In discharging functions under this Part, the Secretary of State must have regard to the regulatory objectives. Meaning of “regulatory functions” and “regulatory objectives” 391C 1 This section has effect for the purposes of this Part. 2 “ Regulatory functions ”, in relation to a recognised professional body, means any functions the body has— a under or in relation to its arrangements for or in connection with— i authorising persons to act as insolvency practitioners, or ii regulating persons acting as insolvency practitioners, or b in connection with the making or alteration of those arrangements. 3 “ Regulatory objectives ” means the objectives of— a having a system of regulating persons acting as insolvency practitioners that— i secures fair treatment for persons affected by their acts and omissions, ii reflects the regulatory principles, and iii ensures consistent outcomes, b encouraging an independent and competitive insolvency-practitioner profession whose members— i provide high quality services at a cost to the recipient which is fair and reasonable, ii act transparently and with integrity, and iii consider the interests of all creditors in any particular case, c promoting the maximisation of the value of returns to creditors and promptness in making those returns, and d protecting and promoting the public interest. 4 In subsection (3)(a), “ regulatory principles ” means— a the principles that regulatory activities should be transparent, accountable, proportionate, consistent and targeted only at cases in which action is needed, and b any other principle appearing to the body concerned (in the case of the duty under section 391B(1)), or to the Secretary of State (in the case of the duty under section 391B(2)), to lead to best regulatory practice. Oversight of recognised professional bodies Directions 391D 1 This section applies if the Secretary of State is satisfied that an act or omission of a recognised professional body (or a series of such acts or omissions) in discharging one or more of its regulatory functions has had, or is likely to have, an adverse impact on the achievement of one or more of the regulatory objectives. 2 The Secretary of State may, if in all the circumstances of the case satisfied that it is appropriate to do so, direct the body to take such steps as the Secretary of State considers will counter the adverse impact, mitigate its effect or prevent its occurrence or recurrence. 3 A direction under this section may require a recognised professional body— a to take only such steps as it has power to take under its regulatory arrangements; b to take steps with a view to the modification of any part of its regulatory arrangements. 4 A direction under this section may require a recognised professional body— a to take steps with a view to the institution of, or otherwise in respect of, specific regulatory proceedings; b to take steps in respect of all, or a specified class of, such proceedings. 5 For the purposes of this section, a direction to take steps includes a direction which requires a recognised professional body to refrain from taking a particular course of action. 6 In this section “ regulatory arrangements ”, in relation to a recognised professional body, means the arrangements that the body has for or in connection with— a authorising persons to act as insolvency practitioners, or b regulating persons acting as insolvency practitioners. Directions: procedure 391E 1 Before giving a recognised professional body a direction under section 391D, the Secretary of State must give the body a notice accompanied by a draft of the proposed direction. 2 The notice under subsection (1) must— a state that the Secretary of State proposes to give the body a direction in the form of the accompanying draft, b specify why the Secretary of State has reached the conclusions mentioned in section 391D(1) and (2), and c specify a period within which the body may make written representations with respect to the proposal. 3 The period specified under subsection (2)(c)— a must begin with the date on which the notice is given to the body, and b must not be less than 28 days. 4 On the expiry of that period, the Secretary of State must decide whether to give the body the proposed direction. 5 The Secretary of State must give notice of that decision to the body. 6 Where the Secretary of State decides to give the proposed direction, the notice under subsection (5) must— a contain the direction, b state the time at which the direction is to take effect, and c specify the Secretary of State's reasons for the decision to give the direction. 7 Where the Secretary of State decides to give the proposed direction, the Secretary of State must publish the notice under subsection (5); but this subsection does not apply to a direction to take any step with a view to the institution of, or otherwise in respect of, regulatory proceedings against an individual. 8 The Secretary of State may revoke a direction under section 391D; and, where doing so, the Secretary of State— a must give the body to which the direction was given notice of the revocation, and b must publish the notice and, if the notice under subsection (5) was published under subsection (7), must do so (if possible) in the same manner as that in which that notice was published. Financial penalty 391F 1 This section applies if the Secretary of State is satisfied— a that a recognised professional body has failed to comply with a requirement to which this section applies, and b that, in all the circumstances of the case, it is appropriate to impose a financial penalty on the body. 2 This section applies to a requirement imposed on the recognised professional body— a by a direction given under section 391D, or b by a provision of this Act or of subordinate legislation under this Act. 3 The Secretary of State may impose a financial penalty, in respect of the failure, of such amount as the Secretary of State considers appropriate. 4 In deciding what amount is appropriate, the Secretary of State— a must have regard to the nature of the requirement which has not been complied with, and b must not take into account the Secretary of State's costs in discharging functions under this Part. 5 A financial penalty under this section is payable to the Secretary of State; and sums received by the Secretary of State in respect of a financial penalty under this section (including by way of interest) are to be paid into the Consolidated Fund. 6 In sections 391G to 391I, “ penalty ” means a financial penalty under this section. Financial penalty: procedure 391G 1 Before imposing a penalty on a recognised professional body, the Secretary of State must give notice to the body— a stating that the Secretary of State proposes to impose a penalty and the amount of the proposed penalty, b specifying the requirement in question, c stating why the Secretary of State is satisfied as mentioned in section 391F(1), and d specifying a period within which the body may make written representations with respect to the proposal. 2 The period specified under subsection (1)(d)— a must begin with the date on which the notice is given to the body, and b must not be less than 28 days. 3 On the expiry of that period, the Secretary of State must decide— a whether to impose a penalty, and b whether the penalty should be the amount stated in the notice or a reduced amount. 4 The Secretary of State must give notice of the decision to the body. 5 Where the Secretary of State decides to impose a penalty, the notice under subsection (4) must— a state that the Secretary of State has imposed a penalty on the body and its amount, b specify the requirement in question and state— i why it appears to the Secretary of State that the requirement has not been complied with, or ii where, by that time, the requirement has been complied with, why it appeared to the Secretary of State when giving the notice under subsection (1) that the requirement had not been complied with, and c specify a time by which the penalty is required to be paid. 6 The time specified under subsection (5)(c) must be at least three months after the date on which the notice under subsection (4) is given to the body. 7 Where the Secretary of State decides to impose a penalty, the Secretary of State must publish the notice under subsection (4). 8 The Secretary of State may rescind or reduce a penalty imposed on a recognised professional body; and, where doing so, the Secretary of State— a must give the body notice that the penalty has been rescinded or reduced to the amount stated in the notice, and b must publish the notice; and it must (if possible) be published in the same manner as that in which the notice under subsection (4) was published. Appeal against financial penalty 391H 1 A recognised professional body on which a penalty is imposed may appeal to the court on one or more of the appeal grounds. 2 The appeal grounds are— a that the imposition of the penalty was not within the Secretary of State's power under section 391F; b that the requirement in respect of which the penalty was imposed had been complied with before the notice under section 391G(1) was given; c that the requirements of section 391G have not been complied with in relation to the imposition of the penalty and the interests of the body have been substantially prejudiced as a result; d that the amount of the penalty is unreasonable; e that it was unreasonable of the Secretary of State to require the penalty imposed to be paid by the time specified in the notice under section 391G(5)(c). 3 An appeal under this section must be made within the period of three months beginning with the day on which the notice under section 391G(4) in respect of the penalty is given to the body. 4 On an appeal under this section the court may— a quash the penalty, b substitute a penalty of such lesser amount as the court considers appropriate, or c in the case of the appeal ground in subsection (2)(e), substitute for the time imposed by the Secretary of State a different time. 5 Where the court substitutes a penalty of a lesser amount, it may require the payment of interest on the substituted penalty from such time, and at such rate, as it considers just and equitable. 6 Where the court substitutes a later time for the time specified in the notice under section 391G(5)(c), it may require the payment of interest on the penalty from the substituted time at such rate as it considers just and equitable. 7 Where the court dismisses the appeal, it may require the payment of interest on the penalty from the time specified in the notice under section 391G(5)(c) at such rate as it considers just and equitable. 8 In this section, “ the court ” means the High Court or, in Scotland, the Court of Session. Recovery of financial penalties 391I 1 If the whole or part of a penalty is not paid by the time by which it is required to be paid, the unpaid balance from time to time carries interest at the rate for the time being specified in section 17 of the Judgments Act 1838 (but this is subject to any requirement imposed by the court under section 391H(5), (6) or (7)). 2 If an appeal is made under section 391H in relation to a penalty, the penalty is not required to be paid until the appeal has been determined or withdrawn. 3 Subsection (4) applies where the whole or part of a penalty has not been paid by the time it is required to be paid and— a no appeal relating to the penalty has been made under section 391H during the period within which an appeal may be made under that section, or b an appeal has been made under that section and determined or withdrawn. 4 The Secretary of State may recover from the recognised professional body in question, as a debt due to the Secretary of State, any of the penalty and any interest which has not been paid. Reprimand 391J 1 This section applies if the Secretary of State is satisfied that an act or omission of a recognised professional body (or a series of such acts or omissions) in discharging one or more of its regulatory functions has had, or is likely to have, an adverse impact on the achievement of one or more of the regulatory objectives. 2 The Secretary of State may, if in all the circumstances of the case satisfied that it is appropriate to do so, publish a statement reprimanding the body for the act or omission (or series of acts or omissions). Reprimand: procedure 391K 1 If the Secretary of State proposes to publish a statement under section 391J in respect of a recognised professional body, it must give the body a notice— a stating that the Secretary of State proposes to publish such a statement and setting out the terms of the proposed statement, b specifying the acts or omissions to which the proposed statement relates, and c specifying a period within which the body may make written representations with respect to the proposal. 2 The period specified under subsection (1)(c)— a must begin with the date on which the notice is given to the body, and b must not be less than 28 days. 3 On the expiry of that period, the Secretary of State must decide whether to publish the statement. 4 The Secretary of State may vary the proposed statement; but before doing so, the Secretary of State must give the body notice— a setting out the proposed variation and the reasons for it, and b specifying a period within which the body may make written representations with respect to the proposed variation. 5 The period specified under subsection (4)(b)— a must begin with the date on which the notice is given to the body, and b must not be less than 28 days. 6 On the expiry of that period, the Secretary of State must decide whether to publish the statement as varied. Revocation etc of recognition Revocation of recognition at instigation of Secretary of State 391L 1 An order under section 391(1) or (2) in relation to a recognised professional body may be revoked by the Secretary of State by order if the Secretary of State is satisfied that— a an act or omission of the body (or a series of such acts or omissions) in discharging one or more of its regulatory functions has had, or is likely to have, an adverse impact on the achievement of one or more of the regulatory objectives, and b it is appropriate in all the circumstances of the case to revoke the body's recognition under section 391. 2 If the condition set out in subsection (3) is met, an order under section 391(1) in relation to a recognised professional body may be revoked by the Secretary of State by an order which also declares the body concerned to be a recognised professional body which is capable of providing its insolvency specialist members with partial authorisation only of the kind specified in the order (see section 390A(1)). 3 The condition is that the Secretary of State is satisfied— a as mentioned in subsection (1)(a), and b that it is appropriate in all the circumstances of the case for the body to be declared to be a recognised professional body which is capable of providing its insolvency specialist members with partial authorisation only of the kind specified in the order. 4 In this Part— a an order under subsection (1) is referred to as a “ revocation order ”; b an order under subsection (2) is referred to as a “ partial revocation order ”. 5 A revocation order or partial revocation order— a has effect from such date as is specified in the order, and b may make provision for members of the body in question to continue to be treated as fully or partially authorised (as the case may be) to act as insolvency practitioners for a specified period after the order takes effect. 6 A partial revocation order has effect as if it were an order made under section 391(2). Orders under section 391L: procedure 391M 1 Before making a revocation order or partial revocation order in relation to a recognised professional body, the Secretary of State must give notice to the body— a stating that the Secretary of State proposes to make the order and the terms of the proposed order, b specifying the Secretary of State's reasons for proposing to make the order, and c specifying a period within which the body, members of the body or other persons likely to be affected by the proposal may make written representations with respect to it. 2 Where the Secretary of State gives a notice under subsection (1), the Secretary of State must publish the notice on the same day. 3 The period specified under subsection (1)(c)— a must begin with the date on which the notice is given to the body, and b must not be less than 28 days. 4 On the expiry of that period, the Secretary of State must decide whether to make the revocation order or (as the case may be) partial revocation order in relation to the body. 5 The Secretary of State must give notice of the decision to the body. 6 Where the Secretary of State decides to make the order, the notice under subsection (5) must specify— a when the order is to take effect, and b the Secretary of State's reasons for making the order. 7 A notice under subsection (5) must be published; and it must (if possible) be published in the same manner as that in which the notice under subsection (1) was published. Revocation of recognition at request of body 391N 1 An order under section 391(1) or (2) in relation to a recognised professional body may be revoked by the Secretary of State by order if— a the body has requested that an order be made under this subsection, and b the Secretary of State is satisfied that it is appropriate in all the circumstances of the case to revoke the body's recognition under section 391. 2 An order under section 391(1) in relation to a recognised professional body may be revoked by the Secretary of State by an order which also declares the body concerned to be a recognised professional body which is capable of providing its insolvency specialist members with partial authorisation only of the kind specified in the order (see section 390A(1)) if— a the body has requested that an order be made under this subsection, and b the Secretary of State is satisfied that it is appropriate in all the circumstances of the case for the body to be declared to be a recognised professional body which is capable of providing its insolvency specialist members with partial authorisation only of the kind specified in the order. 3 Where the Secretary of State decides to make an order under this section the Secretary of State must publish a notice specifying— a when the order is to take effect, and b the Secretary of State's reasons for making the order. 4 An order under this section— a has effect from such date as is specified in the order, and b may make provision for members of the body in question to continue to be treated as fully or partially authorised (as the case may be) to act as insolvency practitioners for a specified period after the order takes effect. 5 An order under subsection (2) has effect as if it were an order made under section 391(2). Court sanction of insolvency practitioners in public interest cases Direct sanctions orders 391O 1 For the purposes of this Part a “direct sanctions order” is an order made by the court against a person who is acting as an insolvency practitioner which— a declares that the person is no longer authorised (whether fully or partially) to act as an insolvency practitioner; b declares that the person is no longer fully authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner but remains partially authorised to act as such either in relation to companies or individuals, as specified in the order; c declares that the person's authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner is suspended for the period specified in the order or until such time as the requirements so specified are complied with; d requires the person to comply with such other requirements as may be specified in the order while acting as an insolvency practitioner; e requires the person to make such contribution as may be specified in the order to one or more creditors of a company, individual or insolvent partnership in relation to which the person is acting or has acted as an insolvency practitioner. 2 Where the court makes a direct sanctions order, the relevant recognised professional body must take all necessary steps to give effect to the order. 3 A direct sanctions order must not be made against a person whose authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner was granted by the Department of Enterprise, Trade and Investment in Northern Ireland (see section 390A(2)(b)). 4 A direct sanctions order must not specify a contribution as mentioned in subsection (1)(e) which is more than the remuneration that the person has received or will receive in respect of acting as an insolvency practitioner in the case. 5 In this section and section 391P— “ the court ” means the High Court or, in Scotland, the Court of Session; “ relevant recognised professional body ”, in relation to a person who is acting as an insolvency practitioner, means the recognised professional body by virtue of which the person is authorised so to act. Application for, and power to make, direct sanctions order 391P 1 The Secretary of State may apply to the court for a direct sanctions order to be made against a person if it appears to the Secretary of State that it would be in the public interest for the order to be made. 2 The Secretary of State must send a copy of the application to the relevant recognised professional body. 3 The court may make a direct sanctions order against a person where, on an application under this section, the court is satisfied that condition 1 and at least one of conditions 2, 3, 4 and 5 are met in relation to the person. 4 The conditions are set out in section 391Q. 5 In deciding whether to make a direct sanctions order against a person the court must have regard to the extent to which— a the relevant recognised professional body has taken action against the person in respect of the failure mentioned in condition 1, and b that action is sufficient to address the failure. Direct sanctions order: conditions 391Q 1 Condition 1 is that the person, in acting as an insolvency practitioner or in connection with any appointment as such, has failed to comply with— a a requirement imposed by the rules of the relevant recognised professional body; b any standards, or code of ethics, for the insolvency-practitioner profession adopted from time to time by the relevant recognised professional body. 2 Condition 2 is that the person— a is not a fit and proper person to act as an insolvency practitioner; b is a fit and proper person to act as an insolvency practitioner only in relation to companies, but the person's authorisation is not so limited; or c is a fit and proper person to act as an insolvency practitioner only in relation to individuals, but the person's authorisation is not so limited. 3 Condition 3 is that it is appropriate for the person's authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner to be suspended for a period or until one or more requirements are complied with. 4 Condition 4 is that it is appropriate to impose other restrictions on the person acting as an insolvency practitioner. 5 Condition 5 is that loss has been suffered as a result of the failure mentioned in condition 1 by one or more creditors of a company, individual or insolvent partnership in relation to which the person is acting or has acted as an insolvency practitioner. 6 In this section “ relevant recognised professional body ” has the same meaning as in section 391O. Direct sanctions direction instead of order 391R 1 The Secretary of State may give a direction (a “direct sanctions direction”) in relation to a person acting as an insolvency practitioner to the relevant recognised professional body (instead of applying, or continuing with an application, for a direct sanctions order against the person) if the Secretary of State is satisfied that— a condition 1 and at least one of conditions 2, 3, 4 and 5 are met in relation to the person (see section 391Q), and b it is in the public interest for the direction to be given. 2 But the Secretary of State may not give a direct sanctions direction in relation to a person without that person's consent. 3 A direct sanctions direction may require the relevant recognised professional body to take all necessary steps to secure that— a the person is no longer authorised (whether fully or partially) to act as an insolvency practitioner; b the person is no longer fully authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner but remains partially authorised to act as such either in relation to companies or individuals, as specified in the direction; c the person's authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner is suspended for the period specified in the direction or until such time as the requirements so specified are complied with; d the person must comply with such other requirements as may be specified in the direction while acting as an insolvency practitioner; e the person makes such contribution as may be specified in the direction to one or more creditors of a company, individual or insolvent partnership in relation to which the person is acting or has acted as an insolvency practitioner. 4 A direct sanctions direction must not be given in relation to a person whose authorisation to act as an insolvency practitioner was granted by the Department of Enterprise, Trade and Investment in Northern Ireland (see section 390A(2)(b)). 5 A direct sanctions direction must not specify a contribution as mentioned in subsection (3)(e) which is more than the remuneration that the person has received or will receive in respect of acting as an insolvency practitioner in the case. 6 In this section “ relevant recognised professional body ” has the same meaning as in section 391O. General Power for Secretary of State to obtain information 391S 1 A person mentioned in subsection (2) must give the Secretary of State such information as the Secretary of State may by notice in writing require for the exercise of the Secretary of State's functions under this Part. 2 Those persons are— a a recognised professional body; b any individual who is or has been authorised under section 390A to act as an insolvency practitioner; c any person who is connected to such an individual. 3 A person is connected to an individual who is or has been authorised to act as an insolvency practitioner if, at any time during the authorisation— a the person was an employee of the individual; b the person acted on behalf of the individual in any other way; c the person employed the individual; d the person was a fellow employee of the individual's employer; e in a case where the individual was employed by a firm, partnership or company, the person was a member of the firm or partnership or (as the case may be) a director of the company. 4 In imposing a requirement under subsection (1) the Secretary of State may specify— a the time period within which the information in question is to be given, and b the manner in which it is to be verified. Compliance orders 391T 1 If at any time it appears to the Secretary of State that— a a recognised professional body has failed to comply with a requirement imposed on it by or by virtue of this Part, or b any other person has failed to comply with a requirement imposed on the person by virtue of section 391S, the Secretary of State may make an application to the court. 2 If, on an application under this section, the court decides that the body or other person has failed to comply with the requirement in question, it may order the body or person to take such steps as the court considers will secure that the requirement is complied with. 3 In this section, “ the court ” means the High Court or, in Scotland, the Court of Session. The requisite qualification, and the means of obtaining it Authorisation by competent authority. 392 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grant, refusal and withdrawal of authorisation. 393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notices. 394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right to make representations. 395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference to Tribunal. 396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action of Tribunal on reference. 397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refusal or withdrawal without reference to Tribunal. 398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part XIV Public Administration (England and Wales) Adjudicators Appointment etc of adjudicators and assistants 398A 1 The Secretary of State may appoint persons to the office of adjudicator. 2 A person appointed under subsection (1)— a is to be paid out of money provided by Parliament such salary as the Secretary of State may direct, b holds office on such other terms and conditions as the Secretary of State may direct, and c may be removed from office by a direction of the Secretary of State. 3 A person who is authorised to act as an official receiver may not be appointed under subsection (1). 4 The Secretary of State may appoint officers of the Secretary of State's department to assist adjudicators in the carrying out of their functions. Official receivers Appointment, etc. of official receivers. 399 1 For the purposes of this Act the official receiver, in relation to any bankruptcy , winding up , individual voluntary arrangement, debt relief order or application for such an order , is any person who by virtue of the following provisions of this section or section 401 below is authorised to act as the official receiver in relation to that bankruptcy , winding up , individual voluntary arrangement, debt relief order or application for such an order . 2 The Secretary of State may (subject to the approval of the Treasury as to numbers) appoint persons to the office of official receiver, and a person appointed to that office (whether under this section or section 70 of the Bankruptcy Act 1914)— a shall be paid out of money provided by Parliament such salary as the Secretary of State may with the concurrence of the Treasury direct, b shall hold office on such other terms and conditions as the Secretary of State may with the concurrence of the Treasury direct, and c may be removed from office by a direction of the Secretary of State. 3 Where a person holds the office of official receiver, the Secretary of State shall from time to time attach him either to the High Court or to the county court. 4 Subject to any directions under subsection (6) below, an official receiver attached to a particular court is the person authorised to act as the official receiver in relation to every bankruptcy , winding up , individual voluntary arrangement, debt relief order or application for such an order falling within the jurisdiction of that court. 5 The Secretary of State shall ensure that there is, at all times, at least one official receiver attached to the High Court and at least one attached to the county court ; but he may attach the same official receiver to both courts. 6 The Secretary of State may give directions with respect to the disposal of the business of official receivers, and such directions may, in particular— a authorise an official receiver attached to one court to act as the official receiver in relation to any case or description of cases falling within the jurisdiction of the other court; b provide, where there is more than one official receiver authorised to act as the official receiver in relation to cases falling within the jurisdiction of any court, for the distribution of their business between or among themselves. 7 A person who at the coming into force of section 222 of the Insolvency Act 1985 (replaced by this section) is an official receiver attached to a court shall continue in office after the coming into force of that section as an official receiver attached to that court under this section. Functions and status of official receivers. 400 1 In addition to any functions conferred on him by this Act, a person holding the office of official receiver shall carry out such other functions as may from time to time be conferred on him by the Secretary of State. 2 In the exercise of the functions of his office a person holding the office of official receiver shall act under the general directions of the Secretary of State and shall also be an officer of the court in relation to which he exercises those functions. 3 Any property vested in his official capacity in a person holding the office of official receiver shall, on his dying, ceasing to hold office or being otherwise succeeded in relation to the bankruptcy or winding up in question by another official receiver, vest in his successor without any conveyance, assignment or transfer. Deputy official receivers and staff. 401 1 The Secretary of State may, if he thinks it expedient to do so in order to facilitate the disposal of the business of the official receiver attached to any court, appoint an officer of his department to act as deputy to that official receiver. 2 Subject to any directions given by the Secretary of State under section 399 or 400, a person appointed to act as deputy to an official receiver has, on such conditions and for such period as may be specified in the terms of his appointment, the same status and functions as the official receiver to whom he is appointed deputy. Accordingly, references in this Act (except section 399(1) to (5)) to an official receiver include a person appointed to act as his deputy. 3 An appointment made under subsection (1) may be terminated at any time by the Secretary of State. 4 The Secretary of State may, subject to the approval of the Treasury as to numbers and remuneration and as to the other terms and conditions of the appointments, appoint officers of his department to assist official receivers in the carrying out of their functions. The Official Petitioner Official Petitioner. 402 1 There continues to be an officer known as the Official Petitioner for the purposes of discharging, in relation to cases in which a criminal bankruptcy order is made, the functions assigned to him by or under this Act; and the Director of Public Prosecutions continues, by virtue of his office, to be the Official Petitioner. 2 The functions of the Official Petitioner include the following— a to consider whether, in a case in which a criminal bankruptcy order is made, it is in the public interest that he should himself present a petition under section 264(1)(d) of this Act; b to present such a petition in any case where he determines that it is in the public interest for him to do so; c to make payments, in such cases as he may determine, towards expenses incurred by other persons in connection with proceedings in pursuance of such a petition; and d to exercise, so far as he considers it in the public interest to do so, any of the powers conferred on him by or under this Act. 3 Any functions of the Official Petitioner may be discharged on his behalf by any person acting with his authority. 4 Neither the Official Petitioner nor any person acting with his authority is liable to any action or proceeding in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in the discharge, or purported discharge, of the functions of the Official Petitioner. 5 In this section “ criminal bankruptcy order ” means an order under section 39(1) of the Powers of Criminal Courts Act 1973. Insolvency Service finance, accounting and investment Insolvency Services Account. 403 1 All money received by the Secretary of State in respect of proceedings under this Act as it applies to England and Wales shall be paid into the Insolvency Services Account kept by the Secretary of State with the Bank of England; and all payments out of money standing to the credit of the Secretary of State in that account shall be made by the Bank of England in such manner as he may direct. 2 Whenever the cash balance standing to the credit of the Insolvency Services Account is in excess of the amount which in the opinion of the Secretary of State is required for the time being to answer demands in respect of bankrupts’ estates or companies’ estates, the Secretary of State shall— a notify the excess to the National Debt Commissioners, and b pay into the Insolvency Services Investment Account (“the Investment Account”) kept by the Commissioners with the Bank of England the whole or any part of the excess as the Commissioners may require for investment in accordance with the following provisions of this Part. 3 Whenever any part of the money so invested is, in the opinion of the Secrtetary of State, required to answer any demand in respect of bankrupt’s estates or companies’ estates, he shall notify to the National Debt Commissioners the amount so required and the Commissioners— a shall thereupon repay to the Secretary of State such sum as may be required to the credit of the Insolvency Services Account, and b for that purpose may direct the sale of such part of the securities in which the money has been invested as may be necessary. Investment Account. 404 Any money standing to the credit of the Investment Account (including any money received by the National Debt Commissioners by way of interest on or proceeds of any investment under this section) may be invested by the Commissioners, in accordance with such directions as may be given by the Treasury, in any manner for the time being specified in Part II of Schedule 1 to the Trustee Investments Act 1961. Application of income in Investment Account; adjustment of balances. 405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interest on money received by liquidators or trustees in bankruptcy and invested. 406 Where under rules made by virtue of paragraph 16 of Schedule 8 to this Act(investment of money received by company liquidators) or paragraph 21 of Schedule 9 to this Act (investment of money received by trustee in bankruptcy) a company or a bankrupt’s estate has become entitled to any sum by way of interest, the Secretary of State shall certify that sum and the amount of tax payable on it to the National Debt Commissioners; and the Commissioners shall pay, out of the Investment Account— a into the Insolvency Services Account, the sum so certified less the amount of tax so certified, and b to the Commissioners of Inland Revenue, the amount of tax so certified. Unclaimed dividends and undistributed balances. 407 1 The Secretary of State shall from time to time pay into the Consolidated Fund out of the Insolvency Services Account so much of the sums standing to the credit of that Account as represents— a dividends which were declared before such date as the Treasury may from time to time determine and have not been claimed, and b balances ascertained before that date which are too small to be divided among the persons entitled to them. 2 For the purposes of this section the sums standing to the credit of the Insolvency Services Account are deemed to include any sums paid out of that Account and represented by any sums or securities standing to the credit of the Investment Account. 3 The Secretary of State may require the National Debt Commissioners to pay out of the Investment Account into the Insolvency Services Account the whole or part of any sum which he is required to pay out of that account under subsection (1); and the Commissioners may direct the sale of such securities standing to the credit of the Investment Account as may be necessary for that purpose. Adjustment of balances 408 1 The Treasury may direct the payment out of the Consolidated Fund of sums into— a the Insolvency Services Account; b the Investment Account. 2 The Treasury shall certify to the House of Commons the reason for any payment under subsection (1). 3 The Secretary of State may pay sums out of the Insolvency Services Account into the Consolidated Fund. 4 The National Debt Commissioners may pay sums out of the Investment Account into the Consolidated Fund. Annual financial statement and audit. 409 1 The National Debt Commissioners shall for each year ending on 31st March prepare a statement of the sums credited and debited to the Investment Account in such form and manner as the Treasury may direct and shall transmit it to the Comptroller and Auditor General before the end of November next following the year. 2 The Secretary of State shall for each year ending 31st March prepare a statement of the sums received or paid by him under section 403 above in such form and manner as the Treasury may direct and shall transmit each statement to the Comptroller and Auditor General before the end of November next following the year. 3 Every such statement shall include such additional information as the Treasury may direct. 4 The Comptroller and Auditor General shall examine, certify and report on every such statement and shall lay copies of it, and of his report, before Parliament. Supplementary Extent of this Part. 410 This part of this Act extends to England and Wales only. Part XV Subordinate Legislation General insolvency rules Company insolvency rules. 411 1 Rules may be made— a in relation to England and Wales, by the Lord Chancellor with the concurrence of the Secretary of State and, in the case of rules that affect court procedure, with the concurrence of the Lord Chief Justice , or b in relation to Scotland, by the Secretary of State, for the purpose of giving effect to Parts A1 to VII of this Act or the EU Regulation . 1A Rules may also be made for the purpose of giving effect to Part 2 of the Banking Act 2009 (bank insolvency orders); and rules for that purpose shall be made— a in relation to England and Wales, by the Lord Chancellor with the concurrence of— i the Treasury, and ii in the case of rules that affect court procedure, the Lord Chief Justice, or b in relation to Scotland, by the Treasury. 1B Rules may also be made for the purpose of giving effect to Part 3 of the Banking Act 2009 (bank administration); and rules for that purpose shall be made— a in relation to England and Wales, by the Lord Chancellor with the concurrence of— i the Treasury, and ii in the case of rules that affect court procedure, the Lord Chief Justice, or b in relation to Scotland, by the Treasury. 2 Without prejudice to the generality of subsection (1), (1A) or (1B) or to any provision of those Parts by virtue of which rules under this section may be made with respect to any matter, rules under this section may contain— a any such provision as is specified in Schedule 8 to this Act or corresponds to provision contained immediately before the coming into force of section 106 of the Insolvency Act 1985 in rules made, or having effect as if made, under section 663(1) or (2) of the the Companies Act 1985 (old winding-up rules), and b such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor or, as the case may be, the Secretary of State or the Treasury necessary or expedient. 2A For the purposes of subsection (2), a reference in Schedule 8 to this Act to doing anything under or for the purposes of a provision of this Act includes a reference to doing anything under or for the purposes of the EU Regulation (in so far as the provision of this Act relates to a matter to which the EU Regulation applies). 2B Rules under this section for the purpose of giving effect to the EU Regulation may not create a new relevant offence . 2C For the purposes of subsection (2), a reference in Schedule 8 to this Act to doing anything under or for the purposes of a provision of this Act includes a reference to doing anything under or for the purposes of Part 2 of the Banking Act 2009. 2D For the purposes of subsection (2), a reference in Schedule 8 to this Act to doing anything under or for the purposes of a provision of this Act includes a reference to doing anything under or for the purposes of Part 3 of the Banking Act 2009. 3 In Schedule 8 to this Act “ liquidator ” includes a provisional liquidator or bank liquidator or administrator ; and references above in this section to Parts A1 to VII of this Act or Part 2 or 3 of the Banking Act 2009 are to be read as including the Companies Acts so far as relating to, and to matters connected with or arising out of, the insolvency or winding up of companies. 3A In this section references to Part 2 or 3 of the Banking Act 2009 include references to those Parts as applied to building societies (see section 90C of the Building Societies Act 1986). 4 Rules under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. 5 Regulations made by the Secretary of State or the Treasury under a power conferred by rules under this section shall be made by statutory instrument and, after being made, shall be laid before each House of Parliament. 6 Nothing in this section prejudices any power to make rules of court. 7 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Individual insolvency rules (England and Wales). 412 1 The Lord Chancellor may, with the concurrence of the Secretary of State and, in the case of rules that affect court procedure, with the concurrence of the Lord Chief Justice , make rules for the purpose of giving effect to Parts 7A to 11 of this Act or the EU Regulation . 2 Without prejudice to the generality of subsection (1), or to any provision of those Parts by virtue of which rules under this section may be made with respect to any matter, rules under this section may contain— a any such provision as is specified in Schedule 9 to this Act or corresponds to provision contained immediately before the appointed day in rules made under section 132 of the Bankruptcy Act 1914; and b such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor necessary or expedient. 2A For the purposes of subsection (2), a reference in Schedule 9 to this Act to doing anything under or for the purposes of a provision of this Act includes a reference to doing anything under or for the purposes of the EU Regulation (in so far as the provision of this Act relates to a matter to which the EU Regulation applies). 2B Rules under this section for the purpose of giving effect to the EU Regulation may not create a new relevant offence . 3 Rules under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. 4 Regulations made by the Secretary of State under a power conferred by rules under this section shall be made by statutory instrument and, after being made, shall be laid before each House of Parliament. 5 Nothing in this section prejudices any power to make rules of court. 6 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Insolvency Rules Committee. 413 1 The committee established under section 10 of the Insolvency Act 1976 (advisory committee on bankruptcy and winding-up rules) continues to exist for the purpose of being consulted under this section. 2 The Lord Chancellor shall consult the committee before making any rules under section 411 or 412 other than rules which contain a statement that the only provision made by the rules is provision applying rules made under section 411, with or without modifications, for the purposes of provision made by section any of sections 23 to 26 of the Water Industry Act 1991 or Schedule 3 to that Act or by any of sections 59 to 65 of, or Schedule 6 or 7 to, the Railways Act 1993. . 3 Subject to the next subsection, the committee shall consist of— a a judge of the High Court attached to the Chancery Division; b a circuit judge; c an insolvency and companies court judge ; d a district judge; e a practising barrister; f a practising solictor; and g a practising accountant; and the appointment of any person as a member of the committee shall be made in accordance with subsection (3A) or (3B) . 3A The Lord Chief Justice must appoint the persons referred to in paragraphs (a) to (d) of subsection (3), after consulting the Lord Chancellor. 3B The Lord Chancellor must appoint the persons referred to in paragraphs (e) to (g) of subsection (3), after consulting the Lord Chief Justice. 4 The Lord Chancellor may appoint as additional members of the committee any persons appearing to him to have qualifications or experience that would be of value to the committee in considering any matter with which it is concerned. 5 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Fees orders Fees orders (company insolvency proceedings). 414 1 There shall be paid in respect of— a proceedings under any of Parts A1 to VII of this Act, and b the performance by the official receiver or the Secretary of State of functions under those Parts, such fees as the competent authority may with the sanction of the Treasury by order direct. 2 That authority is— a in relation to England and Wales, the Lord Chancellor, and b in relation to Scotland, the Secretary of State. 3 The Treasury may by order direct by whom and in what manner the fees are to be collected and accounted for. 4 The Lord Chancellor may, with the sanction of the Treasury, by order provide for sums to be deposited, by such persons, in such manner and in such circumstances as may be specified in the order, by way of security for fees payable by virtue of this section. 5 An order under this section may contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor, the Secretary of State or (as the case may be) the Treasury necessary or expedient. 6 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument and, after being made, shall be laid before each House of Parliament. 7 Fees payable by virtue of this section shall be paid into the Consolidated Fund. 8 References in subsection (1) to Parts A1 to VII of this Act are to be read as including the Companies Acts so far as relating to, and to matters connected with or arising out of, the insolvency or winding up of companies. 8A This section applies in relation to Part 2 of the Banking Act 2009 (bank insolvency) as in relation to Parts I to VII of this Act. 8B This section applies in relation to Part 3 of the Banking Act 2009 (bank administration) as in relation to Parts I to VII of this Act. 8C In subsections (8A) and (8B) the reference to Parts 2 and 3 of the Banking Act 2009 include references to those Parts as applied to building societies (see section 90C of the Building Societies Act 1986). 9 Nothing in this section prejudices any power to make rules of court; and the application of this section to Scotland is without prejudice to section 2 of the Courts of Law Fees (Scotland) Act 1895. Fees orders (individual insolvency proceedings in England and Wales). 415 1 There shall be paid in respect of— za the costs of persons acting as approved intermediaries under Part 7A, a proceedings under Parts 7A to 11 of this Act, ... b the performance by the official receiver or the Secretary of State of functions under those Parts, and c the performance by an adjudicator of functions under Part 9 of this Act, such fees as the Lord Chancellor may with the sanction of the Treasury by order direct. 1A An order under subsection (1) may make different provision for different purposes, including by reference to the manner or form in which proceedings are commenced. 2 The Treasury may by order direct by whom and in what manner the fees are to be collected and accounted for. 3 The Lord Chancellor may, with the sanction of the Treasury, by order provide for sums to be deposited, by such persons, in such manner and in such circumstances as may be specified in the order, by way of security for— a fees payable by virtue of this section, and b fees payable to any person who has prepared an insolvency practitioner’s report under section 274 in Chapter I of Part IX. 4 An order under this section may contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor or, as the case may be, the Treasury, necessary or expedient. 5 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument and, after being made, shall be laid before each House of Parliament. 6 Fees payable by virtue of this section shall be paid into the Consolidated Fund. 7 Nothing in this section prejudices any power to make rules of court. Fees orders (general) 415A A1 The Secretary of State— a may by order require a person or body to pay a fee in connection with the grant or maintenance of a designation of that person or body as a competent authority under section 251U, and b may refuse to grant, or may withdraw, any such designation where a fee is not paid. 1 The Secretary of State— a may by order require a body to pay a fee in connection with the grant or maintenance of recognition of the body under section 391, and b may refuse recognition, or revoke an order of recognition under section 391(1) or (2) by a further order, where a fee is not paid. 1A Fees under subsection (1) may vary according to whether the body is recognised under section 391(1) (body providing full and partial authorisation) or under section 391(2) (body providing partial authorisation). 1B In setting under subsection (1) the amount of a fee in connection with maintenance of recognition, the matters to which the Secretary of State may have regard include, in particular, the costs of the Secretary of State in connection with any functions under sections 391D, 391E, 391J, 391K and 391N. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Secretary of State may by order require the payment of fees in respect of— a the operation of the Insolvency Services Account; b payments into and out of that Account. 4 The following provisions of section 414 apply to fees under this section as they apply to fees under that section— a subsection (3) (manner of payment), b subsection (5) (additional provision), c subsection (6) (statutory instrument), d subsection (7) (payment into Consolidated Fund), and e subsection (9) (saving for rules of court). 5 Section 391M applies for the purposes of an order under subsection (1)(b) as it applies for the purposes of a revocation order made under section 391L. Specification, increase and reduction of money sums relevant in the operation of this Act Monetary limits (company moratorium) 415B 1 The Secretary of State may by regulations increase or reduce any of the money sums for the time being specified in the following provisions of Part A1— a section A25(1) (maximum amount of credit which company may obtain without disclosing moratorium); b section A28(2) (maximum amount for certain payments without obtaining monitor consent etc); c section A46(2) (minimum value of company property concealed or fraudulently removed, affecting criminal liability of company’s officer). 2 Regulations under this section may contain such transitional provisions as may appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 3 Regulations under this section are to be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Monetary limits (companies winding up). 416 1 The Secretary of State may by order in a statutory instrument increase or reduce any of the money sums for the time being specified in the following provisions in the first Group of Parts— section 117(2) (amount of company’s share capital determining whether county court has jurisdiction to wind it up); section 120(3) (the equivalent as respects sheriff court jurisdiction in Scotland); section 123(1)(a) (minimum debt for service of demand on company by unpaid creditor); section 184(3) (minimum value of judgment, affecting sheriff’s duties on levying execution); section 206(1)(a) and (b) (minimum value of company property concealed or fraudulently removed, affecting criminal liability of company’s officer). 2 An order under this section may contain such transitional provisions as may appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 3 No order under this section increasing or reducing any of the money sums for the time being specified in section 117(2), 120(3) or 123(1)(a) shall be made unless a draft of the order has been laid before and approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament. 4 A statutory instrument containing an order under this section, other than an order to which subsection (3) applies, is subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Money sum in s. 222. 417 The Secretary of State may by regulations in a statutory instrument increase or reduce the money sum for the time being specified in section 222(1) (minimum debt for service of demand on unregistered company by unpaid creditor); but such regulations shall not be made unless a draft of the statutory instrument containing them has been approved by resolution of each House of Parliament. Money sums (company moratorium). 417A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monetary limits (bankruptcy). 418 1 The Secretary of State may by order prescribe amounts for the purposes of the following provisions in the second Group of Parts— section 251S(4) (maximum amount of credit which a person in respect of whom a debt relief order is made may obtain without disclosure of his status); section 273 (minimum value of debtor’s estate determining whether immediate bankruptcy order should be made; small bankruptcies level); section 313A (value of property below which application for sale, possession or charge to be dismissed); section 346(3) (minimum amount of judgment, determining whether amount recovered on sale of debtor’s goods is to be treated as part of his estate in bankruptcy); section 354(1) and (2) (minimum amount of concealed debt, or value or property concealed or removed, determining criminal liability under the section); section 358 (minimum value of property taken by a bankrupt out of England and Wales, determining his criminal liability); section 360(1) (maximum amount of credit which bankrupt may obtain without disclosure of his status); section 361(2) (exemption of bankrupt from criminal liability for failure to keep proper accounts, if unsecured debts not more than the prescribed minimum); section 364(2)(d) (minimum value of goods removed by the bankrupt, determining his liability to arrest); paragraphs 6 to 8 of Schedule 4ZA (maximum amount of a person's debts, monthly surplus income and property for purposes of obtaining a debt relief order); and references in the second Group of Parts to the amount prescribed for the purposes of any of those provisions, and references in those provisions to the prescribed amount, are to be construed accordingly. 2 An order under this section may contain such transitional provisions as may appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 3 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Insolvency practice Regulations for purposes of Part XIII. 419 1 The Secretary of State may make regulations for the purpose of giving effect to Part XIII of this Act; and “prescribed” in that Part means prescribed by regulations made by the Secretary of State. 2 Without prejudice to the generality of subsection (1) or to any provision of that Part by virtue of which regulations may be made with respect to any matter, regulations under this section may contain— a provision as to the matters to be taken into account in determining whether a person is a fit and proper person to act as an insolvency practitioner; b provision prohibiting a person from so acting in prescribed cases, being cases in which a conflict of interest will or may arise; c provision imposing requirments with respect to— i the preparation and keeping by a person who acts as an insolvency practitioner of prescribed books, accounts and other records, and ii the production of those books, accounts and records to prescribed persons; d provision conferring power on prescribed persons— i to require any person who acts or has acted as an insolvency practitioner to answer any inquiry in relation to a case in which he is so acting or has so acted, and ii to apply to a court to examine such a person or any other person on oath concerning such a case; e provision making non-co(mpliance with any of the regulations a criminal offence; and f such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 3 Any power conferred by Part XIII of this Part to make regulations, rules or orders is exercisable by statutory instrument subject to annulment by resolution of either House of Parliament. 4 Any rule or regulation under Part XIII or this Part may make different provision with respect to different cases or descriptions of cases, including different provision for different areas. 5 In making regulations under this section, the Secretary of State must have regard to the regulatory objectives (as defined by section 391C(3)). Other order-making powers Insolvent partnerships. 420 1 The Lord Chancellor may, by order made with the concurrence of the Secretary of State and the Lord Chief Justice , provide that such provisions of this Act as may be specified in the order shall apply in relation to insolvent partnerships with such modifications as may be so specified. 1A An order under this section may make provision in relation to the EU Regulation . 1B But provision made by virtue of this section in relation to the EU Regulation may not create a new relevant offence . 2 An order under this section may make different provision for different cases and may contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor and the Lord Chief Justice necessary or expedient. 3 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. 4 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Insolvent estates of deceased persons. 421 1 The Lord Chancellor may, by order made with the concurrence of the Secretary of State and the Lord Chief Justice , provide that such provisions of this Act as may be specified in the order shall apply in relation to the administration of the insolvent estates of deceased persons with such modifications as may be so specified. 1A An order under this section may make provision in relation to the EU Regulation . 1B But provision made by virtue of this section in relation to the EU Regulation may not create a new relevant offence . 2 An order under this section may make different provision for different cases and may contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Lord Chancellor and the Lord Chief Justice necessary or expedient. 3 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. 4 For the purposes of this section the estate of a deceased person is insolvent if, when realised, it will be insufficient to meet in full all the debts and other liabilities to which it is subject. 5 The Lord Chief Justice may nominate a judicial office holder (as defined in section 109(4) of the Constitutional Reform Act 2005) to exercise his functions under this section. Insolvent estates: joint tenancies. 421A 1 This section applies where— a an insolvency administration order has been made in respect of the insolvent estate of a deceased person, b the petition for the order was presented after the commencement of this section and within the period of five years beginning with the day on which he died, and c immediately before his death he was beneficially entitled to an interest in any property as joint tenant. 2 For the purpose of securing that debts and other liabilities to which the estate is subject are met, the court may, on an application by the trustee appointed pursuant to the insolvency administration order, make an order under this section requiring the survivor to pay to the trustee an amount not exceeding the value lost to the estate. 3 In determining whether to make an order under this section, and the terms of such an order, the court must have regard to all the circumstances of the case, including the interests of the deceased’s creditors and of the survivor; but, unless the circumstances are exceptional, the court must assume that the interests of the deceased’s creditors outweigh all other considerations. 4 The order may be made on such terms and conditions as the court thinks fit. 5 Any sums required to be paid to the trustee in accordance with an order under this section shall be comprised in the estate. 6 The modifications of this Act which may be made by an order under section 421 include any modifications which are necessary or expedient in consequence of this section. 7 In this section, “ survivor ” means the person who, immediately before the death, was beneficially entitled as joint tenant with the deceased or, if the person who was so entitled dies after the making of the insolvency administration order, his personal representatives. 8 If there is more than one survivor— a an order under this section may be made against all or any of them, but b no survivor shall be required to pay more than so much of the value lost to the estate as is properly attributable to him. 9 In this section— “ insolvency administration order ” has the same meaning as in any order under section 421 having effect for the time being, “ value lost to the estate ” means the amount which, if paid to the trustee, would in the court’s opinion restore the position to what it would have been if the deceased had been made bankrupt immediately before his death. Formerly authorised banks . 422 1 The Secretary of State may by order made with the concurrence of the Treasury and after consultation with the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority provide that specified provisions in the first Group of Parts shall apply with specified modifications in relation to any person who— a has a liability in respect of a deposit which he accepted in accordance with the Banking Act 1979 (c. 37) or 1987 (c. 22), but b does not have permission under Part 4A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (c. 8) (regulated activities) to accept deposits. 1A Subsection (1)(b) shall be construed in accordance with— a section 22 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (classes of regulated activity and categories of investment), b any relevant order under that section, and c Schedule 2 to that Act (regulated activities). 1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 An order under this section may make different provision for different cases and may contain such incidental, supplemental and transitional provisions as may appear to the Secretary of State necessary or expedient. 3 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Meaning of “relevant offence” 422A In this Part “ relevant offence ” means a criminal offence punishable with imprisonment for more than two years or punishable on summary conviction with imprisonment for more than three months or with a fine of more than level 5 on the standard scale (if not calculated on a daily basis) or with a fine of more than £100 a day. Part XVI Provisions Against Debt Avoidance (England and Wales only) Transactions defrauding creditors. 423 1 This section relates to transactions entered into at an undervalue; and a person enters into such a transaction with another person if— a he makes a gift to the other person or he otherwise enters into a transaction with the other on terms that provide for him to receive no consideration; b he enters into a transaction with the other in consideration of marriage or the formation of a civil partnership ; or c he enters into a transaction with the other for a consideration the value of which, in money or money’s worth, is significantly less than the value, in money or money’s worth, of the consideration provided by himself. 2 Where a person has entered into such a transaction, the court may, if satisfied under the next subsection, make such order as it thinks fit for— a restoring the position to what it would have been if the transaction had not been entered into, and b protecting the interests of persons who are victims of the transaction. 3 In the case of a person entering into such a transaction, an order shall only be made if the court is satisfied that it was entered into by him for the purpose— a of putting assets beyond the reach of a person who is making, or may at some time make, a claim against him, or b of otherwise prejudicing the interests of such a person in relation to the claim which he is making or may make. 4 In this section “ the court ” means the High Court or— a if the person entering into the transaction is an individual, any other court which would have jurisdiction in relation to a bankruptcy petition relating to him; b if that person is a body capable of being wound up under Part IV or V of this Act, any other court having jurisdiction to wind it up. 5 In relation to a transaction at an undervalue, references here and below to a victim of the transaction are to a person who is, or is capable of being, prejudiced by it; and in the following two sections the person entering into the transaction is referred to as “ the debtor ”. Those who may apply for an order under s. 423. 424 1 An application for an order under section 423 shall not be made in relation to a transaction except— a in a case where the debtor has been made bankrupt or is a body corporate which is being wound up or is in administration , by the official receiver, by the trustee of the bankrupt’s estate or the liquidator or adminstrator of the body corporate or (with the leave of the court) by a victim of the transaction; b in a case where a victim of the transaction is bound by a voluntary arrangement approved under Part I or Part VIII of this Act, by the supervisor of the voluntary arrangement or by any person who (whether or not so bound) is such a victim; or c in any other case, by a victim of the transaction. 2 An application made under any of the paragraphs of subsection (1) is to be treated as made on behalf of every victim of the transaction. Provision which may be made by order under s. 423. 425 1 Without prejudice to the generality of section 423, an order made under that section with respect to a transaction may (subject as follows)— a require any property transferred as part of the transaction to be vested in any person, either absolutely or for the benefit of all the persons on whose behalf the application for the order is treated as made; b require any property to be so vested if it represents, in any person’s hands, the application either of the proceeds of sale of property so transferred or of the money so transferred; c release or discharge (in whole or in part) any security given by the debtor; d require any person to pay to any other person in respect of benefits received from the debtor such sums as the court may direct; e provide for any surety or guarantor whose obligations to any person were released or discharged (in whole or in part) under the transaction to be under such new or revived obligations as the court thinks appropriate; f provide for security to be provided for the discharge of any obligation imposed by or arising under the order, for such an obligation to be charged on any property and for such security or charge to have the same priority as a security or charge released or discharged (in whole or in part) under the transaction. 2 An order under section 423 may affect the property of, or impose any obligation on, any person whether or not he is the person with whom the debtor entered into the transaction; but such an order— a shall not prejudice any interest in property which was acquired from a person other than the debtor and was acquired in good faith, for value and without notice of the relevant circumstances, or prejudice any interest deriving from such an interest, and b shall not require a person who received a benefit from the transaction in good faith, for value and without notice of the relevant circumstances to pay any sum unless he was a party to the transaction. 3 For the purposes of this section the relevant circumstances in relation to a transaction are the circumstances by virtue of which an order under section 423 may be made in respect of the transaction. 4 In this section “ security ” means any mortgage, charge, lien or other security. Part XVII Miscellaneous and General Co-operation between courts exercising jurisdiction in relation to insolvency. 426 1 An order made by a court in any part of the United Kingdom in the exercise of jurisdiction in relation to insolvency law shall be enforced in any other part of the United Kingdom as if it were made by a court exercising the corresponding jurisdiction in that other part. 2 However, without prejudice to the following provisions of this section, nothing in subsection (1) requires a court in any part of the United Kingdom to enforce, in relation to property situated in that part, any order made by a court in any other part of the United Kingdom. 3 The Secretary of State, with the concurrence in relation to property situated in England and Wales of the Lord Chancellor, may by order make provision for securing that a trustee or assignee under the insolvency law of any part of the United Kingdom has, with such modifications as may be specified in the order, the same rights in relation to any property situated in another part of the United Kingdom as he would have in the corresponding circumstances if he were a trustee or assignee under the insolvency law of that other part. 4 The courts having jurisdiction in relation to insolvency law in any part of the United Kingdom shall assist the courts having the corresponding jurisdiction in any other part of the United Kingdom or any relevant country or territory. 5 For the purposes of subsection (4) a request made to a court in any part of the United Kingdom by a court in any other part of the United Kingdom or in a relevant country or territory is authority for the court to which the request is made to apply, in relation to any matters specified in the request, the insolvency law which is applicable by either court in relation to comparable matters falling within its jurisdiction. In exercising its descretion under this subsection, a court shall have regard in particular to the rules of private international law. 6 Where a person who is a trustee or assignee under the insolvency law of any part of the United Kingdom claims property situated in any other part of the United Kingdom (whether by virtue of an order under subsection (3) or otherwise), the submission of that claim to the court exercising jurisdiction in relation to insolvency law in that other part shall be treated in the same manner as a request made by a court for the purpose of subsection (4). 7 Section 38 of the Criminal Law Act 1977 (execution of warrant of arrest throughout the United Kingdom) applies to a warrant which, in exercise of any jurisdiction in relation to insolvency law, is issued in any part of the United Kingdom for the arrest of a person as it applies to a warrant issued in that part of the United Kingdom for the arrest of a person charged with an offence. 8 Without prejudice to any power to make rules of court, any power to make provision by subordinate legislation for the purpose of giving effect in relation to companies or individuals to the insolvency law of any part of the United Kingdom includes power to make provision for the purpose of giving effect in that part to any provision made by or under the preceding provisions of this section. 9 An order under subsection (3) shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. 10 In this section “ insolvency law ” means— a in relation to England and Wales, provision extending to England and Wales and made by or under this Act or sections 1A 6 to 10, 12 to 15 , 19(c) and 20 (with Schedule 1) of the Company Directors Disqualification Act 1986 and sections 1 to 17 of that Act as they apply for the purposes of those provisions of that Act ; b in relation to Scotland, provision extending to Scotland and made by or under this Act, sections 1A 6 to 10, 12 to 15 , 19(c) and 20 (with Schedule 1) of the Company Directors Disqualification Act 1986 and sections 1 to 17 of that Act as they apply for the purposes of those provisions of that Act , Part XVIII of the Companies Act or the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 ; c in relation to Northern Ireland, provision made by or under the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 or the Company Directors Disqualification (Northern Ireland) Order 2002 ; d in relation to any relevant country or territory, so much of the law of that country or territory as corresponds to provisions falling within any of the foregoing paragraphs; and references in this subsection to any enactment include, in relation to any time before the coming into force of that enactment the corresponding enactment in force at that time. 11 In this section “ relevant country or territory ” means— a any of the Channel Islands or the Isle of Man, or b any country or territory designated for the purposes of this section by the Secretary of State by order made by statutory instrument. 12 In the application of this section to Northern Ireland— a for any reference to the Secretary of State there is substituted a reference to the Department of Economic Development in Northern Ireland; b in subsection (3) for the words “another part of the United Kingdom” and the words “that other part” there is substituted the words “Northern Ireland”; c for subsection (9) there is substituted the following subsection— 9 An order made under subsection (3) by the Department of Economic Development in Northern Ireland shall be a statutory rule for the purposes of the Statutory Rules (Northern Ireland) Order 1979 and shall be subject to negative resolution within the meaning of section 41(6) of the Interpretation Act (Northern Ireland) 1954. . 13 Section 129 of the Banking Act 2009 provides for provisions of that Act about bank insolvency to be “ insolvency law ” for the purposes of this section. 14 Section 165 of the Banking Act 2009 provides for provisions of that Act about bank administration to be “ insolvency law ” for the purposes of this section. Disqualification from Parliament (England and Wales and Northern Ireland) 426A 1 A person in respect of whom a bankruptcy restrictions order or a debt relief restrictions order has effect shall be disqualified— a from membership of the House of Commons, b from sitting or voting in the House of Lords, and c from sitting or voting in a committee of the House of Lords or a joint committee of both Houses. 2 If a member of the House of Commons becomes disqualified under this section, his seat shall be vacated. 3 If a person who is disqualified under this section is returned as a member of the House of Commons, his return shall be void. 4 No writ of summons shall be issued to a member of the House of Lords who is disqualified under this section. 5 If a court makes a bankruptcy restrictions order or interim order , or a debt relief restrictions order or an interim debt relief restrictions order, in respect of a member of the House of Commons or the House of Lords the court shall notify the Speaker of that House. 6 If the Secretary of State accepts a bankruptcy restrictions undertaking or a debt relief restrictions undertaking made by a member of the House of Commons or the House of Lords, the Secretary of State shall notify the Speaker of that House. 7 If the Department of Enterprise, Trade and Investment for Northern Ireland accepts a bankruptcy restrictions undertaking made by a member of the House of Commons or the House of Lords under Schedule 2A to the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989, the Department shall notify the Speaker of that House. 8 In this section a reference to a bankruptcy restrictions order or an interim order includes a reference to a bankruptcy restrictions order or an interim order made under Schedule 2A to the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989. Devolution 426B 1 If a court in England and Wales makes a bankruptcy restrictions order or interim order in respect of a member of the Scottish Parliament, the Northern Ireland Assembly or the National Assembly for Wales, or makes a debt relief restrictions order or interim debt relief restrictions order in respect of such a member, the court shall notify the presiding officer of that body. 1A If the High Court in Northern Ireland makes a bankruptcy restrictions order or interim order under Schedule 2A to the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 in respect of a member of the Scottish Parliament or the National Assembly for Wales, the Court shall notify the presiding officer of that body. 2 If the Secretary of State accepts a bankruptcy restrictions undertaking or a debt relief restrictions undertaking made by a member of the Scottish Parliament, the Northern Ireland Assembly or the National Assembly for Wales, the Secretary of State shall notify the presiding officer of that body. 3 If the Department of Enterprise, Trade and Investment for Northern Ireland accepts a bankruptcy restrictions undertaking made by a member of the Scottish Parliament or the National Assembly for Wales under Schedule 2A to the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989, the Department shall notify the presiding officer of that body. Irrelevance of privilege 426C 1 An enactment about insolvency applies in relation to a member of the House of Commons or the House of Lords irrespective of any Parliamentary privilege. 2 In this section “ enactment ” includes a provision made by or under— a an Act of the Scottish Parliament, or b Northern Ireland legislation. Disqualification from Parliament (Scotland ...) 427 1 Where ... a court in Scotland awards sequestrian of an individual’s estate, the individual is disqualified— a for sitting or voting in the House of Lords, b for being elected to, or sitting or voting in, the House of Commons, and c for sitting or voting in a committee of either House. 2 Where an individual is disqualified under this section, the disqualification ceases— a except where the award is recalled or reduced without the individual having been first discharged, on the discharge of the individual, and b in the excepted case, on the ... recall or reduction, as the case may be. 3 No writ of summons shall be issued to any lord of Parliament who is for the time being disqualified under this section for sitting and voting in the House of Lords. 4 Where a member of the House of Commons who is disqualified under this section continues to be so disqualified until the end of the period of 6 months beginning with the day of the ... award, his seat shall be vacated at the end of that period. 5 A court which makes an ... award such as is mentioned is subsection (1) in relation to any lord of Parliament or member of the House of Commons shall forthwith certify the ... award to the Speaker of the House of Lords or, as the case may be, to the Speaker of the House of Commons. 6 Where a court has certified an ... award to the Speaker of the House of Commons under subsection (5), then immediately after it becomes apparent which of the following certificates is applicable, the court shall certify to the Speaker of the House of Commons— a that the period of 6 months beginning with the day of the ... award has expired without the ... award having been ..., recalled or reduced, or b that the ... award has been ..., recalled or reduced before the end of that period. 6A Subsections (4) to (6) have effect in relation to a member of the Scottish Parliament but as if— a references to the House of Commons were to the Parliament and references to the Speaker were to the Presiding Officer, and b in subsection (4), for “under this section” there were substituted “under section 15(1)(b) of the Scotland Act 1998 by virtue of this section” . 6B Subsections (4) to (6) have effect in relation to a member of the National Assembly for Wales but as if— a references to the House of Commons were to the Assembly and references to the Speaker were to the presiding officer, and b in subsection (4), for “under this section” there were substituted “under section 16(A1)(a) of the Government of Wales Act 2006 and paragraph 4 of Schedule 1A to that Act ” . 6C Subsections (4) to (6) have effect in relation to a member of the Northern Ireland Assembly but as if— a references to the House of Commons were to the Assembly and references to the Speaker were to the Presiding Officer; and b in subsection (4), for “under this section” there were substituted “ under section 36(4) of the Northern Ireland Act 1998 by virtue of this section ” . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exemptions from Restrictive Trade Practices Act. 428 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 In this section “ insolvency services ” means the services of persons acting as insolvency practitioners or carrying out under the law of Northern Ireland functions corresponding to those mentioned in section 388(1) or (2) in Part XIII, in their capacity as such . . .. Disabilities on revocation of administration order against an individual. 429 1 The following applies where a person fails to make any payment which he is required to make by virtue of an administration order under Part VI of the County Courts Act 1984. 2 The court which is administering that person’s estate under the order may, if it thinks fit— a revoke the administration order, and b make an order directing that this section and section 12 of the Company Directors Disqualification Act 1986 shall apply to the person for such period, not exceeding one year , as may be specified in the order. 3 A person to whom this section so applies shall not— a either alone or jointly with another person, obtain credit to the extent of the amount prescribed for the purposes of section 360(1)(a) or more, or b enter into any transaction in the course of or for the purposes of any business in which he is directly or indirectly engaged, without disclosing to the person from whom he obtains the credit, or (as the case may be) with whom the transaction is entered into, the fact that this section applies to him. 4 The reference in subsection (3) to a person obtaining credit includes— a a case where goods are bailed or hired to him under a hire-purchase agreement or agreed to be sold to him under a conditional sale agreement, and b a case where he is paid in advance (whether in money or otherwise) for the supply of goods or services. 5 A person who contravenes this section is guilty of an offence and liable to imprisonment or a fine, or both. Provision introducing Schedule of punishments. 430 1 Schedule 10 to this Act has effect with respect to the way in which offences under this Act are punishable on conviction. 2 In relation to an offence under a provision of this Act specified in the first column of the Schedule (the general nature of the offence being described in the second column), the third column shows whether the offence is punishable on conviction on indictment, or on summary conviction, or either in the one way or the other. 3 The fourth column of the Schedule shows, in relation to an offence, the maximum punishment by way of fine or imprisonment under this Act which may be imposed on a person convicted of the offence in the way specified in relation to it in the third column (that is to say, on indictment or summarily) a reference to a period of years or months being to a term of imprisonment of that duration. 4 The fifth column shows (in relation to an offence for which there is an entry in that column) that a person convicted of the offence after continued contravention is liable to a daily default fine; that is to say, he is liable on a second or subsquent conviction of the offence to the fine specified in that column for each day on which the contravention is continued (instead of the penalty specified for the offence in the fourth column of the Scheudule). 4A In relation to an offence committed before 2 May 2022 , a reference in Schedule 10 to 12 months on summary conviction in England and Wales is to be read as a reference to 6 months. 5 For the purpose of any enactment in this Act whereby an officer of a company who is in default is liable to a fine or penalty, the expression “ officer who is in default ” means any officer of the company who knowingly and wilfully authorises or permits the default, refusal or contravention mentioned in the enactment. Summary proceedings. 431 1 Summary proceedings for any offence under any of Parts A1 to VII of this Act may (without prejudice to any jurisdiction exercisable apart from this subsection) be taken against a body corporate at any place at which the body has a place of business, and against any other person at any place at which he is for the time being. 2 Notwithstanding anything in section 127(1) of the Magistrates’ Courts Act 1980, an information relating to such an offence which is triable by a magistrates’ court in England and Wales may be so tried if it is laid at any time within 3 years after the commission of the offence and within 12 months after the date on which evidence sufficient in the opinion of the Director of Public Prosecutions or the Secretary of State (as the case may be) to justify the proceedings comes to his knowledge. 3 Summary proceedings in Scotland for such an offence shall not be commenced after the expiration of 3 years from the commission of the offence. Subject to this (and notwithstanding anything in section 136 of the Criminal Procdure (Scotland) Act 1995) , such proceedings may (in Scotland) be commenced at any time within 12 months after the date on which evidence sufficient in the Lord Advocate’s opinion to justify the proceedings came to his knowledge or, where such evidence was reported to him by the Secretary of State, within 12 months after the date on which it came to the knowledge of the latter; and subsection (3) of that section applies for the purpose of this subsection as it applies for the purpose of that section. 4 For purposes of this section, a certificate of the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Lord Advocate or the Secretary of State (as the case may be) as to the date on which such evidence as is referred to above came to his knowledge is conclusive evidence. Offences by bodies corporate. 432 1 This section applies to offences under this Act other than those excepted by subsection (4). 2 Where a body corporate is guilty of an offence to which this section applies and the offence is proved to have been committed with the consent or connivance of, or to be attributable to any neglect on the part of, any director, manager, secretary or other similar officer of the body corporate or any person who was purporting to act in any such capacity he, as well as the body corporate, is guilty of the offence and liable to be proceeded against and punished accordingly. 3 Where the affairs of a body corporate are managed by its members, subsection (2) applies in relation to the acts and defaults of a member in connection with his functions of management as if he were a director of the body corporate. 4 The offences excepted from this section are those under sections A19(5), A25(3), A26(4), A27(1), A28(5), A29(6), A30(2), A31(10), A32(4), 30, 39, 51, 53, 54, 62, 64, 66, 85, 89, 164, 188, 201, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210 and 211 .... Admissibility in evidence of statements of affairs, etc. 433 1 In any proceedings (whether or not under this Act)— a a statement of affairs prepared for the purposes of any provision of this Act which is derived from the Insolvency Act 1985, aa a statement made in pursuance of a requirement imposed by or under Part 2 of the Banking Act 2009 (bank insolvency), ab a statement made in pursuance of a requirement imposed by or under Part 3 of that Act (bank administration), and b any other statement made in pursuance of a requirement imposed by or under any such provision or by or under rules made under this Act, may be used in evidence against any person making or concurring in making the statement. 2 However, in criminal proceedings in which any such person is charged with an offence to which this subsection applies— a no evidence relating to the statement may be adduced, and b no question relating to it may be asked, by or on behalf of the prosecution, unless evidence relating to it is adduced, or a question relating to it is asked, in the proceedings by or on behalf of that person. 3 Subsection (2) applies to any offence other than— a an offence under section 22(6), 47(6), 48(8), 66(6), 67(8), 95(8), ... 99(3) , 131(7), 192(2), 208(1)(a) or (d) or (2), 210, 235(5), 353(1), 354(1)(b) or (3) or 356(1) or (2)(a) or (b) or paragraph 4(3)(a) of Schedule 7; b an offence which is— i created by rules made under this Act, and ii designated for the purposes of this subsection by such rules or by regulations made by the Secretary of State; c an offence which is— i created by regulations made under any such rules, and ii designated for the purposes of this subsection by such regulations; d an offence under section 1, 2 or 5 of the Perjury Act 1911 (false statements made on oath or made otherwise than on oath); or e an offence under section 44(1) or (2) of the Criminal Law (Consolidation) (Scotland) Act 1995 (false statements made on oath or otherwise than on oath). 4 Regulations under subsection (3)(b)(ii) shall be made by statutory instrument and, after being made, shall be laid before each House of Parliament. Crown application. 434 For the avoidance of doubt it is hereby declared that provisions of this Act which derive from the Insolvency Act 1985 and Part A1 and sections 233A and 233B and Schedule 4ZZA bind the Crown so far as affecting or relating to the following matters, namely— a remedies against, or against the property of, companies or individuals; b priorities of debts; c transactions at an undervalue or preferences; d voluntary arrangements approved under Part I or Part VIII, and e discharge from bankruptcy. PART 17A SUPPLEMENTARY PROVISIONS Introductory 434A The provisions of this Part have effect for the purposes of— a the First Group of Parts, and b sections 411, 413, 414, 416 and 417 in Part 15. Representation of corporations in decision procedures and at meetings 434B 1 If a corporation is a creditor or debenture-holder, it may by resolution of its directors or other governing body authorise a person or persons to act as its representative or representatives— a in a qualifying decision procedure, held in pursuance of this Act or of rules made under it, by which a decision is sought from the creditors of a company, or b at any meeting of a company held in pursuance of the provisions contained in a debenture or trust deed. 2 Where the corporation authorises only one person, that person is entitled to exercise the same powers on behalf of the corporation as the corporation could exercise if it were an individual creditor or debenture-holder. 3 Where the corporation authorises more than one person, any one of them is entitled to exercise the same powers on behalf of the corporation as the corporation could exercise if it were an individual creditor or debenture-holder. 4 Where the corporation authorises more than one person and more than one of them purport to exercise a power under subsection (3)— a if they purport to exercise the power in the same way, the power is treated as exercised in that way; b if they do not purport to exercise the power in the same way, the power is treated as not exercised. Legal professional privilege 434C In proceedings against a person for an offence under this Act nothing in this Act is to be taken to require any person to disclose any information that he is entitled to refuse to disclose on grounds of legal professional privilege (in Scotland, confidentiality of communications). Enforcement of company's filing obligations 434D 1 This section applies where a company has made default in complying with any obligation under this Act— a to deliver a document to the registrar, or b to give notice to the registrar of any matter. 2 The registrar, or any member or creditor of the company, may give notice to the company requiring it to comply with the obligation. 3 If the company fails to make good the default within 14 days after service of the notice, the registrar, or any member or creditor of the company, may apply to the court for an order directing the company, and any specified officer of it, to make good the default within a specified time. 4 The court's order may provide that all costs (in Scotland, expenses) of or incidental to the application are to be borne by the company or by any officers of it responsible for the default. 5 This section does not affect the operation of any enactment imposing penalties on a company or its officers in respect of any such default. Application of filing obligations to overseas companies 434E The provisions of this Act requiring documents to be forwarded or delivered to, or filed with, the registrar of companies apply in relation to an overseas company that is required to register particulars under section 1046 of the Companies Act 2006 as they apply in relation to a company registered under that Act in England and Wales or Scotland. Part XVIII Interpretation Meaning of “associate”. 435 1 For the purposes of this Act any question whether a person is an associate of another person is to be determined in accordance with the following provisions of this section (any provision that a person is an associate of another person being taken to mean that they are associates of each other). 2 A person is an associate of an individual if that person is— a the individual’s husband or wife or civil partner, b a relative of— i the individual, or ii the individual’s husband or wife or civil partner, or c the husband or wife or civil partner of a relative of— i the individual, or ii the individual’s husband or wife or civil partner. 3 A person is an associate of any person with whom he is in partnership, and of the husband or wife or civil partner or a relative of any individual with whom he is in partnership; and a Scottish firm is an associate of any person who is a member of the firm. 4 A person is an associate of any person whom he employs or by whom he is employed. 5 A person in his capacity as trustee of a trust other than— a a trust arising under any of the second Group of Parts or the Bankruptcy (Scotland) Act 2016 , or b a pension scheme or an employees’ share scheme . . . , is an associate of another person if the beneficiaries of the trust include, or the terms of the trust confer a power that may be exercised for the benefit of, that other person or an associate of that other person. 6 A company is an associate of another company— a if the same person has control of both, or a person has control of one and persons who are his associates, or he and persons who are his associates, have control of the other, or b if a group of two or more persons has control of each company, and the groups either consist of the same persons or could be regarded as consisting of the same persons by treating (in one or more cases) a member of either group as replaced by a person of whom he is an associate. 7 A company is an associate of another person if that person has control of it or if that person and persons who are his associates together have control of it. 8 For the purposes of this section a person is a relative of an individual if he is that individual’s brother, sister, uncle, aunt, nephew, niece, lineal ancestor or lineal descendant, treating— a any relationship of the half blood as a relationship of the whole blood and the stepchild or adopted child of any person as his child, and b an illegitimate child as the legitimate child of his mother and reputed father; and references in this section to a husband or wife include a former husband or wife and a reputed husband or wife and references to a civil partner include a former civil partner and a reputed civil partner . 9 For the purposes of this section any director or other officer of a company is to be treated as employed by that company. 10 For the purposes of this section a person is to be taken as having control of a company if— a the directors of the company or of another company which has control of it (or any of them) are accustomed to act in accordance with his directions or instructions, or b he is entitled to exercise, or control the exercise of, one third or more of the voting power at any general meeting of the company of or another company which has control of it; and where two or more persons together satisfy either of the above conditions, they are to be taken as having control of the company. 11 In this section “ company ” includes any body corporate (whether incorporated in Great Britain or elsewhere); and references to directors and other officers of a company and to voting power at any general meeting of a company have effect with any necessary modifications. Expressions used generally. 436 1 In this Act, except in so far as the context otherwise requires (and subject to Parts VII and XI )— “agricultural charge” has the same meaning as in the Agricultural Credits Act 1928; “agricultural receiver” means a receiver appointed under an agricultural charge; “ the appointed day ” means the day of which this Act comes into force under section 443; “ associate ” has the meaning given by section 435; “ body corporate ” includes a body incorporated outside Great Britain, but does not include— a corporation sole, or a partnership that, whether or not a legal person, is not regarded as a body corporate under the law by which it is governed; “ business ” includes a trade or profession; “ the Companies Act ” means the Companies Act 1985; “ the Companies Acts ” means the Companies Acts (as defined in section 2 of the Companies Act 2006) as they have effect in Great Britain; “ conditional sale agreement ” and “ hire-purchase agreement ” have the same meanings as in the Consumer Credit Act 1974; “corporate member” means an insolvent member which is a company; “the court”, in relation to an insolvent partnership, means the court which has jurisdiction to wind up the partnership; “ distress ” includes use of the procedure in Schedule 12 to the Tribunals, Courts and Enforcement Act 2007, and references to levying distress, seizing goods and related expressions shall be construed accordingly; ... “ the EU Regulation ” means Regulation (EU) 2015/848 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 May 2015 on insolvency proceedings as it forms part of domestic law on and after exit day ; “ EEA State ” means a state that is a Contracting Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area signed at Oporto on 2 nd May 1992 as adjusted by the Protocol signed at Brussels on 17 th March 1993; “employees' share scheme” means a scheme for encouraging or facilitating the holding of shares in or debentures of a company by or for the benefit of— the bona fide employees or former employees of— the company, any subsidiary of the company, or the company's holding company or any subsidiary of the company's holding company, or the spouses, civil partners, surviving spouses, surviving civil partners, or minor children or step-children of such employees or former employees. “individual member” means an insolvent member who is an individual; “insolvency order” means— in the case of an insolvent partnership or a corporate member, a winding-up order; and in the case of an individual member, a bankruptcy order; “insolvency petition” means, in the case of a petition presented to the court— against a corporate member, a petition for its winding up by the court; against an individual member, a petition for a bankruptcy order to be made against that individual, where the petition is presented in conjunction with a petition for the winding up of the partnership by the court as an unregistered company under the Act; “insolvency proceedings” means any proceedings under the Act, this Order or the Insolvency Rules 1986 “insolvent member” means a member of an insolvent partnership, against whom an insolvency petition is being or has been presented; “joint bankruptcy petition” means a petition by virtue of article 11 of this Order; “joint debt” means a debt of an insolvent partnership in respect of which an order is made by virtue of Part IV or V of this Order; “joint estate” means the partnership property of an insolvent partnership in respect of which an order is made by virtue of Part IV or V of this Order; “joint expenses” means expenses incurred in the winding up of an insolvent partnership or in the winding up of the business of an insolvent partnership and the administration of its property; “limited partner” has the same meaning as in the Limited Partnerships Act 1907; “member” means a member of a partnership and any person who is liable as a partner within the meaning of section 14 of the Partnership Act 1890; “ modifications ” includes additions, alterations and omissions and cognate expressions shall be construed accordingly; “officer”, in relation to an insolvent partnership, means— a member; or a person who has management or control of the partnership business; “partnership property” has the same meaning as in the Partnership Act 1890; “postponed debt” means a debt the payment of which is postponed by or under any provision of the Act or of any other enactment; “ property ” includes money, goods, things in action, land and every description of property wherever situated and also obligations and every description of interest, whether present or future or vested or contingent, arising out of, or incidental to, property; “ records ” includes computer records and other non-documentary records; “responsible insolvency practitioner” means— in winding up, the liquidator of an insolvent partnership or corporate member; and in bankruptcy, the trustee of the estate of an individual member, and in either case includes the official receiver when so acting; “separate debt” means a debt for which a member of a partnership is liable, other than a joint debt; “separate estate” means the property of an insolvent member against whom an insolvency order has been made; “separate expenses” means expenses incurred in the winding up of a corporate member, or in the bankruptcy of an individual member; and “ subordinate legislation ” has the same meaning as in the Interpretation Act 1978; and “ transaction ” includes a gift, agreement or arrangement, and references to entering into a transaction shall be construed accordingly. “trustee of the partnership” means a person authorised by order made by virtue of article 11 of this Order to wind up the business of an insolvent partnership and to administer its property. 2 The following expressions have the same meaning in this Act as in the Companies Acts— “ articles ”, in relation to a company (see section 18 of the Companies Act 2006); “debenture” (see section 738 of that Act); “holding company” (see sections 1159 and 1160 of, and Schedule 6 to, that Act); “the Joint Stock Companies Acts” (see section 1171 of that Act); “overseas company” (see section 1044 of that Act); “paid up” (see section 583 of that Act); “private company” and “public company” (see section 4 of that Act); “registrar of companies” (see section 1060 of that Act); “share” (see section 540 of that Act); “subsidiary” (see sections 1159 and 1160 of, and Schedule 6 to, that Act). Proceedings under EU Regulations : modified definition of property 436A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References to things in writing 436B 1 A reference in this Act to a thing in writing includes that thing in electronic form. 2 Subsection (1) does not apply to the following provisions— a section 53 (mode of appointment by holder of charge), b section 67(2) (report by receiver), c section 70(4) (reference to instrument creating a charge), d section 111(2) (dissent from arrangement under s. 110), e in the case of a winding up of a company registered in Scotland, section 111(4), f section 123(1) (definition of inability to pay debts), g section 198(3) (duties of sheriff principal as regards examination), h section 222(1) (inability to pay debts: unpaid creditor for £750 or more), and i section 223 (inability to pay debts: debt remaining unsatisfied after action brought). Part XIX Final Provisions Transitional provisions, and savings. 437 The transitional provisions and savings set out in Schedule 11 to this Act shall have effect, the Schedule comprising the following Parts— Part I: company insolvency and winding up (matters arising before appointed day, and continuance of proceedings in certain cases as before that day); Part II: individual insolvency (matters so arising, and continuance of bankruptcy proceedings in certain cases as before that day); Part III: transactions entered into before the appointed day and capable of being affected by orders of the court under Part XVI of this Act; Part IV: insolvency practitioners acting as such before the appointed day; and Part V: general transitional provisions and savings required consequentially on, and in connection with, the repeal and replacement by this Act and the Company Directors Disqualification Act 1986 of provisions of the Companies Act 1985 , the greater part of the Insolvency Act 1985 and other enactments. Repeals. 438 The enactments specified in the second column of Schedule 12 to this Act are repealed to the extent specified in the third column of that Schedule. Amendment of enactments. 439 1 The Companies Act is amended as shown in Parts I and II of Schedule 13 to this Act, being amendments consequential on this Act and the Company Directors Disqualification Act 1986. 2 The enactments specified in the first column of Schedule 14 to this Act (being enactments which refer, or otherwise relate, to those which are repealed and replaced by this Act or the Company Directors Diqualification Act 1986) are amended as shown in the second column of that Schedule. 3 The Lord Chancellor may by order make such consequential modifications of any provision contained in any subordinate legislation made before the appointed day and such transitional provisions in connection with those modifications as appear to him necessary or expedient in respect of— a any reference in that subordinate legislation to the Bankruptcy Act 1914; b any reference in that subordinate legislation to any enactment repealed by Part III or IV or Schedule 10 to the Insolvency Act 1985; or c any reference in that subordinate legislation to any matter provided for under the Act of 1914 or under any enactment so repealed. 4 An order under this section shall be made by statutory instrument subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament. Extent (Scotland). 440 1 Subject to the next subsection, provisions of this Act contained in the first Group of Parts extend to Scotland except where otherwise stated. 2 The following provisions of this Act do not extend to Scotland— a in the first Group of Parts— section 43; sections 238 to 241; and section 246; b the second Group of Parts; c in the third Group of Parts— sections 399 to 402, sections 412, 413, 415, 415A(3), 418, 420 and 421, sections 423 to 425, and section 429(1) and (2); and d in the Schedules— Parts II and III of Schedule 11; and Schedules 12 and 14 so far as they repeal or amend enactments which extend to England and Wales only. Extent (Northern Ireland). 441 1 The following provisions of this Act extend to Northern Ireland— a sections 197, 426, 426A, 426B, 427 and 428; and b so much of section 439 and Schedule 14 as relates to enactments which extend to Northern Ireland. 2 Subject as above, and to any provision expressly relating to companies incorporated elsewhere than in Great Britain, nothing in this Act extends to Northern Ireland or applies to or in relation to companies registered or incorporated in Northern Ireland. Extent (other territories). 442 Her Majesty may, by Order in Council, direct that such of the provisions of this Act as are specified in the Order, being provisions formerly contained in the Insolvency Act 1985, shall extend to any of the Channel Islands or any colony with such modifications as may be so specified. Commencement. 443 This Act comes into force on the day appointed under section 236(2) of the Insolvency Act 1985 for the coming into force of Part III of that Act (individual insolvency and bankruptcy), immediately after that Part of that Act comes into force for England and Wales. Citation. 444 This Act may be cited as the Insolvency Act 1986.